SOATEST I IIT 


eeeeseeoeorecoeeeonvpneneesgeovsereeeoee Been oe 8t δε. 





Oe 


A 
WRITER OF ATTIC PROSE 










© MMW UMC COO P&P 


aol 





FLAGG 














a 


WRITER OF ATTIC PROSE 


MODELS FROM XENOPHON 
EXERCISES AND GUIDE 
A VOCABULARY OF ATTIC PROSE USAGE 


BY 


ISAAC FLAGG 


PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 


NEW YORK-::. CINCINNATI -:- CHICAGO 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 





: CopyriGHT, 1902, BY 
ISAAC FLAGG. 






ENTERED AT STATIONERS’ Hatt, Lonpvon. 





ATTIC PROSE. ὺ 
Wark kt 
x : ams + 
7 ' 
CO. εν 
᾿ rare § 
“ 2 
7 ᾿ ΜῈ ; 





PREPACE 


THE intention and purpose of the present work are indi- 
cated in the first few paragraphs under the head of Writer’s 
Guide, and explicitly stated at the end of the same section 
in Directions for Using the Book, p. 103. The Guide is 
not meant to offer an exhaustive treatment of any of the 
topics which it touches: supplementary matter can be 
found by such readers as may desire it in Ou//ines of the 
Temporal and Modal Principles of Attic Prose, published 
by the University of California, copyright, 1893; an Intro- 
duction to the Lives of Cornelius Nepos, on the Rapid 
Reading of Latin and the Art of Translation; The Trans- 
lation Habit, University of California Magazine, April, 
1808. 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/writerofatticoro0Oflagiala 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

MODELS FROM XENOPHON . ; : : A : : . 1-63 
Cyrus the Great: his Lineage and Native Qualities (107) . I 
The Boy Cyrus at the Court of Media (107) . ς : : Ι 


At Dinner (109) . 3 
The Court in its Cups (110) . : 4 
Cyrus decides to remain with his Grandfather (111) 5 
A Lesson in Justice (112). : : : ; : ‘ 6 
Winning Ways of Cyrus (112) 74 
Hunting (113) : : : : : : : ὃ 
A Grand Hunting Party (116). : : : : Ae τὸ 


Cyrus returns Home (118). eo : : : cer 
He resumes the Persian Discipline (119). : : aks 
Designs of the King of the Assyrians (119) . ; : 5 PRT 
Cyrus takes Command of a Persian Army (120) . : Le τ 
He marches to Media (121). : ; Ε : ; Ear ts 
Capture of Sardis (122) : 2 : : : : s 16 
Cyrus and Croesus (122). : : : : δ δ τ 
Τνῶθι σεαυτόν (124). : : : : : : e ets 
Evdatpovia (127) . : : : : : , : ων 21 
The Taking of Babylon (128). ὃ : : : ὩΣ 
Cyrus’ Dower (133) . ; ; : ἢ : : τ ΖΕ 
The Charge of Cambyses (134) . ; : ; : + eo 
Length and Breadth of the Empire (135). : ‘ ἐν 28 
Συσκευάζου, ὦ Κῦρε (136). : ; : ; : τα Φ 20 
Last Words of Cyrus the Great (137) . orgs ss : & 946 


The Death of Cyrus the Younger (138) : ᾿ . «33 
v 


CONTENTS 


Traits of the younger Cyrus (141) : . 
Kadoxayabia (143) 

Ischomachus’ Instructions to his Wife (145) 
Learning Homer (152) 

Beauty of Socrates (153) - : : . 
Xanthippe, his Wife (154) . ᾿ : . 
Filial Gratitude (155). 

Agesilaus in Asia (158) : 
Recalled to Hellas (161) ‘ : 
Battle of Coronea (162) 

Panhellenic Patriotism (165) 

Spartan Simplicity (165) : 
Hunting as Part of a Liberal Education (166) 


EXERCISES AND GUIDE 


Intuition and Imitation 

Rhetorical Articulation 

Lesser Rhetorical Masses 

Larger Rhetorical Masses : 

Responsiveness of the Greek Language 

The Greek Order . 

First come, First served 

The Group as Unit 

Period, Antithesis, Chiasmus 

Euphony 

Rhetoric and Grammar 

Grammatical Terminology 

Temporal and Modal Expression . 

Pure Conditional Clauses 
Real Condition . ; 
Circumstantial Condition . 
Vague Condition 


CONTENTS 


Relative Indefinite ; 4 ; : . . 
Original and Secondary Constructions . . . 
Scheme of Subordinate Clauses . : . . 
The Past Phase . : : ‘ τ : . 
Objective Conditional . : ‘ : : < 
Subjective Conditional . : : 2 ‘ : 
Final of Expectation . ; ; : : ° 
Cautions regarding Idiom. ‘ : : 

The Connective Particle . : : : 3 


Parataxis of μέν 

Aorist and Imperfect 

The Perfect Stem 

Infinitive and Participle 

φάναι, εἰπεῖν and λέγειν 

οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν, ἡγεῖσθαι. νομίζειν 
γνῶναι : 

φαίνεσθαι, ἀκούειν : : 
Adjuncts of Infinitive or Participle 
Personal and Impersonal . 
Temporal Relations . 


Simplicity . : ; : 

Directions for Using the Boo 

Exercises for Writing. . : : : . 
ABBREVIATIONS . ᾿ . . . . . . 
VOCABULARY . . . . . . . . 





ATTIC PROSE 


Cyrus the Great: his Lineage and Native Qualities 


Πατρὸς μὲν δὴ ὁ Κῦρος λέγεται γενέσθαι Kap- 
βύσεω Περσῶν βασιλέως, μητρὸς δὲ ὁμολογεῖται 
Μανδάνης γενέσθαι: ἡ δὲ Μανδάνη αὕτη ᾿Αστυά.- 
γους ἦν θυγάτηρ τοῦ Μήδων γενομένου βασιλέως. 

5 φῦναι δὲ ὁ Κῦρος λέγεται καὶ aderar ἔτι καὶ νῦν 
ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, εἶδος μὲν κάλλιστος ψυχὴν δὲ 
φιλανθρωπότατος καὶ φιλομαβέστατος καὶ φιλοτιμό- 
τατος, ὥστε πάντα μὲν πόνον ἀνατλῆναι πάντα δὲ 
κίνδυνον ὑπομεῖναι τοῦ ἐπαινεῖσθαι ἕνεκα. φύσιν 

ιο μὲν δὴ τῆς μορφῆς καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς τοιαύτην ἔχων δια- 
μνημονεύεται: ἐπαιδεύθη γε μὴν ἐν Περσῶν νόμοις. 


The Boy Cyrus at the Court of Media 
Qn ἈΝ , Ν ’ὔ ΓΝ a a» 3 ’ A 
Κῦρος yap μέχρι μὲν δώδεκα ἐτῶν ἢ ὀλίγῳ πλεῖον 
wn“ 4 “ 
ταύτῃ τῇ παιδείᾳ ἐπαιδεύθη, καὶ πάντων τῶν ἡλίκων 
, > ’ Ν 5 Ν Ν ’ aA ia 
διαφέρων ἐφαίνετο καὶ εἰς τὸ ταχὺ μανθάνειν ἃ δέοι 
‘A > Ἀ “~ ἣ > / gy “ > Ν 
15 καὶ "εἰς τὸ καλῶς καὶ ἀνδρείως ἕκαστα ποιεῖν. ἐκ δὲ 
τούτου τοῦ χρόνου μετεπέμψατο ᾿Αστυάγης τὴν ἑαυ- 
Cal 4 Ἀ Ἀ nw 5 lal > “ Ἀ 5 ’ 
τοῦ θυγατέρα καὶ τὸν παῖδα αὐτῆς - ἰδεῖν γὰρ ἐπεθύ- 
μει, ὅτι ἤκουεν αὐτὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν εἶναι. ἔρχεται 
» > ’ ε ’ὔ Ν ἂς , Ν ἈΝ nn 
ὃ αὑτὴ τε ἢ Μανδάνη πρὸς τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὸν Kupov 
20 τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα. 
ATTIC PROSE—I I 


uw 


πὸ 
ο 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


Ν » ε “ Ν 
Ὡς δὲ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα, καὶ ἔγνω ὁ Kupos τὸν 
: 4 ἢ ὸ ἤρα ὄντα, εὐθὺς οἷα δὴ 
Αστυάγην τὴς μήῆτρος TATEP ’ τῶι 
ἐὰ τ τ 3 , , 
παῖς φύσει φιλόστρργος ὧν ἠσπάζετό τε αὐτὸν 
4 Ν ’ : 
ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις πάλαι συντεθραμμένος καὶ πάλαι 
an Ν ε “ ἊΝ eee | , 
φιλῶν ἀσπάζοιτο, καὶ ὁρῶν δὴ αὐτὸν κεκοσμημένον 
“ ε “Ὁ \ rd 5 ’ 
καὶ ὀφθαλμῶν ὑπογραφῇ καὶ χρώματος ἐντρίψει 
ἃ Ν ’ὔ > > 4 
καὶ κόμαις προσθέτοις, ἃ δὴ νόμιμα ἦν ἐν Μήδοις 
an 4, 3 ‘ ε lal 
-- ταῦτα yap πάντα Μηδικά ἐστι, καὶ ot toppupot 
\ XN ε \ 
χιτῶνες καὶ οἱ κάνδυες καὶ οἱ στρεπτοὶ οἱ περι 
Ν “A 4 3 
τῇ δέρῃ καὶ τὰ ψέλια τὰ περὶ ταῖς χερσίν, ἐν 
an a Ν Ν > lal 
Πέρσαις δὲ τοῖς οἴκοι καὶ νῦν ἔτι πολὺ καὶ ἐσθῆτες 
Η ,ὔ ε “ ἈΝ 
φαυλότεραι καὶ δίαιται εὐτελέστεραι --- ὁρῶν δὴ 
Q , “ ’ » λέ 5 ΜΆ, ἔλε εν 
τὸν κόσμον τοῦ πάππου, ἐμβλέπων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν, 
lal > , ἈΝ 
Ὦ μῆτερ, ὡς καλός μοι ὁ πάππος. ἐρωτώσης δὲ 
A 4. εὑ A a. 
αὐτὸν τῆς μητρὸς πότερος καλλίων αὐτῷ δοκεῖ 
> - Ἂ ε lal 
εἶναι, 6 πατὴρ ἢ οὗτος, ἀπεκρίνατο apa ὁ Κῦρος, 
lal ’, ε ‘\ 
Ὦ μῆτερ, Περσῶν μὲν πολὺ κάλλιστος ὁ ἐμὸς 
, ὃ ΄, ῳ Ce 4 ἅνταν Ar A 
πατήρ, Μήδων μέντοι ὅσων ἑώρακα ἐγὼ Kal ἐν ταῖς 
δὸ Ἂ Ν > hy ” θύ λὺ a ε 5 . ὖ ’ 
ὁδοῖς καὶ ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις πολὺ οὗτος ὁ ἐμὸς πάππος 
£ 
κάλλιστος. 
Ν 
᾿Αντασπαζόμενος δὲ ὁ πάππος αὐτὸν καὶ στολὴν 
Ν 3 “ὃ Ν A Ν ΄, SES, Ν 
καλὴν. ἐνέδυσε καὶ στρεπτοῖς καὶ ψελίοις ἐτίμα καὶ 
φψυν \ » > , pe he ee 4 Ne 
ἐκόσμει, καὶ εἴ που ἐξελαύνοι, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου χρυσοχαλί- 
νου περιῆγεν, ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτὸς εἰώθει πορεύεσθαι. 
ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἅτε παῖς ὧν καὶ φιλόκαλος καὶ φιλότιμος 
ν a la 
ἥδετο TH στολῇ, καὶ ἱππεύειν μανθάνων ὑπερέχαιρεν" 
> , Ν ὃ \ Ἂς Ν > Ν ’ 
ἐν Πέρσαις γὰρ διὰ τὸ χαλεπὸν εἶναι καὶ τρέφειν 
ν Vee , 3 > ἴω ΕἾ “ἅμ , 
ἵππους Kal ἱππεύειν ἐν ὀρεινῇ οὔσῃ TH χώρᾳ Kar 
3 Lal ν 
ἰδεῖν ἵππον σπάνιον. 


σι 


10 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 3 


At Dinner 
A lal δὲ ε >A , A ~ 0 A ‘ Lal 
 Δειπνῶν δὲ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης σὺν τῇ θυγατρὶ καὶ τῷ 
Κύρῳ, βουλόμενος τὸν παῖδα ὡς ἥδιστα δειπνεῖν, 
ἵνα ἧττον τὰ οἴκαδε ποθοίη, προσήγαγεν αὐτῷ καὶ 
’ὕ Ν Ν 5 fh \ , 
παροψίδας καὶ παντοδαπὰ ἐμβάμματα καὶ βρώματα. 
Τὸν δὲ Κῦρον ἔφασαν λέγειν, Ὦ πάππε, ὅσα 
πράγματα ἔχεις ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ, εἰ ἀνάγκη σοι ἐπὶ 
πάντὰ τὰ λεκάρια ταῦτα διατείνειν τὰς χεῖρας καὶ 
ἀπογεύεσθαι τούτων τῶν παντοδαπῶν βρωμάτων. 
Τί δέ, φάναι τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην, οὐ γὰρ πολύ σοι δοκεῖ 
> , , Ν lal ree) , Ν 
εἶναι κάλλιον τόδε τὸ δεῖπνον τοῦ ἐν Πέρσαις ; τὸν 
\ , Ν an > , , ¥ 
δὲ Kvpov πρὸς ταῦτα ἀποκρίνασθαι λέγεται, Οὔκ, 
> , 5 Ν το , Nua. , 9 
ὦ πάππε" ἀλλα πολὺ ἀπλουστέρα καὶ εὐθυτέρα παρ 
ε Lal e ε 5 3 Ἀ Ν 5 “~ x Ἂς ε A 
ἡμῖν ἡ ὁδός ἐστιν ἐπὶ τὸ ἐμπλησθῆναι ἢ Tap’ ὑμῖν. 
Tap ἡμῖν μὲν γὰρ ἄρτος καὶ κρέα εἰς τοῦτο ἀγει" 
ε oe de > A ‘\ 2% Se) "ὃ Ν 
ὑμεῖς δὲ εἰς μὲν τὸ αὐτὸ ἡμῖν σπεύδετε, πολλοὺς δέ 
τινας ἑλιγμοὺς ἄνω καὶ κάτω πλανώμενοι μόλις 
5 “ 4 ε “a 4 ν 
ἀφικνεῖσθε ὅποι ἡμεῖς πάλαι ἥκομεν. 
᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ παῖ, φάναι τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην, οὐκ ἀχθόμενοι 
lat 4 ’ὔ Ν ΝῚ 4 » 
ταῦτα περιπλανώμεθα γευόμενος δὲ καὶ σύ, ἔφη, 
7 9 e , > 7 > Ν Ν 4 4 Ν 
γνώσει OTL ἡδέα ἐστίν. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ σέ, φάναι τὸν 
Κῦρον, ὁρῶ, ὦ πάππε, μυσαττόμενον ταῦτα τὰ βρώ- 
A Ν > 4 3 , Ν , δὴ 
ματα. καὶ τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην ἐπερέσθαι, Καὶ τίνι δὴ 
N , > an , y , 
σὺ τεκμαιρόμενος, ὦ παῖ, λέγεις; Ὅτι σε, φάναι, 
ὁρῶ, ὅταν μὲν τοῦ ἄρτου ἅψῃ, εἰς οὐδὲν τὴν χεῖρα 
5 , ν A 4 Ν , 5 Ἂ 3 
ἀποψώμενον" ὅταν δὲ τούτων τινὸς θίγῃς, εὐθὺς ἀπο- 
καθαίρει τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὰ χειρόμακτρα, ὡς πάνυ 
ἀχθόμενος ὅτι πλέα σοι ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐγένετο. πρὸς 
Lal A A > ’ὕ > Lal 3 ’ ν ’ὕ 
ταῦτα δὲ τὸν Aotuayny etre, Et τοίνυν οὕτω γιγνώ- 


uw 


15 


2 


ο 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


> “Ὁ ν 4 
σκεις, ὦ Tat, ἀλλὰ κρέα γε εὐωχοῦ, Wa νεανίας 
ΕἾ 5 , ν δὲ n N , AX ἈΝ > nw 
οἴκαδε ἀπέλθῃς. ἅμα δὲ ταῦτα λέγοντα πολλὰ αὐτῳ 
Ν a“ ε , 
παραφέρειν καὶ θήρεια καὶ τῶν ἡμέρων. 
Ν ἂν “A > ‘ Ce ‘ A , > Lal 
Kat τὸν Κῦρον, ἔπει ewpa πολλὰ τὰ κρέα, εἰπεῖν, 
> ¥ “ ΄ ‘ 
Ἦ καὶ δίδως, φάναι, ὦ πάππε, πάντα ταῦτα μοι τὰ 
» lal » 4 , 
κρέα 6 τι βούλομαι αὐτοῖς χρῆσθαι; Νὴ Ata, φάναι, 
΄ nw 4 
ὦ παῖ, ἔγωγέ σοι. ἐνταῦθα δὴ τὸν Κῦρον λαβόντα 
“ lal , iad > Ν Ν ’ θ ν 
τῶν κρεῶν διαδιδόναι τοῖς ἀμφὶ τὸν πάππον θερα- 
nw ΄“ ν 
πευταῖς ἐπιλέγοντα ἑκάστῳ, Σοὶ μὲν τοῦτο, ὅτι προ- 
’ ε 4 ’ ἊΝ ’ 9 Ν ν 
θύμως με ἱππεύειν διδάσκεις - σοὶ δέ, ὅτι μοι παλτὸν 
a a κ᾿ a 8 ὧν; \ δὲ Ψ Ν 
ἔδωκας, νῦν γὰρ τοῦτ᾽ ἔχω σοὶ δέ, OTL μου τὴν 
ἴω nw , aA 
μητέρα τιμᾷς. τοιαῦτα ἐποίει ἕως διεδίδου πάντα ἃ 
¥ / 
έλαβε κρέα. 
The Court in its Cups 
Ν A an > 
Kat τὸν Κῦρον εἰπεῖν, Ὦ Σάκα, ἀπόλωλας : ἐκβαλῶ 
9 A a ΄ x Ε ΄ a ΄, 
σε ἐκ τῆς τιμῆς" τά τε γὰρ ἄλλα, hava, σοῦ κάλλιον 
> Ν > 
οἰνοχοήσω, Kal οὐκ ἐκπίομαι αὐτὸς τὸν οἶνον. οἱ δ᾽ 
» -“ , Η -“ 
ἄρα τῶν βασιλέων οἰνοχόοι, ἐπειδὰν διδῶσι τὴν 
aN > 4 ree = PoP thn: A , > ‘ 
φιά YY, ἀρύσαντες ἀπ αὑτὴς τῳ κυάθῳ εἰς τὴν 


3 Ν αὶ la 
ἀριστερὰν χεῖρα ἐγχεάμενοι καταρροφοῦσι, τοῦ δὴ 


εἰ φάρμακα ἐγχέοιεν μὴ λυσιτελεῖν αὐτοῖς. 

Ἔκ τούτου δὴ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης ἐπισκώπτων, Καὶ τί 
δή, ἔφη, ὦ Κῦρε, τἄλλα μιμούμενος τὸν Σάκαν, οὐκ 
ἀπερρόφησας τοῦ οἴνου ; Ὅτι, er, νὴ Δία ἐδεδοίκειν 
μὴ ἐν τῷ κρατῆρι φάρμακα μεμιγμένα εἴη. καὶ γὰρ 
ὅτε εἱστίασας σὺ τοὺς φίλους ἐν τοῖς γενεθλίοις, 
σαφῶς κατέμαθον φάρμακα ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἐγχέαντα. 
Καὶ πῶς δὴ σὺ τοῦτο, ἔφη, κατέγνως ; Ὅτι νὴ Δί᾽ 


ε “A cs A lal “ Ὑ 
Upas ἐώρων καὶ ταῖς γνώμαις καὶ τοῖς σώμασι 








uw 


Io 


15 


9. 20 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 5 


/, a \ , 9 > 34 es pee 
σφαλλομένους. πρῶτον μὲν yap, a οὐκ ἐᾶτε ἡμᾶς 
τοὺς παῖδας ποιεῖν, ταῦτα αὐτοὶ ἐποιεῖτε. πάντες μὲν 

Ν ¥ 3 , > , Ν > \ > , 
yap ἅμα ἐκεκράγετε, ἐμανθάνετε δὲ οὐδὲν ἀλλήλων, 
ν A , 4 > > 7 δὲ Lal 
noere δὲ μάλα γελοίως, οὐκ ἀκροώμενοι δὲ τοῦ 
ΕἾ > , »” ᾿, / Ἀ ν 
ἄδοντος ὠμνύετε ἄριστα ᾷδειν: λέγων δὲ ἕκαστος 
ὑμῶν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ῥώμην, ἔπειτ᾽ εἰ ἀνασταίΐητε ὀρχη- 

, a es 3 > a θ 3 ε θ a 3 s ὩΣ 
σόμενοι, μὴ ὅπως ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν ῥυθμῳ, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε. ἐπελέλησθε δὲ παντάπασι, σύ 

“ N > Y ΕΠ “ ἂς ἦν 
τε ὅτι βισιλεὺς ἦσθα οἵ τε ἄλλοι ὅτι σὺ ἄρχων. 
τότε γὰρ δὴ ἔγωγε καὶ πρῶτον κατέμαθον ὅτι τοῦτ᾽ 
ἂν; 3: οἷ ε 3 ’ a ε τῷ κῶν > A 5 ’ 
ἄρ᾽ ἦν ἡ ἰσηγορία ὃ ὑμεῖς τότ᾽ ἐποιεῖτε. οὐδέποτε 
γοῦν ἐσιωπᾶτε. 

Καὶ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης λέγει, Ὁ δὲ σὸς πατήρ, ἔφη; 
ὦ παῖ, πίνων οὐ μεθύσκεται; Οὐ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη. ᾿Αλλὰ 
πῶς ποιεῖ; Διψῶν παύεται, ἄλλο δὲ κακὸν οὐδὲν 


, = > 4 “ 
πάσχει" οὐ γὰρ οἶμαι, ὦ πάππε, Σάκας αὐτῷ οἰνοχοεῖ. 
Cyrus decides to remain with his Grandfather 


> Ἁ A 
Επεὶ δὲ ἡ Μανδάνη παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἀπιοῦσα 

’ Ν Ν »” 5» “ 5 “" ε > 4 
πάλιν πρὸς Tov ἄνδρα, ἐδεῖτο αὐτῆς ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης 
is Ν “ ἃ Ν 3 / 9 , 
καταλιπεῖν τὸν Κῦρον. ἣ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο, ὅτι Bov- 

Ν 9 a ΕἾ 

λοιτο μὲν ἅπαντα τῷ πατρὶ χαρίζεσθαι, ἄκοντα 
μέντοι τὸν παῖδα χαλεπὸν εἶναι νομίζειν καταλιπεῖν. 

» Ἀ aA 
Ενθα δὴ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης λέγει πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον, 
ἊΝ “4 aA 9 “- 
OQ παῖ, ἣν μένῃς παρ᾽ ἐμοί, πρῶτον μὲν ἵπποις τοῖς 
> - , Ν » ε ,ὕ “ἡ , ‘ 
ἐμοῖς χρήσει καὶ ἄλλοις ὁπόσοις ἂν βούλῃ, καὶ 

Ἀπ... Ὁ» ΕΙΣ ¥ » ἃ Δ > 8 527 » 

ὁπόταν ἀπίῃς, ἔχων ἄπει ods ἂν αὐτὸς ἐθέλῃς. ἔπειτα 

Ν “Ὁ cal » 
δὲ ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ ἐπὶ τὸ μετρίως σοι δοκοῦν ἔχειν 
ε , , εν , » ΄ a > 
ὁποίαν βούλει ὁδὸν πορεύσει. ἔπειτα τά TE νῦν ἐν 


6 ATTIC PROSE 


; A 

τῷ παραδείσῳ θηρία δίδωμί σοι καὶ ἄλλα παντοδαπὰ 
5 

ld 

συλλέξω, ἃ σύ, ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα ἱππεύειν μάθῃς, 

διώξει, καὶ τοξεύων καὶ ἀκοντίζων καταβαλεῖς ὥσπερ 

ε u 4 Ν τὸ ὃ , > TR, , 

οἱ μεγάλοι ἄνδρες. καὶ παῖδας δέ σοι ἐγὼ συμπαΐ- 

στορας παρέξω, καὶ ἄλλα ὁπόσα ἂν βούλῃ λέγων 


un 


πρὸς ἐμὲ οὐκ ἀτυχήσεις. 

3 \ la) > εἰ 5 ’, ε ΄ ὃ , 

Eve. ταῦτα εἶπεν ὁ Αστυαγὴς, ἢ μήτηρ ONpeTa 
Ν a , aN , x 3 , a δὲ i 
τὸν Κῦρον πότερον βούλοιτο μένειν ἢ ἀπιέναι. ὃ δὲ 
οὐκ ἐμέλλησεν, ἀλλὰ ταχὺ εἶπεν ὅτι μένειν βούλοιτο. 
39 \ 3.3 “4 € Ν “ ‘\ Ν. ’ 5 - 
ἐπερωτηθεὶς δὲ πάλιν ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς διὰ τί, εἰπεῖν 
λέγεται, Ὅτι οἴκοι μὲν τῶν ἡλίκων καὶ εἰμὶ καὶ δοκῶ 


Ι 


° 


κράτιστος εἶναι, ὦ μῆτερ, καὶ ἀκοντίζων καὶ τοξεύων, 
3 an \ 909 9 ε , 9 δι τῆς val €\7 
ἐνταῦθα δὲ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι ἱππεύων ἥττων εἰμὶ τῶν ἡλίκων. 
καὶ τοῦτο εὖ ἴσθι, ὦ μῆτερ, ἔφη, ὅτι ἐμὲ πάνυ ἀνιᾷ. 
» ὦ μῆτερ, ἔφη, ὅτι ἐμὲ πάνυ ἀνιᾷ 


Δ δέ τς 3 (ὃ Ν , ε , 7} 
15 ἣν O€ με καταλίπῃς ἐνθάδε καὶ μάθω ἱππεύειν, ὅταν 


ωι 


μὲν ἐν Πέρσαις ὦ, οἶμαί σοι ἐκείνους τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς 
τὰ πεζικὰ ῥᾳδίως νικήσειν " ὅταν δ᾽ εἰς Μήδους ἔλθω, 
ἐνθάδε πειράσομαι τῷ πάππῳ, ἀγαθῶν ἱππέων κρά- 
τιστος ὦν, ἱππεὺς συμμαχεῖν αὐτῷ. 


A Lesson in Justice 


20 Τὴν, δὲ δικαιοσύνην, ὦ παῖ, πῶς μαθήσει ἐνθάδεμ: 
ἐκεῖ ὄντων σοι τῶν διδασκάλων; καὶ τὸν Κῦρον 
φάναι, "ANN ὦ μῆτερ, ἀκριβῶ ταῦτά γε ἤδη. Πῶς 
σὺ οἶσθα; τὴν “Μανδάνην εἰπεῖν. “Ort, φάναι, 6 
διδάσκαλός με, ὡς ἤδη ἀκριβοῦντα τὴν δικαιοσύνην, 

25 καὶ ἄλλοις καθίστη δικάζειν: καὶ τοίνυν, φάναι, ἐ ἐπὶ 


μιᾷ ποτε δίκῃ πληγὰς ἔλαβον ὡς οὐκ ὀρθῶς 
δικάσας. 


mn 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON “a - 


3 RAE ’ 7, -“" , ἈΝ Ξ 
Hy δὲ ἡ δίκη τοιαύτη. παῖς μέγας μικρὸν ἔχων 
nw ᾿Ψ᾿ nw 

χιτῶνα παῖδα μικρὸν μέγαν ἔχοντα χιτῶνα, ἐκδύσας 

af ‘ \ ε ee ας ΜΩ͂Ν > , Ν = ae | , 

αὐτόν, τὸν μὲν ἑαυτοῦ ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε, τὸν δ᾽ ἐκείνου 

- Meg * os # > Ν > 4 ’ » ΄ 

αὐτὸς ἐνέδυ. ἐγὼ οὖν τούτοις δικάζων ἔγνων βέλτιον 
’ lal 
εἶναι ἀμφοτέροις τὸν ἁρμόττοντα ἑκάτερον χιτῶνα 
᾿» 5 Ν 4 ¥ ε , , 
ἔχειν. ἐν δὲ τούτῳ με ἔπαισεν ὁ διδάσκαλος, λέξας, 
» 9 
ὅτι ὁπότε μὲν TOD ἁρμόττοντος εἴην κριτής, οὕτω δέοι 
Lal | » 
ποιεῖν: ὁπότε δὲ κρῖναι δέοι ποτέρου ὁ χιτὼν εἴη, 

a> »¥ , >. ΄ A , > , 

τοῦτ᾽ ἔφη σκεπτέον εἶναι, Tis κτῆσις δικαία ἐστί, 

πότερα τὸν βίᾳ ἀφελόμενον ἔχειν ἢ τὸν ποιησάμενον 
ρ ᾿ μενον ἔχειν ἢ ησάμ 

ka 

ἢ πριάμενον κεκτῆσθαι. 


Winning Ways of Cyrus 


Τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ πολλὰ ἐλάλει ὁ Kdpos: τέλος δὲ 
ε A - Ρ] ΄“ wn δὲ ’ὕ Ν 5 lal 
ἡ μὲν μήτηρ ἀπῆλθε, Κῦρος δὲ κατέμενε καὶ αὐτοῦ 
ἐτρέφετο. καὶ ταχὺ μὲν τοῖς ἡλικιώταις συνεκέκρατο 
ὥστε οἰκείως διακεῖσθαι" ταχὺ δὲ τοὺς πατέρας 

5 ἴω 5 4 Ἀ A » xd 9 5 , 
αὐτῶν ἀνήρτητο, προσιὼν καὶ ἔνδηλος ὧν ὅτι ἠσπά- 
ζετο αὐτῶν τοὺς υἱεῖς, ὥστε, εἴ τι τοῦ βασιλέως 

la ‘\ La) » ΟΝ 4 A , “ 
δέοιντο, τοὺς παῖδας ἐκέλευον τοῦ Κύρου δεῖσθαι 
διαπράξασθαί σφισιν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος, εἰ δέοιντο αὐτοῦ 
οἱ παῖδες, διὰ τὴν φιλανθρωπίαν καὶ φιλοτιμίαν περὶ 
παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο διαπράττεσθαι. 

Καὶ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης, ὅ τι δέοιτο αὐτοῦ ὁ Κῦρος, οὐδὲν 
5 , 5 Ya \ > 4 A > 5 
ἐδύνατο ἀντέχειν μὴ οὐ χαρίζεσθαι. καὶ γὰρ ἀσθε- 

᾽’ Φ Le! 5 Fy 9 4 Ν , ὩΣ Ἀ 
νήσαντος αὐτοῦ, οὐδέποτε ἀπέλειπε τὸν πάππον οὐδὲ 

΄ \ 9 ΄ 3 \ A 5 an 9 ε 
κλάων ποτὲ ἐπαύετο, ἀλλὰ δῆλος ἣν πᾶσιν OTL ὑὕπερε- 
φ β A , Ἧς" ἃ , >a. θά Ξ ἈΝ Ν ΕῚ Ν 

οβεῖτο μή οἱ ὁ πάππος ἀποθάνῃ" καὶ γὰρ ἐκ νυκτὸς 
εἴ τινος δέοιτο ᾿Αστυάγης. πρῶτος ἠσθάνετο Κῦρος 

YNS, πρ Hf] ρ 


un 


° 


20 


2 


unr 


ATTIC PROSE 


3 ’ὔ ε ’ ν 
καὶ πάντων ἀοκνότατα ἀνεπήδα ὑπηρετήσων O τι 
aA 4 > 4 A 
οἴοιτο χαριεῖσθαι, ὥστε παντάπασιν ἀνεκτήσατο TOV 


> z 
Aotuayny. 
Hunting 
nee an a 
Καὶ ταχὺ μὲν εἰς τὸ ἴσον ἀφίκετο τῇ ἱππικῇ τοὺς 
9 \ ‘ , Ν Ν 9 ὁ a“ » ‘ 
ἥλιξι, ταχὺ δὲ παρήει διὰ τὸ ἐρᾶν Tov epyou, ταχὺ 
$2 ra év Τῷ δείσῳ θηρία ἀνηλώκει διώκων Kat 
é τὰ ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ θηρία avy 
3 ’ > o> 
βάλλων καὶ κατακαίνων, ὥστε ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης οὐκέτ 
*> nw Ν ε “~ > 7 
εἶχεν αὐτῷ συλλέγειν θηρία. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος, αἰσθό- 
ε “ Ν 
μενος ὅτι βουλόμενος οὐ δύναιτό οἱ ζῶντα πολλὰ 
: ἔλ ὃς αὐτόν, Ὦ πάππε, τί σε δεῖ 
παρέχειν, ἔλεγε πρὸς αὐτόν, ᾿ 
θηρία ζητοῦ άγματ᾽ ἔχειν ; ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν ἐμὲ ἐκπέμ- 
HPA CNTOVYTA πραγμαῖτ EXEW ; μ μ 
nw , 4 -ν > 7 
πῃς ἐπὶ θήραν σὺν τῷ θείῳ, νομιῶ, ὅσα ἂν ἴδω θηρία, 
ἐμοὶ ταῦτα τρέφεσθαι. ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ σφόδρα ἐξιέναι 
A 9 
ἐπὶ τὴν θήραν, οὐκέθ᾽ ὁμοίως λιπαρεῖν ἐδύνατο ὥσπερ 
/ 
παῖς ὦν, ἀλλ᾽ ὀκνηρότερον προσήει" οὐ yap προσῇξει 
εἰ μὴ ἴδοι εἰ καιρὸς εἴη. 
Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οὖν ἔγνω ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης σφόδρα αὐτὸν 
9 -“ » lal 5 , eat 4 Ὁ“ ’ 
ἐπιθυμοῦντα ἔξω θηρᾶν, ἐκπέμπει αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ θείῳ 
μ pers Be ‘ f 
καὶ φύλακας συμπέμπει ἐφ᾽ ἵππων πρεσβυτέρους 
re ρ ᾿ 
9 Lal nw 
ὅπως ἀπὸ τῶν δυσχωριῶν φυλάττοιεν αὐτὸν Kal εἰ 
τῶν ἀγρίων τι φανείη θηρίων. 6 οὖν Κῦρος τῶν ἕπο- 
’ 
μένων προθύμως ἐπυνθάνετο, ποίοις οὐ χρὴ θηρίοις 
4, x a lal 
πελάζειν καὶ ποῖα χρὴ θαρροῦντα διώκειν. ot δ᾽ 
"δῇ Ψ ¥ \ »¥ , 
ἔλεγον ὅτι ἄρκτοι τε πολλοὺς ἤδη πλησιάσαντας 


’ \ 
διέφθειραν καὶ κάπροι καὶ λέοντες καὶ παρδάλεις, 


ε VS Ν 
ai δὲ ἔλαφοι καὶ δορκάδες καὶ οἱ ἄγριοι oles καὶ οἱ 
3 δον ἫΝ > ᾽- a: 5f. μὰ Ν Ν Lae 
ονοι οἱ ἄγριοι dowels εἶσιν. ἔλεγον δὲ Kal τοῦτο, 
Ν 7 9 
τὰς δυσχωρίας ὅτι δέοι φυλάττεσθαι οὐδὲν ἧττον ἢ 


uw 


Io 


I 


un 


25 


- 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 9 


‘ , Ν Ν ὃ > “ me ay 
τὰ θηρία: πολλοὺς yap ἤδη αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἵπποις κατα- 
κρημνισθῆναι. 
δ, “ἃ “ , “A 3 , , 
Kai ὁ Κῦρος πάντα ταῦτα ἐμάνθανε προθύμως 
3, 
ὡς δὲ εἶδεν ἔλαφον ἐκπηδήσασαν, πάντων ἐπιλαθό- 
- ¥ δέ ὑδὲ » «ε “A “ἡ ῳ 
μενος ὧν ἤκουσεν ἐδίωκεν, οὐδὲν ἀλλο ὁρῶν ἢ OTOL 
¥ ,ὔ ὃ δῶ δεν Δ die a. s > 
ἐφενγε. καί πως διαπηδῶν αὐτῷ ὁ ἵππος πίπτει εἰς 
γόνατα καὶ μικροῦ κἀκεῖνον ἐξετραχήλισεν. οὐ μὴν 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐσεμεώνεν ὁ Κῦρος μόλις πως καὶ ἵππος ἐξανέστη, 
ὡς δὲ εἰς τὸ πεδίον ἦλθεν, ἀκοντίσας καταβάλλει τὴν 
ε ’ “a \ ΄ 
ἐλαφον, καλόν τι χρῆμα καὶ μέγα. 
ν ἃ Ν Ν ε ’ ε Ν ’ 
Καὶ ὃ μὲν δὴ ὑπερέχαιρεν: οἱ δὲ φύλακες προσε- 
λάσαντες ἐλοιδόρουν αὐτὸν καὶ ἔλεγον εἰς οἷον κίν- 
ν ιν» A > ~ ε > ra 
δυνον ἔλθοι καὶ ἔφασαν κατερεῖν αὐτοῦ. ὁ οὖν Κῦρος 
εἱστήκει καταβεβηκὼς καὶ ἀκούων ταῦτα ἠνιᾶτο. ὡς 
ν an 
δ᾽ nobero κραυγῆς. ἀνεπήδησεν ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ὥσπερ 
ἐνθουσιῶν, καὶ ὡς εἶδεν ἐκ τοῦ ἀντίου κάπρον προσ- 
φερόμενον, ἀντίος ἐλαύνει καὶ διατεινάμενος εὐστόχως 
βάλλει εἰς τὸ μέτωπον καὶ κατέσχε τὸν κάπρον. 
᾿Ενταῦθα μέντοι ἤδη καὶ ὁ θεῖος αὐτῷ ἐλοιδορεῖτο, 
Ἁ ’ ε “A a > > “ ’ 
τὴν θρασύτητα ὁρῶν. ὃ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ λοιδορουμένου 
9 > -“ ν Ὅς ¥ a 2A > , 
ὅμως ἐδεῖτο, ὅσα αὐτὸς ἔλαβε, ταῦτα ἐᾶσαι εἰσκομί- 
σαντα δοῦναι τῷ πάππῳ. τὸν δὲ θεῖον εἰπεῖν φασιν, 
᾿Αλλ᾽ ἣν αἴσθηται ὅτι ἐδίωκες, οὐ σοὶ μόνον λοιδο- 
, 3 Ν 1 Fare a De xd ΣΌΝ ἃ , 
ρήσεται, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐμοΐ, ὁτι σε εἴων. Kat ἣν Bov- 
ληται, φάναι αὐτόν, μαστιγωσάτω, ἐπειδάν γε ἐγὼ 
δῶ αὐτῷ. καὶ σύ i βούλει, ἔφη, ὦ θεῖε, τιμωρη- 
ὑτῴ. σύ γε, εἰ βούλει, ἔφη, » τιμωρὴ 
σάμενος ταῦτα, mpiess χάρισαί, μοι. καὶ ὃ Κυαξάρης 
μώτοι τελευτῶν εἶπε, Ποίει ὅπως βούλει: σὺ γὰρ 
νῦν γε ἡμῶν ἔοικας βασιλεὺς εἶναι. 


IO ATTIC PROSE 


“ ’ 9.2. 
Οὕτω δὴ ὁ Κῦρος εἰσκομίσας τὰ θηρία ἐδίδου 
lal , 
τε TO πάππῳ Kal ἔλεγεν OTL αὐτὸς ταῦτα θηράσειεν 
Ν mA , 
ἐκείνῳ. Kal τὰ ἀκόντια ἐπεδείκνυ μὲν οὔ, κατέθηκε 
, τὰ , 9 ¥ Ν ΄, »” θ ε δὲ 
δὲ ἡματωμένα ὅπου wero τὸν πάππον ὄψεσθαι. ὁ δὲ 
> > a A 
5 Aotudyns dpa εἶπεν, “ANN, ὦ παῖ, δέχομαι μὲν 
» ε ’ὕ ν ‘\ 4 Ε 3 ’ δέ ’ 
ἔγωγε ἡδέως ὅσα σὺ δίδως, οὐ μέντοι δέομαί γε 
by A - 
τούτων οὐδενὸς ὥστε σε κινδυνεύειν. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος 
¥ 3 lA Ν Ν λον ε , > / > Ν 
ἔφη, Εἰ τοίνυν μὴ σὺ δέει, ἱκετεύω, ὦ πάππε, ἐμοὶ 
ζω “ > 
δὸς αὐτά, ὅπως τοῖς ἡλικιώταις ἐγὼ Sada. ᾿Αλλ᾽, 
10 ὦ Tat, ἔφη ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης, καὶ ταῦτα λαβὼν διαδίδου 
an / 
ὅτῳ σὺ βούλει καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁπόσα θέλεις. 


A Grand Hunting Party 


Kat 6 Κῦρος λαβὼν ἐδίδου τε ἄρας τοῖς παισὶ καὶ 
ἅμα ἔλεγεν, Ὦ παῖδες, ὡς ἄρα ἐφλυαροῦμεν ὅτε τὰ 
ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ θηρία ἐθηρῶμεν - ὅμοιον ἔμοιγε 

15 δοκεῖ εἶναι οἷόνπερ εἴ τις δεδεμένα ζῷα θηρῴη. 
πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ ἐν μικρῷ χωρίῳ ἣν, ἔπειτα λεπτὰ 
καὶ ψωραλέα, καὶ τὸ μὲν αὐτῶν χωλὸν ἣν τὸ δὲ 
κολοβόν τὰ δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ λειμῶσι θηρία, 
ὡς μὲν καλὰ ὡς δὲ μεγάλα ὡς δὲ λιπαρὰ ἐφαίνετο. 

20 καὶ αἱ μὲν ἔλαφοι ὥσπερ πτηναὶ ἤλλοντο πρὸς τὸν 
οὐρανόν, οἱ δὲ κάπροι, ὥσπερ τοὺς ἄνδρας φασὶ 
τοὺς ἀνδρείους, ὁμόσε ἐφέροντο: ὑπὸ δὲ τῆς πλατύ- 
τητος οὐδὲ ἁμαρτεῖν οἷόν 7° ἦν αὐτῶν. καλλίω δή, 
ἔφη, ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ καὶ τεθνηκότα εἶναι ταῦτα ἢ ζῶντα 
ἐκεῖνα τὰ περιῳκοδομημένα. 

: “Ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα ars ἔφη, ἀφεῖεν καὶ ὑμᾶς οἱ πατέρες 

ἐπὶ θήραν; Καὶ ῥᾳδίως γ᾽ ἄν, ἔφασαν, εἰ ᾿Αστυάγης 


2 


ωι 


δ... .. 


20 


2 


ul 


uw 


wm 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON II 


κελεύοι. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος εἶπε, Tis οὖν ἂν ἡμῖν ᾿Αστυάγει 
͵΄ , \ 3 ¥ a ε , 
μνησθείη; Tis yap av, ἔφασαν, σοῦ γε ἱκανώτερος 
πεῖσαι; ᾿Αλλὰ μὰ τὸν Δία, ἔφη, ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδ᾽ 
Ψ » θ ΄ ὑδὲ Ν es 3 aS 
ὅστις ἄνθρωπος γεγένημαι: οὐδὲ yap οἷός τ᾽ εἰμὶ 
λέγειν ἔγωγε, οὐδ᾽ ἀναβλέπειν πρὸς τὸν πάππον ἐκ 
a ΕἸ τ ¥ , x \ a 3 A 
Tov ἴσου ἔτι δύναμαι. ἣν δὲ τοσοῦτον ἐπιδιδῶ, 
δέδοικα, ἔφη, μὴ παντάπασι βλάξ τις καὶ ἠλίθιος 
7 : δά δὲ ὦν, δεινό iv ἐδό 
γένωμαι" παιδάριον ὃὲ ὧν, δεινότατος λαλεῖν ἐδόκουν 
> cA τῷ A > Ν ΄, N A 
εἶναι. καὶ οἱ παῖδες εἶπον, ἸΤονηρὸν λέγεις τὸ πρᾶγμα, 
5 Ἄν. πῆς δ πα ” , ΄ ΄ 3 3 
εἰ μηδὲ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἄν τι δέῃ, δυνήσει πράττειν, ἀλλ 
Μ᾿" Ν 2 eae SOR y 2S , » A e an 
ἄλλου τινὸς τὸ ἐπὶ σὲ ἀνάγκη ἔσται δεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς. 
᾿Ακούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Κῦ ἐδήχθ ὶ ἢ 
ύσας ταῦτα ὃ Κυρος ἐδήχθη; καὶ σιγῇ 
3 ’ -" 6 “ la 5 A 
ἀπελθών, διακελευσάμενος ἑαυτῷ τολμᾶν, εἰσῆλθεν, 
5 , ν Ἅ 3 / ν Ν Ν 
ἐπιβουλεύσας ὅπως ἂν ἀλυπότατα εἴποι πρὸς τὸν 
πάππον καὶ διαπράξειεν αὑτῷ τε καὶ τοῖς παισὶν ὧν 
ἐδέοντο. ἤρξατο οὖν ὧδε. Εἰπέ μοι, ἔφη, ὦ πάππε, 
Ἂν 5 al ων > A Ν ΄, Θ᾿ ον , 
ἦν τις ἀποδρᾷ σε τῶν οἰκετῶν καὶ λάβῃς αὐτόν, τί 
αὐτῷ χρήσει; Τί ἄλλο, ἔφη, ἢ δήσας ἐργάζεσθαι 
3 ’ x δὲ 3 ’ 4, ¥ 0 “Ὁ , 
ἀναγκάσω; “Hy δὲ αὐτόματος πάλιν ἐλθῃ, πὼς ποιή- 
’ ὃ ὩΣ 4 > \ , ν Ν 50 
σεις; Τί δέ, ἔφη; εἰ μὴ μαστιγώσας ye, Wa μὴ αὖθις 
“ ~ 5 5 nw , ν 3, » ε 
τοῦτο ποιῇ; ἐξ ἀρχῆς χρήσομαι; Ὥρα ἄν, ἔφη ὁ 
Κῦρος, σοὶ παρασκευάζεσθαι εἴη, ὅτῳ μαστιγώσεις 
ε , , ν 3 ὃ a x % Ν 
με, ws βουλεύομαί γε ὅπως σε ἀποδρῶ λαβὼν τοὺς 
A ¥ 
ἡλικιώτας ἐπὶ θήραν. καὶ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης, Καλῶς, ἐφη: 
5 ’ ’ ἐ A , 4 5 ty 
ἐποίησας προειπών" ἔνδοθεν yap, ἔφη, ἀπαγορεύω 
A“ nA 
σοι μὴ κινεῖσθαι. χαρίεν yap, ἔφη; εἰ ἕνεκα κρεα- 
δί “A Ν Ν A 2 , 
ἴων τῇ θυγατρὶ τὸν παῖδα ἀποβουκολήσαιμι. 
> ὕὔ ~ ε nA 3 ͵ὕ A x, »¥ 
Ακούσας ταῦτα 6 Κῦρος, ἐπείθετο μὲν καὶ ἔμεινεν, 
A “ ε ’ 
ἀνιαρὸς δὲ καὶ σκυθρωπὸς ὧν σιωπῇ διῆγεν. ὁ μέντοι 


12 


σι 


I 


wn 


45 


ATTIC PROSE 


᾽ 4 > N » a> , 3 A 
Aotudyns, ἐπεὶ ἔγνω αὐτὸν λυπούμενον ἰσχυρῶς, 
; Sees , θ »Φ Ἐπὶ Oy \ 
βουλόμενος αὐτῷ χαρίζεσθαι ἐξάγει ἐπὶ θήραν, καὶ 
Ν Ν Ν ε ’ ’ Ἀ ‘ 
πεζοὺς πολλοὺς καὶ ἱππέας συναλίσας Kal τοὺς 
~ ld 4, Ν 
παῖδας, καὶ συνελάσας εἰς τὰ ἱππάσιμα χωρία τὰ 
ld ” a 
θηρία ἐποίησε μεγάλην θήραν. 
\ “A Ν Ν 3 / > / δέ 
Καὶ βασιλικῶς δὴ παρὼν αὐτός, ἀπηγόρευε μηδένα 
, a “~ c Ν lal 
βάλλειν πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρῶν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος 
> Ud 
οὐκ εἴα κωλύειν, ἀλλ᾽, Ei βούλει, ἔφη, ὦ πάππε, 
ε , lal » Ν ae > Ἁ , ὃ ’ 
ἡδέως με θηρᾶν, ἄφες τοὺς κατ᾽ ἐμὲ πάντας διώκειν 
καὶ διαγωνίζεσθαι ὅπως ἕκαστος κράτιστα δύναιτο. 
> “A Ν ε > 4 > 4 Ν Ἀ > Lal 
ἐνταῦθα δὴ ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης ἀφίησι, καὶ στὰς ἐθεᾶτο 
ε ’ DAN Ν , Ν a Ν 
ἁμιλλωμένους ἐπὶ τὰ θηρία καὶ φιλονεικοῦντας καὶ 
74 Ν > / Ν ’ 9 > 
διώκοντας καὶ ἀκοντίζοντας, καὶ Κύρῳ ἥδετο ov 
᾽ὔ A ε Ν A e A 5 Φ 9 4 
δυναμένῳ σιγᾶν ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς, GAN ὥσπερ σκύλακι 
’ 3 ’ ε ’ ’ ’ Ν 
γενναίῳ ἀνακλάζοντι ὁπότε πλησιάζοι θηρίῳ, καὶ 
παρακαλοῦντι ὀνομαστὶ ἕκαστον. καὶ τοῦ μὲν κατα- 
μην teen ε A > , Ν , Ν 
γελῶντα αὐτὸν ὁρῶν εὐφραίνετο, τὸν δέ τινα καὶ 
> “ » ee! > , 5 Φ “4 ΄“" Lal 
ἐπαινοῦντα αὐτὸν ἠσθάνετο οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν φθονερῶς. 
΄ > 
τέλος δ᾽ οὖν πολλὰ θηρία ἔχων ὁ ᾿Αστυάγης ἀπῇει. 
Ν 4 9 ν “A 
Kat τὸ λοιπὸν οὕτως ἥσθη τῇ τότε θήρᾳ, ὥστε 
iY el Heed ar Ὅν ἐν A 
ἀεί, ὁπότε οἷόν τ᾽ εἴη, συνεξήει τῷ Κύρῳ, καὶ ἄλλους 
Ν a“ 
τε πολλοὺς παρελάμβανε καὶ τοὺς παῖδας Κύρου 
ν Ν Ν lal lal 
ἐνεκα. τὸν μὲν δὴ πλεῖστον χρόνον οὕτω διῆγεν 
ε Le) “A e “ nw 
ὁ Κῦρος, πᾶσιν ἡδονῆς μὲν Kat ἀγαθοῦ τινος συναΐί- 
3, a 
TLOS WY, κακοῦ δὲ οὐδενός. 


Cyrus returns Home 


Καμβύσης δὲ ὁ τοῦ Κύρου πατὴρ ἥδετο μὲν πυν- 
θανόμενος ταῦτα, ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἤκουσεν ἔργα ἀνδρὸς ἤδη 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 13 


’ ἣν “ > 4 ’ ν Ν > 
διαχειριζόμενον τὸν Κῦρον, ἀπεκάλει δή, ὅπως τὰ ἐν 
’ 3 » > / ΑΓ ὦ “ ἈΚ Ψ “ 
Πέρσαις ἐπιχώρια ἐπιτελοίη. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος δὲ ἐνταῦθα 

᾽’ > “Ὁ ν 3 ΄ r Ν ε , 
λέγεται εἰπεῖν ὅτι ἀπιέναι βούλοιτο, μὴ ὁ πατήρ τι 
» \ ε ’ ΄ XN > 2 4, 
ἄχθοιτο καὶ ἡ πόλις μέμφοιτο. Kal τῴ ᾿Αστυάγει 
δὲ ἐδόκει εἶναι ἀναγκαῖον ἀποπέμπειν αὐτόν. ἔνθα 


uw 


Ἂν 9 teen ‘ a 35. τὸ 3 ΄ a 
δὴ ἵππους τε αὐτῷ δοὺς ods αὐτὸς ἐπεθύμει λαβεῖν 
καὶ ἄλλα συσκευάσας πολλὰ ἔπεμπε, καὶ διὰ τὸ φιλεῖν 

> AN ΙΝ 3 ΄ ᾿Ξ , ΕἸ ΕἸ “ » 
αὐτὸν καὶ ἅμα ἐλπίδας ἔχων μεγάλας ἐν αὐτῷ, ἄνδρα 
¥ ε Ν Ν ’ 3 “a 3 x 9 “ 
ἔσεσθαι ἱκανὸν καὶ φίλους ὠφελεῖν καὶ ἐχθροὺς ἀνιᾶν. 

> , \ Ν a ΄ ψ Ἂς 

ἴο ᾿Απιόντα δὲ τὸν Κῦρον προύπεμπον ἅπαντες καὶ 
a“ ‘ 9 \. = Ν , b ded [e Jams 4 

παῖδες καὶ ἥλικες καὶ ἄνδρες Kal γέροντες ἐφ᾽ ἵππων 

“ὦ , ae \ 50. 7 ¥ 9 > 9 
καὶ ᾿Αστυάγης αὐτός, καὶ οὐδένα ἔφασαν ὅντιν᾽ οὐ 

4, 39. » ’, ‘ A Ν San , 
δακρύοντ᾽ ἀποστρέφεσθαι. καὶ Κῦρον δὲ αὐτὸν héye- 

‘\ aA ’ 3 ΄“ ἣν Ν 
ται σὺν πολλοῖς δακρύοις ἀποχωρῆσαι. πολλὰ δὲ 

A a , ἂν ε , ΗΝ 

15 δῶρα διαδοῦναί φασιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἡλικιώταις ὧν 
3 ’ > “A 3 ’ / Ν Ν ἃ > 

Αστυάγης αὐτῷ ἐδεδώκει, τέλος δὲ Kal ἣν εἶχε 
στολὴν τὴν Μηδικὴν ἐκδύντα δοῦναί τινι, δηλῶν ὅτι 
τοῦτον μάλιστα ἠσπάζετο. 

Τοὺς μῶντοι λαβόντας καὶ δεξαμένους τὰ δῶρα 

, > , > A > , \ , 

20 λέγεται ᾿Αστυάγει ἀπενεγκεῖν, ᾿Αστυάγην δὲ δεξά- 
4 > ’ Ν δὲ ’ὔ 3 7 

μενον Κύρῳ ἀποπέμψαι, Tov 0€ πάλιν τε ἀποπέμψαι 

eis Μήδους καὶ εἰπεῖν, Εἰ βούλει, ὦ πάππε, ἐμὲ καὶ 

> 27 ε A κ > , ¥ ¥ ¥ a 
αὖθις ἰέναι ὡς σὲ μὴ αἰσχυνόμενον, ἔα ἔχειν εἴ TO 

σι. ἋὉ »" > , \ “ > 7A 
τι ἐγὼ δέδωκα: ᾿Αστυάγην δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντα 
25 ποιῆσαι ὥσπερ Κῦρος ἐπέστειλεν. 


He resumes the Persian Discipline 


Ὁ μὲν δὴ Κῦρος οὕτως ἀπελθὼν ἐν Πέρσαις ἐνιαυ- 
τὸν λέγεται ἐν τοῖς παισὶν ἔτι γενέσθαι. καὶ τὸ μὲν 


14 ATTIC PROSE 


I 


° 


20 


25 


ἧς ε aA » > F ε ΕΣ θ a 9 
πρῶτον οἱ παῖδες ἔσκωπτον αὐτόν, ὡς ἡδυπαθειν ἐν 
, ἧς ψ ἜΑΣΟΝ δὲ ἣν» 8 bi Pe 
Μήδοις μεμαθηκὼς ἥκοι" ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ ἐσθίοντα αὑτὸν 

9 Ν ts Ν 5» 
ἑώρων ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἡδέως καὶ πίνοντα, καὶ εἰ 
Lal / Aw 
mor ἐν ἑορτῇ εὐωχία γένοιτο, ἐπιδιδόντα μᾶλλον 
an Δ ’ὔ 
αὐτὸν τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ μέρους ἠσθάνοντο ἢ προσδεόμενον, 
Φ Ν 
καὶ πρὸς τούτοις δὲ τἄλλα κρατιστεύοντα αὐτὸν 
“ la 4 Ψ > “~ 
ἑώρων ἑαυτῶν, ἐνταῦθα δὴ πάλιν ὑπέπτησσον αὕτῳ 
ε«ὺν 
οἱ ἥλικες. 
¥ a 
᾿Επεὶ δὲ διελθὼν τὴν παιδείαν ταύτην ἤδη εἰσῆλθεν 
3 ‘ > 4 3 4 > 286 , 
εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους, ἐν τούτοις αὖ ἐδόκει κρατιστεύειν 
καὶ μελετῶν ἃ χρῆν καὶ καρτερῶν καὶ αἰδούμενος 
A »¥ 
τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους καὶ πειθόμενος τοῖς ἄρχουσι. 


Designs of the King of the Assyrians 


Προιόντος δὲ τοῦ χρόνου ὁ μὲν ᾿Αστυάγης ἐν Tots 
Μήδοις ἀποθνήσκει, ὁ δὲ Κναξάρης ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αστυάγους 
παῖς, τῆς δὲ Κύρου μητρὸς ἀδελφός, τὴν βασιλείαν 
ἔσχε τὴν Μήδων. 

ὋὉ δὲ τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων βασιλεὺς καταστρεψάμενος 
μὲν πάντας. Σύρους, φῦλον πάμπολυ, ὑπήκοον δὲ 
πεποιημένος τὸν ᾿Αραβίων βασιλέα, ὑπηκόους δὲ 
ἔχων ἤδη καὶ Ὑρκανίους, πολιορκῶν δὲ καὶ Βακ- 
τρίους, ἐνόμιζεν, εἰ τοὺς Μήδους ἀσθενεῖς ποιήσειε, 
πάντων γε τῶν πέριξ ῥᾳδίως ἄρξειν - ἰσχυρότατον 
γὰρ τῶν ἐγγὺς φύλων τοῦτο ἐδόκει εἶναι. οὕτω δὴ 
διαπέμπει πρός τε τοὺς ὑπ᾽ αὐτὸν πάντας καὶ πρὸς 
Κροῖσον τὸν Λυδῶν βασιλέα. καὶ πρὸς τὸν Καππα- 
δοκῶν καὶ πρὸς Φρύγας ἀμφοτέρους καὶ πρὸς Παφλα- 
γόνας καὶ Ἰνδοὺς καὶ πρὸς Κᾶρας καὶ Κίλικας. οἵ 


wm 


10 


35 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 15 


‘ \ ΄- , , ,ὕ > A o3 
μὲν δὴ τοῖς λόγοις πειθόμενοι συμμαχίαν αὐτῷ ἐποι- 
ovvTO, ot δὲ καὶ δώροις καὶ χρήμασιν ἀναπειθόμενοι" 

Ν ἈΝ Ν “ > 5 al 
πολλὰ γὰρ καὶ τοιαῦτα ἣν αὐτῷ. 


Cyrus takes Command of a Persian Army 


’ὔ ΟΝ: ΝῊ ’ ” > Ἐν ee ’, 
Κυαξάρης δὲ ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αστυάγους παῖς ἐπεὶ ἠσθάνετο 
3 ‘ ἊΝ, ἈΝ Ν “A 
τήν τ᾽ ἐπιβουλὴν Kal THY παρασκευὴν τῶν συνιστα- 
, 515 εἰ ΄ δι τον 92.2 Ψ ὦ > 
μένων ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτόν, αὐτός τε εὐθέως ὅσα ἐδύνατο ἀντι- 
παρεσκευάζετο, καὶ εἰς Πέρσας ἔπεμπε πρός τε τὸ 
Ν RG χες, ἐνς ΄ N \ 5) \ » 
κοινὸν καὶ πρὸς Καμβύσην τὸν τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἔχοντα 
Ν 4 > , 
καὶ βασιλεύοντα ἐν Πέρσαις. 
» δὲ ἈΝ 4 A ὃ , > A 
ἔπεμπε δὲ Kat πρὸς Κῦρον, δεόμενος αὐτοῦ πει- 
΄-“ » -“ nw Lal 
ρᾶσθαι ἄρχοντα ἐλθεῖν τῶν ἀνδρῶν, εἴ Twas πέμποι 
’ ‘\ “A , » Ν Ane ἴω 
στρατιώτας τὸ Περσῶν κοινόν. ἤδη γὰρ καὶ ὁ Κῦρος, 
\ Ν᾿ “us A 5 hae , » 9 A 
διατετελεκὼς τὰ ἐν τοῖς ἐφήβοις δέκα ἔτη, ἐν τοῖς 
τελείοις ἀνδράσιν ἦν. οὕτω δὴ δεξαμένου τοῦ Κύρου 
οἱ βουλεύοντες γεραίτεροι αἱροῦνται αὐτὸν ἄρχοντα 
τῆς εἰς Μήδους στρατιᾶς. 


He marches to Media 


Κῦρος δὲ προσευξάμενος “Eotia πατρῴᾳ καὶ Διὶ 
’ὔ Ν a ¥ ας ε om aN Ν 

πατρῴῳ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις θεοῖς ὡρμᾶτο ἐπὶ τὴν στρα- 
\ Ν Ae , Ν 
τείαν, συμπρούπεμπε δὲ αὐτὸν καὶ ὁ πατήρ. ἐπειδὴ 
Ν » ~ + en > ’ ’ 3 Ν Ν 
δὲ ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας ἐγένοντο, λέγονται ἀστραπαὶ καὶ 
βρονταὶ αὐτῷ αἴσιοι γενέσθαι. τούτων δὲ φανέντων 
οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἔτι οἰωνιζόμενοι ἐπορεύοντο, ὡς οὐδένα 

λήσοντα τὰ τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ σημεῖα. 

A “ , 

Καὶ ἀφίκοντο μὲν μέχρι τῶν ὁρίων τῆς Περσίδος’ 

> \ > > a > Ν ὃ Ν \ A 
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἀετὸς δεξιὸς φανεὶς προηγεῖτο, προσευ- 


16 


ωι 


". 
° 


15 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


Edpevor θεοῖς καὶ ἥρωσι τοῖς Περσίδα γῆν κατέχου- 
σιν ἵλεως καὶ εὐμενεῖς πέμπειν σφᾶς, οὕτω διέβαινον 
τὰ ὅρια. ἐπειδὴ δὲ διέβησαν, προσηύχοντο αὖθις 
θεοῖς τοῖς Μηδίαν γῆν κατέχουσιν ἵλεως καὶ εὐμενεῖς 
δέχεσθαι αὐτούς. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσαντες, ἀσπασά- 
μενοι ἀλλήλους ὥσπερ εἰκός, ὁ μὲν πατὴρ πάλιν εἰς 
πόλιν ἀπήει, Κῦρος δὲ εἰς Μήδους πρὸς Κυαξάρην᾽ 
ἐπορεύετο. 

᾿Επεὶ δὲ ἀφίκετο ὁ Κῦρος εἰς Μήδους πρὸς τὸν 
Κυαξάρην, πρῶτον μὲν ὥσπερ εἰκὸς ἠσπάσαντο 
ἀλλήλους, ἔπειτα δὲ ἤρετο τὸν Κῦρον ὁ Κυαξάρης, 
πόσον ἄγοι τὸ στράτευμα. ὃ δὲ ἔφη, Τρισμυρίους 
μῶν γε, ot καὶ πρόσθεν ἐφοίτων πρὸς ὑμᾶς μισθο- 
φόροι: ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ τῶν οὐδέποτε ἐξελθόντων προσ- 
έρχονται τῶν ὁμοτίμων. 


Capture of Sardis 


Κυαξάρης μὲν οὖν τῶν Μήδων ἔχων τὸ τρίτον 
, , e δὲ \ »” » » ε δὲ 
μέρος κατέμενεν, ὧς μηδὲ τὰ οἴκοι ἔρημα εἴη. ὁ δὲ 
Κῦρος ἐπορεύετο ὡς ἠδύνατο τάχιστα. 
ov , 2>Q> ὍΝ , ¥ ‘ ὥς 
Κροῖσος μῶντοι εὐθὺς ἐπὶ Σάρδεων ἔφευγε σὺν τῷ 
, Ν a la 9 390 7 
στρατεύματι" τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα φῦλα ὅποι ἐδύνατο προσω- 
τάτω ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ τῆς ἐπ᾽ οἶκον ὁδοῦ ἕκαστος ἀπε- 
, 3 oy δὲ ε Ἃ πε 52 Ν δ κ , ὃ 
χώρει. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, εὐθὺς ἐπὶ Σάρδεις 
> “ ε “ lal 
nye Κῦρος. ὡς δ᾽ ἐγένετο πρὸς τῷ τείχει τῷ ἐν 
’ ἴω 
Σάρδεσι, τάς τε μηχανὰς ἀνίστη ὡς προσβαλῶν πρὸς 
Ν la) Ν “ 
τὸ τεῖχος καὶ κλίμακας παρεσκευάζετο. ταῦτα δὲ 
“ Ἕ “ 
ποιῶν κατὰ τὰ ἀποτομώτατα δοκοῦντα εἶναι τοῦ Σαρ- 
ape 3 , nw 
διανῶν ἐρύματος τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀναβιβάζει 


uw 


I 


° 


15 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 17 


Χαλδαίους τε καὶ Πέρσας. ἡγήσατο δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἀνὴρ 
᾽ lal 4 lal “a 
Πέρσης, δοῦλος γεγενημένος τῶν ἐν TH ἀκροπόλει 
“a ‘\ 
τινὸς φρουρῶν Kat καταμεμαθηκὼς κατάβασιν εἰς 
τὸν ποταμὸν καὶ ἀνάβασιν τὴν αὐτήν. 
ε ΒᾺΝ , an = 9 ΕἾ ‘ »” 
Ὡς δ᾽ ἐγένετο τοῦτο δῆλον, ὅτι εἴχετο τὰ ἄκρα, 
, A » ε Ν 5 Ν ΄“ “ ΄ 
πάντες δὴ ἔφευγον οἱ Λυδοὶ ἀπὸ τῶν τειχῶν ὅποι 
> , 4 Lal ’ lal Q 9 A 
ἐδύνατο ἕκαστος τῆς πόλεως. Κῦρος δὲ ἅμα τῇ 
ἡμέρᾳ εἰσήει εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ παρήγγειλεν ἐκ τῆς 
’ὔ lA Lal e Ἁ “Ὁ 
τάξεως μηδένα κινεῖσθαι. 6 δὲ Κροῖσος κατακλει- 
σάμενος ἐν τοῖς βασιλείοις, Κῦρον ἐβόα" ὁ δὲ Κῦρος 
Lal A , 4 7 a. Ἃς NX: 
τοῦ μὲν Κροίσου φύλακας κατέλιπεν, αὐτὸς δὲ κατα- 
στρατοπεδεύσας τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ ὅπου ἐδόκει τὸ ἐπιτη- 
δειότατον εἶναι τῆς πόλεως, μένειν ἐπὶ τοῖς ὅπλοις 
παρήγγειλε καὶ ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι. 


Cyrus and Croesus 


A A , > Lal 3 , e A 
Ταῦτα δὲ διαπραξάμενος ἀγαγεῖν ἐκέλευσεν αὑτῷ 
“Ὁ ‘ A“ εὺ “ 
τὸν Κροῖσον. ὁ δὲ Κροῖσος ὡς εἶδε τὸν Κῦρον, 
Χ A > pes ¥ : A ἈΝ ε ΄ νιν 
αἴρε, ὦ δέσποτα, EPN* τοῦτο γὰρ ἢ τύχη καὶ ἔχειν 
Ἂς, 5 Ν “ ’ὔ Ν \ 3 XN ’ 
τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε δίδωσι σοὶ καὶ ἐμοὶ προσαγορεύειν. 
Καὶ σύ γε, ἔφη, ὦ Κροῖσε, ἐπείπερ ἄνθρωποί γέ 
3 > , δἰ.» ¥ > A > > »* , 
ἐσμεν ἀμφότεροι. ἀτάρ, ἔφη, ὦ Κροῖσε, ap αν τί 
μοι ἐθελήσαις συμβουλεῦσαι ; Καὶ βουλοίμην γ᾽ av, 
¥ > “ 3 ΄ , ε ἰο a Ν “ἡ 
ἔφη, ὦ Κῦρε, ἀγαθόν τί σοι εὑρεῖν: τοῦτο γὰρ ἂν 
> > Ν 5 Ἀ ’ 
οἶμαι ἀγαθὸν κἀμοὶ γενέσθαι. 
¥ εν τῶ ¥ > a 2 4 \ eon 
Ακουσον τοίνυν, ἔφη, ὦ Κροῖσε: ἐγὼ yap ὅρων 
τοὺς στρατιώτας πολλὰ πεπονηκότας καὶ πολλὰ κε- 
κινδυνευκότας καὶ νῦν νομίζοντας πόλιν ἔχειν τὴν 
, > 2 Jey | , Ν ων 3 lal 
πλουσιωτάτην ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ peta Βαβυλῶνα, ἀξιῶ 
ATTIC PROSE— 2 


18 


uw 


20 


ATTIC PROSE 


“ ’ 
ὠφεληθῆναι τοὺς στρατιώτας: γιγνώσκω γάρ, ἔφη, 
ὅτι εἰ μή τινα καρπὸν λήψονται τῶν πόνων, οὐ δυνή- 
σομαι αὐτοὺς πολὺν χρόνον πειθομένους ἔχειν. διαρ- 
4, Ν > > “A > A ‘ IX > ix . 
πάσαι μὲν οὖν αὐτοῖς ἐφεῖναι τὴν πόλιν οὐ βούλομαι 
A » A 
τήν τε yap πόλιν͵ νομίζω ἂν διαφθαρῆναι, ἔν τε TH 
al > 53 / 
ἁρπαγῇ εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι ot πονηρότατοι πλεονεκτή- 
σειαν ἄν. 
aA A > ἂν» 
᾿Ακούσας ταῦτα ὃ Κροῖσος ἔλεξεν, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐμέ, ἔφη, 
ἔασον λέξαι πρὸς ods ἂν ἐγὼ Λυδῶν ἐθέλω, ὅτι 
διαπέπραγμαι παρὰ σοῦ μὴ ποιῆσαι ἁρπαγὴν μηδὲ 
ἐᾶσαι ἀφανισθῆναι παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας, ὑπεσχόμην 
δέ σοι ἀντὶ τούτων, ἢ μὴν παρ᾽ ἑκόντων Λυδῶν 
¥ rn 9 N > | ees 5 , 
ἔσεσθαι πᾶν ὅ τι καλὸν κἀγαθόν ἐστιν ἐν Σάρδεσιν. 
x . A 3 , SQ? Κ᾽ y a ¢ 
ἣν yap ταῦτα ἀκούσωσιν, oid ὅτι ἥξει σοι πᾶν ὅ τι 
5 ‘ > , Ἀ A > ‘ \ , Ν 
ἐστὶν ἐνθάδε καλὸν κτῆμα ἀνδρὶ καὶ γυναικί" καὶ 
ὁμοίως εἰς νέωτα πολλῶν καὶ καλῶν πάλιν σοι 
’ ε 
πλήρης ἡ πόλις ἔσται: ἣν δὲ διαρπάσῃς, καὶ αἱ 
/ ἃ lal A 
τέχναι σοι, ἃς πηγάς φασι τῶν καλῶν εἶναι, διεφθαρ- 
, ὃ" 
μέναι ἔσονται. ἐξέσται δέ σοι ἰδόντι τὰ ἐλθόντα, 
+ Ν Ν A al lal 
ἐτι καὶ περὶ τῆς ἁρπαγῆς βουλεύσασθαι. πρῶτον 
ἘΩ͂Ν + ae. Ν 
δέ, ἔφη, ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς θησαυροὺς πέμπε καὶ παρα- 


᾿ ’ 
λαμβανέτωσαν οἱ σοὶ φύλακες παρὰ τῶν ἐμῶν 


25 


φυλάκων. 


Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ἅπαντα οὕτω συνήνεσε ποιεῖν ὁ 
Κῦρος, ὥσπερ ἔλεξεν ὁ Κροῖσος. 
Γνῶθι σεαυτόν 


Τάδε δέ μοι πάντως, ἔφη, Κροῖσε, λέξον, πῶς σοι 
ἀποβέβηκε τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἐν Δελφοῖς χρηστηρίου" σοὶ 


wm 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 19 


yap δὴ λέγεται πάνυ ye τεθεραπεῦσθαι ὃ ᾿Απόλλων 
καί σε πάντα ἐκείνῳ πειθόμενον πράττειν. 
᾿Εβουλόμην οὖν, ἔφη, ὦ Κῦρε, οὕτως ἔχειν νῦν δὲ 
πάντα τἀναντία εὐθὺς ἐξ ἀρχῆς πράττων προσηνέχθην 
τῷ ᾿Απόλλωνι. Πῶς δέ; ἔφη ὁ Κῦρος: δίδασκε: 
’ Ν ’ id ν A v2 » 
πάνυ γὰρ παράδοξα λέγεις. Ὅτι πρῶτον per, ἔφη, 
ἀμελήσας ἐρωτᾶν τὸν θεόν, εἴ τι ἐδεόμην, ἀπεπειρώ- 
3 gd > ὃ 4 > θ ’ “ ὃ , » ἧς 
μὴν αὐτοῦ εἰ δύναιτο ἀληθεύειν. τοῦτο δέ, ἔφη, μὴ 
ὅτι θεός, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄνθρωποι καλοὶ κἀγαθοί, ἐπειδὰν 


3 “~ “A 
10 γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι, οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας. 


15 


20 


25 


ἐπεὶ μέντοι ἔγνω καὶ μάλα ἄτοπα ἐμοῦ ποιοῦντος 

ἈΝ , A > ’ 9 Ν i δ 
καὶ πρόσω Δελφῶν ἀπέχοντος, οὕτω δὴ πέμπω περὶ 

’, a ’ x Ν “A 50» > ’ 
παίδων. ὃ δέ μοι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον οὐδ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο" 
3 Ν σας Ν Ν , 3 ΄ as 
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγὼ πολλὰ μὲν πέμπων ἀναθήματα χρυσᾶ 
πολλὰ δ᾽ ἀργυρᾶ, πάμπολλα δὲ θύων, ἐξιλασάμην 
ποτὲ αὐτόν, ὡς ἐδόκουν, τότε δή μοι ἀποκρίνεται 
ἐρωτῶντι τί ἄν μοι ποιήσαντι παῖδες γένοιντο" ὃ δὲ 
> Σ΄ » "ae ee , 252 N "δὲ 
εἶπεν ὅτι ἔσοιντο. καὶ ἐγένοντο μέν, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ 

”~ > , , Ν > Ν ¥ aA Ν 
τοῦτο ἐψεύσατο, γενόμενοι δὲ οὐδὲν ὥνησαν. ὃ μὲν 

Ν Ν a» ὃ /, a δὲ » ΄ > 
yap κωφὸς ὧν διετέλει, ὃ δὲ ἄριστος γενόμενος ἐν 
> » -“ ’ > ’ 
ἀκμῇ τοῦ βίου ἀπώλετο. 

Πιεζόμενος δὲ ταῖς περὶ τοὺς παῖδας συμφοραῖς 
πάλιν πέμπω καὶ ἐπερωτῶ τὸν θεόν, τί ἂν ποιῶν τὸν 
λοιπὸν βίον εὐδαιμονέστατα διατελέσαιμι: ὃ δέ μοι 
ἀπεκρίνατο, 


Σαυτὸν γιγνώσκων εὐδαίμων, Κροῖσε, περάσεις. 


Ἐγὼ δὲ ἀκούσας τὴν μαντείαν ἥσθην ἐνόμιζον γὰρ 
τὸ ῥᾷστόν μοι αὐτὸν προστάξαντα τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν 


20 ATTIC PROSE 


N , Α A @r 

διδόναι. ἄλλους μὲν γὰρ γιγνώσκειν, TOUS μὲν οἷόν 

9. 4 \ > » ε \ Se 7 3 ΄ ΄ \ 

7 εἶναι τοὺς δ᾽ ov" ἑαυτὸν δὲ ὅστις ἐστί, πάντα τινα 

9. < Ε 38 , \ \ ‘ a δὴ 

ἐνόμιζον ἄνθρωπον εἰδέναι. καὶ τὸν μετὰ ταῦτα δὴ 

Ν 3 ’ Ἀ 

χρόνον, ἕως μὲν εἶχον ἡσυχίαν, οὐδὲν ἐνεκάλουν μετὰ 
a ΄“ ’ 3 Ἂν Ν 5. 

τὸν τοῦ παιδὸς θάνατον ταῖς τύχαις - ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνε- 
’ ε Ἀ a> ’ 5 > ε “Ὁ , θ 

πείσθην ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ασσυρίου ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς στρατεύεσθαι, 

’, 5» ‘\ 

εἰς πάντα κίνδυνον ἦλθον" ἐσώθην μέντοι οὐδὲν 


un 


lal / 
κακὸν λαβών. οὐκ αἰτιῶμαι δὲ οὐδὲ τάδε τὸν θεόν. 
3 \ Ν + 3 » 5 ea Ν eke) , 6 
ἐπεὶ yap ἔγνων ἐμαυτὸν μὴ ἱκανὸν ὑμῖν μάχεσθαι, 


“ an “ “-“ Ν | aoe.’ Ν ε 
ο ἀσφαλῶς σὺν τῷ θεῷ ἀπῆλθον καὶ αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ 


+ > 4 
σὺν ἐμοί. 
Nov δ᾽ αὖ πάλιν ὑπό τε πλούτου τοῦ παρόντος 
διαθρυπτόμενος καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν δεομένων μου προστάτην 
a ‘ 
γενέσθαι καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν δώρων ὧν ἐδίδοσάν μοι καὶ 
£2929 θ ΄΄ ν , ¥ ε af. δ 
15 Ur ἀνθρώπων, οἵ με κολακεύοντες ἔλεγον ὡς εἰ ἐγὼ 
3522 ¥ ΄ a 3 Ν ΄ὔ " , 
ἐθέλοιμι ἄρχειν πάντες ἂν ἐμοὶ πείθοιντο καὶ μέ 
“ἡ » 5 θ , oak , δὲ λό 
γιστος ἂν εἴην ἀνθρώπων, ὑπὸ τοιούτων δὲ λόγων 
3 , ε ν , 4 ce 4 
ἀναφυσώμενος, ὡς εἵλοντό pe πάντες οἱ κύκλῳ βασι- 
a / “A 
Nels προστάτην τοῦ πολέμου, ὑπεδεξάμην THY στρα- 
ε a “Ὁ 
29 Τηγίαν, ὡς ἱκανὸς ὧν μέγιστος γενέσθαι, ἀγνοῶν 
»” ’ 4 Ν a 
ἄρα ἐμαυτόν, ὅτι σοὶ ἀντιπολεμεῖν ἱκανὸς @pny εἶναι, 
πρῶτον μὲν ἐκ θεῶν γεγονότι, ἔπειτα δὲ διὰ βασιλέων 
ἊΝ» n Lal 
πεφυκότι, ἔπειτα δ᾽ ἐκ παιδὸς ἀρετὴν ἀσκοῦντι" τῶν. 
3. » ~ Ψ “ 
δ᾽ ἐμῶν προγόνων ἀκούω τὸν πρῶτον βασιλεύσαντα 
hd , x 
ἅμα τε βασιλέα καὶ ἐλεύθερον γενέσθαι. ταῦτ᾽ οὖν 
3 ’ ὃ ’ » » \ , 
ἀγνοήσας, δικαίως, ἔφη, ἔχω THY δίκην. 
3 ‘ A 2° ἂν > a 
᾿Αλλὰ νῦν δή, ἔφη, ὦ Κῦρε, γιγνώσκω μὲν ἐμαυτόν" 
Ν 3 » an » 
σὺ δ᾽, ἔφη, δοκεῖς ἔτι ἀληθεύσειν τὸν ᾿Απόλλω, ὡς 
9 , ¥ 
εὐδαίμων ἔσομαι γιγνώσκων ἐμαυτόν; σὲ δ᾽ ἐρωτῶ 


2 


ωι 


ut 


-" 
ωι 


20 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 21 


ὃ Α a 9 ¥ > » ὃ Lal > ’ lal 9 

τὰ TOUTO, OTL αριστ αν μοι OKELS εἰκάσαι TOUTO EV 
ἊΝ ΄ Ν Ἀ a 

τῷ παρόντι" καὶ yap δύνασαι ποιῆσαι. 


Εὐδαιμονία 


Ν > 
Kat ὁ Κῦρος εἶπε, Βουλήν μοι δὸς περὶ τούτου, 
ὦ Κροῖσε' ἐγὼ γάρ σου ἐννοῶν τὴν πρόσθεν εὐδαι- 
‘ A 
μονίαν, οἰκτείρω τέ σε Kal ἀποδίδωμι ἤδη γυναῖκά τε 
ἔχειν ἣν εἶχες καὶ τὰς θυγατέρας, ἀκούω γάρ σοι εἶναι, 
Ν Ν ’, Ν Ν ’ Ν LA Ν 
καὶ τοὺς φίλους καὶ τοὺς θεράποντας καὶ τράπεζαν σὺν 
Ψ eC A τ ’ὔ ὃ , Ν Ν , > A 
olamep ἐζῆτε: μάχας O€ σοι καὶ πολέμους ἀφαιρῶ. 
’ lal 
Ma Ata μηδὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη ὁ Κροῖσος, od ἐμοὶ ἔτι 
βουλεύου ἀποκρίνασθαι περὶ τῆς ἐμῆς εὐδαιμονίας " 
δ. X Ν no , x a , la ἃ , 
ἐγὼ yap non σοι λέγω, ἢν ταῦτά μοι ποιήσῃς ἃ λέγεις, 
bd ἃ ¥ , > bee? > Ἁ 
ὅτι ἣν ἄλλοι τε μακαριωτάτην ἐνόμιζον εἶναι βιοτὴν 
καὶ ἐγὼ συνεγίγνωσκον αὐτοῖς, ταύτην καὶ ἐγὼ νῦν 
» , Ne A > , Ve ᾧ , 
ἔχων διάξω. καὶ ὁ Κῦρος εἶπε, Tis δὴ ὁ ἔχων ταύτην 
\ ΄ ΄, ε ὅτι "ἃ eee A 
τὴν μακαρίαν βιοτήν; H ἐμὴ γυνή, εἶπεν, ὦ Kupe: 
ἐκείνη γὰρ τῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν καὶ τῶν μαλακῶν καὶ 
εὐφροσυνῶν πασῶν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἴσον μετεῖχε, φροντίδων 
δὲ ὅπως ταῦτα ἔσται καὶ πολέμου καὶ μάχης οὐ 
a Lee Y δὴ ‘ Ν ὃ ἴον te ies 4 
μετὴν αὐτῇ. οὕτω δὴ Kal σὺ δοκεῖς ἐμὲ κατασκευά- 
iA re eee 277 , > , 9 
lew, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ἣν ἐφίλουν μάλιστα ἀνθρώπων, ὥστε 
τῷ ᾿Απόλλωνι ἄλλα μοι δοκῶ χαριστήρια ὀφειλήσειν. 
3 4 δὲ ε lal Ν ’ 3 ““ 30 4 
Axovoas ὃὲ 0 Κῦρος τοὺς λόγους αὐτοῦ, ἐθαύμασε 
Ν Ἀ 5 ’ > Ν Ν ς bd Ν ἍΡ τῆς 
μὲν τὴν εὐθυμίαν, ἦγε δὲ τὸ λοιπὸν ὅποι καὶ αὐτὸς 
πορεύοιτο. 
The Taking of Babylon 
Προϊὼν δὲ τὴν ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνος κατεστρέψατο μὲν 
, Ὧν ἡ τς A , , , ΩΝ 
Φρύγας τοὺς ἐν τῇ μεγάλῃ Φρυγίᾳ, κατεστρέψατο δὲ 


22 


2 


uw 


° 


wm 


20 


wn 


ATTIC PROSE 


Καππαδόκας, ὑποχειρίους δ᾽ ἐποιήσατο “ApaBious. 
ἐξέπλησε δὲ ἀπὸ πάντων τούτων Περσῶν μὲν ἱππέας 
οὐ μεῖον τετρακισμυρίους, πολλοὺς δὲ ἵππους τῶν 
αἰχμαλώτων καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς συμμάχοις διέδωκε: καὶ 
πρὸς Βαβυλῶνα ἀφίκετο παμπόλλους μὲν ἱππέας 
ἔχων, παμπόλλους δὲ τοξότας καὶ ἀκοντιστάς, σφεν- 
δονήτας δὲ ἀναριθμήτους. ἐπεὶ δὲ πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι 
ἣν ὁ Κῦρος, περιέστησε μὲν πᾶν τὸ στράτευμα περὶ 
τὴν πόλιν, ἔπειτα αὐτὸς περιήλαυνε τὴν πόλιν σὺν 
τοῖς φίλοις τε καὶ ἐπικαιρίοις τῶν συμμάχων, καὶ 
καταθεασάμενος τὰ τείχη ἀπήγαγε τὴν στρατιὰν ἀπὸ 
τῆς πόλεως. 

᾿Επεὶ δὲ κατεστρατοπεδεύσαντο, συνεκάλεσεν ὃ 
Κῦρος τοὺς ἐπικαιρίους καὶ ἔλεξεν, "Avdpes σύμμα- 
xo, τεθεάμεθα μὲν κύκλῳ τὴν πόλιν: ἐγὼ δέ, ὅπως 
μὲν ἄν τις τείχη οὕτως ἰσχυρὰ καὶ ὑψηλὰ προσμαχό- 
μενος ἕλοι, οὐκ ἐνορᾶν μοι δοκῶ: ὅσῳ δὲ πλέονες 
ἄνθρωποι ἐν τῇ πόλει εἰσίν, ἐπείπερ οὐ μάχονται 
ἐξιόντες, τοσούτῳ ἂν θᾶττον λιμῷ αὐτοὺς ἡγοῦμαι 
ἁλῶναι. εἰ μή τιν᾽ οὖν ἄλλον τρόπον ἔχετε λέγειν, 
τούτῳ πολιορκητέους φημὶ εἶναι τοὺς ἄνδρας. 

Καὶ ὁ Χρυσάντας εἶπεν, Ὃ δὲ ποταμός, ἔφη, οὗτος 
οὐ διὰ μέσης τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ πλάτος ἔχων πλεῖον ἢ 
ἐπὶ δύο στάδια; Ναὶ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ Γωβρύας, καὶ 
βάθος γε ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν δύο ἄνδρες ὁ ἕτερος ἐπὶ τοῦ 
ἑτέρου ἑστηκὼς τοῦ ὕδατος ὑπερέχοιεν - ὥστε τῷ ποτα- 
μῷ ἔτι ἰσχυροτέρα ἐστὶν ἡ πόλις ἢ τοῖς τείχεσι. καὶ 
ὁ Κῦρος, Ταῦτα μέν, ἔφη, ὦ Χρυσάντα, ἐῶμεν, ὅσα 
κρείττω ἐστὶ τῆς ἡμετέρας δυνάμεως : διαμετρησα- 


ΓΚ ὧν 


uw" 


15 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 23 


μένους δὲ χρὴ ws τάχιστα TO μέρος ἑκάστου ἡμῶν 
> ’ ’ ε , A , 9 
ὀρύττειν τάφρον ws πλατυτάτην Kat βαθυτάτην, ὅπως 
9 3 ’ ε on A td , 
ὅτι ἐλαχίστων ἡμῖν τῶν φυλάκων δέῃ. 

Ov δὴ 4, λ ὃ ’΄ ‘ Ν A » 

ὕτω δὴ κύκλῳ διαμετρήσας περὶ τὸ τεῖχος, ἀπο- 
λιπὼν ὅσον τύρσεσι μεγάλαις ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ. 
» ¥ \ ἂν al , , ε 
ὦρυττεν ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν τοῦ τείχους τάφρον ὑπερ- 
/ ‘ Ἁ ~ > Re Ν ε 4 \ 

μεγέθη Kai τὴν γῆν ἀνέβαλλον πρὸς ἑαυτούς. καὶ 
πρῶτον μὲν πύργους ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ φκοδόμει, ὅπως 
ὅτι μάλιστα ἐοίκοι πολιορκήσειν παρασκευαζομένῳ. 
δε τ A Ν pee α Ν 4 Pree.’ A > 
ἀνίστη δὲ Kal ἄλλους πολλοὺς πύργους ἐπὶ τῆς ἀμβο- 
λάδος γῆς, ὅπως ὅτι πλεῖστα φυλακτήρια εἴη. 

Οἱ μὲν δὴ ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν" οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῷ τείχει κατε- 

~ 4 ε » Ν > 4 , 

γέλων τῆς πολιορκίας, ὡς ἔχοντες τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πλέον 
εἴκοσιν ἐτῶν. ἀκούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Κῦρος τὸ στρά- 
τευμα κατίνειμε δώδεκα μέρη, ὡς μῆνα τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ 
ἕκαστον μέρος φυλάξον. οἱ δ᾽ αὖ Βαβυλώνιοι ἀκού- 
σαντες ταῦτα πολὺ ἔτι μᾶλλον τούτων κατεγέλων, 
ἐννοούμενοι εἰ σφᾶς Φρύγες καὶ Λυδοὶ καὶ ᾿Αράβιοι 
καὶ Καππαδόκαι φυλάξοιεν, ovs σφίσιν ἐνόμιζον 
πάντας εὐμενεστέρους εἶναι ἢ Πέρσαις. 
Καὶ αἱ μὲν τάφροι ἤδη ὀρωρυγμέναι ἦσαν. ὁ δὲ 


> 


A > Ν ε Ἀ 5 la al ΕἾ > 
Κῦρος ἐπειδὴ ἑορτὴν ἐν τῇ Βαβυλῶνι ἤκουσεν εἶναι, 
> se , , 9 Ν , , Ν 
ἐν ἧ πάντες Βαβυλώνιοι ὅλην τὴν νύκτα πίνουσι καὶ 
κωμάζουσιν, ἐν ταύτῃ, ἐπειδὴ τάχιστα συνεσκότασε, 
λαβὼν πολλοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἀνεστόμωσε τὰς τάφρους 
πρὸς τὸν ποταμόν. ὡς δὲ τοῦτο ἐγένετο, τὸ ὕδωρ 

Ἀ ‘ , 5 , 3 “ ’ ε Ν Ν A 
κατὰ Tas τάφρους ἐχώρει ἐν TH νυκτί, ἡ δὲ διὰ τῆς 

’ ε x 4 > 4 5 ’ ε Ν 
πόλεως ὁδὸς πορεύσιμος ἀνθρώποις ἐγίγνετο. ὡς δὲ 
τὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ οὕτως ἐπορσύνετο, παρηγγύησεν ὃ 


24 ATTIC PROSE 


wm 


° 


wn 


20 


2 


wm 


Ν n ἌΓ , 5» 
Κῦρος Πέρσαις χιλιάρχοις καὶ πεζῶν καὶ ἱππέων εἰς 
a Ν > ’ Ν 
δύο ἄγοντας τὴν χιλιοστὺν παρεῖναι πρὸς αὑτὸν, τοὺς 
Ν , 4 
δ᾽ ἄλλους συμμάχους κατ᾽ οὐρὰν τούτων ἕπεσθαι 
, a Ν Ν Lge ‘ \ 
ἧπερ πρόσθεν τεταγμένους. οἱ μὲν δὴ παρῆσαν" ὃ δὲ 
n “ Ν ε ’ 
καταβιβάσας εἰς τὸ ξηρὸν τοῦ ποταμου τοὺς ὑπηρέτας 
,ὔ > 4 
καὶ πεζοὺς καὶ ἱππέας, ἐκέλευσε σκέψασθαι εἰ πορεύ- 
σιμον εἴη τὸ ἔδαφος τοῦ ποταμοῦ. 
» > “A 
Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπήγγειλαν ὅτι πορεύσιμον εἴη, ἐνταῦθα 
“A ἃ Ν > 4 
δὴ ἐπορεύοντο: τῶν δὲ ἀπαντώντων ot μὲν ἀπέθνῃσκον 
: ¥ ἃ 9 397 ε 
παιόμενοι, οἱ δ᾽ ἔφευγον πάλιν εἴσω, ot δ᾽ ἐβόων οἱ 
“ ε Ν 
δ᾽ ἀμφὶ τὸν Γωβρύαν συνεβόων αὐτοῖς, ὡς κωμασταὶ 
» Ν > ΄ ae BY e δύ , > N 
ὄντες Kal αὐτοί: Kal ἰόντες ἡ ἐδύναντο τάχιστα ἐπὶ 
lal Ν ε Ν Ν “ 4 
τοῖς βασιλείοις ἐγένοντο. καὶ οἱ μὲν σὺν τῷ Γωβρύᾳ 
Ν 
καὶ Γαδάτᾳ τεταγμένοι κεκλεισμένας εὑρίσκουσι τὰς 
a , / 
πύλας τοῦ βασιλείου: οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοὺς φύλακας ταχθέν- 
A “A 4 
τες ἐπεισπίπτουσιν αὐτοῖς πίνουσι πρὸς φῶς πολύ, 
καὶ εὐθὺς ὡς πολεμίοις ἐχρῶντο. 
ε δὲ Ν \ , } ee > , ε 
Ὡς δὲ κραυγὴ καὶ κτύπος ἐγίγνετο, αἰσθόμενοι οἱ 
ἔνδον τοῦ θορύβου, κελεύσαντος τοῦ βασιλέως σκέ- 
θ ae, Ν a > , , > , 
ψασθαι Ti εἴη TO πρᾶγμα, ἐκθέουσί τινες ἀνοίξαντες 
Ἀ > 
τὰς πύλας. οἱ δ᾽ ἀμφὶ τὸν Γαδάταν ὡς εἶδον Tas 
5X Χ ΄ 3 ΄ A ΚΝ ΄ , 
πύλας χαλώσας, εἰσπίπτουσι, καὶ τοῖς πάλιν φεύγου- 
» , 
ow εἴσω ἐφεπόμενοι καὶ παίοντες ἀφικνοῦνται πρὸς 
᾿ \ 
τὸν βασιλέα: καὶ ἤδη ἑστη τότα αὐτὸν καὶ ἐσπασμέ 
a > > rn 
νον ὃν εἶχεν ἀκινάκην εὑρίσκουσι. Kal τοῦτον μὲν 
ε \ , \ ; a \ 
οἱ σὺν Γαδάτᾳ καὶ Τωβρύᾳ πολλοὶ ἐχειροῦντο: καὶ 


ε Ν 3 “A Ἁ 3 4 
ot σὺν αὐτῷ δὲ ἀπέθνῃσκον, ὃ μὲν προβαλλόμενός τι, 
ἃ 


Ν 4 a 4, 
ὃ δὲ φεύγων, ὃ δέ ye καὶ ἀμυνόμενος ὅτῳ ἐδύνατο. 


ε Ν lal , lal 
ὁ δὲ Κῦρος διέπεμπε τὰς τῶν ἱππέων τάξεις κατὰ τὰς 


- 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 25 


ὁδοὺς Kal προεῖπεν ods μὲν ἔξω λαμβάνοιεν κατακαΐί- 
νειν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις κηρύττειν τοὺς Συριστὶ 
ἐπισταμένους ἔνδον μένειν: εἰ δέ τις ἔξω ληφθείη, 
ὅτι θανατώσοιτο. 


wn 


Ot μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἐποίουν. Taddras δὲ καὶ Γωβρύας 
Ὁ ‘ an 
ἧκον" καὶ θεοὺς μὲν πρῶτον προσεκύνουν, ὅτι τετι- 
΄ 5 \ er, , » \ 
μωρημένοι ἦσαν τὸν ἀνόσιον βασιλέα, ἔπειτα δὲ 
Κύρου κατεφίλουν καὶ χεῖρας καὶ πόδας, πολλὰ δα- 
y ~ 
κρύοντες ἅμα χαρᾷ Kal εὐφραινόμενοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἡμέρα 
ἊΝ la 
10 ἐγένετο Kat ἤσθοντο οἱ τὰς ἄκρας ἔχοντες ἑαλωκυῖϊάν 
ἣν Ψ' \ Ν ᾽’ Ψ if 
τε τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὸν βασιλέα τεθνηκότα, παραδιδόασι 
Ν Ν » ε Ν a ἣν Ν 3» 3 A 
καὶ Tas ἄκρας. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος τὰς μὲν ἄκρας εὐθὺς 
4, 5 ’ὔ Ν ‘\ > 
παρελάμβανε καὶ φρουράρχους τε καὶ φρουροὺς εἰς 
ταύτας ἀνέπεμπε, τοὺς δὲ τεθνηκότας θάπτειν ἐφῆκε 


I5 τοῖς προσήκουσι. 


wm 


Cyrus’ Dower 
"Evel δὲ πορευόμενοι γίγνονται κατὰ τὴν Μηδικήν, 
id ε “ Ν ’ 32 Ν \ 5 , 
τρέπεται 6 Κῦρος πρὸς Κυαξάρην. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἠσπά- 
σαντο ἀλλήλους, πρῶτον μὲν δὴ ὁ Κῦρος εἶπε τῷ 
α ἥλους, πρῶτον μὲν δὴ ὁ Kop 
> nw » wn 
Κυαξάρῃ ὅτι οἶκος αὐτῷ ἐξηρημένος εἴη ἐν Βαβυλῶνι 
20 καὶ ἀρχεῖα, ὅπως ἔχῃ καὶ ὅταν ἐκεῖσε ἔλθῃ εἰς οἰκεῖα 
, » ᾿ . A » eens 
κατάγεσθαι. ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἄλλα δῶρα ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 
᾿πολλὰ καὶ καλά. 
Ὁ δὲ Κυαξάρης ταῦτα μὲν ἐδέχετο, προσέπεμψε 
“ ΄ “ Ν 
δὲ αὐτῷ τὴν θυγατέρα στέφανόν τε χρυσοῦν καὶ 
25 Ψέλια φέρουσαν καὶ στρεπτὸν καὶ στολὴν Μηδικὴν 
᾿ ε Σ Ν ’ πο δ Ν Ν ~ > , 
ὡς δυνατὸν καλλίστην. καὶ ἡ μὲν δὴ παῖς ἐστεφάνου 
7 tov Κῦρον, 6 δὲ Κναξάρης εἶπε, Δίδωμι δέ σοι, ἔφη, 
’ ὦ Κῦρε, καὶ αὐτὴν ταύτην γυναῖκα, ἐμὴν οὖσαν θυγα- 


26 | ATTIC PROSE 


wn 


I 


° 


μι 
wm 


20 


25 


, ᾿ς A A A » A “a 3 a) a 
répa Kal 6 σὸς δὲ πατὴρ ἔγημε THY TOV ἐμοῦ πατρὸς 
ae ἃ Ν 
θυγατέρα, ἐξ ἧς σὺ ἐγένου: αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἣν σὺ 
, an >» 9 Wig lal > 0 > 6 ’ 
πολλάκις παῖς ὦν, OTE παρ ἡμιν ἦσθα, ἐτισηνησω" 
aA ¥ 7 
καὶ ὁπότε τις ἐρωτῴη αὐτὴν τίνι yapotro, ἐλεγεν OTL 
4 > 4 Ν 3 “A > Ν Ν Ἀ ’ 
Κύρῳ: ἐπιδίδωμι δὲ αὐτῇ ἐγὼ καὶ φερνὴν Μηδίαν 
τὴν πᾶσαν. 
“ > > 
Ὃ μὲν οὕτως εἶπεν᾽ ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἀπεκρίνατο, ᾿Αλλ᾽, 
> , ΄ , > aA Ν Ν τὸ Ν Ν 
ὦ Κυαξάρη. τό τε γένος ἐπαινῶ καὶ τὴν παϊδα καὶ τὰ 
lal , pe Ν “~ ‘al Ν ’ 
δῶρα: βούλομαι δέ, ἔφη, σὺν τῇ τοῦ πατρὸς γνώμῃ 
καὶ τῇ τῆς μητρὸς ταῦτά σοι συναινέσαι. εἶπε μὲν 
οὖν οὕτως ὁ Κῦρος, ὅμως δὲ τῇ παιδὶ πάντα ἐδωρή- 
ς pos, ὅμως δὲ τῇ παιδὶ πάν ρή 
ε / ¥ , a“ “ 
σατο ὁπόσα ᾧετο Κυαξάρῃ χαριεῖσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ 
ποιήσας εἰς Πέρσας ἐπορεύετο. 


The Charge of Cambyses 


"Evel δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῖς Περσῶν ὁρίοις ἐγένετο πορευό- 
μενος, τὸ μὲν ἄλλο στράτευμα αὐτοῦ κατέλιπεν, αὐτὸς 
δὲ σὺν τοῖς φίλοις εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἐπορεύετο, ἱερεῖα μὲν 
ἄγων ὡς πᾶσι Πέρσαις ἱκανὰ θύειν τε καὶ ἑστιᾶσθαι" 
δῶρα δὲ ἦγεν, οἷα μὲν ἔπρεπε τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ 
καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις φίλοις, οἷα δ᾽ ἔπρεπεν ἀρχαῖς καὶ 
γεραιτέροις καὶ τοῖς ὁμοτίμοις πᾶσιν: ἔδωκε δὲ καὶ 
πᾶσι Πέρσαις καὶ Περσίσιν ὅσαπερ καὶ νῦν ἔτι 
δίδωσιν, ὅτανπερ ἀφίκηται βασιλεὺς εἰς Πέρσας. ἐκ 
δὲ τούτου συνέλεξε Καμβύσης τοὺς γεραιτέρους 
Περσῶν καὶ τὰς ἀρχάς, οἵπερ τῶν μεγίστων κύριοί 
εἰσι" παρεκάλεσε δὲ καὶ Κῦρον, καὶ ἔλεξε τοιάδε. 

“Avdpes Πέρσαι καὶ σύ, ὦ Κῦρε, ἐγὼ ἀμφοτέροις 
ὑμῖν εἰκότως εὔνους εἰμί: ὑμῶν μὲν γὰρ βασιλεύω, 


— 


Io 


15 


25 


CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 27 


a ΘΟ ὧδ le) a ge es, 5 ΄ὕὔ > > 9 
σὺ δέ, ὦ Κῦρε, παῖς ἐμὸς εἶ. δίκαιος οὖν εἰμι, ὅσα 
γιγνώσκειν δοκῶ ἀγαθὰ ἀμφοτέροις, ταῦτα εἰς τὸ 
μέσον λέγειν. τὰ μὲν γὰρ παρελθόντα ὑμεῖς μὲν 
Κῦρον ηὐξήσατε στράτευμα δόντες καὶ ἄρχοντα τού- 
του καταστήσαντες, Κῦρος δὲ ἡγούμενος τούτου σὺν 
θεοῖς, εὐκλεεῖς μὲν ὑμᾶς, ὦ Πέρσαι, ἐν πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ- 

> ’ > , 3 4 Aa 3 ὧν 6 A ms 

ποις ἐποίησεν, ἐντίμους δ᾽ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πάσῃ: τῶν δὲ 

συστρατευσαμένων τοὺς μὲν ἀρίστους καὶ πεπλούτικε, 
aA \ a) Ν . ἣν ΄, 

τοῖς δὲ πολλοῖς μισθὸν καὶ τροφὴν παρεσκεύακεν᾽ 

ἱππικὸν δὲ καταστήσας Περσῶν, πεποίηκε Πέρσαις 

καὶ πεδίων εἶναι μετουσίαν. ἢν μὲν οὖν καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν 

ν 4 “ Ἂν 8 A ¥ 3 ve 
οὕτω γιγνώσκητε, πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν αἴτιοι ἀλλήλοις 
¥ Ξ 3 ν ἃ , > A > Ν al , 
ἔσεσθε" εἰ δὲ ἢ σύ, ὦ Κῦρε, ἐπαρθεὶς ταῖς παρούσαις 

4, > Ἀ A ¥ ye , 
τύχαις, ἐπιχειρήσεις καὶ Περσῶν ἄρχειν ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ 
ν Ἀ A ¥ a ἐφ A > A ΄ 
ὥσπερ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ἢ ὑμεῖς, ὦ πολῖται, φθονήσαν- 
τες τούτῳ τῆς δυνάμεως, καταλύειν πειράσεσθε τοῦτον 

“a 3 ial S ¥ 9 > δὰ > / ma x 
τῆς ἀρχῆς, εὖ LTTE OTL ἐμποδὼν ἀλλήλοις TOAAWY καὶ 
ἀγαθῶν ἔσεσθε. 

Ὥ > Ν lal ’ iAX ‘ 5 θ ’ 5 Ν 

ς οὖν μὴ ταῦτα γίγνηται ἀλλὰ τἀγαθά, ἐμοὶ 
δοκεῖ, ἔφη, θύσαντας ὑμᾶς κοινῇ καὶ θεοὺς ἐπιμαρ- 

a π ¥ 

τυραμένους, συνθέσθαι, σὲ μέν, ὦ Κῦρε, nv τις ἐπι- 
στρατεύηται χώρᾳ Περσιδι ἢ Περσῶν νόμους διασπᾶν 

“ ’ὔ Ν 4 Ἂ ε A Pa aX ’, 
πειρᾶται, βοηθήσειν παντὶ σθένει" ὑμᾶς δέ, ὦ Πέρσαι, 
¥ a A an a 
ἦν τις ἢ ἀρχῆς Κῦρον ἐπιχειρῇ καταπαύειν ἢ ἀφί- 
στασθαί τις τῶν ὑποχειρίων, βοηθήσειν καὶ ὑμῖν 

> — Ν 4 ΩΨ ΕΝ κα > , Ν 
αὐτοῖς καὶ Κύρῳ καθ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν οὗτος ἐπαγγέλλῃ. καὶ 
ν \ » 2. & A | Pe ΄ ε 3 ΄, 
ἕως μὲν ἂν ἐγὼ ζῶ, ἐμὴ γίγνεται ἡ ἐν Πέρσαις 

? 9 + thee | Ν ’ al 9 4 
βασιλεία: ὅταν δ᾽ ἐγὼ τελευτήσω, δῆλον ὅτι Κύρου, 
38 lal a # A a > 7 > , 
ἐὰν ζῇ. καὶ ὅταν μὲν οὗτος ἀφίκηται eis Πέρσας, 


28 ATTIC PROSE 


10 


20 


2 


5 


wr 


ε ,ὕ “Ὁ Ν᾿ Ἂν ¥ lal θύ a bee A e A 
ὁσίως ἂν ὑμῖν ἔχοι τοῦτον θύειν τὰ ἱερὰ ὕπερ ὑμῶν 
a > Φ + > lal 
ἅπερ νῦν ἐγὼ θύω" ὅταν δ᾽ οὗτος ἔκδημος H, καλῶς 
=> lal lal ἃ “Ὁ i ΤΏΡ 
ἂν οἶμαι ὑμῖν ἔχειν, εἰ ἐκ τοῦ γένους, ὃς ἂν δοκῇ ὑμῖν 
> - A las > ’ 
ἄριστος εἶναι, οὗτος τὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀποτελοίη. 
an 4 4 Ν 
Ταῦτα εἰπόντος Καμβύσου συνέδοξε Κύρῳ τε καὶ 
- A A XN 
τοῖς Περσῶν τέλεσι" καὶ συνθέμενοι ταῦτα τότε Kal 
Ἀ a ¥ 4 
θεοὺς ἐπιμαρτυράμενοι, οὕτω Kal νῦν ἔτι διαμένουσι 
“ \ 
ποιοῦντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους Πέρσαι τε καὶ βασιλεύς. 
, Ν id Ψ ΄ 4 a ε 8 > Ν 
τούτων δὲ πραχθέντων ἀπήει ὁ Κῦρος. ὡς ὃ ἀπιὼν 
δ΄ 3 Μ “ὃ ὃ Le “ Ν Ν Lal Ν 
ἐγένετο ἐν Μήδοις, συνδόξαν τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ 
“ιν , , ae ” KS , 
γαμεῖ τὴν Κυαξάρου θυγατέρα, ἧς ἔτι Kal νῦν λόγος 
ὡς παγκάλης γενομένης. 


Length and Breadth of the Empire 


> Ν XN “A ε 3 ’ , Q 
Emct δὲ περιῆλθεν ὁ ἐνιαυτός, συνήγειρε στρατιὰν 
εἰς Βαβυλῶνα, καὶ λέγεται αὐτῷ γενέσθαι εἰς δώδεκα 
Nie , ὮΝ 3 ὃ , de L ὃ 
μὲν ἱππέων μυριάδας, εἰς δισχίλια δὲ ἅρματα ὄρεπα- 
,ὔ “ Ν > 4 ε ’ > Ν Ν 
νηφόρα, πεζῶν δὲ εἰς μυριάδας ἑξήκοντα. ἐπεὶ δὲ 
ταῦτα συνεσκεύαστο αὐτῷ, ὥρμα δὴ ταύτην τὴν στρα- 
, ? =e , / , Ae 
τείαν ἐν ἣ λέγεται καταστρέψασθαι πάντα τὰ ἔθνη; 
Ψ ,ὔ 3 , > tal ΄ > ΄“ , 
ὅσα Συρίαν ἐκβάντι οἰκεῖ μέχρι ἐρυθρᾶς θαλάττης. 
Ν Ἁ lal 
μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἡ εἰς Αἴγυπτον στρατεία λέγεται 
΄, \ , ΕἾ 
γενέσθαι, καὶ καταστρέψασθαι Αἴγυπτον. 
Καὶ ἐκ τούτου τὴν ἀρχὴν ὥριζεν αὐτῷ πρὸς ἕω μὲν 
ὩΣ : WY Cpxy¥ ΩΡ Ure tp 
, XN + 
ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλαττα, πρὸς ἄρκτον δὲ ὁ Εὔξεινος πόντος; 
Ν ε , 
πρὸς ἑσπέραν δὲ Κύπρος καὶ Αἴγυπτος, πρὸς μεσὴμ- 
’ Ν 3 
βρίαν δὲ Αἰθιοπία. τούτων δὲ τὰ πέρατα τὰ μὲν διὰ 
’, Ν ἣν an 
θάλπος, τὰ δὲ διὰ ψῦχος, τὰ δὲ διὰ ὕδωρ, τὰ δὲ 
δι 3 ὃ ᾽, ὃ , δες ἂς 3". , , 
L avvdpiav δυσοίκητα. αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ τούτων 


un 


Io 


45 


20 





CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 29 


‘ / , Ν ᾿ eh h. > a 
τὴν δίαιταν ποιησάμενος, τὸν μὲν ἀμφὶ τὸν χειμῶνα 
΄ A > - ε δ a Ψ κι 
χρόνον διῆγεν ἐν Βαβυλῶνι ἑπτὰ μῆνας - αὕτη γὰρ 
> Ὧν ,-ᾧ , X Rr as ΝΑ ἀρ aA A . 
ἀλεεινὴ ἡ χώρα: τὸν δὲ ἀμφὶ τὸ ἔαρ τρεῖς μῆνας ἐν 
Σούσοις, τὴν δὲ ἀκμὴν τοῦ θέρους δύο μῆνας ἐν 
> 4 ν Ν “x φοὸνἣ, , > 
Εκβατάνοις. οὕτω δὴ ποιοῦντα αὐτὸν λέγουσιν ἐν 
> A , \ , , Cr Y \ ὔ 
ἐαρινῷ θάλπει καὶ ψύχει διάγειν ἀεί. οὕτω δὲ διέ- 
KEWTO πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ὡς πᾶν μὲν ἔθνος 
A > ΄ > Ν 4, , ν Ν 
μειονεκτεῖν ἐδόκει εἰ μὴ Κύρῳ πέμψειεν ὅ τι καλὸν 
χω y ~ a ΄ A 
αὐτοῖς ἐν TH χώρᾳ ἢ φύοιτο ἢ τρέφοιτο ἢ τεχνῷτο, 
“A \ ΄ «ε , a Woe ΄ ΄ 
πᾶσα δὲ πόλις ὡσαύτως, πᾶς δὲ ἰδιώτης πλούσιος 
x» + ’ θ » Kv , Ὰ Ν Ἂ ε 
ἂν ᾧετο γενέσθαι εἴ τι Κύρῳ χαρίσαιτο: καὶ γὰρ ὁ 
Κῦρος λαμβάνων παρ᾽ ἑκάστων ὧν ἀφθονίαν εἶχον 
ε ’ 3 ’ - ’ > Ἁ 
οἱ διδόντες, ἀντεδίδου ὧν σπανίζοντας αὐτοὺς 
αἰσθάνοιτο. 
Συσκευάζου, ὦ Κῦρε 
Οὕτω δὲ τοῦ αἰῶνος προκεχωρηκότος, μάλα δὴ 
, “Δ ε ΄“ 5 co > , Ἀ 
πρεσβύτης ὧν ὁ Κῦρος ἀφικνεῖται εἰς Πέρσας τὸ 
ἕβδομον ἐπὶ τῆς αὑτοῦ ἀρχῆς. καὶ ὁ μὲν πατὴρ καὶ 
ε ’ ld ‘ 4 > Ἂς 3 ’, 
ἡ μήτηρ πάλαι δὴ ὥσπερ εἰκὸς ἐτετελευτήκεσαν 
3 a ε δὲ Ko 6A Ἂχ ζό ε ’ Ἂς “ 
αὐτῷ" ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἔθυσε τὰ νομιζόμενα ἱερά, καὶ τοῦ 
χοροῦ ἡγήσατο Πέρσαις κατὰ τὰ πάτρια, καὶ τὰ 
δῶρα πᾶσι διέδωκεν ὥσπερ εἰώθει. 
Κοιμηθεὶς δ᾽ ἐν τῷ βασιλείῳ ὄναρ εἶδε τοιόνδε. 
ΕῚ “~ Ν 4 x ‘\ nd 
ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ προσελθὼν κρείττων τις ἢ κατὰ ἀνθρω- 
δος ὡς , > A » . > N 
Tov εἰπεῖν, Συσκευάζου, ὦ Κῦρε: ἤδη yap εἰς θεοὺς 
¥ a & 3298 eed 3 , Ν Ν 
ἄπει. τοῦτο δὲ ἰδὼν τὸ ὄναρ ἐξηγέρθη, καὶ σχεδὸν 
50. 7 3 4 9 a ’ ε Ν ’ > ‘ 
ἐδόκει εἰδέναι ὅτι TOD βίου ἡ τελευτὴ παρείη. εὐθὺς 
οὖν λαβὼν ἱερεῖα ἔθυε Avi τε πατρῴῳ καὶ Ἡλίῳ καὶ 


Tots ἄλλοις θεοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν ἄκρων, ὡς Πέρσαι θύουσιν, 


20 ATTIC PROSE 


ὧδε ἐπευχόμενος" Ζεῦ πατρῷε καὶ Ἥλιε καὶ πάντες 
θεοί, δέχεσθε τάδε καὶ τελεστήρια πολλῶν καὶ καλῶν 


πράξεων καὶ χαριστήρια, ὅτι ἐσημήνατέ 2655: καὶ ἐν 


: ἱεροῖς καὶ ἐν ener σημεϊοιᾷ καὶ ἐν οἰωνοῖς καὶ 


ωι 


- 
wn 


2 


ο 


25 


ἐν φήμαις aT ἐχρῆν ποιεῖν καὶ ἃ οὐκ ἐχρῆν. πολλὴ 
δ᾽ ὑμῖν χάρις, ὅτι κἀγὼ ἐγίγνώσιεθε τὴν ὑμετέραν 
ἐπιμέλειαν καὶ οὐδεπώποτε ἐπὶ ταῖς εὐτυχίαις ὑπὲρ 
ἄνθρωπον A di αἰτοῦμαι δ᾽ ὑμᾶς δοῦναι καὶ 
νῦν παισὶ μὲν καὶ ee καὶ φίλοις Kat πατρίδι 
εὐδαιμονίαν, ἐμοὶ δέ, οἷόνπερ αἰῶνα δεδώκατε, τοιαύ- 
την καὶ τελευτὴν δοῦναι. 


Last Words of Cyrus the Great 


A Ν 
Παῖδες ἐμοὶ καὶ πάντες οἱ παρόντες φίλοι, ἐμοὶ 
A A , Ἂς Ζλ "ὃ Ud : > AA 
μὲν τοῦ βίου τὸ τέλος ἤδη πάρεστιν" ἐκ πολλῶν 
an “ “ ν 
τοῦτο σαφῶς γιγνώσκω" ὑμᾶς δὲ χρή, ὅταν Tehev- 
an \ a 
τήσω, ὡς περὶ εὐδαίμονος ἐμοῦ Kal λέγειν καὶ ποιεῖν 
πάντα. καὶ νῦν καταλείπω μὲν ὑμᾶς, ὦ παῖδες, 
ζῶντας, οὕσπερ ἔδοσάν μοι οἱ θεοὶ γενέσθαι, κατα- 
’ \ / Ν ’ὔ > ‘al ν 
λείπω δὲ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους εὐδαιμονοῦντας - ὥστε 
πῶς οὐκ ἂν ἐγὼ δικαίως μακαριζόμενος τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον 
, , “ Ν Ν ἈΝ ’ 
μνήμης τυγχάνοιμι; δεῖ δὲ καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν σαφη- 
νίσαντα καταλιπεῖν, ὡς ἂν μὴ ἀμφίλογος γενομένη 
πράγματα ὑμῖν παράσχῃ. 
\ \ S A 
Kat ov μέν, ὦ Καμβύση, τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχε, θεῶν 
τε διδόντων καὶ ἐμοῦ, ὅσον ἐν ἐμοί: σοὶ δέ, ὦ Tavao- 
’ὔ ’ὔ > , 
Eapn, σατράπην εἶναι δίδωμι Μήδων τε καὶ ᾿Αρμενίων 
Ν , “~ 
Kal τρίτων Καδουσίων" ταῦτα δέ σοι διδοὺς νομίζω 
5 ᾿ Ἂς ’ \ »» Lal , ou 
ἀρχὴν μὲν μείζω καὶ τοὔνομα τῆς βασιλείας TO 


Th 7 ᾿ς. 


uw 


I 


wn 


20 


25 





CYROPAEDIA OF XENOPHON 31 


πρεσβυτέρῳ καταλιπεῖν, εὐδαιμονίαν δὲ σοὶ ἀλυπο- 
τέραν. ὁποίας μὲν γὰρ ἀνθρωπίνης εὐφροσύνης 
5 Ἀ ¥ 5 ε »"» 5 A 2 A -“ 
ἐπιδεὴς ἔσει, οὐχ ὁρῶ, ἀλλὰ πάντα σοι τὰ δοκοῦντα 
ἀνθρώπους εὐφραίνειν παρέσται. οἶσθα μὲν οὖν καὶ 
, > 4 2 > , 4 a A - 
σύ, ὦ Καμβύση, ὅτι οὐ τόδε τὸ χρυσοῦν σκῆπτρον 
τὸ τὴν βασιλείαν διασῷζόν ἐστιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ πιστοὶ 
φίλοι σκῆπτρον βασιλεῦσιν ἀληθέστατον καὶ ἀσφα- 
λέστατον. οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ σπέρματος φύντες 
καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς μητρὸς τραφέντες καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ 
οἰκίᾳ αὐξηθέντες καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν γονέων ἀγαπώ- 
μενοι καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν μητέρα καὶ τὸν αὐτὸν πατέρα 
προσαγορεύοντες, πῶς οὐ πάντων οὗτοι οἰκειότατοί τε 
καὶ πιστότατοι; 
᾿Αλλὰ πρὸς θεῶν πατρῴων, ὦ παῖδες, τιμᾶτε ἀλλή- 
λους, εἴ τι καὶ ἐμοὶ χαρίζεσθαι μέλει ὑμῖν: οὐ γὰρ 
, A: ya a 50. 7 ε 592 > 
δήπου τοῦτό ye σαφῶς δοκεῖτε εἰδέναι, ws οὐδέν εἰμι 
5 Ν » 5 A »“ 5» ,ὔ vd , 
ἐγὼ ἔτι, ἐπειδὰν τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου βίου τελευτήσω" 
» A A nw y > 5 A A 4 »“» 5 3 
οὐδὲ γὰρ νῦν τοι τὴν Ὑ ἐμὴν ψυχὴν ἑωρᾶτε, ἀλλ 
οἷς διεπράττετο, τούτοις αὐτὴν ὡς οὖσαν κατεφωρᾶτε. 
οὔτοι ἔγωγε, ὦ παῖδες, οὐδὲ τοῦτο πώποτε ἐπείσθην, 
ε ε ,ὔὕ 9 \ » > “ , 5 A 9 
ὡς ἡ ψυχή, ἕως μὲν ἂν ἐν θνητῷ σώματι ἢ), ζῇ: ὅταν 
A 4 5 ww 4, ’ Ὧν 2 4 
δὲ τούτου ἀπαλλαγῇ; τέθνηκεν διαλνομένου δὲ ἀνθρώ- 
~ ’ὕ 5 4 > , + Ν ε , 
που δῆλά ἐστιν ἕκαστα ἀπιόντα πρὸς τὸ ὁμόφυλον 
πλὴν τῆς ψυχῆς, αὕτη δὲ μόνη οὔτε παροῦσα οὔτε 
> A ey en ᾽ , , 4 9 > ΄ 
ἀπιοῦσα ὁρᾶται. ἐννοήσατε δέ, ἔφη, ὅτι ἐγγύτερον 
A lal > 7, , ὑδέ 3 ν ε δὲ 
μὲν τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θανάτῳ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὕπνου" ἡ δὲ 
» > 4, A , 4 7 , 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ψυχὴ τότε δήπου θειοτάτη καταφαΐ- 
Ἀ ,’ lal » “ ’ , 
νεται καὶ τότε TL τῶν μελλόντων TPOOPa’ τότε yap, 
’ἅ lal 
ὡς ἔοικε, μάλιστα ἐλευθεροῦται. 


22 


10 


I 


2 


2 


wm 


ο 


uv 


ATTIC PROSE 


9 ΓΟ τ" > 9 » an 9 δι» τῇ, » 

Εἰ μὲν οὖν οὕτως ἔχει ταῦτα, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ οἴομαι, 
es Ἀ / Ἂς “A Ν Ν ᾿ς ΓΝ Ν 
καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καταλείπει τὸ σῶμα, καὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχὴν 

“A a , > \ Ν Y 
καταιδούμενοι ποιεῖτε ἃ ἐγὼ δέομαι" εἰ δὲ μὴ οὕτως, 
lal Ἄ 
ἀλλὰ μένουσα ἡ ψυχὴ ἐν τῷ σώματι συναποθνήσκει, 
, Φι ἜΣ “A 
ἀλλὰ θεούς ye τοὺς ἀεὶ ὄντας καὶ πάντ᾽ ἐφορῶντας 
Ν , Ν “ - 
καὶ πάντα δυναμένους, ot καὶ τήνδε τὴν τῶν ὅλων 
a= Ν 5 ’ Ἀν ΗΝ , 
τάξιν συνέχουσιν ἀτριβῆ Kal ἀγήρατον καὶ ἀναμάρ- 
ΡΝ. XN ’ Ν 6 LO ᾽ὔ Ye 
τητον καὶ ὑπὸ κάλλους Kal μεγέθους ἀδιήγητον, TOU- 
Ξ Ν ἌΝ ’, 
τους φοβούμενοι μήποτ᾽ ἀσεβὲς μηδὲν μηδὲ ἀνόσιον 
μήτε ποιήσητε μήτε βουλεύσητε. 
ΝΥ Fi , δ Φ ’ Ν “A 7 Ν 
Μετὰ μέντοι θεούς, καὶ ἀνθρώπων τὸ πᾶν γένος τὸ 
ax Ἃς > / > a > \ > , ε ~ 
del ἐπιγιγνόμενον αἰδεῖσθε. οὐ yap ἐν σκότῳ ὑμᾶς 
ε \ > , 9 3 > “ “Ὁ > 4 
οἱ θεοὶ ἀποκρύπτονται, ἀλλ᾽ ἐμφανῆ πᾶσιν ἀνάγκη 
os A Nee 4 » a ἃ Ν θ Ν τς 
ἀεὶ ζῆν τὰ ὑμέτερα ἔργα: ἃ ἣν μὲν καθαρὰ καὶ ἔξω 
τῶν ἀδίκων φαίνηται, δυνατοὺς ὑμᾶς ἐν πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ- 
ποις ἀναδείξει" εἰ δὲ εἰς ἀλλήλους ἄδικόν τι φρονήσετε, 
9 , 9 ΄ 1 , > > a 
ἐκ πάντων ἀνθρώπων τὸ ἀξιόπιστοι εἶναι ἀποβαλεῖτε. 
1) ἊΝ Ν » Ψ A ὃ , £726 ὑδ᾽ 3 
οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἂν ἔτι πιστεῦσαι δύναιτο ὑμῖν, οὐδ᾽ εἰ 
, aA > Ν 5 , Ν ’ 
πάνυ προθυμοῖτο, ἰδὼν ἀδικούμενον τὸν μάλιστα 
’ ’ 
φιλίᾳ προσήκοντα. 
> \ ie 3. ΤῊΝ cA e A , 4 ‘ 
Eu μὲν οὖν έγω υμᾶς LKAVWS διδάσκω οἵους Χρη 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους εἶναι, ---- εἰ δὲ μή ὶ ὰ τῷ 
ρ λήλους εἶναι, --- εἰ δὲ μή, Kal παρὰ τῶν 
’ 
προγεγενημένων μανθάνετε: αὕτη γὰρ ἀρίστὴ διδα- 
΄ Ὁ ον κ 
σκαλία. οἱ μὲν γὰρ πολλοὶ διαγεγένηνται φίλοι μὲν 
lal P “~ 
γονεῖς παισί, φίλοι δὲ ἀδελφοὶ ἀδελφοῖς - ἤδη δέ 
τινες τούτων καὶ ἐναντία ἀλλήλοις ἔπραξαν. ὅποτέ: 
x > > , 
pois av οὖν αἰσθάνησθε τὰ πραχθέντα συνενεγκόντα, 
“A Ν ε “ 
ταῦτα δὴ αἱρούμενοι ὀρθῶς ἂν βουλεύοισθε. 
Ν , a ὦ 
Καὶ τούτων μὲν tows ἤδη ἅλις. τὸ δ᾽ ἐμὸν σῶμα, 


—< -ν--. 


wm 


10 


15 


20 


25 


ANABASIS OF XENOPHON 33 


> to 9 y 4 > A“ Lal 2 
ὦ παῖδες, ὅταν τελευτήσω, μήτε Ev χρυσῷ θῆτε μήτε 
9-0 19 ve Δ 3 LAX ὃ ’ὔ ἰλλὰ “A A ε 
ἐν ἀργύρῳ μήτε ἐν ἄλλῳ μηδενί, ἀλλὰ τῇ γῇ ὡς 
> + , \ = 
τάχιστα ἀπόδοτε. τί γὰρ τούτου μακαριώτερον, τοῦ 
“A An a 9 Ν Ν λὰ »}» δὲ 3 θὰ 
γῇ μιχθῆναι, ἣ πάντα μὲν τὰ καλὰ πάντα δὲ τἀγαθὰ 
φύει τε καὶ τρέφει; ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ ἄλλως φιλάνθρωπος 
ἐγενόμην, καὶ νῦν ἡδέως av μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι τοῦ 
εὐεργετοῦντος ἀνθρώπους. 
ΕΝ 
᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ ἤδη, ἔφη, ἐκλείπειν μοι φαίνεται ἡ 
ψυχή; ὅθενπερ, ὡς ἔοικε, πᾶσιν ἄρχεται ἀπολείπουσα. 
3" “ “ἡ lal “A A Y 
εἴ Tis οὖν ὑμῶν ἢ δεξιᾶς βούλεται τῆς ἐμῆς ἅψασθαι, 
ἂν. 7 > Ν “A » ὃ a) > / ν᾿ 
ἢ ὄμμα τοὐμὸν ζῶντος ἔτι προσιδεῖν ἐθέλει, προσίτω" 
9 πν | > , > A CN > ω 
ὅταν δ᾽ ἐγὼ ἐγκαλύψωμαι, αἰτοῦμαι ὑμᾶς, ὦ παῖδες, 
ὃ Ν ψ. ae θ , seh. ca ἰδέ Ss 3 Ν 
μηδεὶς er ἀνθρώπων τοὐμὸν σῶμα ἰδέτω, μηδ᾽ αὐτοὶ 
ὑμεῖς. Πέρσας μέντοι πάντας καὶ τοὺς συμμάχους 
ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα τοὐμὸν παρακαλεῖτε συνησθησομένους 
3 ne > an 9 nn» » ε ΚΣ » 
ἐμοί, ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ ἤδη ἔσομαι, ὡς μηδὲν ἂν ἔτι 
κακὸν παθεῖν, μήτε ἣν μετὰ τοῦ θείου γένωμαι μήτε 
a \ » > ε ΄ > ἃ Ψ , Ἂν 
ἣν μηδὲν ἔτι ὦ: ὁπόσοι δ᾽ ἂν ἔλθωσι, τούτους εὖ 
la ε ’ὔ be 3 Ν 3 ᾿ς ’ 
ποιήσαντες ὁπόσα ἐπ᾽ ἀνδρὶ εὐδαίμονι νομίζεται, 
ἀποπέμπετε. καὶ τοῦτο, ἔφη, μέμνησθέ μου τελευ- 
aA Ν. ir > na Ν Ν 5 θ X\ 
Tatov, τοὺς φίλους εὐεργετοῦντες καὶ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς 
δυνήσεσθε κολάζειν. καὶ χαίρετε, ὦ φίλοι παῖδες, 
καὶ τῇ μητρὶ ἀπαγγέλλετε ὡς παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ καὶ πάντες 
δὲ ε , ἥν o> ’ὔ ’ὕ vd 
€ OL παρόντες καὶ οἱ ἀπόντες φίλοι χαίρετε. 
Ταῦτ᾽ εἰπὼν καὶ πάντας δεξιωσάμενος ἐνεκαλύψατο 
A ν 
καὶ οὕτως ἐτελεύτησεν. 


The Death of Cyrus the Younger 


Kai ἤδη τε ἦν ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν Kat 


ATTIC PROSE --- 3 


24 ATTIC PROSE 


un 


- 
wm 


20 


25 


4, | ee 
πλησίον ἣν ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, ἡνίκα 
A 3 Ν a la 
Πατηγύας, ἀνὴρ Πέρσης, τῶν ἀμφὶ Κῦρον πιστῶν, 
ε ΩΣ ny 
προφαίνεται ἐλαύνων ἀνὰ κράτος ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ" 
Ν 3 Ν ~ e > 4 > ’ὔ Ν 
καὶ εὐθὺς πᾶσιν οἷς ἐνετύγχανεν ἐβόα καὶ BapBapr 
“ ν ε A 9 Ν ιἶ , 
κῶς Kal Ἑλληνικῶς, ὅτι βασιλεὺς σὺν στρατεύματι 
πολλῷ προσέρχεται WS εἰς μάχην παρεσκευασμένος. 
» Ν \ ΄, 5 τι εν ee ‘ 286 
ἔνθα δὴ πολὺς τάραχος ἐγένετο' αὐτίκα yap ἐδόκουν 
eg Ἂς ΄ 4 > , , > 
ot Ἕλληνες, καὶ πάντες δέ, ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπιπε- 
σεῖσθαι" Κῦρός τε καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος 
Ν vA > “ὃ ἈΝ Ν We." A 9 Ν Ἂς 
τὸν θώρακα ἐνέδυ καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ παλτὰ 
> ‘ A » a δ A , 
εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε, τοῖς TE ἄλλοις πᾶσι παρήγγελ- 
3 / Ν ᾿ς > % ε la 
hev ἐξοπλίζεσθαι καὶ καθίστασθαι εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
τάξιν ἕκαστον. ἔνθα δὴ σὺν πολλῇ σπουδῇ Kabi- 
,ὕ Ἀ N \ A , ¥ 
σταντο, Κλέαρχος μὲν τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος ἔχων 
Ν “ 5 »)} “A / \ τῷ / ε 
πρὸς τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ, Πρόξενος δὲ ἐχόμενος, οἱ 
> ¥ δ A 7 s SA δ τας , \ 
ἄλλοι μετὰ τοῦτον᾽ Μένων δὲ καὶ τὸ στράτευμα TO 
ta’ 4 4 » ae na nw 4 
εὐώνυμον κέρας ἔσχε τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ. τοῦ δὲ Bap- 
lal e A“ Ν , > ’ Ν 
βαρικοῦ ἱππεῖς μὲν Παφλαγόνες εἰς χιλίους παρὰ 
3 » > A “ \ Se Ν 
Κλέαρχον ἔστησαν ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ καὶ τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν 
’ὔ ἴω nw 
πελταστικόν, ἐν δὲ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ ᾿Αριαῖός τε 6 Κύρον 
9 SN ie , 
ὕπαρχος καὶ τὸ ἄλλο βαρβαρικόν. 
\ » > 
Kat ἤδη τε ἦν μέσον ἡμέρας καὶ οὔπω καταφανεῖς 
Sh ε 
ἦσαν οἱ πολέμιοι" ἡνίκα δὲ δείλη ἐγίγνετο, ἐφάγη 
κονιορτὸς ὥσπερ νεφέλη λευκή ὄνῳ δὲ D 
ΤΠ ΠΟΡΤΟΣ: ρ n KH, χρόνῳ δὲ συχνῷ 
’, ΄-“. 
ὕστερον ὥσπερ μελανία τις ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ ἐπὶ πολύ. 
ὅτε δὲ ἐγγύ ἐγί ἵνα δὴ καὶ 5 
€ ἐγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, τάχα δὴ καὶ χαλκός τις 
Ἂ Ν 
στραπτε καὶ at λόγχαι καὶ αἱ τάξεις καταφανεῖς 
aS » \ lal 
ἐγίγνοντο. καὶ Κῦρος παρελαύνων αὐτὸς σὺν Πίγρητι 
oa ὃ lal { » A Δ δὲ 
τῷ ἐρμῆήνει καὶ ἄλλοις τρισὶν ἢ τέτταρσι, τῷ Κλεάρχῳ 


ANABASIS ΟΕ XENOPHON 35 


3 , 3, Ν , A id Ν a 
ἐβόα ἄγειν τὸ στράτευμα κατὰ μέσον τὸ τῶν πολε- 
’ 9 3 a ςε Ν ς 7, x a> ὦ la) 
μίων, ὅτι ἐκεῖ 6 βασιλεὺς εἴη" κἂν τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη, νικῶ- 
μεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται. 
Κ Ἀν. 5 ἧς ΜᾺ “A Ν Ν β Ν ’, 
αἱ ἐν τούτῳ τῴ καιρῷ τὸ μὲν βαρβαρικὸν στρά- 
ε “ ’ὔ Ν Se ’ » > toe 
5 τευμα ὁμαλῶς προΐει, τὸ δὲ Ἑλληνικόν, ἔτι ἐν τῷ 
αὐτῷ μένον, συνετάττετο ἐκ τῶν ἔτι προσιόντων. καὶ 
ὁ Κῦρος παρελαύνων οὐ πάνυ πρὸς αὐτῷ τῷ στρατεύ- 
ματι κατεθεᾶτο, ἑκατέρωσε ἀποβλέπων εἴς τε τοὺς 
’ Ν ἥν ’ 3 Ν AY SAN > Ν A 
πολεμίους Kal τοὺς φίλους. ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
10 Ἑλληνικοῦ Ἐενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, ὑπελάσας ὡς συναν- 
τῆσαι, ἤρετο εἴ τι παραγγέλλοι᾽" ὃ δ᾽ ἐπιστήσας εἶπε 
Ν 4 b te 4 aA ν x Nine ᾿ς ἊΝ Ἂς, 
καὶ λέγειν ἐκέλευσε πᾶσιν, OTL καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καλὰ καὶ 
τὰ σφάγια καλά. ταῦτα δὲ λέγων θορύβου ἤκουσε 
Ν A ’ὔ 37 i Le ε ’ » 
διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος, καὶ ἤρετο τίς ὁ θόρυβος εἴη. 
ε \ /, > ν Ν , , 
150 δὲ Κλέαρχος εἶπεν ὅτι τὸ σύνθημα παρέρχεται 
4 ¥ Ν a 3 vd , VA 
δεύτερον ἤδη. καὶ ὃς ἐθαύμασε Tis παραγγέλλει, 
‘ ¥ 9 » Ν , a bho , 9 
καὶ ἤρετο ὅ TL εἴη TO σύνθημα. ὃ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι 
Ζεὺς Σωτὴρ καὶ Νίκη. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἀκούσας, ᾿Αλλὰ 
4 7 ¥ Ν lal » lal > > Ν 3 
δέχομαί τε, ἔφη; καὶ τοῦτο ἔστω. ταῦτα δ᾽ εἰπὼν εἰς 
20 τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χώραν ἀπήλαυνε. 
\ > ἔν ’ “ἡ 4 / , + 
Καὶ οὐκέτι τρία ἢ τέτταρα στάδια διειχέτην τὼ 
φάλαγγε ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων, ἡνίκα ἐπαιάνιζόν τε οἱ “ENAy- 
νες καὶ προήρχοντο ἀντίοι ἰέναι τοῖς πολεμίοις. ὡς 
δὲ πορευομένων ἐξεκύμαινέ τι τῆς φάλαγγος, τὸ ὑπο- 
, ¥ , an Ὁ .ν 9 , 

25 λειπόμενον ἤρξατο δρόμῳ θεῖν" καὶ ἅμα ἐφθέγξαντο 
’ ana σῆς. 9 ’, 5 , ΄- , 
πάντες οἵόνπερ TH Ενυαλίῳ ἐλελίζουσι, καὶ πάντες 
ᾧ » , , ε . a. Ὁ , N 
δὲ ἔθεον. λέγουσι δέ τινες ws Kal Tats ἀσπίσι πρὸς 

Ν , 25 ͵ , nA A 9 
τὰ δόρατα ἐδούπησαν, φόβον ποιοῦντες τοῖς ἵπποις. 
πρὶν δὲ τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι, ἐκκλίνουσιν οἱ βάρβαροι 


26 


ui 


μι 
ο 


Ι 


ωι 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


a \ 297 \ Ν 
καὶ φεύγουσι. καὶ ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἐδίωκον μὲν κατὰ 
53 7 ‘ ~ ’ 
κράτος οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐβόων δὲ ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν δρόμῳ, 
3 A Ν 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἕπεσθαι. τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα τὰ δρεπανη- 
΄, TW ΚΑ Ν \ 5 3 ΓΞ = Ὰ , \ 
φόρα ἐφέροντο τὰ μὲν Ou αὐτῶν τῶν πολεμίων, τὰ 
a : 4 Ὧν cas 
δὲ καὶ διὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων κενὰ ἡνιόχων. ot δ᾽ ἐπεὶ 
> ν ἈΝ ’ 
προΐδοιεν, διίσταντο: ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις καὶ κατελήφθη 
ν. 3 ε ὃ , 2 λ sees A ὑδὲ Ld 
ὥσπερ ἐν ἱπποδρόμῳ ἐκπλαγείς: καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι 
na “ »” A lal ε 4 
οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν ἔφασαν, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος δὲ τῶν ᾿Ελλή- 
> , a , ΕΣ θ i) ‘ i) 4 λὴ Φ' 
νων ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ μάχῃ ἔπαθεν οὐδεὶς οὐδέν, πλὴν ἐπὶ 
~ 3 ’ “a / > id 
τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοζευθῆναί τις ἐλέγετο. : 
an “ Ν 9 “Ὁ 
Κῦρος δ᾽ ὁρῶν τοὺς Ἕλληνας νικῶντας τὸ καθ 
αὑτοὺς καὶ διώκοντας, ἡδόμενος καὶ προσκυνούμενος 
al 2 ἃ ld 
ἤδη ὡς βασιλεὺς ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφ᾽ αὐτόν, οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐξήχθη 
“ Ν 
διώκειν, ἀλλὰ συνεσπειραμένην ἔχων τὴν τῶν σὺν 
a “A ν 
ἑαυτῷ ἑξακοσίων ἱππέων τάξιν, ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅ τι ποι- 
/ 4 ‘\ \ ἡ ὃ 3 Ν 9 , » 
ἥσει βασιλεύς. καὶ yap ὕδει αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι 
τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος. καὶ πάντες δ᾽ οἱ τῶν 
βαρβάρων ἄρχοντες μέσον ἔχοντες τὸ αὑτῶν ἡγοῦν- 
ο xX 
Tal, νομίζοντες οὕτω Kal ἐν ἀσφαλεστάτῳ εἶναι, ἣν 
(¢ aes, See Ν 7 A € , et ὁ »" 
ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ τι παραγγεῖλαι 
, 
χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ στρά- 
ἣν, 
τευμα. καὶ βασιλεὺς δὴ τότε μέσον ἔχων τῆς αὑτοῦ 
an 9 A 
στρατιᾶς, ὅμως ἔξω ἐγένετο τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύμου 
4 > μ᾿ nw 
κέρατος. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο ἐκ TOD ἀντίον 
> Ν a > “ Ἷ 
οὐδὲ τοῖς αὐτοῦ τεταγμένοις ἔμπροσθεν, ἐπέκαμπτεν 
ε > 
ὡς εἰς κύκλωσιν. 
ν Ν nw , 
Ενθα δὴ Κῦρος, δείσας μὴ ὄπισθεν γενόμενος 
’ a, ἫΝ 
κατακόψῃ τὸ Ἑλληνικόν, ἐλαύνει ἀντίος " καὶ ἐμβαλὼν 


Ν a e , na 
σὺν τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις νικᾷ τοὺς πρὸ βασιλέως τεταγ- 


ωι 


Io 


Ur 


20 


25 


OECONOMICUS OF XENOPHON 37 


eee Ἂ τον ἊΝ 
μένους καὶ εἰς φυγὴν ἔτρεψε τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους, καὶ 
ἀποκτεῖναι λέγεται αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρὶ ᾿Αρταγέρ- 
» nw 
σην τὸν ἄρχοντα αὐτῶν. ws δ᾽ ἡ τροπὴ ἐγίνετο, δια- 
’ ‘\ ε ve ε , > ᾿ς , 
σπείρονται Kal ot Κύρου ἑξακόσιοι, εἰς τὸ διώκειν 
ε ’ ὃ x v4 Ἂν ’ 5 5 > Ἂς 4 
ὁρμήσαντες" πλὴν πάνυ ὀλίγοι ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν κατελεί- 
φθησαν, σχεδὸν οἱ ὁμοτράπεζοι καλούμενοι. σὺν 
, ΝΥΝ > / \ Ne as) 3. 7.5 A 
τούτοις δὲ ὧν καθορᾷ βασιλέα καὶ τὸ ἀμφ᾽ ἐκεῖνον 
tal Ν 5 Ν 3 ΘΑ τ 3 3 > v4 Ν 
στῖφος: καὶ εὐθὺς οὐκ ἠνέσχετο, ἀλλ᾽ εἰπών, Τὸν 
᾿», ε “Ὁ ν + Ee ιν ‘\ 7 Ν ἃς , 
ἄνδρα ὁρῶ, ἵετο ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ παίει κατὰ τὸ στέρνον 
Ν ’ Ν A , 9 , ε 
καὶ τιτρώσκει διὰ τοῦ θώρακος, ὥς φησι Κτησίας ὁ 
ἰατρός, καὶ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι. παίοντα 
> Ti ἂν > , “” ε Ἂν Ν 5 Ν, 
δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀκοντίζει τις παλτῷ ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν 
’ Ν > “ ’ ἣν ἣν ‘\ 
βιαίως: Kai ἐνταῦθα μαχόμενοι καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ 
Κῦρος, καὶ οἱ ἀμφ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ ἑκατέρου, ὁπόσοι 
μὲν τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἀπέθνῃσκον Κτησίας λέγει" 
ie , ‘ 9 εἰ Ko δὲ 5 , > ‘Q Ν 
Tap ἐκείνῳ γὰρ ἦν: Κῦρος δὲ αὐτός τε ἀπέθανε καὶ 
ὀκτὼ οἱ ἄριστοι τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἔκειντο ET αὐτῷ. 


Traits of the younger Cyrus 


Φασὶ δέ τινες, ὅταν δῶρα διδῷ ὁ βασιλεύς, πρῶτον 
μὲν εἰσκαλεῖν τοὺς πολέμῳ ἀγαθοὺς γεγονότας, ὅτι 
950 5 » eer an > ΝΗῚ Ae ions ay 
οὐδὲν ὄφελος πολλὰ ἀροῦν, εἰ μὴ εἶεν οἱ ἀρήξοντες 
g " 
δεύτερον δὲ τοὺς κατασκευάζοντας τὰς χώρας ἄριστα 
»-: Ν A , 9 ὑδ᾽ ΕΝ ΩΝ» 
καὶ ἐνεργοὺς ποιοῦντας, λέγοντα ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἱ ἄλκιμοι 
, A 3 ἂς - #4 es ΄ ΄ \ 
δύναιντο ζῆν, εἰ μὴ εἶεν οἱ ἐργαζόμενοι. λέγεται δὲ 
‘ A ν ὐὸ , δὴ Ν Ἂς 
καὶ Κῦρός ποτε, ὅσπερ εὐδοκιμώτατος δὴ βασιλεὺς 
γεγένηται, εἰπεῖν Τοῖς ἐπὶ τὰ δῶρα κεκλημένοις, ὅτι 
ΘΝ ad ’ Ni > , A , 
αὐτὸς ἂν δικαίως τὰ ἀμφοτέρων δῶρα λαμβάνοι" 
> Ν 
κατασκευάζειν τε γὰρ ἄριστος εἶναι ἔφη χώραν καὶ 


28 


2 


wn 


wn 


wn 


ATTIC PROSE 


’, 5 £ ᾿ς 
ἀρήγειν τοῖς κατεσκευασμένοις. ἐπηγάλλετο τοίνυν 
a “ Ν “ x 
οὐδὲν ἧττον ἐπὶ τῷ χώρας ἐνεργοὺς ποιειν καὶ κατα- 

a Ν δ 
σκευάζειν ἢ ἐπὶ τῷ πολεμικὸς εἰναι. 
a 3, ΕΝ ἊΨ 
Καὶ Κῦρός γε, εἰ ἐβίωσεν, ἀριστος ἂν δοκεῖ ἄρχων 
Ψ Ἀ , 
γενέσθαι, καὶ τούτου τεκμήρια ἄλλα τε πολλὰ παρέ 
A , nw 3 a 
σχηται, καὶ ὁπότε περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τῷ ἀδελφῷ 
Ν ’ > ‘ , 
ἐπορεύετο μαχούμενος, παρὰ μὲν Κύρου οὐδεὶς λέγε- 
al ‘ Ν , 
ται αὐτομολῆσαι πρὸς βασιλέα, παρὰ δὲ βασιλέως 
Ν ’, ἊΝ Land > ‘ δὲ Ἀ lal ε lal 
πολλαὶ μυριάδες πρὸς Κῦρον. ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ἡγοῦ- 
3 al > Le) 
μαι μέγα τεκμήριον ἄρχοντος ἀρετῆς εἶναι, ᾧ ἂν 
“ lal 52 2 
ἑκόντες πείθωνται καὶ ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς παραμένειν ἐθέ- 
3 4 Ἂν ε 4 Ὁ“ ra ’ 
λωσιν. ἐκείνῳ δὲ ot φίλοι ζῶντί τε συνέμάχοντο 
’ὔ ἣς 
καὶ ἀποθανόντι συναπέθανον, πάντες περὶ τὸν νεκρὸν 
, Ν > 4 > A δ᾽ ¥ > NN “~ 
μαχόμενοι πλὴν Αριαίου: ᾿Αριαιος ὃ ἐτυχεν ἐπὶ TH 
εὐωνύμῳ κέρατι τεταγμένος. 
Οὗτος τοίνυν ὁ Κῦρος λέγεται Λυσάνδρῳ, ὅτε ἦλθεν 
ἄγων αὐτῷ τὰ παρὰ τῶν συμμάχων δῶρα, ἄλλα τε 
al ε JN » ε ’ 4 , 
φιλοφρονεῖσθαι, as αὐτὸς ἔφη ὁ Λύσανδρος ξένῳ ποτέ 
3 , ὃ , Ν A > 4 ὃ 
τινι ἐν Μεγάροις διηγούμενος, καὶ τὸν ἐν Σάρδεσι 
, 3 TREN ¥ 3 Ν ἌΣ , 
παράδεισον ἐπιδεικνύναι αὐτὸν ἔφη. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐθαύ- 
3. ἘῸΝ, ε , ὃ ε Ν \ Ν δέ ὃ 
μαΐεν αὐτὸν ὁ Λύσανδρος, ὡς καλὰ μὲν τὰ δένδρα 
» ὃ 9 ἊΨ δὲ Ν , 5 θ Ν δὲ rf , 
εἴη; Ov ἴσου δὲ τὰ πεφυτευμένα, ὀρθοὶ δὲ οἱ στίχοι 
τῶν δένδρων, εὐγώνια δὲ πάντα καλῶς εἴη, ὀσμαὶ δὲ 
πολλαὶ καὶ ἡδεῖαι συμπαρομαρτοῖεν. αὐτοῖς περιπα- 
τοῦσι, καὶ ταῦτα θαυμάζων εἶπεν, "ANN ἐγώ τοι, ὦ 
Κῦρε, πάντα μὲν ταῦτα θαυμάζω ἐπὶ τῷ κάλλει, πολὺ 
\ A 3, A 
δὲ μᾶλλον ἄγαμαι τοῦ καταμετρήσαντός σοι καὶ 
διατάξαντος ἕκαστα τούτων. ἀκούσαντα δὲ ταῦτα 
‘ Ko e én , Q > aA A , ba 
τὸν Κῦρον ἡσθῆναί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν, Ταῦτα τοίνυν, ὦ 


wn 


Io 


15 


20 


25 


OECONOMICUS OF XENOPHON 39 


he ὃ SN , \ ὃ om \ ὃ , ἕ 
ὕσανδρε, ἐγὼ πάντα καὶ διεμέτρησα καὶ διέταξα, 
» Ὁ» > n~ , A Xu , > , 

ἔστι δ᾽ αὐτῶν, φάναι, ἃ καὶ ἐφύτευσα αὐτός. 

Καὶ ὁ Λύσανδρος ἔφη, ἀποβλέψας εἰς αὐτὸν καὶ 
> A nw ε ᾽ὔ Ν , - > XA An ΕῚ lal 
ἰδὼν τῶν τε ἱματίων τὸ κάλλος ὧν εἶχε Kal τῆς ὀσμῆς 
αἰσθόμενος καὶ τῶν στρεπτῶν καὶ τῶν ψελίων τὸ 

, \ “Ἄν ΄ ᾿ς κ᾿ > κα ΄ 
κάλλος καὶ τοῦ ἄλλου κόσμου οὗ εἶχεν, εἰπεῖν, Τί 
λέγεις, φάναι, ὦ Κῦρε; ἢ γὰρ σὺ ταῖς σαῖς χερσὶ 
τούτων τι ἐφύτευσας ; καὶ τὸν Κῦρον ἀποκρίνασθαι, 
Θαυμάζεις τοῦτο, ἔφη, ὦ Λύσανδρε; ὄμνυμί σοι τὸν 
Μίθρην, ὅτανπερ ὑγιαίνω, μηπώποτε δειπνῆσαι πρὶν 
ἱδρῶσαι, ἢ τῶν πολεμικῶν τι ἢ τῶν γεωργικῶν ἔργων 

A Δ 
μελετῶν, ἢ τοιούτων γέ τι φιλοτιμούμενος. 
Ν - τῆς , » ε 4 3 , ~ 

Kat αὐτὸς μέντοι ἔφη ὁ Λύσανδρος ἀκούσας ταῦτα 

’ , r ee. ἈΝ 3 Ὁ , A 
δεξιώσασθαί τε αὐτὸν καὶ εἰπεῖν, Δικαίως μοι δοκεῖς, 


ἔφη, ὦ Κῦρε, εὐδαίμων εἶναι" ἀγαθὸς γὰρ ὧν ἀνὴρ 
εὐδαιμονεῖς. 


Καλοκἀγαθία 
» ᾿ἶἥΝὄἪ ¥ 3¢ 5 A 5 , ε , 

Τί οὖν, Hv σοι ἐξ ἀρχῆς διηγήσωμαι, ὡς συνεγενό- 
μὴν ποτὲ ἀνδρὶ ὃς ἐμοὶ ἐδόκει εἶναι τῷ ὄντι τούτων 
an ΕῚ -" oe We e nw Ν » 7 3 Ἂς ἃ 
τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐφ᾽ οἷς τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα δικαίως ἐστὶν ὃ 

“ , > Ν > , 

καλεῖται καλός Te κἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ; 

Λέξω τοίνυν ὡς καὶ ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὴν σκέψιν αὐτοῦ. 

‘ \ \ > ‘ 4 , > , 
τοὺς μὲν yap ἀγαθοὺς τέκτονας, χαλκέας ἀγαθούς, 

’ 3 , 3 , Ν Ν ἊΨ 

ζωγράφους ἀγαθούς, ἀνδριαντοποιούς, καὶ τὰ ἄλλα 
τὰ τοιαῦτα, πάνυ ὀλίγος μοι χρόνος ἐγένετο ἱκανὸς 
ε “A “ Ἁ ’ὔ Ν 
ἱκανῶς περιελθεῖν τε καὶ θεάσασθαι τὰ δεδοκιμασ- 

4 Ν dl > aA > 9 \ ~ Ν Ἁ 
μένα καλὰ ἔργα αὐτοῖς εἶναι. ὅπως δὲ δὴ καὶ τοὺς 
ἔχοντας τὸ σεμνὸν ὄνομα τοῦτο, τὸ καλός τε κἀγαθός, 
> ’ ’ > 3 ’ n> > Lad 
ἐπισκεψαίμην, τί ποτ᾽ ἐργαζόμενοι τοῦτ᾽ ἀξιοῖντο 


40 ATTIC PROSE 


καλεῖσθαι, πάνυ pov ἡ ψυχὴ ἐπεθύμει αὐτῶν τινι 
συγγενέσθαι. 

Καὶ πρῶτον μέν, ὅτι προσέκειτο τὸ καλὸς τῷ 
ἀγαθῷ, ὅντινα ἴδοιμι καλόν, τούτῳ προσήειν καὶ 


σι 


¥ ΕΣ 
ἐπειρώμην καταμανθάνειν, εἴ που ἴδοιμι προσηρτη- 
nw “ > 3, > ν 
μένον τῷ καλῷ τὸ ἀγαθόν. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἄρα εἶχεν οὕτως, 
9 δι 75:2 25 , θ ΄ ms ho \ 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐνίους ἐδόκουν καταμανθάνειν τῶν καλῶν τὰς 
» \ ΄ » 
μορφὰς πάνυ μοχθηροὺς ὄντας τὰς ψυχάς. ἔδοξεν 
ΡῈ A an > a 
οὖν μοι, ἀφέμενον τῆς καλῆς ὄψεως ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν τινα 
“ an “ “ Ν > 
10 ἐλθεῖν τῶν καλουμένων καλῶν τε κἀγαθῶν. ἐπεὶ οὖν 
\ “A Ν 
τὸν Ἰσχόμαχον ἤκουον πρὸς πάντων καὶ ἀνδρῶν καὶ 
γυναικῶν καὶ ξένων καὶ ἀστῶν καλόν τε κἀγαθὸν 
Aw 
ἐπονομαζόμενον, ἔδοξέ μοι τούτῳ πειραθῆναι συγ- 
'γενέσθαι. 
> A “ lal , 
15 Ἰδὼν οὖν ποτε αὐτὸν ἐν TH τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ ᾽᾿Ελευθερίου 
στοᾷ καθήμενον, ἐπεί μοι ἔδοξε σχολάζειν, προσῆλθον 
t Hp ? μ x Ry i 
a Ν , ey ΄ / 
αὐτῷ καὶ παρακαθιζόμενος εἶπον, Ti, ὦ Ἰσχόμαχε, 
35 ’ὔ 3 ν 4 tO > Ν ’ 
οὐ μάλα εἰωθὼς σχολάζειν, κάθησαι; ἐπεὶ τά γε 
πλεῖστα ἢ πράττοντά τι ὁρῶ σε ἢ οὐ πάνυ σχολά- 
9 Pang A sQN »¥ a ΕἾ εν , 
20 Covra ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ. Οὐδὲ av ye viv, ἔφη ὁ Ἰσχόμαχος, 
> Ν ἊΨ» Ἂς , > 4 3 ’ 9 
εἰ μὴ ξένους Twas συνεθέμην ἀναμένειν ἐνθάδε. Ὅταν 
δὲ μὴ πράττῃς τι τοιοῦτον, πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ἔφην ἐγώ, 
ποῦ διατρίβεις καὶ τί ποιεῖς ; ἐγὼ γάρ τοι πάνυ 
4 ’ , 4 , ’ 
βούλομαί σου πυθέσθαι, τί ποτε πράττων καλός τε 
3 θὲ ΖΝ 3 \ > ¥ ΄ὔ ὑδὲ 
25 Καγαθὸς κέκλησαι, ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἔνδον γε διατρίβεις, οὐδὲ 
τοιαύτη σου ἡ ἕξις τοῦ σώματος καταφαίνεται. 
Nee 4 “ lal 
Kat ὁ ᾿Ισχόμαχος, γελάσας ἐπὶ τῷ Τί ποιῶν καλὸς 
5 
κἀγαθὸς κέκλησαι, καὶ ἡσθείς, ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ ἔδοξεν, 
> 3 3 3 ψ na 
εἶπεν, AAN εἰ μέν, ὅταν σοι διαλέγωνται περὶ ἐμοῦ 


OECONOMICUS OF XENOPHON 41 


la , “ ΟΝ. 3 ὅθι 3 \ 
τινες, καλοῦσί με τοῦτο TO ὄνομα, οὐκ οἶδα. οὐ yap 
δή, ὅταν γέ με εἰς ἀντίδοσιν καλῶνται τριηραρχίας 
ἂ , 3 ΄ ¥ Ans , > 
ἢ χορηγίας, οὐδείς, ἔφη, ζητεῖ τὸν καλόν τε κἀγα- 
, > \ a » 3 , Ἄν 3 , 
θόν, ἀλλὰ σαφῶς, ἔφη, ὀνομάζοντές" με ᾿Ισχόμαχον 
5 πατρόθεν προσκαλοῦνται. ἐγὼ μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη, ὦ 
’ ν > ? 3 A »” , 
Σώκρατες, ὅ με ἐπήρου, οὐδαμῶς ἔνδον διατρίβω. 
% Ν ὃ ’ » ’ > ~ > 4 Z x 
καὶ yap δή, ἔφη, τά.γε ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ pov πάνυ καὶ 
αὐτὴ ἡ γυνή ἐστιν ἱκανὴ διοικεῖν. 


Ischomachus’ Instructions to his Wife 


᾿Αλλὰ Kal τοῦτο, ἔφην, ἔγωγε, ὦ ᾿Ισχόμαχε, πάνυ 
10 ἂν ἡδέως σου πυθοίμην, πότερα αὐτὸς σὺ ἐπαιδευσας 
τὴν γυναῖκα, ὥστε εἶναι οἵαν δεῖ, ἢ ἐπισταμένην ἔλαβες 
παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τῆς μητρὸς διοικεῖν τὰ προσή- 
3 an | 4m »” > 4 = 7 
κοντα αὐτῇ. Καὶ τί av, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἐπισταμένην 
ρου ἣν , ἃὰν Ν ¥ (ὃ 
αὐτὴν παρέλαβον, ἣ ἔτη μὲν οὕπω πεντεκαίδεκα γεγο- 
~ 4 N Creag ea >» , » Cu IN 
15 νυῖα ἦλθε πρὸς ἐμέ, τὸν δ᾽ ἔμπροσθεν χρόνον ἔζη ὑπὸ 
“ 5 ’ 9 ε 5 ’ὔ wv ” > , 
πολλῆς ἐπιμελείας ὅπως ws ἐλάχιστα μὲν ὀὄψοιτο, ἐλα- 
> 9 ΄ ἄν Ee 4. α ΄, 3 DS > 
χιστα δ᾽ ἀκούσοιτο, ἐλάχιστα δ᾽ ἐροίη; od yap ἀγαπη- 
, ie > , > > ΄ » 
τόν σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, εἰ μόνον ἦλθεν ἐπισταμένη ἔρια 
“ ε A lal 
παραλαβοῦσα ἱμάτιον ἀποδεῖξαι, Kal ἑωρακυῖα ὡς 
20 ἔργα ταλάσια θεραπαίναις δίδοται ; Τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα, ἔφην 
ἐγώ, ὦ ᾿Ισχόμαχε, αὐτὸς ἐπαίδευσας τὴν γυναῖκα, 
ν ε Ν > 1 , > eS > 
ὥστε ἱκανὴν εἶναι ὧν προσήκει ἐπιμελεῖσθαι; Οὐ 
\ >» £5 , 3 ΄, \ » Ν 
μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ ᾿Ισχόὅμαχος, οὐ πρίν γε καὶ ἔθυσα καὶ 
εὐξάμην ἐμέ τε τυγχάνειν διδάσκοντα καὶ ἐκείνην 
’ Ν ’ > ’, ε ia) Ν 
25 μανθάνουσαν τὰ βέλτιστα ἀμφοτέροις ἡμῖν. Πρὸς 
κα ΕἾ ποτ νκα Ὧν, 3 , ͵΄ A ΄ 
θεῶν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ ᾿Ισχόμαχε, τί πρῶτον διδάσκειν 
» “ lal 4 
ἤρχου αὐτήν, διηγοῦ pou ws ἐγὼ ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἥδιόν σου 


42 


ur 


10 


I 


wn 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


ΕῪ ΕΣ Ν Ao <8 x 
διηγουμένου ἀκούοιμι, ἢ εἴ μοι γυμνικὸν ἢ ἱππικὸν 
wn Ὁ“ 
ἀγῶνα τὸν κάλλιστον διηγοῖο. 
, . 42 mS , 
Καὶ ὁ Ἰσχόμαχος ἀπεκρίνατο, Tt δ᾽, ἔφη, ὦ Σώ- 
. 3 τα , 
κρατες, ἐπεὶ ἤδη μοι χειροήθης ἣν Kat ἐτετιθάσευτο 
σ΄ ΄, ? , 3 , » δέ ὲ 
ὥστε διαλέγεσθαι, ἠρόμην αὐτήν, ἔφη, ὧδέ πως 
> > ’ Ν 
Εἰπέ μοι, ὦ γύναι, dpa ἤδη κατενόησας τίνος ποτὲ 
ν > , Ἄν ἂν ε Ν a“ ἔδ ’ 
ἕνεκα ἐγώ τε σὲ ἔλαβον καὶ οἱ σοὶ γονεῖς ἔδοσαν σε 
5 ’ ’ Ν Ν ¥ ε Ν 5 Lal \ ε 
ἐμοί; βουλευόμενος μὲν γὰρ ἔγωγε ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ καὶ οἱ 
σοὶ γονεῖς ὑπὲρ σοῦ, τίν᾽ ἂν κοινωνὸν βέλτιστον 
» NS , , 3 , 5 Nore: , 
οἴκου τε καὶ τέκνων λάβοιμεν, ἐγώ τε σὲ ἐξελεξάμην, 
‘ a a A , 
καὶ ol σοὶ γονεῖς, ὡς ἐοίκασιν, ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν ἐμέ. 
lal Ν \ Φ ε a 9 , > > , Ν 
νῦν δὲ δὴ οἶκος ἡμῖν ὅδε κοινός ἐστιν. ἐγώ τε γὰρ 
ὅσα μοι ἔστιν ἅπαντα εἰς τὸ κοινὸν ἀποφαίνω, σύ τε 
Ψ Ν 
ὅσα ἠνέγκω πάντα εἰς τὸ κοινὸν κατέθηκας. καὶ 
> “A ‘al a ’ 3, > ~ ’ 
οὐ τοῦτο δεῖ λογίζεσθαι, πότερος ἄρα ἀριθμῷ πλείω 
συμβέβληται ἡμῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνο δεῖ εὖ εἰδέναι, ὅτι 
κὰν λ CA , Ν M4 hy \ 
ὁπότερος av ἡμῶν βελτίων κοινωνὸς ἢ, οὗτος τὰ 
» 
πλείονος ἄξια συμβάλλεται. 
a , , > , \ A ε 
πεκρίνατο δέ μοι, ὦ Σώκρατες, πρὸς ταῦτα ἡ 
, - OS a 
γυνή, Ti δ᾽ ἂν ἐγώ σοι, ἔφη, δυναίμην συμπρᾶξαι; 
rd Ἄς. Ἔ Ν 
τίς δὲ ἡ ἐμὴ δύναμις ; ἀλλ᾽ ἐν σοὶ πάντα ἐστίν" ἐμὸν 
δ᾽ » ε , ¥ > a Ν » 
ἔφησεν ἡ μήτηρ ἔργον εἶναι σωφρονεῖν. Ναὶ μὰ 
Av? ἔφ ν é ώ > , \ Ν 4, 05: τ Ὁ ΄ 
» ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ γύναι, καὶ γὰρ καὶ ἐμοὶ ὃ πατήρ. 
ἀλλὰ φ s 7a 39 § Ν Ν ΄ 
σωφρόνων τοί ἐστι, καὶ ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικός, 
9 A ΄ 
οὕτως ποιεῖν ὅπως τά τε ὄντα ws βέλτιστα ἕξει καὶ 
¥ 9 PS τς 
ἄλλα ὅτι πλεῖστα ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦ τε καὶ δικαίου 
, \ , , ¥ Ca ε ΄ ν 
προσγενήσεται. Kar τί δέ, ἔφη. ορᾷς, ἢ γυνὴ: Oo 
x “Ὁ A , Ν 53 δ 
τι ἂν ἐγὼ ποιοῦσα συναύξοιμι τὸν οἶκον; Ναὶ 
.Ἷ 43 » 5 , 7} 
μὰ Δί᾽, ἐεφην ἐγώ, a τε οἱ θεοὶ ἔφυσάν σε δύνασθαι 


_ 


wm 


15 


25 


OECONOMICUS OF XENOPHON 43 


oe , A an lal ε 4, 
Kal ὁ νόμος συνεπαινεῖ, ταῦτα πειρῶ ὡς βέλτιστα 
ποιεῖν. 
Καὶ τί δὴ ταῦτά ἐστιν; ἔφη ἐκείνη. Οἶμαι μὲν 
¥ » 5 ἂν > 4 ¥ > 7 4 Ν 
ἔγωγε, ἔφην, οὐ τὰ ἐλαχίστου ἄξια, εἰ μή πέρ γε καὶ 
ε > “ 4 ε Ἁ ’ 9-. 9 5 , > ’ 
ἡ ἐν τῷ σμήνει ἡγεμὼν μέλιττα ἐπ᾽ ἐλαχίστου ἀξίοις 
» > 4 5 Ν A » lA ‘\ ε 
ἔργοις ἐφέστηκεν. ἐμοὶ γάρ τοι; Edn φάναι, καὶ ot 
θεοί, ὦ γύναι, δοκοῦσι πολὺ διεσκεμμένως μάλιστα 
ν n “ , aA A A ‘\ 
τὸ ζεῦγος τοῦτο συντεθεικέναι ὃ καλεῖται θῆλυ καὶ 
»* 9 9 > , 5S ε A > AN 
ἄρρεν, ὅπως OTL ὠφελιμώτατον ἢ αὑτῷ εἰς THY κοινω- 
’, Ν Ν , 52 Χ ΄΄ ε , 
νίαν. καὶ τὴν φύσιν εὐθὺς παρεσκεύασεν ὁ θεός, 
Pee ἱἷς ΜΕΝ \ A ὍΝ oN ey. ¥ 
ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, THY μὲν τῆς γυναικὸς ἐπὶ τὰ ἔνδον ἔργα 
ee , Ν \ Aes ΄ς. ee Ney » 
καὶ ἐπιμελήματα, τὴν δὲ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἐπὶ τὰ ἔξω ἔργα 
Ν 5 4 es A Ν Ν 4 Ν 
καὶ ἐπιμελήματα. ῥίγη μὲν γὰρ καὶ θάλπη καὶ 
ὁδοιπορίας καὶ στρατείας τοῦ ἀνδρὸς τὸ σῶμα καὶ 
‘A A A“ , wn , 
τὴν ψυχὴν μᾶλλον δύνασθαι καρτερεῖν κατεσκεύασεν" 
ν Ν ἔξ Φὸ τ ἕξ δ, τεῖνον Ἂν, < A δὲ Ν 
ὥστε τὰ ἔξω ἐπέταξεν αὐτῷ epya’ τῇ δὲ γυναικὶ 
ἧττον τὸ σῶμα δυνατὸν πρὸς ταῦτα φύσας, τὰ ἔνδον 
» > “Ὁ 4 » ’ ae , 
ἔργα αὐτῇ; φάναι ἔφη, προστάξαι μοι δοκεῖ ὁ θεός. 
δ, \ Ν Ἀ ’ὔ Ἃς Ν ’ > Ἂν > v4 
διὰ δὲ τὸ THY φύσιν μὴ πρὸς πάντα ταὐτὰ ἀμφοτέρων 
εὖ πεφυκέναι, διὰ τοῦτο καὶ δέονται μᾶλλον ἀλλήλων 
Ν ‘ A > ’ ε A , a Ν 
καὶ τὸ ζεῦγος ὠφελιμώτερον ἑαυτῷ γεγώνηται, ἃ τὸ 
ν 3 ’, Ν ν ὃ , le , 
ἕτερον ἐλλείπεται TO ἕτερον δυνάμενον. ταῦτα δέ, 
¥ Pies, Wate > , 950. 7 aA oe , Cc oA 
ἔφην, Set ἡμᾶς, ὦ γύναι, εἰδότας, ἃ ἑκατέρῳ ἡμῶν 
, ει ὅς A a A ν ε , 
προστέτακται ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, πειρᾶσθαι ὅπως ὡς βέλ- 
τιστα τὰ προσήκοντα ἑκάτερον ἡμῶν διαπράττεσθαι. 
A ’, » ’ Ἁ ε , > , 
Συνεπαινεὶ δέ, ἔφη φάναι, καὶ ὁ νόμος αὐτά, 
\ ¥ \ A s \ X 1 > ε 
συζευγνὺς ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα" καὶ καλὰ δὲ εἶναι ὁ 
’ > 7 a” € Ν » ε ’ὔ’ lal 
νόμος ἀποδείκνυσιν ἃ ὁ θεὸς ἔφυσεν ἑκάτερον μᾶλλον 
, Pa A \ \ , ¥ , 
δύνασθαι. τῇ μὲν yap γυναικὶ κάλλιον ἔνδον μένειν 


44 


αι 


Io 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


a eur \ ” ¥ , EN 
ἢ θυραυλεῖν, τῷ δὲ ἀνδρὶ αἴσχιον ἔνδον μένειν ἢ 
τῶν ἔξω ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. εἰ δέ τις παρ᾽ ἃ 6 θεὸς ἔφυσε 
ποιεῖ, ἴσως τι καὶ ἀτακτῶν τοὺς θεοὺς οὐ λήθει, καὶ 
δίκην δίδωσιν ἀμελῶν τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἢ πράτ- 
των τὰ τῆς γυναικὸς ἔργα. δοκεῖ δέ μοι, ἔφην, καὶ 
ἡ τῶν μελιττῶν ἡγεμὼν τοιαῦτα ἔργα ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ 
προστεταγμένα διαπονεῖσθαι. 

Καὶ ποῖα δ᾽, ἔφη ἐκείνη, ἔργα ἔχουσα ἡ τῶν 
μελιττῶν ἡγεμὼν ἐξομοιοῦται τοῖς ἔργοις οἷς ἐμὲ δεῖ 
πράττειν; Ὅτι, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἐκείνη τε ἐν τῷ σμήνει 
μένουσα οὐκ ἐᾷ ἀργοὺς τὰς μελίττας εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἃς 
μὲν δεῖ ἔξω ἐργάζεσθαι ἐκπέμπει ἐπὶ τὸ ἔργον, καὶ ἃ 
ἂν αὐτῶν ἑκάστη εἰσφέρῃ οἷδέ τε καὶ δέχεται, καὶ 
σῴζει ταῦτα ἔστ᾽ ἂν δέῃ χρῆσθαι. ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἡ 
dpa τοῦ χρῆσθαι ἥκῃ, διανέμει τὸ δίκαιον ἑκάστῃ. 
καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἔνδον δ᾽ ἐξυφαινομένοις κηρίοις ἐφέστηκεν, 
ὡς καλῶς καὶ ταχέως ὕφαννηται, καὶ τὸν γιγνόμενον 
τόκον ἐπιμελεῖται ws ἐκτρέφηται᾽ ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἐκτραφῇ 
καὶ ἀξιοεργοὶ οἱ νεοττοὶ γένωνται, ἀποικίζει αὐτοὺς 
σὺν τῶν ἑπομένων τινὶ ἡγεμόνι. 

Ἦ καὶ ἐμὲ οὖν, ἔφη ἡ γυνή, δεήσει ταῦτα ποιεῖν ; 
Δεήσει μέντοι σε, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἔνδον τε μένειν, καὶ οἷς 
μὲν ἂν ἔξω τὸ ἔργον ἢ τῶν οἰκετῶν, τούτους συνεκ- 
πέμπειν, οἷς δ᾽ ἂν ἔνδον ἔργον ἐργαστέον, τούτων 
σοι ἐπιστατητέον καὶ τά τε εἰσφερόμενα ἀποδεκτέον, 
καὶ ἃ μὲν ἂν αὐτῶν δέῃ δαπανᾶν, σοὶ διανεμητέον, 
ἃ δ᾽ ἂν περιττεύειν δέῃ, προνοητέον καὶ φυλακτέον 
ὅπως μὴ ἡ εἰς τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν κειμένη δαπάνη εἰς τὸν 
μῆνα δαπανᾶται. καὶ ὅταν ἔρια εἰσενεχθῇ σοι, ἐπι- 


ee ὦν... γι τὰκ. 








ωι 


Ιο 


15 


25 


OECONOMICUS OF XENOPHON 45 


, . - eer s , \ 9 ᾿ 
μελητέον ὅπως οἷς δεῖ ἱμάτια γίγνηται. καὶ ὅ γε ξηρὸς 
“ . a 
σῖτος ὅπως καλῶς ἐδώδιμος γίγνηται, ἐπιμελητέον. ἕν 
μέντοι τῶν σοι προσηκόντων, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἐπιμελημά- 
» 3 , , 53 9 a ΓΝ 4 
των ἴσως ἀχαριστότερον δόξει εἶναι, ὅτι ὃς ἂν κάμνῃ 
“ 5 la 4 ld , sd 
TOV οἰκετῶν, τούτων σοι ἐπιμελητέον πάντων ὅπως 
, \ ee Ἂν ε ΄, > , 
θεραπεύηται. Νὴ At’, ἔφη ἡ γυνή, ἐπιχαριτώτατον 
Ἀ > + , ’ e A , 
μὲν οὖν, ἣν μέλλωσί ye οἱ καλῶς θεραπευθέντες 
΄ ¥ κ > , Δ ΄ ¥ 
χάριν εἴσεσθαι καὶ εὐνούστεροι ἢ πρόσθεν ἔσεσθαι. 
Ν > 4 » et ’ 3 \ > “Ὁ Ν 
Καὶ ἐγώ, ἔφη ὁ ᾿Ισχόμαχος, ἀγασθεὶς αὐτῆς τὴν 
9 ’ὔ > a , 5S , Ν , 
ἀπόκρισιν, εἶπον᾽ “Apa ye, ὦ γύναι, διὰ τοιαύτας 
τινὰς προνοίας καὶ τῆς ἐν τῷ σμήνει ἡγεμόνος αἱ 
’ 9 ’ ᾿ > Ν 4 
μέλιτται οὕτω διατίθενται πρὸς αὐτὴν ὥστε, ὅταν 
7 . ἃ 3 he 5 , Ψ ἄν N ny) = 
ἐκείνη ἐκλίπῃ, οὐδεμία οἴεται τῶν μελιττῶν ἀπο 
λειπτέον εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἕπονται πᾶσαι; καὶ ἡ γυνή μοι 
5» ’ 4 > 3, » 3 Ἂν ἃς Ν 
ἀπεκρίνατο: Θαυμάζοιμ᾽ av, ἔφη, εἰ μὴ πρὸς σὲ 
aed 4 Ν Lal e / » x» x > ’ 
μᾶλλον TEewor τὰ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος ἔργα ἢ πρὸς ἐμέ. 
ε Ν > Ν Ἦν “A » A Ἂς v4 
ἡ yap ἐμὴ φυλακὴ τῶν ἔνδον καὶ διανομὴ γελοία τις 
* > ΄ 3 ᾿, ΄ > Ai » 
ἄν, οἶμαι, φαίνοιτο, εἰ μὴ σύ γε ἐπιμελοῖο ὅπως ἔξω- 
θέ > , Τ' x , > ee 2 3 2 ε Ξ \ 
ἐν τι εἰσφέροιτο. Τελοία δ᾽ αὖ, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἡ ἐμὴ 
> Ἂς ’ ; We. > A » 9 ‘\ > θέ 
εἰσφορὰ φαίνοιτ᾽ av, εἰ μὴ εἴη ὅστις τὰ εἰσενεχθέντα 
4 > ε a » 3 , ε 3 Ἂς Ne 
σῴζοι. οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ἔφην ἐγώ, οἱ εἰς τὸν τετρημένον 
nw ν "4 
πίθον ἀντλεῖν λεγόμενοι ὡς οἰκτείρονται, OTL μάτην 
nw Ν Ν 
πονεῖν δοκοῦσι; Νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη ἡ γυνή, καὶ γὰρ 
τλήμονές εἶσιν, εἰ τοῦτό γε ποιοῦσιν. 
¥ > , 
Αλλαι δέ τοι, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἴδιαι ἐπιμέλειαι, ὦ γύναι, 
4 
ἡδεῖαί σοι γίγνονται, ὁπόταν ἀνεπιστήμονα ταλασίας 
“A > , , Ν ’ 
λαβοῦσα ἐπιστήμονα ποιήσῃς καὶ διπλασίου τὸν 
7 
ἀξία γένηται, kal ὁπόταν ἀνεπιστήμονα ταμιείας καὶ 
“ Ν XN 
διακονίας παραλαβοῦσα, ἐπιστήμονα καὶ πιστὴν 


46 ATTIC PROSE 


I 


uw 


wm 


Α Ν , ἂν 9 ,’ » A 
καὶ διακονικὴν ποιησαμένη παντὸς ἀξίαν ἔχῃς; καὶ 
Ν - A 
ὁπόταν τοὺς μὲν σώφρονάς TE καὶ ὠφελίμους τῷ σῷ 
¥ Ci al 5 ~ ΞΝ /, Ν , 
οἴκῳ ἐξῇ σοι εὖ ποιῆσαι, ἐὰν δέ τις πονηρὸς φαίνηται, 
ΕΟ Ζ' Ν - δὲ I ¢ “ὃ aN Xr , 
ἐξῇ σοι κολάσαι" τὸ δὲ πάντων ἥδιστον, ἐὰν βελτίων 
nw lal 4, , ἣν Ν 
ἐμοῦ φανῇς καὶ ἐμὲ σὸν θεράποντα ποιήσῃ; καὶ μὴ 
A - “ ε ’, > 
δέῃ σε φοβεῖσθαι, μὴ προϊούσης τῆς ἡλικίας ἀτιμο- 
“ ν 
τέρα ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ γένῃ; ἀλλὰ πιστεύσῃς ὅτι πρεσβυτέρα 
‘ 
γιγνομένη, ὅσῳ ἂν Kal ἐμοὶ κοινωνὸς καὶ παισὶν οἴκου 
φύλαξ ἀμείνων ylyvn, τοσούτῳ καὶ τιμιωτέρα ἐν τῷ 
ἴκῳ ἔσει. τὰ γὰρ καλά τε κἀγαθά, ἐγὼ ἔφην, οὐ 
οἴκῳ ἔσει. τὰ γὰρ γαθά, ἐγὼ ἔφην, 
X Ν ε 3 Ἂν ἣν Ν > ἂν 3 Ν 
διὰ τὰς ὡραιότητας, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὰς ἀρετὰς εἰς τὸν 
βίον τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐπαύξεται. 


Learning Homer 


Ἔκ τούτου δὲ πάλιν εἶπεν ὁ Σωκράτης, Οὐκ αἰσχρὸν 

95 τὴ 3 8° > / 4 > “ 
δή, ὦ ἄνδρες, εἰ μηδ᾽ ἐπιχειρήσομεν συνόντες ὠφελεῖν 
τι ἢ εὐφραίνειν ἀλλήλους ; ἐντεῦθεν εἶπον πολλοί, Σὺ 
τοίνυν ἡμῖν ἐξηγοῦ, ποίων λόγων ἁπτόμενοι μάλιστ᾽ 
ΕἾ A A 3 κ \ , Ὁ" ’ ae 
ἂν ταῦτα ποιοῖμεν. ᾿Εγὼ μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη, ἥδιστ᾽ ἂν 
> , \ , ‘ ε ΄ ¥ κ᾿ 
ἀπολάβοιμι παρὰ Καλλίου τὴν ὑπόσχεσιν. ἔφη γὰρ 
δήπου, εἰ συνδειπνοῖμεν, ἐπιδείξειν τὴν αὑτοῦ σοφίαν. 
Καὶ ἐπιδείξω γε, ἔφη, ἐὰν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἅπαντες εἰς 

, ’ 9 9 > ’ > / > > 
μέσον φέρητε ὅ τι ἕκαστος ἐπίστασθε ἀγαθόν. ᾿Αλλ 
οὐδείς σοι, ἔφη, ἀντιλέγει τὸ μὴ οὐ λέξειν 6 τι 
ν A 
ἕκαστος ἡγεῖται πλείστου ἄξιον ἐπίστασθαι. 

3 Ν \ , » ε , ΄ e a ΠΝ ἃ κῶς Ὁ 

Eyo μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη ὁ Καλλίας, λέγω ὑμῖν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ 


, la > 
25 μέγιστον φρονῶ. ἀνθρώπους yap οἶμαι ἱκανὸς εἶναι 


’ “ A 
βελτίους ποιεῖν. ἐπειδὰν τοίνυν καὶ ἡμῶν ἕκαστος 
¥ 9 
elm ὃ τι ὠφέλιμον ἔχει, τότε κἀγὼ οὐ φθονήσω 


eee ee “ὦ 


““, ΓΛ. 


ωι 


25 


SYMPOSIUM OF XENOPHON 47 


> Lal Ἁ ’ > ΓΜΝ A“ > , 3 ‘ 
εἰπεῖν τὴν τέχνην Su ἧς τοῦτο ἀπεργάζομαι. ἀλλὰ 
Ν > ¥ λέ > N , eS ’ὔ 5 ’ὔ 
σὺ αὖ, ἔφη, λέγε, ὦ Νικήρατε, ἐπὶ ποίᾳ ἐπιστήμῃ 
, A <i > ε N > , 
μέγα φρονεῖς. καὶ ὃς εἶπεν, Ὃ πατὴρ ἐπιμελούμενος 
ὅπως ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς γενοίμην, ἠνάγκασέ με πάντα τὰ 
ε , ¥ A \ A ΄ a : , 
Ομήρον ἔπη μαθεῖν - καὶ νῦν δυναίμην ἂν ᾿Ιλιάδα 
9 \ 3 ’ > ΄ς 4 > lal > 4 > 
ὅλην καὶ Ὀδύσσειαν ἀπὸ στόματος εἰπεῖν. ἀκούοιτ 
» > ee Aa Ψ , x 3 ὧ A 
ἂν οὖν καὶ ἐμοῦ ἃ ἔσεσθε βελτίονες, ἣν ἐμοὶ συνῆτε. 
¥ ἊΝ ΄’ 9 9 ε ΄ ΄ 
ἴστε γὰρ δήπου ὅτι Ὅμηρος ὁ σοφώτατος πεποίηκε 
σχεδὸν περὶ πάντων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων. ὅστις ἂν οὖν 
δι ΤᾺΝ ΄ x > ‘ al ὃ x XK 
ὑμῶν βούληται ἢ οἰκονομικὸς ἢ δημηγορικὸς ἢ 
Ν , a 5 ἌΝ ΤΑ » 

στρατηγικὸς γενέσθαι, ἢ ὅμοιος ᾿Αχιλλεῖ ἢ Αἴαντι 
x , x» > A ΦΉΣ 2 αι δον Ἂ 
ἢ Νέστορι ἢ ᾿Οδυσσεῖ, ἐμὲ θεραπευέτω. ἐγὼ yap 
ταῦτα πάντα ἐπίσταμαι. 


Beauty of Socrates 


Ὁ δὲ Καλλίας ἔφη, Σὺ δὲ δή, ὦ Κριτόβουλε, eis 
τὸν περὶ τοῦ κάλλους ἀγῶνα πρὸς Σωκράτην οὐκ 
ἀνθίστασαι ; ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀναδύομαι, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατες" 
ἀλλὰ δίδασκε, εἴ τι ἔχεις σοφόν, ὡς καλλίων εἶ ἐμοῦ. 
μόνον, ἔφη, τὸν λαμπτῆρα ἐγγὺς προσενεγκάτω. 

Εἰς ἀνάκρισιν τοίνυν σε, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, πρῶτον 

nA , a 3 bet v4 XN 7 5 Υ 
τῆς δίκης καλοῦμαι - ἀλλ᾽ ἀποκρίνου. Σὺ δέ γε ἐρώτα. 
Πότερον οὖν ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ μόνον νομίζεις τὸ καλὸν 
εἶναι, 7) καὶ ἐν ἄλλῳ τινί; ᾿Εγὼ μὲν ναὶ μὰ Δί᾽, ἔφη, 

Ἁ » ν Ν δ. A 39 , a τὸ 
καὶ ἐν ἵππῳ καὶ Bot καὶ ἐν ἀψύχοις πολλοῖς. οἶδα 

[η- - Rat (ὃ N Ἂ ΄ Ν δό 
γοῦν οὖσαν καὶ ἀσπίδα καλὴν καὶ ξίφος καὶ δόρυ. 
Καὶ πῶς, ἔφη, οἷόν τε ταῦτα, μηδὲν ὅμοια ὄντα 
ἀλλήλοις, πάντα καλὰ εἶναι; Ἢν νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη, πρὸς 

ἽΝ ΑΨ 
τὰ ἔργα ὧν ἕνεκα ἕκαστα κτώμεθα εὖ εἰργασμένα ἢ, 


48 ATTIC PROSE 


5 


aA x Ν a3 » c 
4 εὖ πεφυκότα πρὸς ἃ ἂν δεώμεθα, καὶ ταῦτ᾽, ἔφη ὁ 
’΄ 
Κριτόβουλος, καλά. 
“" Cy ΕΣ 9 cal / μά ’ 
Οἶσθα οὖν, ἔφη, ὀφθαλμῶν τίνος ἕνεκα δεόμεθα ; 
ἢ ἔφη, ὅ D ὁρᾶν. Οὗ ἐν τοίνυν ἤδη οἱ 
Δῆλον, ἔφη, ὅτι τοῦ ὁρᾶν. Οὕτω μ ἤδη 
>» nn nw » Qn 
ἐμοὶ ὀφθαλμοὶ καλλίονες av τῶν σῶν εἴησαν. Πῶς 
, Y ε Ν \ Ν 3 HOD / ε lal ε 
δή; Ὅτι οἱ μὲν σοὶ τὸ κατ᾽ εὐθὺ μόνον ὁρῶσιν, οἱ 
ἣν ἋΣ Ν Ν Ν 3 , ὃ Ν ΝΙΝ ΕΝ ΄, 53 
δὲ ἐμοὶ καὶ τὸ ἐκ πλαγίου διὰ τὸ ἐπιπόλαιοι εἶναι. 
Λέγεις σύ, ἔφη, καρκίνον εὐοφθαλμότατον εἶναι τῶν 
͵ὕ ΄ὔ ὃ ΄ ¥ : > Ν Ν Ν > Ν 
ζῴων; Πάντως δήπου, ἐφη" ἐπεὶ καὶ πρὸς ἰσχὺν 


10 τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄριστα πεφυκότας ἔχει. 


15 


20 


Εἶεν, ἔφη; τῶν δὲ ῥινῶν ποτέρα καλλίων, ἡ σὴ ἢ ἡ 
Mee. 3 \ , ¥ 5 N » “ ¥ a 
ἐμή; ᾿Εγὼ μέν, edn, οἶμαι τὴν ἐμήν, εἰπερ γε TOU 
> , 7 5 4 ε a. cn ε / ε 
ὀσφραίνεσθαι ἕνεκεν ἐποίησαν ἡμῖν ῥῖνας οἱ θεοί. οἱ 

“ ἴω Ἀ 
μὲν γὰρ σοὶ μυκτῆρες εἰς γῆν ὁρῶσιν, ot δὲ ἐμοὶ 
ἀναπέπτανται, ὥστε τὰς πάντοθεν ὀσμὰς προσδέ- 

Ν Ν ἣν Ν “A ε Ν “ -“ 5 ἴω 
χεσθαι. Τὸ δὲ δὴ σιμὸν τῆς ῥινὸς πῶς τοῦ ὀρθοῦ 
᾽ὔ ν » 5 9 4 > >... αι > ‘ 
κάλλιον; Ὅτι, ἔφη, οὐκ ἀντιφράττει, ἀλλ᾽ ἐᾷ εὐθὺς 
Ν »” a Ν Ν 
τὰς ὄψεις ὁρᾶν ἃ ἂν βούλωνται: ἡ δὲ ὑψηλὴ ῥὶς 
ν 
ὥσπερ ἐπηρεάζουσα διατετείχικε τὰ ὄμματα. 

Τοῦ γε μὴν στόματος, ἔφη ὁ Κριτόβουλος, ὑφίεμαι. 
5 is n 
εἰ yap τοῦ ἀποδάκνειν ἕνεκα πεποίηται, TOAD ἂν σὺ 

n a 
μεῖζον ἢ ἐγὼ ἀποδάκοις. 


Xanthippe, his Wife 


Ν ε 5 
Kat ὁ Σωκράτης εἶπεν, Ἔν πολλοῖς, ὦ ἄνδρες, 
A ν ε Lal Ὁ“ 
δῆλον ὅτι ἡ γυναικεία φύσις οὐδὲν χείρων τῆς τοῦ 


> Ν 9 A 
25 ἀνδρὸς οὖσα τυγχάνει, γνώμης δὲ καὶ ἰσχύος δεῖται. 


ν » ε n a nw 

ὥστε εἰ τις ὑμῶν γυναῖκα ἔχει, θαρρῶν διδασκέτω 
9 , >a a a 

ὁ τι βούλοιτ᾽ ἂν αὐτῇ ἐπισταμένῃ χρῆσθαι. 


ἰδὲ 


15 


25 


MEMORABILIA OF XENOPHON 49 


3 , aA > x > 
Kal 6 ᾿Αντισθένης, Πῶς οὖν, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατες, 
Ἁ ‘ 
οὕτω γιγνώσκων, ov Kal σὺ παιδεύεις Ἐανθίππην, 
> Ν a \ “ Sr ὟΝ > \ \ la 
ἀλλὰ χρῇ γυναικὶ τῶν οὐσῶν, οἶμαι δὲ Kal τῶν γεγε- 
͵ LUA > , , y ¥ 
νημένων Kal TOV ἐσομένων, χαλεπωτάτῃ ; “O71, edn, 
ὁρῶ καὶ τοὺς ἱππικοὺς βουλομένους γενέσθαι οὐ τοὺς 
> , 3 ἈΝ \ na , 
εὐπειθεστάτους ἀλλὰ τοὺς θυμοειδεῖς ἵππους κτωμέ- 
, x 
νους. νομίζουσι yap, ἣν τοὺς τοιούτους δύνωνται 
’ ε ’ “A ¥ 4 7 
κατέχειν, ῥᾳδίως τοῖς ye ἄλλοις ἵπποις χρήσεσθαι. 
3 Ν Ν ’ὔ 9 ΄ A AT Se nA 
κἀγὼ δὴ βουλόμενος ἀνθρώποις χρῆσθαι καὶ ὁμιλεῖν 
ταύτην κέκτημαι, εὖ εἰδὼς ὅτι, εἰ ταύτην ὑποίσω, 
ε ΄, a ¥ 9 > ΄ ΄ 
ῥᾳδίως τοῖς γε ἄλλοις ἅπασιν ἀνθρώποις συνέσομαι. 
Ν - Ν ‘ ε / > 5 Ν Qn rn 
Καὶ οὗτος μὲν δὴ ὁ λόγος οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ σκοποῦ 
¥ > Gene 
ἔδοξεν εἰρῆσθαι. 
Filial Gratitude 
Αἰσθόμενος δέ ποτε Λαμπροκλέα, τὸν πρεσβύ- 
a Ἶ Ν 
τατον υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὴν μητέρα χαλεπαίνοντα, 
Ψ > “ > , 
Εἰπέ μοι, ἔφη, ὦ παῖ, οἶσθά twas ἀνθρώπους ἀχα- 
΄ ’ Ν ΄ Ψ» ε ΄ 
ρίστους καλουμένους; Καὶ μάλα, epy ὁ νεανίσκος. 
Καταμεμάθηκας οὖν τοὺς τί ποιοῦντας τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 
> a » μέ 5. x 5 , 
ἀποκαλοῦσιν ; “Eywye, ἔφη" τοὺς yap ev παθόντας, 
ὅταν δυνάμενοι χάριν ἀποδοῦναι μὴ ἀποδῶσιν, axa- 
, Β a > aA ὃ “ὦ 2 CE BINS, 
ρίστους καλοῦσιν. Οὐκοῦν δοκοῦσί σοι ἐν τοῖς ἀδίκοις 
’ Ν 3 ’ ν » 
καταλογίζεσθαι τοὺς ἀχαρίστους; ἜἜμοιγε, ἔφη. 
"HS ὃ , ΦνΦ ’ > ¥ ν Ν 3 ὃ δί 
Ἢ δέ ποτ᾽ ἐσκέψω, εἰ apa, ὥσπερ τὸ ἀνδραποδί- 
Ε > A 
ζεσθαι τοὺς μὲν φίλους ἄδικον εἶναι δοκεῖ, τοὺς δὲ 
Ἂν A 
πολεμίους δίκαιον, Kal TO ἀχαριστεῖν πρὸς μὲν τοὺς 
7 ¥ ’ 3 Ν δὲ ‘\ / ld 
φίλους ἀδικόν ἐστι, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς πολεμίους δίκαιον; 
¥ a ee eg 
Καὶ pada, ἔφη καὶ δοκεῖ μοι, ὑφ᾽ οὗ av τις εὖ παθών, 
» ’ὔ » ’, ἣ a 4 > 
εἴτε φίλου εἴτε πολεμίου, μὴ πειρᾶται χάριν ἀποδι- 


ATTIC PROSE —4 


50 ATTIC PROSE 


5 


I 


wm 


20 


25 


3, » ν ¥ -“ 
δόναι, ἄδικος εἶναι. Οὔκουν, εἴ γε οὕτως EXEL τοῦτο, 
¥ > , ε 3 ’ 
εἰλικρινής τις ἂν εἴη ἀδικία ἡ ἀχαριστία; συνω- 
μολόγει. 
¥ 9 » , 9 θὰ θὰ vo 
Οὔκουν, ὅσῳ av τις μείζω ἀγαθὰ παθὼν μὴ ἀπο- 
lal , 4 LO , a» ¥ A , Ν 
διδῷ χάριν, τοσούτῳ ἀδικώτερος ἂν εἴη ; συνέφη καὶ 
a , > ¥ eon , ΟΣ Δ , 
τοῦτο. Τίνας οὖν, ἔφη, ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν ἂν μείζω 
“ A e a“ 
εὐεργετημένους ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων ; OVS οἱ γονεῖς 
A Ν Ν 
ἐκ μὲν οὐκ ὄντων ἐποίησαν εἶναι, τοσαῦτα δὲ καλὰ 
ἊΝ κα A Ψ ε \ 
ἰδεῖν καὶ τοσούτων ἀγαθῶν μετασχεῖν, ὅσα ot θεοὶ 
A ἃ Ν Ἂς ν ε “A 
παρέχουσι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις: ἃ δὴ καὶ οὕτως ἡμῖν 
wn > o w 
δοκεῖ παντὸς ἀξια εἶναι, ὥστε πάντες TO καταλιπεῖν 
Pao , ΄, , Ν ε / 9 ἃ 
αὐτὰ πάντων μάλιστα φεύγομεν" καὶ αἱ πόλεις ἐπὶ 
lal , , 
τοῖς μεγίστοις ἀδικήμασι ζημίαν θάνατον πεποιή- 
ε 3 x / A , ‘ iO 7 
κασιν, ὡς οὐκ ἂν μείζονος κακοῦ φόβῳ THY ἀδικίαν 
παύσαντες. 
xe Va ‘\ , ε “ Lal , 
Καὶ ὁ μέν ye πατὴρ τήν τε ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα τρέφει, 
A ¥ 
καὶ τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἔσεσθαι παισὶ προπαρασκευάζει 
¢ Δ 
πάντα ὅσα ἂν οἴηται συνοίσειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν βίον, 
καὶ ταῦτα ὡς ἂν δύνηται πλεῖστα. ἡ δὲ μήτηρ σὺν 
A , nw ὔ Ν 4 Ἀπ᾿ 
πολλῷ πόνῳ τεκοῦσα τρέφει τε τὸ βρέφος καὶ ἐπιμε- 
λεῖται, οὐ γιγνῶσκον ὑφ᾽ ὅτου εὖ πάσχει, οὐδὲ ONpal- 
, ν ιν» > > 9 Ἀν ἢ ’ 
νειν δυνάμενον ὅτου δεῖται: ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὴ στοχαζομένη 
id Ν ἴω 
τά τε συμφέροντα καὶ κεχαρισμένα πειρᾶται ἐκπλη- 
an A , Ν 
ροῦν, καὶ τρέφει πολὺν χρόνον καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς 
ε , a“ 
ὑπομένουσα πονεῖν, οὐκ εἰδυῖα τίνα τούτων χάριν. 
3 ’ \ 
ἀπολήψεται. καὶ οὐκ ἀρκεῖ θρέψαι μόνον, ἀλλὰ Kal, 
3 δὰ δό ε 4 ε a , 
ἐπειδὰν δόξωσιν ἱκανοὶ εἶναι οἱ παῖδες μανθάνειν τι, 
ἃ \ a > bee 4 ε aN > Ν Ν Ν 
ἃ μὲν ἂν αὐτοὶ ἔχωσιν οἱ γονεῖς ἀγαθὰ πρὸς τὸν 
, ’ ἃ ΤῊΝ ¥ 
βίον, διδάσκουσιν ἃ δ᾽ ἂν οἴωνται ἄλλον ἱκανώτερον 


ωι 


10 


15 


20 


25 


MEMORABILIA OF XENOPHON 51 


εἶναι διδάξαι, πέμπουσι πρὸς τοῦτον δαπανῶντες, καὶ 
ἐπιμελοῦνται πάντα ποιοῦντες ὅπως οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῖς 
, ε Ν ’ 
γένωνται ὡς δυνατὸν βέλτιστοι. 
Πρὸς ταῦτα ὁ νεανίσκος ἔφη, ᾿Αλλά τοι, εἰ καὶ 
, “ ’ Ae? , , 
πάντα ταῦτα πεποίηκε καὶ ἀλλα τούτων πολλαπλάσια, 
3 Ἂς ΓᾺ 4 2 Ὅν > 4, Ἀ de 
οὐδεὶς ἂν δύναιτο αὐτῆς ἀνασχέσθαι THY χαλεπότητα. 
\ € , 4 da 4 » , 5 ’ 
καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, Πότερα δέ, ἔφη, οἴει, θηρίου ἀγριό- 
τητα δυσφορωτέραν εἶναι, ἢ μητρός ; ᾿Εγὼ μὲν οἶμαι, 
Ὁ“ Aw » 4 
ἔφη; τῆς μητρός, τῆς γε τοιαύτης. Ἤδη πώποτε οὖν 
ἢ δακοῦσα κακόν τί σοι ἔδωκεν ἢ λακτίσασα, οἷα 
ὑπὸ θηρίων ἤδη πολλοὶ ἔπαθον ; ᾿Αλλὰ νὴ Δία, ἔφη, 
λέγει ἃ οὐκ ay τις ἐπὶ τῷ βίῳ παντὶ βούλοιτο ἀκοῦσαι. 
Σὺ δὲ ’ὔ’ ἐφ ε > K , le a , \ “Ὁ φ “A 
ὺ δὲ πόσα, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, oleL ταύτῃ καὶ TH φωνῇ 
καὶ τοῖς ἔργοις ἐκ παιδίου δυσκολαίνων καὶ ἡμέρας 
καὶ νυκτὸς πράγματα παρασχεῖν, πόσα δὲ λυπῆσαι 
, 3 3 3 7 Sei x y¥> κα 
κάμνων; ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδεπώποτε αὐτήν, ἔφη, οὔτ᾽ εἶπα 
ὕτ᾽ ἐποίησα οὐδὲν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἠσχύνθ 
οὔτ᾽ ἐποίη ὑδὲν ᾧ ησχύνθη. 
¥ ¥ > 
Ti δέ; οἴει, ἔφη, χαλεπώτερον εἶναί σοι ἀκούειν 
ὧν αὕτη λέγει, ἢ τοῖς ὑποκριταῖς ὅταν ἐν ταῖς τραγῳ- 
δίαις ἀλλήλους τὰ ἔσχατα λέγωσιν; ᾿Αλλ᾽, οἶμαι, 
3 \ > » A ’ὔ » Ν 3 vs 
ἐπειδὴ οὐκ οἴονται τῶν λεγόντων οὔτε τὸν ἐλέγχοντα 
2 ν ’ + Ν 9 A 5 A 
ἐλέγχειν ἵνα ζημιώσῃ; οὔτε τὸν ἀπειλοῦντα ἀπειλεῖν 
σ , , ε , , τ > > 
ἵνα κακόν TL ποιήσῃ, ῥᾳδίως φέρουσι. Σὺ δ᾽ εὖ 
3 A 9 ἃ # ε ’ > , > Ν Ν 
εἰδὼς ὅτι ἃ λέγει σοι ἡ μήτηρ οὐ μόνον οὐδὲν κακὸν 
A ’ 3 Ἀ Ν Ψ 3 Ν > 
νοοῦσα λέγει, ἀλλὰ καὶ βουλομένη σοι ἀγαθὰ εἶναι 
ν > \ 3, Vd “Δ ’ὔ ’, 
ὅσα οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ, χαλεπαίνεις ; ἢ νομίζεις κακόνουν 
᾿ ’ > 3 ial ν» A , > 
τὴν μητέρα σοι εἶναι; Οὐ δῆτα, ἔφη, τοῦτό γε οὐκ 
οἴομαι. 
lal » 
Καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης" Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη; σὺ ταύτην, εὔνουν 


52 ATTIC PROSE 


wm 


το 


20 


25 


3 ’ 4, 
τέ σοι οὖσαν, καὶ ἐπιμελομένην ὃς μαλίστα δύναται 
AS ἂν » , 
κάμνοντος, ὅπως ὑγιαίνῃς TE καὶ ὁπως τῶν ἐπιτηδείων 
Ἀ ol 
μηδενὸς ἐνδεὴς ἔσει, καὶ πρὸς τούτοις πολλὰ τοῖς 
a “A Ν ἃς > 
θεοῖς εὐχομένην ἀγαθὰ ὑπὲρ σοῦ καὶ εὐχὰς ἀπο- 
an Ν 3 / 2: 72S ‘\ > > 
διδοῦσαν, χαλεπὴν εἶναι φής; ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι, εἶ 
Ud 
τοιαύτην μὴ δύνασαι φέρειν μητέρα, τἀγαθά σε ov 
> 4 
δύνασθαι φέρειν. οὐκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι καὶ ἡ πόλις ἄλλης 
μὲν ἀχαριστίας οὐδεμιᾶς ἐπιμελεῖτα. οὐδὲ δικάζει, 
Ε] Ν “ Ν > AG 4 > > ὃ 
ἀλλὰ περιορᾷ τοὺς εὖ πεπονθότας χάριν οὐκ ἀποδι- 
δέ 2X 8 ΄ὕ \ θ ΄ , δ΄ 
όντας, ἐὰν δέ τις γονέας μὴ θεραπεύῃ, τούτῳ δίκην 
τε ἐπιτίθησι, καὶ ἀποδοκιμάζουσα οὐκ ἐᾷ ἄρχειν 
A ε » x» xe Ν > aA 0 , ε Ἀ ΄»Ἅ 
τοῦτον, ὡς οὔτε ἂν τὰ ἱερὰ εὐσεβῶς θυόμενα ὑπὲρ τῆς 
’ 4 YA » a” ~ Ν ὃ ’ 
πόλεως, τούτου θύοντος, οὔτε ἄλλο καλῶς καὶ δικαίως 
ὐὸ > ΕΝ 7 a Ν Ν / 77 lal 
οὐδὲν ἂν τούτου πράξαντος ; καὶ νὴ Δία ἐάν τις TOV 
γονέων τελευτησάντων τοὺς τάφους μὴ κοσμῇ; καὶ 
τοῦτο ἐξετάζει ἡ πόλις ἐν ταῖς τῶν ἀρχόντων δοκι- 
μασίαις. 
Σὺ 3, > aA x a N \ N 
ὺ οὖν, ὦ παῖ, ἂν σωφρονῇς, τοὺς μὲν θεοὺς παραι- 
τήσει συγγνώμονας σοι εἶναι εἴ τι παρημέληκας τῆς 
, ae 
μητρός, μή σε Kal οὗτοι, νομίσαντες ἀχάριστον εἶναι, 
3 0 λ , Ss al ἣν δὲ 3 θ , 7 
οὐκ ἐθελήσωσιν εὖ ποιεῖν. τοὺς δὲ ἀνθρώπους ad 
φυλάξει 7 ἰσθό δ { ἱμελοῦ 
> μή σε αἰσθόμενοι τῶν γονέων ἀμελοῦντα 
, 3 , ἫΝ 3 > , , > τῆς 
πάντες ἀτιμάσωσιν, εἶτα ἐν ἐρημίᾳ φίλων ἀναφανῇς" 
ε / Ν ἣΝ “A 
εἰ yap σε ὑπολάβοιεν πρὸς τοὺς γονεῖς ἀχάριστον 
> 5 \ ON , 
εἶναι, οὐδεὶς ἂν νομίσειεν εὖ σε ποιήσας χάριν 
ἀπολήψεσθαι. 
Agesilaus in Asia 
9 , " 
Αγησίλαος ἔτι μὲν νέος ὧν ἔτυχε τῆς βασιλείας" 
ἄρτι δὲ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀρχῇ, ἐξηγγέλθ λεὺ 
ρ ν Τῇ αρχῃ; ἐξηγγελῦη βασι ευς 


20 


2 


ωι 


uw 


AGESILAUS OF XENOPHON 53 


ε las 5 , \ N \ \ \ 
ὁ Περσῶν ἀθροίζων καὶ ναυτικὸν καὶ πεζὸν πολὺ 
, ε 3. τῷ Ν "4 , 
στράτευμα ws ἐπὶ τοὺς “EdAnvas. βουλευομένων 
δὲ περὶ τούτων Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ τῶν συμμάχων, 
fF ir ε ἐς ἊΣ δῶ ΦΎΣΙ ΟΝ , \ 

ynothaos ὑπέστη, ἐὰν δῶσιν αὐτῷ τριάκοντα μὲν 
“ 7 Ν = > 5 
Σπαρτιατῶν, δισχιλίους δὲ νεοδαμώδεις, εἰς ἐξακισχι- 
λίους δὲ τὸ σύνταγμα τῶν συμμάχων, διαβήσεσθαι 
εἰς τὴν ᾿Ασίαν καὶ πειράσεσθαι εἰρήνην ποιῆσαι, ἡ, 
ΓΝ “Ὁ la 
av πολεμεῖν βούληται 6 βάρβαρος, ἀσχολίαν αὐτῷ 
΄ , ee Wey, 
παρέξειν στρατεύειν ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἕλληνας. 
Εὐθὺς μὲν οὖν πολλοὶ πάνυ ἡἠγάσθησαν αὐτὸ τοῦτο 
Ν 3 ~ > Ν ε 7 7 poate. > 
τὸ ἐπιθυμῆσαι, ἐπειδὴ ὁ Πέρσης πρόσθεν ἐπὶ τὴν 
Ἑλλάδα διέβη, ἀντιδιαβῆναι ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, τό τε αἱρεῖσθαι 
ἐπιόντα μᾶλλον ἢ ὑπομένοντα μάχεσθαι αὐτῷ, καὶ 
~ 3 ’ “ , lal a Ἂς ἴω 
τὸ τἀκείνου δαπανῶντα βούλεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων πολεμεῖν. κάλλιστον δὲ πάντων ἐκρίνετο, 
μὴ περὶ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἀλλὰ περὶ τῆς ᾿Ασίας τὸν 
ἀγῶνα καθιστάναι. 
i / a eA. , “ὃ , ae Cie Τῷ 
ν τοίνυν τῇ Ασίᾳ noe πρώτη πρᾶξις ἐγένετο. 
’, A + > τῷ > Ψ' 
Τισσαφέρνης μὲν ὦμοσεν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ, εἰ σπείσαιτο 
ν ¥ ἃ , Ἂς i > ’ὔ 
ἕως ἔλθοιεν ods πέμψειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, 
ὃ ΄ θ bee > A 3 ’ὔ ἣν 5 fed 
ιαπράξεσθαι αὐτῷ ἀφεθῆναι αὐτονόμους Tas ἐν TH 
᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεις Ἑλληνίδας - ᾿Αγησίλαος δὲ ἀντώμοσε 
Ν + > 4 e ’ A , Lal 
σπονδὰς ἄξειν ἀδόλως, ὁρισάμενος τῆς πράξεως τρεῖς 
ial ε Ν δὴ ’, ἃ » ὑθὺ 
μῆνας. ὃ μὲν δὴ Τισσαφέρνης, ἃ ὠμοσεν, εὐθὺς 
ἐψεύσατο - ἀντὶ γὰρ τοῦ εἰρήνην πράττειν, στράτευμα 
πολὺ παρὰ βασιλέως πρὸς ᾧ πρόσθεν εἶχε μετε- 
7 > 4 ’ 7 > 4 A 
πέμπετο. ᾿Αγησίλαος δέ, καΐπερ αἰσθόμενος ταῦτα, 
ὅμως ἐνέμεινε ταῖς σπονδαῖς. 
Ἐμοὶ οὖν τοῦτο πρῶτον καλὸν δοκεῖ διαπράξασθαι, 


54 


ur 


-ι 
ο 


20 


25 


ATTIC PROSE 


, »¥ 
ὅτι Τισσαφέρνην μὲν ἐμφανίσας ἐπίορκον, ἄπιστον 
“ »"» \ 
πᾶσιν ἐποίησεν" ἑαυτὸν δ᾽ ἀντεπιδείξας πρῶτον μὲν 
Ps = 5 om Ψ θ , κ § ΄ 
ὅρκους ἐμπεδοῦντα, ἔπειτα συνθήκας μὴ ψευδόμενον, 
: Ν / 
πάντας ἐποίησε καὶ Ἕλληνας καὶ βαρβάρους θαρ- 
A / ε Lal » ὔ 
ροῦντας συντίθεσθαι ἑαυτῷ εἴ τι βούλοιτο. 
“ A Ν 
Ἔκ δὲ τούτου προεῖπε τοῖς στρατιώταις ὡς εὐθὺς 
Ν Ν a 
ἡγήσοιτο τὴν συντομωτάτην ἐπὶ τὰ κράτιστα τῆς 
χώρας. ὁ μέντοι Τισσαφέρνης ταῦτα μὲν ἐνόμισε 
ld be , > ~ > ’ Ν 
λέγειν αὐτὸν βουλόμενον ἐξαπατῆσαι, εἰς Καρίαν δὲ 
Ἦν ΕῚ “ , > ἃς 5 ’ ,’ 
τῷ ὄντι ἐμβαλεῖν. τό τε οὖν πεζὸν εἰς Καρίαν διεβί- 
\ x e Ν > Ἂς , ὃ δί , 
βασε καὶ τὸ ἱππικὸν εἰς TO Μαιάνδρου πεδίον κατέ- 
στησεν. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αγησίλαος οὐκ ἐψεύσατο, ἀλλ᾽, ὥσπερ 
προεῖπεν, εὐθὺς εἰς τὸν Σαρδιανὸν τόπον ἐχώρησε. 
A aA 
καὶ τρεῖς μὲν ἡμέρας δι’ ἐρημίας πολεμίων πορεύο- 
μενος, πολλὰ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια τῇ στρατιᾷ παρεῖχε" τῇ 
\ ’ “ Ὁ“ 
δὲ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἧκον οἱ τῶν πολεμίων ἱππεῖς. 
Ν aA 
Kat οἱ Πέρσαι ἀντιπαρετάξαντο παμπληθέσι τῶν 
ε , 4 
ἱππέων τάξεσιν. ἔνθα δὴ ὁ ᾿Αγησίλαος γιγνώσκων 
Lg a \ - 3 , Ν ΄ 5... ἌΝ \ 
ὅτι τοῖς μὲν πολεμίοις οὔπω παρείη TO πεζόν, αὐτῷ δὲ 
> ἣν 5 4 A“ 
οὐδὲν ἀπείη τῶν παρεσκευασμένων, καιρὸν ἡγήσατο 
4 ’, 3 
μάχην συνάψαι. σφαγιασάμενος οὖν τὴν μὲν φάχαγγα 
352 Χ τ 4... 
εὐθὺς ἦγεν ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀντιτεταγμένους ἱππέας, ἐκ δὲ 
al e nw Ὁ“ 
τῶν ὁπλιτῶν ἐκέλευσε τὰ δέκα ἀφ᾽ ἤβης θεῖν ὁμόσε 
SER A \ A > , ε a 
a 
ena τόῖς δὲ πελτασταῖς εἶπε δρόμῳ ὑφηγεῖσθαι, 
x A ε A a 
παρήγγειλε δὲ Kal τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν ἐμβάλλειν, ὡς αὐτοῦ 
= Ν XV Qn 
TE καὶ παντὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος ἑπομένου. TOUS μὲν 
δὴ ε , 25 ἐξ es Ν A A > Ν 
ἢ ἱππέας ἐδέξαντο οἱ ἀγαθοὶ τῶν Περσῶν. ἐπειδὴ 
ὟὟ , , Ν lo 
δὲ ἅμα πάντα τὰ δεινὰ παρῆν ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, ἐνέκλιναν, 
Ν a Ν eto Ν a a 
Kat ov μὲν αὐτῶν εὐθὺς ἐν τῷ Πακτωλῷ ποταμῷ 


10 


I 


2 


uw 


5 


wn 


AGESILAUS OF XENOPHON 55 


ἔπεσον, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ἔφευγον. οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες ἑπόμενοι 
αἱροῦσι καὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον αὐτῶν. 
ὋὉ δὲ ᾿Αγησίλαος εὐθὺς ἦγεν ἐπὶ Σάρδεις, κἀκεῖ 
Ψ wee NA ss. N Ἂς ἀκτὰν Y \ 
ἅμα μὲν ἔκαιε καὶ ἐπόρθει τὰ περὶ τὸ ἄστυ, ἅμα δὲ 
Ν , 25 ΄ ἊΝ x > , 7 
καὶ κηρύγματι ἐδήλου, τοὺς μὲν ἐλευθερίας δεομένους 
ὡς πρὸς σύμμαχον αὐτὸν παρεῖναι" εἰ δέ τινες τὴν 
᾿Ασίαν ἑαυτῶν ποιοῦνται, πρὸς τοὺς ἐλευθεροῦντας 
διακρινομένους ἐν ὅπλοις παρεῖναι. ἐπεὶ μέντοι οὐδεὶς 
> 4 > Lal δὴ ΑΝ > Ν Ψ' > , Ν ᾿ 
ἀντεξήει, ἀδεῶς δὴ τὸ ἀπὸ τούτου ἐστρατεύετο, τοὺς μὲν 
’ π FF > / Cons 
πρόσθεν προσκυνεῖν Ἕλληνας ἀναγκαζομένους ὁρῶν 
’ ε > @ ε ve Ν > 3 “ Ν 
τιμωμένους ὑφ᾽ ὧν ὑβρίζοντο, τοὺς δ᾽ ἀξιοῦντας καὶ 
τὰς τῶν θεῶν τιμὰς καρποῦσθαι, τούτους ποιήσας μηδ᾽ 
ἀντιβλέπειν τοῖς Ἕλλησι δύνασθαι" καὶ τὴν μὲν τῶν 
, , > ’ 4 ‘ Ν “ / 
φίλων χώραν ἀδήωτον παρέχων, τὴν δὲ τῶν πολεμίων 
οὕτω καρπούμενος ὥστε ἐν δυοῖν ἐτοῖν πλέον τῶν 
ἑκατὸν ταλάντων τῷ θεῷ ἐν Δελφοῖς δεκάτην ἀποθῦσαι. 
ὋὉ μέντοι Περσῶν βασιλεύς, νομίσας Τισσαφέρνην 
¥ > A an , ΝΕ: A ΄ 
αἴτιον εἶναι τοῦ κακῶς φέρεσθαι τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, Τιθραύ- 
στὴν καταπέμψας ἀπέτεμεν αὐτοῦ τὴν κεφαλήν. μετὰ 
δὲ lal Ν Ν “ ’ ~ > / 3 , 
€ τοῦτο Ta μὲν Tov βαρβάρων ἔτι ἀθυμότερα ἐγένετο. 
Ν a 9 , be aE ς , 9 ΚΑῖς , 
τὰ δὲ ᾿Αγησιλάου πολὺ ἐρρωμενέστερα. ἀπὸ πάντων 
γὰρ τῶν ἐθνῶν ἐπρεσβεύοντο περὶ φιλίας, πολλοὶ δὲ 
Ν 3 ’ Ἂν mee, > (¢ “A > / 
καὶ ἀφίσταντο πρὸς αὐτὸν ὀρεγόμενοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας, 
ὥστε οὐκέτι “Ἑλλήνων μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ βαρβάρων 
πολλῶν ἡγεμὼν ἦν ᾿Αγησίλαος. 


Recalled to Hellas 


"Αξιόν ye μὴν καὶ ἐντεῦθεν ὑπερβαλλόντως ἄγασθαι 
αὐτοῦ, ὅστις ἄρχων μὲν παμπόλλων ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ 


56 ATTIC PROSE 


wn 


15 


2 


ο 


35 


, ¥ ‘ \ ἊΣ > Ν Ν a a 
πόλεων, ἄρχων δὲ Kal νήσων, ἐπεὶ καὶ TO ναυτικὸν 
ne Ἁ \ 5 la 
προσῆψεν αὐτῷ ἡ πόλις, αὐξανόμενος δὲ καὶ εὐκλείᾳ 
fa ad Ν 3 te 
καὶ δυνάμει, παρὸν δ᾽ αὐτῷ πολλοῖς καὶ ἀγαθοῖς 
Ν Ἂν ’ὔ Ν ’ 
χρῆσθαι ὅ τι ἐβούλετο, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις τὸ μέγιστον, 
, ‘ ‘ ε , 
ἐπινοῶν καὶ ἐλπίζων καταλύσειν τὴν ἐπὶ THY Ἑλλάδα 
3 ν ε 3 5 Ἂν 
στρατεύουσαν πρότερον ἀρχήν, ὁμως UT οὐδενὸς 
Ἀγ Ὁ > Ἂ 3 Ν ΄“ 
τούτων ἐκρατήθη" ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἦλθεν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῶν 
A A “A , > td “~ 4 
οἴκοι τελῶν βοηθεῖν τῇ πατρίδι, ἐπείθετο τῇ πόλει 
lal ΄’ » ε Ν 
οὐδὲν διαφερόντως ἢ εἰ ἐν τῷ ἐφορείῳ ἔτυχεν ἑστηκὼς 
μόνος παρὰ τοὺς πέντε, μάλα ἔνδηλον ποιῶν ὡς οὐκ 
an an \ A , 
ἂν πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν δέξαιτο ἀντὶ τῆς πατρίδος. 
Τῶν μὲν δὴ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πράξεων τοῦτο τέλος ἐγέ- 
ὧν μὲν δὴ ἐν TH Δσίᾳ πρ γέ 
ε , 3 4 
vero. διαβὰς δὲ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἐπορεύετο διὰ 
τῶν αὐτῶν ἐθνῶν ὧνπερ ὁ Πέρσης τῷ παμπληθεῖ 
΄ ς See 2 ΄ ose ε , > , 
στόλῳ Kal ἣν ἐνιαυσίαν ὁδὸν ὁ βάρβαρος ἐποιή- 
lal 3 / 
σατο, ταύτην μεῖον ἢ ἐν μηνὶ κατήνυσεν ὃ ᾿Αγησί- 
λαος. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐξαμείψας Μακεδονίαν εἰς Θετταλίαν 
AS A ΕΝ 
ἀφίκετο, ὑπερβάλλων τὰ ᾿Αχαϊκὰ τῆς Φθίας ὄρη 
3 460 > Ἂς a 9 5 vO δὴ > 
ἐπορεύθη eis τὰ Βοιωτῶν ὅρια. ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἀντι- 
4 e bY 4 3 9 > ’ 
τεταγμένους εὑρὼν Θηβαίους ᾿Αθηναίους ᾿Αργείους 
Κορινθίους Αἰνιᾶνας Εὐβοέας καὶ Λοκροὺς ἀμφοτέ- 
ὑδὲ 3 , 39 ὦ “ lal 5 
ρους, οὐδὲν ἐμέλλησεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ ἀντιπαρ- 
έταττε, Λακεδαιμονίων μὲν ἔχων μόραν καὶ ἥμισυ, 
“A δ᾽ 3 40 £ la 5 Ih aie ’, 
των ὃ αὐτόθεν συμμάχων Φωκέας καὶ Ορχομενίους 
/ 9» 
μόνους, τό τ᾽ ἄλλο στράτευμα ὅπερ ἠγάγετο αὐτός. 


Battle of Coronea 


‘ A 
Καὶ ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο οἵαπερ οὐκ ἄλλη τῶν ἐφ᾽ 
ε A 
ἡμῶν. συνήεσαν μὲν yap eis τὸ κατὰ Kopwvetay 


, 
ον. 


Io 


I 


2 


5 


uw 


AGESILAUS OF XENOPHON 57 


πεδίον ol μὲν σὺν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Κηφισοῦ, ot 
Ν Ν a“ ’ 3 Ν a ¢ “~ es Ν 
δὲ σὺν τοῖς Θηβαίοις ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἑλικῶνος. ἑώρων δὲ 
τάς τε φάλαγγας ἀλλήλων μάλα ἰσομάχους, σχεδὸν 
δὲ καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς ἦσαν ἑκατέρων ἰσοπληθεῖς. εἶχε 
\ ε 3 / Ν ἣς > nw > ε lal 
δὲ ὁ ᾿Αγησίλαος μὲν τὸ δεξιὸν τοῦ μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, 
3 , Ν » > > “A na 3 ͵ 
Ορχομένιοι δὲ ἔσχατοι ἦσαν αὐτῷ τοῦ εὐωνύμου. 
ε 5 A > A 
οἱ δ᾽ αὖ Θηβαῖοι αὐτοὶ μὲν δεξιοὶ ἦσαν, ᾿Αργεῖοι δ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς τὸ εὐώνυμον εἶχον. 
Συνιόντων δέ, τέως μὲν σιγὴ πολλὴ ἦν ἀπ᾽ ἀμφο- 
’ ε ’ 3, 3 “Δ 3 id 9 , 
τέρων: ἡνίκα δὲ ἀπεῖχον ἀλλήλων ὅσον στάδιον, 
ἀλαλάξαντες οἱ Θηβαῖοι δρόμῳ ὁμόσε ἐφέροντο. ὡς 
\ A ¥ ΄ > , » 5 , 
δὲ τριῶν ἔτι πλέθρων ἐν μέσῳ ὄντων, ἀντεξέδραμον 
ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Αγησιλάου φάλαγγος ὧν Ἡριππίδας ἐξε- 
νάγει. ἦσαν δ᾽ οὗτοι τῶν τε ἐξ οἴκου αὐτῷ συστρα- 
, Ν la) ’ ’ Ἂς ΣΝ δ 
τευσαμένων καὶ τῶν Κυρείων τινές, καὶ Ἴωνες δὲ 
Ν 3 A Wit ’ > la Ν , 
καὶ Αἰολεῖς καὶ .Ελλησπόντιοι ἐχόμενοι. καὶ πάντες 
οὗτοι τῶν συνεκδραμόντων τε ἐγένοντο καὶ εἰς δόρυ 
5 ’ > ’, Ν > ε , > “a 
ἀφικόμενοι ἐτρέψαντο τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτούς. ᾿Αργεῖοι 
μέντοι οὐκ ἐδέξαντο τοὺς ἀμφ᾽ ᾿Αγησίλαον, ἀλλ᾽ 
¥ tee Ν ε lal 
ἔφυγον ἐπὶ Tov Ἑλικῶνα. 
5 » ἃ "2 A td > , Ψ 
Κἀνταῦθα ot μέν τινες τῶν ξένων ἐστεφάνουν ἤδη 
τὸν ᾿Αγησίλαον, ἀγγέλλει δέ τις αὐτῷ ὅτι Θηβαῖοι 
Ν 3 ’ ΄ > “A , 
τοὺς ᾿Ορχομενίους διακόψαντες ἐν τοῖς σκευοφόροις 
3 ’ ψ a A > Ν 3 δ Χ 2 4 φι 13 
εἰσί. καὶ ὃ μὲν εὐθὺς ἐξελίξας τὴν φάλαγγα ἦγεν ἐπ 
> , ea. > nr ε > N , 
αὐτούς " of δ᾽ αὖ Θηβαῖοι, ὡς εἶδον τοὺς συμμάχους 
Ν ae “ ’ a / 
πρὸς τῷ “Ἑλικῶνι πεφευγότας, διαπεσεῖν βουλόμενοι 
nw “ ‘ 
πρὸς τοὺς ἑαυτῶν, ἐχώρουν ἐρρωμένως. ἐνταῦθα δὴ 
> ’ 3 ‘al Ν 3, 3 iy 3 ’ 
Αγησίλαον ἀνδρεῖον μὲν ἔξεστιν εἰπεῖν ἀναμφιλόγως, 
3 , 4 ΄ ὌΝ 5 /, 30% Ν et 
οὐ μέντοι εἵλετό γε τὰ ἀσφαλέστατα: ἐξὸν yap αὐτῷ 


58 ATTIC PROSE 


ε ’, A A 
παρῶντι τοὺς διαπίπτοντας ἑπομένῳ χειροῦσθαι τοὺς 
ΕΣ θ > 5 ’, lal ἀλλ᾽ > 4 Ὁ έ 
ὄπισθεν, οὐκ ἐποίησε τοῦτο, ἀντιμέτωπος συνέρ- 

A ’ ἈΝ ’ Ν > ’ 

ραξε τοῖς Θηβαίοις. καὶ συμβαλόντες τὰς ἀσπί- 

lal ’ > / A 

Sas, ἐωθοῦντο ἐμάχοντο ἀπέκτεινον ἀπέθνῃσκον. Kat 
Ν \ WT) , A > ἈΝ ὑδὲ ΄ Ν 

κραυγὴ μὲν οὐδεμία παρῆν, οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ σιγή, φωνὴ 

2 > ’ Ν ’ ’ > 

δέ τις ἦν τοιαύτη οἵαν ὀργή TE Kal μάχη παράσχοιτ 
᾿ , A “A 7 a » 7 Ἀ 

ἄν. τέλος δὲ τῶν Θηβαίων οἱ μὲν διαπίπτουσι πρὸς 


ωι 


τὸν Ἑλικῶνα, πολλοὶ δ᾽ ἀποχωροῦντες ἀπέθανον. 
Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ μὲν νίκη σὺν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ ἐγένετο, 
/ > + ἸΝἄἮ , 0 Ν Ν aN 
τετρωμένος δ᾽ αὐτὸς προσηνέχθη πρὸς τὴν φάλαγγα, 
προσελάσαντές τινες τῶν ἱππέων λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ὅτι 


I 


° 


a“ ’ 3 4 Ν a 9 ε A »-“ 
τῶν πολεμίων ὀγδοήκοντα σὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις ὑπὸ τῷ 
ναῷ εἰσι, καὶ ἠρώτων τί χρὴ ποιεῖν. ὃ δέ, καίπερ 
πολλὰ τραύματα ἔχων πάντοσε καὶ παντοίοις ὅπλοις, 
9 s > X 10 “ θ , hk 3” ΕἸ , 

15 ὅμως οὐκ ἐπελάθετο τοῦ θείου, ἀλλ᾽ ἐᾶν τε ἀπιέναι - 
ὅποι βούλοιντο ἐκέλευε καὶ ἀδικεῖν οὐκ εἴα, καὶ προ- 

, τ δ > > rye Vee A ¥ > a 
πέμψαι ἐπέταξε τοὺς ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν ἱππεῖς, ἔστε ἐν TO 
ἀσφαλεῖ ἐγένοντο. 

> , Ν ¥ ε ’ A Ἀ ’ 
Επεί γε μὴν ἔληξεν ἡ μάχη: παρῆν δὴ θεάσασθαι, 
20 ἔνθα συνέπεσον ἀλλήλοις, τὴν μὲν γῆν αἵματι πεφυρ- 

, ‘ δὲ , ν΄ -.ᾳ)ἭἬ 4 
μένην, νεκροὺς δὲ κειμένους φιλίους Kal πολεμίους 
per ἀλλήλων, ἀσπίδας δὲ διατεθρυμμένας, δόρατα 
συντεθραυσμίώνα, ἐγχειρίδια γυμνὰ κολεῶν, τὰ μὲν 

/ > Lal 
χαμαΐ, τὰ δ᾽ ἐν σώμασι, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι μετὰ χεῖρας. τότε 
\ + Ν Ν > » 
25 μὲν οὖν, καὶ γὰρ ἦν ἤδη ὀψέ, συνελκύσαντες τοὺς 
τῶν πολιτῶν νεκροὺς εἴσω φάλαγγος ἐδειπνοποιή- 
3, an 
σαντο Kal ἐκοιμήθησαν: πρωΐ δὲ Τῦλιν τὸν πολέ 
’ 
μαρχον παρατάξαι τε ἐκέλευσε τὸ στράτευμα καὶ 
4, ν ‘\ a 
τρόπαιον ἵστασθαι, καὶ στεφανοῦσθαι πάντας τῷ 


un 


25 


AGESILAUS OF XENOPHON 59 


“ A Ν > Ν , 5 i. Ἂς a Ν 
θεῷ, καὶ τοὺς αὐλητὰς πάντας αὐλεῖν. καὶ οἱ μὲν 
δι" 1.6 Ψ' ᾿ ε Ν μος » ΄ ε 
ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν " οἱ δὲ Θηβαῖοι ἔπεμψαν κήρυκα, ὑπο- 
σπόνδους τοὺς νεκροὺς αἰτοῦντες θάψαι. καὶ οὕτως 

be ν Ἂς 4 Ν ap ’ὕ » 
δὴ αἵ τε σπονδαὶ γίγνονται καὶ ὁ ᾿Αγησίλαος οἴκαδε 
ἀπεχώρει, ἑλόμενος ἀντὶ τοῦ μέγιστος εἶναι ἐν τῇ 
7A 4 » Ν , A ¥ Ἂν , δὲ 
σίᾳ οἴκοι τὰ νόμιμα μὲν ἄρχειν τὰ νόμιμα δὲ 
» 
ἄρχεσθαι. 
Panhellenic Patriotism 
¢ ¥ 
᾿Αγησίλαος, ὅπου ῴετο THY πατρίδα TL ὠφελήσειν, 
3 ’ ε ’ » 4 9 Ἄ: > vd 
ov πόνων ὑφίετο, οὐ κινδύνων ἀφίστατο, οὐ χρημάτων 
> ’ὔ 5 Ὁ > a“ > 4 5 x \ 
ἐφείδετο, οὐ σῶμα, οὐ γῆρας προὐφασίζετο, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
βασιλέως ἀγαθοῦ τοῦτο ἔργον ἐνόμιζε, τὸ τοὺς ἀρχο- 
μένους ὡς πλεῖστα ἀγαθὰ ποιεῖν. εἴ γε μὴν αὖ 
καλὸν Ἕλληνα ὄντα φιλέλληνα εἶναι, τίνα τις εἶδεν 
x Ν EN ΄ 3 52 2 ΟΣ 
ἄλλον στρατηγὸν ἢ πόλιν οὐκ ἐθέλοντα αἱρεῖν, 
9 ¥ - “ἡ Ν , Ν 
ὅταν οἴηται πορθήσειν, ἣ συμφορὰν νομίζοντα τὸ 
Lal > ~ ‘\ 9 , > A 4 
νικᾶν ἐν τῷ πρὸς Ἕλληνας πολέμῳ ; ἐκεῖνος τοίνυν, 
> ’ εἶ 3 4 >) A (4 3 ~ 3 2 
ἀγγελίας μὲν ἐλθούσης αὐτῷ ws ἐν τῇ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 
’ὔ 5 Ν Ν 4 3 Ν \ 4, A 
μάχῃ ὀκτὼ μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων ἐγγὺς δὲ μύριοι τῶν 
΄ ay > > a. XN 3. τ 
πολεμίων τεθναῖεν, οὐκ ἐφησθεὶς φανερὸς ἐγένετο, 
ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν ἄρα, Φεῦ ὦ Ἑλλάς, ὁπότε ot νῦν τεθνηκότες 
ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν ζῶντες νικᾶν πάντας τοὺς βαρβάρους. 
’ ἈΝ “ , , 9 > 
Κορινθίων ye μὴν τῶν φευγόντων λεγόντων ὅτι ἐνδι- 
a A κν 
δοῖτο αὐτοῖς ἡ πόλις, καὶ μηχανὰς ἐπιδεικνύντων αἷς 
πάντες ἤλπιζον ἑλεῖν τὰ τείχη; οὐκ ἤθελε προσβαλ- 
λειν, λέγων ὅτι οὐκ ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι δέοι “Ἑλληνίδας 
πόλεις, ἀλλὰ σωφρονίζειν. Εἰ δὲ τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας, 


ἔφη, ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἀφανιοῦμεν, ὁρᾶν χρὴ μὴ οὐδ᾽ 


ἕξομεν μεθ᾽ ὅτου τῶν βαρβάρων κρατήσομεν. 


60 ATTIC PROSE 


mn 


I 


° 


20 


25 


Spartan Simplicity 
lal / ν ε / 
"Ayapar δὲ κἀκεῖνο ᾿Αγησιλάου, ὅτι οὐχ ὁπότερος 
¥ 
πλείω τε χρήματα ἔχοι Kal πλειόνων ἄρχοι, τούτῳ 
ε / A , Ἐκ i\N. ς , fae 
ἡγήσατο μεῖζον φρονητέον εἰναι, ἀλλ᾽ ὁπότερος αὑτὸς 
aA Ν ‘\ 
τε ἀμείνων εἴη Kal ἀμεινόνων ἡγοῖτο. ὃ μὲν yap 
, sf a 7 λ a » ’ θ᾽ 
Πέρσης, νομίζων, ἣν χρήματα πλεῖστα ἔχῃ; πᾶν 
lal “ A Ν 
ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ ποιήσεσθαι, διὰ τοῦτο πᾶν μὲν τὸ ἐν 
3 ΄ , A δὲ Nice. , , δὲ Ν 
ἀνθρώποις χρυσίον, πᾶν δὲ τὸ ἀργύριον, πάντα OE τὰ 
, 3 A X ε Ν 10 ΄, ὰ 
πολυτελέστατα ἐπειρᾶτο πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἀθροίζειν. ὃ 
δὲ οὕτως ἀντεσκευάσατο τὸν οἶκον ὥστε τούτων 
ὃ Ν ὃ a θ 3 δέ a 3 a ἰδέ 
μηδενὸς προσδεῖσθαι. εἰ δέ τις ταῦτα ἀπιστεῖ, ἰδέτω 
Ν ν a) SF ¥ 3 A ’ὔ θ δὲ ‘ θύ 
μὲν οἵα οἰκία ἤρκει αὐτῷ, θεασάσθω δὲ τὰς θύρας 
αὐτῆς" εἰκάσειε γὰρ av τις ἔτι ταύτας ἐκείνας εἶναι 
Ψ A 
domep ᾿Αριστόδημος ὁ Ἡρακλέους, ὅτε κατῆλθε, 
λαβὼν ἐπεστήσατο" πειρασάσθω δὲ θεάσασθαι τὴν 
» 4 5 ’ Ν ε 5 4 > ad 
ἔνδον κατασκευήν, ἐννοησάτω δὲ ὡς ἐθοίναζεν ἐν ταῖς 
θυσίαις, ἀκουσάτω δὲ ὡς ἐπὶ πολιτικοῦ κανάθρου 
’ὔ 5 3 4 ε / 9 La! “A 
Karner εἰς ᾿Αμύκλας ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτοῦ. τοιγαροῦν 
ν 3 , Ν ΄, A / 2Q\ 
οὕτως ἐφαρμόσας Tas δαπάνας ταῖς προσόδοις, οὐδὲν 
5 ’ 
ἠναγκάζετο χρημάτων ἕνεκα ἄδικον πράττειν. 
, \ \ A > , 3 ἣν 
Καίτοι καλὸν μὲν δοκεῖ εἶναι τείχη ἀνάλωτα 
a ε 
κτᾶσθαι ὑπὸ πολεμίων " πολὺ μέντοι ἔγωγε κάλλιον 
’ x νι “ 
κρίνω τὸ τὴν αὑτοῦ ψυχὴν ἀνάλωτον κατασκευάσαι 
eh oN , “ 
καὶ ὑπὸ χρημάτων καὶ ὑπὸ ἡδονῶν καὶ ὑπὸ φόβου. 


Hunting as Part of a Liberal Education 


ἥ᾿ Ν ν lal 

To μὲν εὕρημα θεῶν, ᾿Απόλλωνος καὶ ᾿Αρτέμιδος, 
5» \ 
ἄγραι Kal κύνες: ἔδοσαν δὲ Kal ἐτίμησαν τούτῳ 

΄ Ν. , a \ Ν ΡΝ ὁ of 
Χείρωνα διὰ δικαιότητα. ὃ δὲ λαβὼν ἐχάρη TH 


wm 


Io 


15 


25 


CYNEGETICUS OF XENOPHON _ 61 


Ν Lal ἘΞ Ν A 
δώρῳ καὶ ἐχρῆτο᾽ Kat ἐγένοντο αὐτῷ μαθηταὶ κυνη- 
΄ \ ¢ 7 A N 3 N 
γεσίων τε Kal ἑτέρων καλῶν Θησεὺς Ὀδυσσεὺς 
Διομήδης Κάστωρ Πολυδεύκης Αἰνείας ᾿Αχιλλεύς, 
- Ν , 7 eas A 3 , \ 
ὧν κατὰ χρόνον ἕκαστος ὑπὸ θεῶν ἐτιμήθη. Θησεὺς 
\ \ \ ne aS > \ , , 
μὲν yap τοὺς τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἐχθροὺς πάσης μόνος 
ἀπώλεσε, τὴν δ᾽ αὑτοῦ πατρίδα πολλῷ μείζ Ἵ 
π ἌΡΤΙ, ρ ᾧ μείζω ποιήσας 
» 4 5 4 39 
ἔτι καὶ νῦν θαυμάζεται. ᾿Οδυσσεὺς δὲ καὶ Διομήδης 
λαμπροὶ μὲν καὶ καθ᾽ ἕν ἕκαστον, τὸ δὲ ὅλον αἴτιοι 
Τροίαν ἁλῶναι: Κάστωρ δὲ καὶ Πολυδεύκης, ὅσα 
ἐπεδείξαντο ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι τῶν παρὰ Χείρωνος, διὰ 
Ν > , Ν > , > κα / - | 3 ra , 
τὸ ἀξίωμα τὸ ἐκ τούτων ἀθάνατοί εἰσιν. Αἰνείας δέ, 
’ Ν Ν ἣν Ἃ 4 
σώσας μὲν τοὺς πατρῴους Kal μητρῴους θεούς, 
, \ Ν ἊΝ Ν Z. ΄, > , 
σώσας δὲ Kal αὐτὸν τὸν πατέρα, δόξαν εὐσεβείας 
» / 9 Ν € 7, ty 5 ΄ὔ ® 
ἐξηνέγκατο, ὥστε καὶ οἵ πολέμιοι μόνῳ ἐκείνῳ ὧν 
ἐκράτησαν ἐν Τροίᾳ ἔδοσαν μὴ συληθῆναι. ᾿Αχιλ- 
Ν A a 4 “Ὁ 7 4 4 Ν ΩΝ 
λεὺς δὲ ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ παιδείᾳ τραφείς, οὕτω καλὰ καὶ 
μεγάλα μνημεῖα παρέδωκεν ὥστε οὔτε λέγων οὔτε 
ἀκούων περὶ ἐκείνου οὐδεὶς ἀπαγορεύει. οὗτοι τοιοῦ- 
τοι ἐγένοντο ἐκ τῆς ἐπιμελείας τῆς παρὰ Χείρωνος. 
᾿Ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν παραινῶ τοῖς νέοις μὴ καταφρονεῖν 
΄ ΕΣ 39 ἌΠΟΥΝ δὴν 15 , \ 
κυνηγεσίων μηδὲ τῆς ἄλλης παιδείας " ἐκ τούτων γὰρ 
΄ 4 3 Ἀ , : 9 ey <x 
γίγνονται τὰ εἰς TOV πόλεμον ἀγαθοί, εἴς τε τὰ ἄλλα 
3 & 3 ’ “ Cond Ν , ‘ / 
ἐξ ὧν ἀνάγκη καλῶς νοεῖν καὶ λέγειν Kal πράττειν. 
5 ’ 39 ε 9 7 7, “ » 
ὠφελήσονται δ᾽ οἱ ἐπιθυμήσαντες τούτου τοῦ ἔργου 
πολλά᾽ ὑγίειάν τε γὰρ τοῖς σώμασι παρασκευάσουσι 
καὶ ὁρᾶν καὶ ἀκούειν μᾶλλον, γηράσκειν δὲ ἧττον" 
Ν δὲ x A , ἊΣ ὃ , Τὰν A δὲ 
τὰ δὲ πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον μάλιστα παιδεύει. ἑώρων δὲ 
καὶ οἱ πρόγονοι ἡμῶν ὅτι τῶν νεωτέρων ἡ ἡδονὴ μόνη 
αὕτη πλεῖστα ἀγαθὰ παρασκευάζει. σώφρονάς τε 


62 ATTIC PROSE 


Ν Ν 3 “A b , 
yap ποιεῖ καὶ δικαίους διὰ τὸ ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ Tar 
, > , \ Varn’ 20 ay A \ 
δεύεσθαι. ἀμείνους δὲ καὶ ot ἐθέλοντες πονεῖν. καὶ 
“ ’ ὺ A ‘ 
τοῦτο ἐπιδέδεικται μεγάλῳ παραδείγματι: τῶν yap 
4 > , ΄ 
παλαιοτέρων οἱ παρὰ Χείρωνι, ὧν ἐπεμνήσθην, νέοι 
»” 3 7, > Ν. “A ’ὔ λλὰ XN Na 

5 ὄντες ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῶν κυνηγεσίων πολλὰ καὶ καλὰ 
» tows | -τ eZ 9 A tr > la ὃ δι ὍΝ 
ἔμαθον ἐξ ὧν ἐγένετο αὐτοῖς μεγάλη ἀρετή, Ov ἣν 

ἊΝ - φ x 5. κα , 
καὶ νῦν θαυμάζονται. ἧς ὅτι μὲν ἐρῶσι πάντες, 
2 9 \ Ν ld ¥ A > a ε 
εὔδηλον " ὅτι δὲ διὰ πόνων ἔστι τυχεῖν αὐτῆς, οἱ 

Ν 5 if Ν Ν Ν 4 0 
πολλοὶ ἀφίστανται. τὸ μὲν yap κατεργάσασθαι 
Ley. μέ ε Ν ’ ε > > “ ae 

10 αὐτὴν ἄδηλον, ot δὲ πόνοι οἱ ἐν αὐτῇ ἐνόντες 
φανεροί. 

A A 9 
Θαυμάζω δὲ τῶν σοφιστῶν καλουμένων, ὅτι φασὶ 
A >. 9 > Ν »” ε Ν Ν ’ ᾿, δ᾽ 
μὲν ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν ἀγειν οἱ πολλοὶ τοὺς νέους, ἀγουσι 
ἐπὶ τοὐναντίον" οὐ γὰρ ἄνδρα που ἑωράκαμεν ὅντιν᾽ 
ε “ Ν > AG > ’, r foe. δὲ io , 

15 οἱ νῦν σοφισταὶ ἀγαθὸν ἐποίησαν. ἐγὼ O€ ἰδιώτης 
μέν εἶμι, οἶδα δὲ ὅτι κράτιστον μέν ἐστι παρὰ αὐτῆς 
τῆς φύσεως τὸ ἀγαθὸν διδάσκεσθαι, δεύτερον δὲ 

Q an 5 A > , 3 , A 
παρὰ τῶν ἀληθῶς ἀγαθόν τι ἐπισταμένων, μᾶλλον 
ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν ἐξαπατᾶν τέχνην ἐχόντων. ἴσως οὖν τοῖς 

A 5 ’ > , 4 3 Ν Ν 

20 μὲν ὀνόμασιν οὐ σεσοφισμένως λέγω" οὐδὲ γὰρ 
ζητῶ τοῦτο" ὧν δὲ δέονται εἰς ἀρετὴν οἱ καλῶς 

ὃ , > θῶ > , lal 4 > , 
πεπαιδευμένοι, ὀρθῶς ἐγνωσμένα ζητῶ λέγειν. ὀνό- 
ματα μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἂν παιδεύσειαν, γνῶμαι δέ, εἰ 
καλῶς ἔχοιεν. ψέγουσι δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι πολλοὶ τοὺς 

25 νῦν σοφιστὰς καὶ οὐ τοὺς φιλοσόφους, ὅτι ἐν τοῖς 
ὀνόμασι σοφίζονται καὶ οὐκ ἐν τοῖς νοήμασιν. τὰ 

A > A nw 
μὲν οὖν τῶν σοφιστῶν παραγγέλματα παραινῶ 

, “ 

φυλάττεσθαι, τὰ δὲ τῶν φιλοσόφων ἐνθυμήματα μὴ 
- ἀτιμάζειν. 


CYNEGETICUS OF XENOPHON 63 


, A Ἁ ͵ὔ A ἈΝ Lal 
Λόγοι δὲ παλαιοὶ κατέχουσιν ὡς καὶ θεοὶ τούτῳ τῷ 

ΕἾ , Ν ’ ‘ 
ἔργῳ χαίρουσι Kal πράττοντες καὶ ὁρῶντες" ὥστε 
ε , 9 , , lal > > A 
ὑπάρχειν ἐνθυμουμένους τούτων θεοφιλεῖς τ᾽ εἶναι καὶ 
Ν “ ἃ an 
εὐσεβεῖς τοὺς νέους τοὺς ποιοῦντας ἃ ἐγὼ παραινῶ, 

5 ὔ ε Ν A ε A “ 4 3. *# 

οἰομένους ὑπὸ θεῶν του ὁρᾶσθαι ταῦτα. οὗτοι δ᾽ ἂν 


ui 


> Ν la > Ν Ν ’ὔ “ ε an , 

εἶεν καὶ τοκεῦσιν ἀγαθοὶ Kal πάσῃ TH ἑαυτῶν πόλει 
Me VEL α / ων a \ 4 > , δὲ 

καὶ ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν πολιτῶν καὶ φίλων. οὐ μόνον δὲ 

9 ᾿Ξ , > , δον. ὧδ > δ᾽ 

ὅσοι ἄνδρες κυνηγεσίων ἠράσθησαν ἐγένοντο ἀγαθοί, 

> \ \ A oe » e N a > , 

_ ἀλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκες αἷς ἔδωκεν ἡ θεὸς ταῦτα, ᾿Αταλάντη 

\ 4 \ » ¥ 
10 καὶ Πρόκρις Kat εἴ τις GAA. 


—vos exemplaria Graeca 
nocturnad versate manu, versate diurna. 


EXERCISES AND GUIDE 


THE Greek language, like any other, is to be learned in the 
first instance through observation and use. Here, as elsewhere, 
empirical acquisition must be in advance of what is theoretical or 
systematic. The latter, however, should follow closely and attend 
constantly upon the former, to help in converting knowledge into 
power, and to lend the precision and fineness that are essential to 
scholarship. The observations of the reading mind need to be 
sharpened, checked, and, as it were, recorded upon the memory by 
the practice of the writing hand. All exercise of accurate writing, 
10 whether by way of simple copying, translation or re-translation, or 

original composition, encourages a habit of wholesome reflection, 

besides prompting frequent reference to system and principle as 
exhibited in the grammar and lexicon. 
Intuition and Imitation.— The faculty of idiomatic expression is 
15 derived primarily, in great part, from imitation, conscious or uncon- 
scious. Mastery of a foreign idiom, in speaking or writing, can never 
be acquired by the way of abstract notions, but grows out of the con- 
templation of real phenomena. Thus, to make a sort of prose that 
would have been intelligible to Xenophon of Athens, one must first 
20 become familiar with the Attic mode of expression, as brought to view 
in the works of that author or of some other writer of his time and 
class. Such familiarity is not to be gained by preparing analytical 
translations, deliberately framed to illustrate a set of rules that would 
have seemed strange and meaningless to the Grecian mind. It must 
come by a process that is mainly intuitive — by the reading aloud 
and hearing read, the frequent reciting of Greek originals, unob- 
_scured and unimpeded by the effort to construct a translation — 
gathering the ideas synthetically, with imagination rather than by 
reason, and more through the ear than through the eye, in the 
30 Greek order of their presentation, with the indispensable help of 
' ATTIC PROSE — 5 65 


un 


2 


wn 





66 ATTIC PROSE 


the embodied rhythmical effects. The writing that follows or 
accompanies such practice will prove good and genuine in about 
the same proportion as the writer, when reading, has conned his 
models with sympathetic, true, and comprehensive insight. 

Rhetorical Articulation. — The primal units of literary expression 
are single words; and to accumulate a good working vocabulary in 
Greek there is need of clear discernment and alert attention on the 
reader’s part, as well as much patient investigation and reflective 
thought. For idiomatic writing, however, we have to consider not 
10 merely the definition of words, but the Grecian way of combining and 
arranging them to form composite rhetorical factors of a higher grade. 
In fluent discourse, while the essential meaning of every word em- 
ployed is strictly essential also to the whole effect, the individuality 
of the words nevertheless comes to be modified and merged, to a 
greater or less degree, in the unity of larger constituents. The articu- 
lations which enable the speaker or writer to convey his thought 
with distinctness to another’s mind are determined primarily for the 
most part by groups of words, not by words apprehended singly. 
The immediately effective masses are the larger and smaller sense- 
20 groups. Moreover, these masses are essentially and always rhe- 
torical, only occasionally and incidentally grammatical, units. That 
is to say, all complex intelligible utterance is addressed to the same 
powers as those from which it emanates— to the constructive, not 
the destructive, powers of the mind. If the rhetorical or synthetic 
framework of a Greek period be overlaid upon the analytic or gram- 
matical framework, the two sets of joints will be found but partially 
to coincide; and in living organic speech the former only are 
apparent. Thus, while a practical acquaintance with the funda- 
mental principles of grammar is indeed the condicio sine qua non 
of intelligibility, skill and power of recognition or expression cap 
advance only pari passu with the receding of grammatical con- 
sciousness. 

In the sphere of humane culture rhetoric, or the art of expres- 
sion, is the positive, grammar the negative pole — vértus est 
vitium fugere. For reading or for writing, the Greek language 
must be observed and studied always with a rhetorical, never with 
a grammatical, purpose. Ideas are presented and apprehended 
humanly, not according to diagrams and formulas, but in waves and 
pulsations. The factors of discourse are units of perception and 


unr 


- 
wn 


2 


αι 


ο 


3 


3 


un 


ΛῈΣ 
ΕΝ 


WRITER’S GUIDE 67 


feeling ; and whether the rhetorical unit happens to be also a gram- 
matical unit, a clause or a complete judgment, or not, is a matter of 
indifference to the genuine reader pr writer. The articulations of 
which he is primarily conscious are those produced by the succes- 
sion of rhetorical factors, as such. The ifternal constitution of these 
factors, however, as well as the massing of them to form the period, 
must be noted by the learner: he must understand the order both 
of words and of groups of words; for in Greek the order is every- 
thing. This subject lies at the very beginning of Greek study; and 
10 for first steps a fortunate field of observation is afforded by Xeno- 
phon, with his extreme simplicity of thought and manner, the absence 
of a conscious artistic purpose, his Athenian lucidity and neatness. 

Lesser Rhetorical Masses. — The earliest groups to attract atten- 
tion are naturally those of an introductory or transitional character. 

15 These must be carefully compared and studied (always in intelligible 
combination, with their supplementary context) with regard to the 
usual idiomatic arrangement of the elements of which they are com- 
posed. Especially the so-called particles, which the Greek employs 
with such fluency to indicate the logical concatenation of the thought, 

20 should be observed with regard both to their mutual collocation, and 
to their position relatively to more prominent words that give the, 
key-note as it were toa ee utterance. eee 

Οὐ γὰρ πολύ σοι--- τά τε yap ἄλλα --- Kal παῖδας δέ σοι ἐγώ-- καὶ 
ὃ μὲν δή --- ἐνταῦθα μέντοι ἤδη --- τέλος δ᾽ οὖν --- καὶ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον --- 

25 τοῦτο γὰρ ἄν --- οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ τοῦτο --- ὅτι ἄριστ᾽ ἄν μοι--- μὰ Δία 
μηδὲν τοίνυν --- εἰ μή τιν᾽ οὖν --- ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν δύο --- οἶσθα μὲν οὖν καὶ σύ 
— ἀκούσαντα δὲ ταῦτα τὸν Κῦρον --- καὶ γὰρ δή --- τί δ᾽ ἂν ἐγώ σοι --- 
τῇ μὲν γὰρ γυναικί --- 7 καὶ ἐμὲ οὖν --- καὶ ἃ μὲν ἂν αὐτῶν --- καὶ ὅ γε 
ξηρὸς σῖτος --- οἶδα γοῦν οὖσαν --- ἐν τοίνυν τῇ ᾿Ασῴᾳ --- τό τε οὖν πεζόν 

30 --- ἐνταῦθα δὴ ᾿Αγησίλαον --- εἴ γε μὴν αὖ καλόν. 

Here note, for example, the position of γάρ, δή, οὖν, relatively to 
each other and to μέν or 84 Observe the prominent position of 
words of negation, and the ways of placing particles in connexion 
with them. Observe also the frequent placing of one or more parti- 

35 cles in an inconspicuous and, at the same time, a sort of attributive 
position between article and noun, or between preposition and sub- 
stantive; likewise between ἄν and the relative pronoun or adverb 
to which ἄν is regularly appended when the subjunctive mode is 
needed. Note especially the position of dy in its potential use, 


wn 


A “ eo o ἄλλα, FAO te ectewter tee eg 
ws ~ 5 ~ . . 
et Pon fz 2 Pe a Os »ντοοευῖ;» eu »Ὰ, eA... ᾿ς 


A iH. »... «ἡ ν᾿. - b 


yh ALLUDED 


68 ATTIC PROSE 


occurring as it mostly does early in the sentence and closely joined 
to some highly significant word, a negative, or an interrogative, or a 
prominent adverb, often, however, with some particle intervening. 
Similar effects to those of the particles are to be observed in the 
placing of enclitic pronouns, σοί, twa, and the like. 

Larger Rhetorical Masses.— By continuing these initial groups 
with their appropriate context we obtain larger effects of unity, more 
or less complex. The articulations indicated by the dividing line 
are sometimes to be marked by a perceptible pause in reciting, 
10 sometimes merely by the inflection or intonation of the voice: at 

any rate, on the part of a sympathetic reader a feeling for the right 

division and disposition of the masses is never absent; nor does 
he ever fail instinctively to lend to this feeling some intelligible 
form of oral expression. 

15 Οὐ γὰρ πολύ σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι κάλλιον 3 9 --- τά τε yap ἄλλα | σοῦ 
κάλλιον οἰνοχοήσω 4 15 — καὶ παῖδας δέ σοι ἐγὼ συμπαίστορας παρίξω 

6 4—kal ὃ μὲν δὴ ὑπερέχαιρεν 9 11 --- ἐνταῦθα μίντοι ἤδη | καὶ ὃ 

θεῖος αὐτῷ ἐλοιδορεῖτο 9 19 --- τέλος δ᾽ οὖν | πολλὰ θηρία ἔχων ὃ 

᾿Αστυάγης | ἀπήει 12 το --- καὶ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον οἱ παῖδες ἔσκωπτον 
20 αὐτόν 13 27 --- τοῦτο γὰρ ἂν οἶμαι ἀγαθὸν κἀμοὶ γενέσθαι 17 22 --- 

οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἐψεύσατο 19 18 — ὅτι ἄριστ᾽ ἄν μοι δοκεῖς εἰκάσαι 
τοῦτο 211 --- μὰ Δία μηδὲν τοίνυν σὺ ἐμοὶ ἔτι βουλεύου ἀποκρίνασθαι 

21 9 -- εἰ μή Tw’ οὖν ἄλλον τρόπον ἔχετε λέγειν 22 2ο--- ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν 

δύο ἄνδρες | ὃ ἕτερος ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου ἑστηκὼς | τοῦ ὕδατος ὑπερέχοιεν 
25 32 25 — οἶσθα μὲν οὖν καὶ σὺ | ὅτι οὐ τόδε τὸ χρυσοῦν σκῆπτρον | 

τὸ τὴν βασιλείαν διασῴζόν ἐστιν 31 4 --- ἀκούσαντα δὲ ταῦτα τὸν 

Κῦρον | ἡσθῆναί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν 38 28 --- καὶ γὰρ δὴ | τά γε ἐν τῇ 

οἰκίᾳ μου | πάνυ καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ γυνή ἐστιν ἱκανὴ διοικεῖν 41 7. --- τί δ᾽ ἂν 

ἐγώ σοι δυναίμην συμπρᾶξαι 42 2ο--- τῇ μὲν γὰρ γυναικὶ | κάλλιον 
30 ἔνδον μένειν 43 29 --- ἢ καὶ ἐμὲ οὖν δεήσει ταῦτα ποιεῖν 44 21 --- καὶ ἃ 
μὲν ἂν αὐτῶν δέῃ δαπανᾶν | σοὶ διανεμητέον 44 26--- καὶ ὅ γε Enpods 
σῖτος | ὅπως καλῶς ἐδώδιμος γίγνηται | ἐπιμελητέον 45 1 --- οἶδα 
γοῦν οὖσαν | καὶ ἀσπίδα καλὴν καὶ ξίφος καὶ δόρυ 47 23 --- ἐν τοίνυν 
τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ | ἧδε πρώτη πρᾶξις ἐγένετο 53 18 ---τό τε οὖν πεζὸν εἰς 
Καρίαν διεβίβασε 54 10 — ἐνταῦθα δὴ ᾿Αγησίλαον | ἀνδρεῖον μὲν 
ἔξεστιν εἰπεῖν 57 27 --- εἴ γε μὴν αὖ καλὸν [ Ἕλλην᾽ ὄντα φιλέλλην᾽ 
εἶναι 59 12. 

Responsiveness of the Greek Language.— The saying, “Well 
begun is half done,” has a peculiar aptness to the task of writing 


Οζι. γ' eae Fee A rr ‘ 3 


un 


3 


wm 


wn 


20 


2 


αι 


30 


35 


WRITER’S GUIDE 69 


Attic prose. The learner who promptly starts his Greek sentence 
in the right way, impelled by a true synthetic feeling, must have 
already conquered in great measure the difficulties of the finish. 
For in a language where the arrangement of the words is largely 
independent of the grammatical construction there must be a 
facile comprehension of the grammatical form before the mind 
can deal freely with the effects of order. As regards the larger 
groupings, in good writing, the arrangement is mainly the same in 
English as in Greek, when the intention is the same; hence in 
translating, the order of the principal masses must usually be pre- 
served, with such shifting of the grammatical construction as the 
difference of idiom may demand. But in dealing with words, the 
subtle effects of position are elusive, sometimes fairly untranslatable ; 
and here the writer of Greek has, in the direct and immediate re- 
sponsiveness of the instrument at his command, an advantage over 
the writer of a modern analytical language, for which only rare power 
and consummate skill can even partially compensate. In English 
the order of words, individually considered, is hampered by the law 
of intelligibility ; rhetoric is at the mercy of grammar: but in Greek, 
where grammar and rhetoric are rather harmonious than inter- 
dependent, there is, from the largest to the smallest element, a well- 
nigh perfect freedom of arrangement. 

The Greek Order. — The Greek principle of order is that of natural 
suggestiveness and succession of ideas, as determined, for any given 
moment, by the mood and purpose of the speaker or writer. The 
thought which first arises before his mind first finds expression ; the 
next arising is next expressed; and so on through a series of ideas, 
simple and complex, until the last that mentally presents itself is 
presented also verbally as the last. We cannot say that in Greek the 
thoughts are arranged in the direct order of their importance, since 
there are various phases of importance, variously interpreted ; nor in 
the order of emphasis, as the word is now commonly understood. 
In the antique sense of the term, however, an emphatic position is a 
position of priority; and such a place in the series may at any time 
be held by a member which, from some point of view other than 
that of natural suggestiveness and straight-forward mental move- 
ment, is of inferior importance. The power of ideas — their ethical 
character of force, weight, color —is inherent in the symbols chosen 
to represent them; but the order in which they occur to the mind, 


70 


unr 


_ 
ο 


20 


25 


30 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


and are arranged in Greek writing, is not conditioned by these 
qualities as such. The beauty of the Greek order consists in its 
spontaneity, due to the mutual independence and harmonious co- 
operation of rhetorical and grammatical form. The sequence and 
involution of the words reflect intimately the sequence and involu- 
tion of the thoughts; and the flow of the thoughts is determined, in 
any given situation, by a power evolved, according to laws which can- 
not be precisely formulated, from the author’s intention and state of 
mind. To know the author and his language, to be educated by 
him, to fall under his spell, and finally with some measure of success 
to imitate his art, the learner must, as far as possible, make that 
intention and state of mind his own. 

The arbitrary restrictions of our idiom are such as to produce 
regularly, in certain forms of expression, the effect of an ascending 
scale. Hence often in translating from the Greek the only arrange- 
ment permissible in English prose exhibits an inverted order of the 
words: ἔρχεται Μανδάνη --- ὡς ἥδιστα δειπνεῖν --- σοῦ κάλλιον oivoxo- 
ήσω ---ἴπποις τοῖς ἐμοῖς χρήσει. Similarly in dependent clauses: 
ὅτι μένειν βούλοιτο --- ἵνα νεανίας οἴκαδε ἀπέλθῃς --- ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα 
ἱππεύειν μάθῃς. In Greek, however, the order is variable. “H μήτηρ 
διηρώτα τὸν Κῦρον | πότερον βούλοιτο μένειν ἢ ἀπιέναι 6 7. In the 
mother’s question βούλεσθαι, the thought of preferring one thing to 
another, is foremost and precedes μένειν, in the utterance as in its 
position before the mind of the speaker. But in the child’s reply, 
ταχὺ εἶπεν | ὅτι μένειν βούλοιτο 6 9, the same βούλεσθαι, having 
been once presented and having served its turn, has passed into 
the background of thought and expression, while μένειν has come 
forward. The English order in both question and answer must be 
the same; but in the answer we indicate the natural priority of the 
idea ¢o remain by a somewhat sharper intonation—there is an 
ascending scale. But in pronouncing the Greek, where the order 
shows everything, no change in the tone-levels would be needed. 
Again, after ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα ἱππεύειν μάθῃς (‘learn to ride’) 6 2, 
we find ἢν μάθω ἱππεύειν (‘do learn to ride’) 6 15: a change of 
word-sequence in the Greek answering precisely to the change of 
thought-sequence ; while in English, where the order of the words 
is constant, the re-arrangement of the thoughts is shown as usual 
by the tone or by a modified form of expression. 

First come, first served.—In consequence of ‘the frequency of 


5 


Ιο 


Ι 


ωι 


20 


25 


30 


3 


unr 


40 


WRITER’S GUIDE 71 


the ascending scale in our idiom, the Greek is apt to convey to us 
correspondingly the effect of a descending scale. Since, however, 
the Greek order of words is not fixed, but adjustable to the order 
of ideas ; and since, assuredly, the flow of human thought may fairly 
be conceived rather as a forward than as a downward movement — 
therefore we ought to term the Greek order neither ascending nor 
descending, but simply direct. The question of arrangement is 
essentially not a question of higher or lower, stronger or weaker, 
worse or better, but of sooner or later for the nonce. First come, 
first served !—a democratic principle that recognizes no privileged 
right to the same order of precedence on separate occasions; and 
each rhetorical unit offers a new occasion. 

Πατρὸς μὲν δὴ ὃ Κῦρος λέγεται γενέσθαι Καμβύσεω Περσῶν 
βασιλέως, ‘the father of Cyrus is said to have been Cambyses, king 
of Persia,’ 1 1.1 In the work of Xenophon entitled The Education 
of Cyrus the principal personage is of course everywhere Cyrus him- 
self. But at the point where the passage above quoted occurs, the 
hero, who has already been introduced to the reader, while main- 
taining the dignity of grammatical subject, falls behind, so far as 
the order of words is concerned, to give precedence in this regard 
to his father, who is here for the first time presented. As usual, 
the zew thought, as first-comer, assumes the first position. 


1 As Greek can be intelligently written, so it can be really translated, 
only-#vith due regard to the order — which is equivalent to saying that it 
cannot be translated until it is fully comprehended. The passage above 
quoted can be turned into English in but one way. It should be noted 
also that real translation demands not merely the sacrifice of grammar to 
position, but often the replacing or the suppression of certain elements, as 
of γενέσθαι in the present passage. Compare the beginning of the Anaba- 
sis, Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, ‘Darius and Parysatis 
had two sons,’ where, again, the construction must be deferred to the order, 
and the specific meaning of ylyvovra replaced. In fact, while grammar 
holds the key to interpretation, with translation it has no concern whatever. 
Δεῖ τὴν βασιλείαν σαφηνίσαντα καταλιπεῖν, “1 must indicate with certainty 
the succession to the throne before I leave it,’ 30 20. Τί ἂν ἐπισταμένην 
αὐτὴν παρέλαβον, ‘ What cou/d she have known when I took her (παρέλα- 
Bov &v)?’ 4113. Τί ὁρᾷς ὅ τι ἂν ἐγὼ ποιοῦσα συναύξοιμι τὸν οἶκον, ‘What 
do you see that I can do to help in increasing the estate?’ 42 27. All 
translation that deliberately aims at reproducing the grammatical form as 
such and the specific meaning of every word, since this can be done only 
at the risk of falsifying the sense, is pseudo-translation. 


72 


wn 


Io 


I5 


20 


2 


uw 


ATTIC PROSE 


Xenophon has composed what purports to be the charge of Cam- 
byses, formally addressed to the peers of the Persian community 
and to his son, when the latter returned to his native state after the 
capture of Babylon. First touching briefly the mutual services of 
these two parties, and the sentiments which ought respectively to 
animate them, Cambyses then goes on to say: ἢν μὲν οὖν καὶ τὸ 
λοιπὸν οὕτω γιγνώσκητε | πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν αἴτιοι ἀλλή- 
λοις ἔσεσθε (‘ye will be to one another authors of many blessings’) ; 
εἰ δὲ ἢ σὺ (Cyrus) . . . ἐπιχειρήσεις Περσῶν ἄρχειν ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ | 
... ἢ ὑμεῖς (Persians) . . . καταλύειν πειράσεσθε τοῦτον τῆς ἀρχῆς | 

. ἐμποδὼν ἀλλήλοις πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν ἔσεσθε (‘ye 
will Aznder one another from many blessings’) 27 11. Here the 
English shows the ascending scale at the close of the first member 
of the period, but not of the second; the tone is shifted, while the 
order remains the same. But it is the order that changes in the 
Greek: ἐμποδών comes to the front as the new thought, while πολ- 
λῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν, already once presented, falls behind. Likewise, the 
suggestions of contrast have been at work here (ἐμποδών the oppo- 
site of αἴτιοι), to produce the so-called chiastic arrangement: ἀγαθῶν 
αἴτιοι " ἐμποδὼν ἀγαθῶν. Also, ἐπιχειρήσεις ἄρχειν " καταλύειν πειρά- 
σεσθε. --- Cf. 17 24-18 1, the two positions of τοὺς στρατιώτας. 

The Group as Unit.—TIt is essential to a sound comprehension 
of the principle of the Greek order that the rhetorical precedence 
of the complex factor over the individual word should hg clearly 
recognized. The order is revealed by counting wmzts; and the 
sensible unit is in the first instance not the word, but the group. 


. Occasionally, though rarely, the waves or pulsations of thought 


30 


35 


proceed with perfect regularity and simplicity in the form of single 
words, so that in counting the words we count also the units: 
ἐωθοῦντο | ἐμάχοντο | ἀπέκτεινον | ἀπέθνῃσκον 58 4. But commonly 
the undulations are of varying length and volume, and, genetically, 
anything but simple. They might be conceived as successive rings 
or spirals, which have a distinct unity of their own, while within 
them the individuality of many a word, otherwise significant enough, 
becomes rhetorically submerged and subordinated. Μικρὸν ἔχων 
χιτῶνα, ‘wearing a small tunic’: first count ove; the group is the 
unit, to begin with. When next, however, we consider the arrange- 
ment of the words inside the group, we find μικρόν taking prece- 
dence of χιτῶνα, because the small size of the tunic is the new and 


ea 


wn 


20 


25 


30 


3 


ut 


WRITER'S GUIDE 73 


foremost thought in the premises, the presence of the garment itself 
being taken for granted. Secondarily, therefore, we may count one, 
two: (1) μικρόν, (2) χιτῶνα : but not one, two, ¢hree; for the word 
ἔχων is not co-ordinate with μ. and x., but rather subordinate to 
their collective notion — so that we might count one, two in another 
way: (I) μικρὸν χιτῶνα, (2) ἔχων. Why, then, did not Xenophon 
write μικρὸν χιτῶνα éxwv? Simply because ἔχων, as an individual, 
was swept away and lost to view, under the unifying power of the 
stream of thought. 

Take, again, ὡς δ᾽ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα, ‘as soon as she arrived,’ 2 1. 
In such a complex are we to begin by counting the words, and try 
to explain matters by insisting that ἀφίκετο stands before τάχιστα, 
or τάχιστα after apixero? Certainly not. Here is a question not 
of one, two, or of one, two, three, but simply of ove. By the driv- 
ing of ἀφίκετο into the centre of ὡς τάχιστα the double purpose is 
served of expanding the phrase and minimizing the individuality 
of the word. We may not say that τάχιστα is emphatic (supposing 
some invariable meaning of the word emphatic to have been agreed 
upon) because it is placed last; for then what right should we have 
to deny that the last word must be emphatic in ws δὲ τάχιστα ἀφί- 
kero? Nor may we say that τάχιστα, in ὡς δ᾽ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα, is 
emphatic because it holds an unusual position (supposing some 
particular position to have been agreed upon as the usual one) ; for, 
by the same token ἀφίκετο would be emphatic also. We may, 
however, affirm that the unit ὡς δ᾽ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα is more impos- 
ing than the unit ὡς τάχιστα would be; and that ὡς δ᾽ ἀφίκετο 
τάχιστα, though composite in nature, is nevertheless, for the main 
effect, one and indivisible, while ws δὲ τάχιστα ἀφίκετο would 
be more readily suggestive of subdivision. We might fancifully 
say that the idea ὡς τάχιστα, as it rose swiftly before the writer's 
mind, acquired such momentum and volume as to swallow its parent 
ἀφίκετο and bear it along in a position of comparative helplessness 
and obscurity. 

Figurative language apart, the phenomenon under consideration 
is really a phase of periodic structure. As the whole period, a com- 
plex organism, derives its name from the inevitable tendency of 
synthetic utterance to hold thought in suspense until an effect of 
unity be secured by coming round again as it were to the point 
of departure, so within the several word-groups, practically indi- 


74 


on 


I 


° 


15 


20 


2 


wn 


30 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


visible, of which the period is composed, the same tendency is at 
work to produce an involved and rounded form. In μικρὸν ἔχων 
χιτῶνα and ws δ᾽ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα the grammatical nucleus is 
the verb itself; its position in the rhetorical mass which has grown 
out of it is due to the periodic impulse. From first to last it holds 
true, that the Greek order strictly reproduces the natural sequence 
and involution of ideas, from the largest to the smallest element. 

Yet one more illustration. Socrates, bent on making out a defi- 
nition of καλοκἀγαθία, finally determines to give over following after 
fair faces, and test the matter in the concrete, by going straight to 
one of the people who in fact received the appellation “fair and 
good”: ἔδοξεν οὖν μοι | ἀφέμενον τῆς καλῆς ὄψεως | ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν τινα 
ἐλθεῖν τῶν καλουμένων καλῶν τε κἀγαθῶν 40 8. The compact unity 
and imposing figure of the last colon or comma strike the hearer at 
once. The grammatical nucleus ἐλθεῖν is linked to the surrounding 
envelope by the preposition and its immediate object τινά, the latter 
being similarly involved as ἐλθεῖν itself. Here again we can count 
only one, to begin with. Probing farther, however, more deeply than 
the speaker can consciously have gone, we may count two: (1) αὐτῶν 
τῶν καλουμένων καλῶν τε κἀγαθῶν, (2) ἐπί τινα ἐλθεῖν. Analyzing 
(1), we find it double, the intensive αὐτῶν naturally taking the pre- 
cedence. Dissecting its latter portion, τῶν καλουμένων καλῶν τε 
κἀγαθῶν, the principle of priority is confirmed to the last: καλεῖσθαι, 
newcomer for the nonce by contrast with ὄψεως, is emphasized, 
while the appellation itself falls behind. It is instructive to com- 
pare with this the arrangement of another passage, θαυμάζω τῶν 
σοφιστῶν καλουμένων 62 12: here the appellation σοφισταί is the 
newcomer and takes precedence of καλεῖσθαι. 

Period, Antithesis, Chiasmus.— The processes of human thought 
are marvelously fine, subtle, and intricate. The psychologist may 
explain them, if he can; skill and power in language consist in the 
ability, not to explain, but to follow them. Good writing comes 
rather from frequent practice, together with the contemplation of 
worthy models, than from any habit of speculation or analysis. Yet 
it can hardly be denied that the Attic Greek, by reason of its flexi- 
bility, clearness, and simple precision, affords a more instructive 
opportunity of observing some of the primary mental movements 
underlying literary expression than could elsewhere be gained from 
the phenomena of mere written language. Period, antithesis, chias- 


5 


10 


15 


20 


25 


30 


35 


WRITER'S GUIDE 75 


mus — these and other technical terms, albeit as names often highly 
artificial, stand in fact for natural impulses of the most elementary 
character. As a brief illustration we may take the period which 
presents Xenophon’s statement of a certain case at law, celebrated 
for the decision rendered by the boy judge, Cyrus, 71: 


(1) παῖς μέγας μικρὸν ἔχων χιτῶνα 

(2) παῖδα μικρὸν μέγαν ἔχοντα χιτῶνα 

(3) ἐκδύσας αὐτόν 

(4) τὸν μὲν ἑαυτοῦ ἐκεῖνον ἠμφίεσε 

(5) τὸν δὲ ἐκείνου αὐτὸς ἐνέδυ. 
Perfectly natural is the mutually antithetic arrangement of (1) and 
(2), and again of (4) and (5), shown with great clearness, as here 
printed, in consequence of the equal numbers of the antitheta, — 
one picture of the two litigants as they confronted each other in the 
original scene; another, of the two final high-handed acts of the 
aggressor. But no less natural, and equally far from any artful 
design on the writer’s part, is the chiastic order seen in (1) and in 
(2), and again in (4) and in (5). 

A chiastic arrangement may result, not from a suggestion of con- 
trast, but merely from the due recession of some word or phrase, 
when the mean terms are like or synonymous. Thus, οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἱ 
ἄλκιμοι δύναιντο ζῆν | εἰ μὴ εἶεν οἱ ἐργαζόμενοι, ‘the valiant them- 
selves would be unable to live, were the tillers of the soil not there,’ 
37 22. Order,abbc. The mean terms, ζῆν and εἶναι, are brought 
into juxtaposition (very neatly, to be sure) merely by the receding 
of οἱ ἐργαζόμενοι, which would have no right to an emphatic place 
immediately after the same thought has been explicitly enunciated, 
τοὺς κατασκευάζοντας τὰς χώρας κτλ. 37 21.—Such is chiasmus. 
Antithesis, on the other hand, is not of contrast and recession, but 
of simple opposition. Another series, of similar but ew members, 
is brought ‘face to face’ with the first series. 


pS ΐ παῖς --- μέγας ---« μικρὸν --- χιτῶνα : chiasmus } 


παῖδα --- μικρὸν >< μέγαν --- χιτῶνα : chiasmus 


abbic i 
ἐν» Ὁ 
Finally, it is worthy of remark, that when chiasmus occurs in Eng- 
lish, as not infrequently in poetry, it affords relief from the rather 


76 


5 


I 


un 


20 


25 


30 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


tiresome ascending scale imposed by the limitations of prosaic 
speech; as in the closing line of Milton’s Lycidas: 


To-morrow to fresh woods and fastures new. 


Euphony.— A sense of euphony often appears to be the final 
determining motive in the arrangement of words. Among several 
possible positions, any one of which would convey the whole intended 
meaning with sufficient precision, the choice is apt to be made (that is 
to say, the thoughts are prone to flow) in obedience to an instinctive 
desire to avoid harsh or disturbing sounds, and secure agreeable effects 
of melody and cadence. Even in the selection of the words them- 
selves the same motive is ever at work, under the same limitations. 
But euphony of language is only part of a greater harmony; it is 
not of the ear alone, but of the soul. Sense and sound are in- 
separably bound together, particularly in a dialect moulded by the 
use of a sensitive artistic people. Hence, if at any time the Greek 
which we have written seems to sound badly, the reason is probably 
that we have not succeeded in saying exactly what we meant to say: 
some word has been wrongly chosen, or a false or unusual form 
employed ; or we have not arranged the words idiomatically, as an 
Attic writer would have arranged them —in the order adapted to 
the most direct and telling presentation of the thought. 

Rhetoric and Grammar.— Underlying the rhetorical art, and 
intimately associated therewith, are the principles of grammar. 
Grammar is to the writer what drawing is to the painter. In order 
to achieve desired effects of color, grouping, and imagery, the 
artist must be able to draw correctly. There are certain well- 
defined laws of delineation and perspective which he may not 
violate and with which he ought to be acquainted, although the 
mere understanding of them would never enable him to paint a 
picture. So closely are rhetoric and grammar bound together 
that at some points of contact their respective functions are hardly 
distinguishable. But the learner should be warned against the 
danger of confusing them. The fundamental principles of gram- 
mar are absolute, and capable of exact definition; but the ways 
of applying them are manifold and_ various, subject ultimately 
to no limitations other than those of common sense. Thus, for 
example, the several forms of conditional clauses in Greek may be 
classified and defined with strict precision; but conditional sentences 


wn 


15 


25 


30 


35 


WRITER’S GUIDE 77 


are not amenable to scientific classification and definition. The 
meaning of the whole sentence, or hypothetical period, as it is some- 
times termed, is the result of combining a condition and a conclu- 
sion; and this meaning changes as the combination changes, while 
the inherent value of either member, considered apart from guiding 
suggestions of context or environment, remains simple and constant. 
Ei dvacrainre ὀρχησόμενοι does not admit various definitions and 
assume various meanings because the conclusion appended to it 
may at one time be οὐδ᾽ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε 5 7, at another time οὐκ 
ἂν δύναισθε, or οὐ δυνήσεσθε, or οὐ δύνασθε. The truth is that in 
passing from conditional clauses to conditional sentences we have 
virtually crossed the boundary line which divides science and art; 
and if we fail to realize the fact of this transition, we run the risk 
of misunderstanding the nature of both elements—of viewing 
grammatical principles which are absolute as if they were variable, 
while perversely attempting to fix by rule the shifting and arbitrary 
combinations of rhetoric. If, however, the distinction here pointed 
out be fairly borne in mind, there is secured, on the one side, a true 
grammar, a standard of first principles, for our guidance; while, on 
the other side, it becomes highly interesting and instructive to 
observe the numerous combinations that are rationally admissible, 
and to note the comparative frequency of their occurrence, as deter- 
mined, partly by the species of composition, partly by the idiosyn- 
crasies of the writer himself. 

Grammatical Terminology.— A word of warning is likewise needed 
with regard to certain wrong impressions apt to be conveyed by the 
traditional terminology of the Greek grammars. Technical terms 
cannot, at the best, serve the purpose of definition; as a rule, they 
can do no more than embody an appropriate thought for handy refer- 
ence. But names that are positively false lead the learner astray and 
work insidious mischief in his mind, even when they are flatly contra- 
dicted by the explanations offered and the examples cited under 
them. An illustration of this evil is afforded by the terms “ pres- 
ent” and “imperfect,” as commonly employed. There is, indeed, 
an Imperfect stem, well so named, upon which are built familiar . 
forms of the Greek verb: λείπειν, λείπει, ἔλειπε, Aelia, λείποι, λεῖπε, 
λείπων are all true imperfects of the Active Voice; and λείπει and 
λέλοιπε are both truly present, one of the Imperfect, the other of 
the Perfect stem. Yet we hear of a “present” Infinitive, or a 


78 ATTIC PROSE 


“ present” Subjunctive, as if any mode except the Indicative could 

express time as past or present; while, again, the term “imperfect” 

is currently employed exactly as if some notion of past time could 

properly be conveyed by this word. Even the name “aorist” 
5 (ἀόριστος, indefinitus) comes to be associated in the minds of 
learners with a notion of past time, although in fact the only past 
form of the Aorist stem is the one that bears the augment, namely 
the Indicative. 

In truth there are two tenses of present time, the Present-Jmper- 
fect and the Present-Perfect. There are also the Past-/mperfect, 
the Past-Perfect, and the Past-Aorist. These are of the Indicative 
mode only. The properties and values of the several action-stems, 
clearly explained in the grammars, are common to all the modes and 
tenses formed thereon. The meaning of λείπειν is ‘to be leaving,’ 
15 while λιπεῖν means simply ‘to leave.’ Whatever is true of Aetreyr, 

as an Imperfect, is equally true of λείπει, ἔλειπε, λείπῃ, λείποι, λεῖπε, 

λείπων. Just as we have the several modes of the Aorist or the 

Perfect stem, so of the Imperfect stem we really find a present and 

a past Indicative; and there is a Subjunctive, an Optative, an Im- 
20 perative, an Infinitive, a Participle, of the /wPerfect, but of course 

not of the present. 

Temporal and Modal Expression.— The phenomena of Greek 
temporal and modal expression are to be classified and defined 
separately, by their essential marks and attributes— without con- 

25 fusion of the temporal and the modal principle. A conditional 
clause is essentially a modal form of expression, and the true 
division of conditions is according to the Modes employed in 
stating them. To refer εἰ δύναται or εἰ ἐδύνατο to a class of 

“present and past” conditions, as is sometimes done, is to convey 
30 to the learner no new truth about the verbal forms δύναται and 

ἐδύνατο, and no truth whatever that pertains to the clauses as con- 

ditionals. Both clauses, since they are expressed by means of the 

Indicative mode, are suppositions of the actual or real: just as ἢν 

δύνηται, by virtue of the Subjunctive mode, is a supposition of 
35 the possible or feasible; and εἰ δύναιτο, by virtue of the Optative 

mode, a supposition of the conceivable or ideal. Only secondarily 
and incidentally can a conditional clause convey a temporal idea: 
the Real Condition is the only sort of condition that can positively 
express time as well as manner, because the Indicative is the only 


I 


° 


wn 


10 


I 


uw 


20 


25 


35 


WRITER'S GUIDE 79 


mode which has temporal forms, except upon the Future stem. 
Therefore the attempt to classify conditions according to the ele- 
ment of time leads to results which are partly gratuitous (in the case 
of the Indicative mode) and partly false (in the case of the Subjunc- 
tive and Optative modes), while containing no suggestion of the value 
and significance of the clauses in respect of their conditional nature. 

Pure Conditional Clauses. — As original constructions, z.e. when 
not so dependent as to have assumed a secondary form or phase 
under the influence of a verb of past time governing the sentence, 
there are three pure conditionals in Attic prose. 

I. Supposition of the Actual, or Real Condition.—A supposed 
case, assumed or conceded as actual in present, past, or future time, 
zs stated by means of the Indicative. 

II. Supposition of the Possible, or Circumstantial Condition. — 
A supposed case is stated, not as actual, but as still possible, by means 
of the Subjunctive. 

III. Supposition of the Conceivable, or Vague Condition. — A 
supposed case, conceived without regard to time or possibility, ts 
stated by means of an Optative not of the Future. 

Pure conditional clauses once classified and defined, we are 
ready to consider the more or less usual combinations of them with 
other constructions to form the conditional sentence or hypothetical 
period. 

Real Condition. —I. As regards the Real Condition, it is to be 
observed, in the first place, that the Greek has no separate form to 
express an wureal condition. If the supposition of reality is intended 
as a false one, this unreality is shown only by the context, usually by 
the presence of a Potential of the Past in the conclusion of the sen- 
tence. Ei σοφὸς ἦν: ‘if he was wise,’ or ‘if he were wise ?? Which 
does it mean? Two forms in English, but only one inGreek! Fora 
specific interpretation of the supposition there is need of more than 
has yet been said. —‘ You are not often thus entirely at leisure,’ says 
Socrates to Ischomachus, finding him seated in the portico of a 
temple. Οὐδὲ ἄν ye viv, replies the latter, εἰ μὴ E€vovs τινὰς συνε- 
θέμην ἀναμΐνειν ἐνθάδε, ‘No, nor would I be so now, had J not 
agreed (the Greek says, d#d / not agree) to wait for certain friends 
from abroad in this place,’ 40 20. — King Agesilaus, recalled to Hellas 
by an official dispatch, from a foreign campaign successfully begun, 
ἐπείθετο τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν διαφερόντως ἢ εἰ ἐν τῷ ἐφορείῳ ἔτυχεν ἑστηκὼς 


Ι 


20 


2 


3 


3 


ὲ wn 


uw 


wn 


uw 


° 


ATTIC PROSE 


μόνος παρὰ τοὺς πέντε 56 8: 2.6. his obedience was as prompt and 
unhesitating as if, instead of being in Asia at the head ofa victorious 
army, he had chanced (the Greek says ‘if he chanced’) to be stand- 
ing alone in the presence of the five Ephors of Sparta. The precise 
interpretation of εἰ ἔτυχεν can only be got, yet is readily got, from 
the connection; there is, after 7, an easy ellipse of the Potential, 
ἐπείθετο av. 
The Real Condition of future time has always a marked rhetori- 
cal significance, varying slightly in tone according to the circum- 
stances indicated. For it is only by an act of the imagination, the 
result of heightened feeling, that a future contingency can be sup- 
posed as real. Ordinarily, when the point of view is future, the 
Supposition of the Possible is employed, as a matter of course. The 
Real Condition of the future is never a matter of course, but always 
implies a greater than ordinary interest in the case supposed; con- 
veying sometimes the effect of a threat or a warning, sometimes 
apprehension, dread, or anxious hope.! The difference between 
the Real and the Circumstantial Condition, rhetorically considered, 
is well shown in a passage already quoted from The Charge of Cam- 
byses 72 6. There, ἢν τὸ λοιπὸν οὕτω γιγνώσκητε, the form of 
condition ordinarily to be expected when the point of view is future, 
exhibits no unusual color; but in passing to εἰ σὺ ἐπιχειρήσεις 
ἄρχειν ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ, ἢ ὑμεῖς καταλύειν πειράσεσθε τοῦτον THs ἀρχῆς, 
the tone rises, and a note of warning is distinctly struck. See a 
precisely similar example in Last Words of Cyrus 32 14-17. Ad- 
monitory also is 59 26f. Again, Socrates, in the Symposium of 
Xenophon, is made to remark with pleasantry, that his choice of a 
helpmeet, like the selection by jockeys of more than usually mettle- 
some animals for practice in horse-breaking, afforded him an 
excellent propaedeutic discipline for successful dealings with man- 
kind in general: εὖ εἰδὼς ὅτι, εἰ ταύτην ὑποίσω (‘if I manage to 
endure her’), ῥᾳδίως τοῖς ye ἄλλοις ἅπασιν ἀνθρώποις συνέσομαι 49 
1ο. A matter-of-course ἢν ταύτην ὑποφέρω would have been feeble 
here; the prospect of sustaining or continuing to sustain matrimo- 
nial relations with a Xanthippe might well impress itself upon the 


1 The Supposition of the Possible may be employed in connection with 
an idea of apprehension or dread, as seen in the construction of the Sub- 
jective Conditional 90 38; but this idea is not suggested by the form of 
the condition itself, when the Subjunctive is used. 


WRITER'S GUIDE 81 


mind with peculiar vividness of apprehension. Note that in this 

passage also the Real Condition is preceded by the Circumstantial 

Condition in mentioning the horse-breakers, the unremarkable ἢν 

δύνωνται κατέχειν 49 7. 

5 Circumstantial Condition.—II. The Circumstantial Condition 
is employed in combination with the Universal Present, or with 
some other form of expression in which the point of view is not 
past. A past point of view and the Singular Present are excluded 
by virtue of the essential meaning of the Subjunctive mode. While 

10 the uses of the Latin subjunctive, so-named, are only to a limited 
extent the same as those of the Greek mode (in conditionals, totally 
diverse), the English and the Greek subjunctive are alike in nature. 

But the obsolescence of a distinction of form between indicative and 

subjunctive in the English language has tended to obscure this truth. 
15 Vague Condition.—III. The Vague Condition is exceedingly 

loose as to its rhetorical associations — Ζοζῶ passim regione vagatur. 

There is no limitation of the temporal point of view, as to present, 

past, or future. The conclusion, however, must be of an indefinite 

or a universal character; a specific or singular form of statement 
20 in the apodosis (an Indicative of the future is not such) would be 
inconsistent with the essential meaning of the Optative mode. The 
conclusion is often a Past-Imperfect, of habitual action; sometimes 
an Indicative of the future; less rarely a Universal Present; very 
often a Potential. But the characteristic vagueness finds expression 
in a great variety of ways— through an Infinitive or a verbal sub- 
stantive, or something of an elliptical or exclamatory nature. The 
royal cupbearers of the Orient, as Xenophon affirms, regularly taste 
the wine which they have poured, before offering the cup, τοῦ δὴ «i 
φάρμακα ἐγχέοιεν μὴ λυσιτελεῖν αὐτοῖς, ‘to the end forsooth that, 
30 supposing them to pour in deadly drugs, it may avail them not,’ 
4 19. — Χαρίεν, exclaims King Astyages, on being asked by his 
grandson if he might take the other boys and go a-hunting; χαρίεν, 
εἰ ἕνεκα Kpeadiov τῇ θυγατρὶ τὸν παῖδα ἀποβουκολήσαιμι, ‘A pretty 
mess, were I to let my daughter’s child stray from the fold, for the 
sake of a few morsels of meat!’ 11 26. Similarly, οὐδὲν ὄφελος 
(‘no use’) πολλὰ ἀροῦν, εἰ μὴ εἶεν οἱ ἀρήξοντες 37 20. 

The Vague Condition is a mere supposition, just the zdea and 
nothing more: putting as fanciful or impossible a case as the speaker 
_ may see fit to put; or, again, putting an ordinary case in what 

ATTIC PROSE — 6 


2 


wm 


3 


wn 


82 


un 


~ 
° 


2 


ο 


25 


ο 


3 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


might be termed a non-committal way, when for any reason the 
speaker sees fit so to put it. In the Symposium of Plato 175 D, 
upon the playful suggestion of Agathon, that by reclining next to 
Socrates at the banquet he might derive somewhat. of the philo- 
sophical through contact with the philosopher, the latter observes: 
Εὖ ἂν ἔχοι, εἰ τοιοῦτον εἴη ἡ σοφία ὥστ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ πληρεστέρου εἰς τὸν 
κενώτερον ῥεῖν ἡμῶν, ἐὰν ἁπτώμεθα ἀλλήλων, ‘It were a capital idea, 
supposing wisdom to be such a thing as to flow out of the fuller 
man into the emptier one among us, if we take hold of each other.’ 
Note that the fanciful and purely imaginary character of the first 
hypothesis is not shared by the second, ἐὰν ἁπτώμεθα ἀλλήλων. --- 
In The Death of Cyrus the Younger, Xenophon mentions the custom, 
regularly observed by Persian military leaders, of holding the central 
position in the line: νομίζοντες οὕτω καὶ ἐν ἀσφαλεστάτῳ εἶναι, ἢν ἢ 
ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ τι παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν 
χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ στράτευμα, ‘believing that they-are not only 
in the safest place in this way, if their force be on either hand, but 
also, should they wish to pass an order, it would take but half as 
long a time for the army to apprehend it,’ 36 19. There is in the 
second hypothesis, εἴ τι παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, nothing of a fanciful 
or extraordinary nature, nor is it by any means intended to suggest 
something unlikely to occur; but the ideal form is appropriate to a 
supposed case not marked by the inevitableness, the purely circum- 
stantial or explanatory quality of ἢν ἡ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἐκατέρωθεν. 
Relative Indefinite. — Relative clauses, not denoting purpose, 
introduced by relative pronouns or adverbs (except those meaning 
until and πρίν before) referring to an indefinite antecedent, have 
the same uses of the modes as conditional clauses. The pro- 
portion of frequency of occurrence, however, among the different 
classes is, as might be expected, not the same in conditional 
relative clauses as in pure conditionals. The Subjunctive is ex- 
ceedingly common, 3 24, 4 17, 5 24, 25,6 2,5,812. The Indicative 
is of far less frequent occurrence than the Subjunctive in indefinite 
relative clauses, 5 27,10 11; the indicative of the future, exceed- 
ingly rare. The Vague Condition as a relative construction is fre- 
quent, more usual when the point of view is past than otherwise, 
τ 14; 7 22,8 2,12 15,21. An example.in which the point of view 
is not past occurs in The Grand Hunting Party: Cyrus, to his grand- 
sire the king, Ei βούλει, ἔφη, ἡδέως pe θηρᾶν, ἄφες τοὺς κατ᾽ ἐμὲ 


WRITER’S GUIDE 83 


πάντας διώκειν καὶ διαγωνίζεσθαι ὅπως ἕκαστος κράτιστα δύναιτο 12 8 : 
Ζ.6.ὄ If you wish me to enjoy my hunting, permit my mates to vie 
with me in the chase, ‘each one with all his might, as best he may’ 
(ὅπως ἕκαστος κράτιστα δύναιτο). The modal construction is the 
same as if εἴ πως had been said instead of ὅπως, but there is no 
idiomatic equivalent in English, as far as the mode is concerned. 
In the Greek, the speaker does not commit himself to a real, or even 
a possible, supposition of ability and strength as variously to be 
manifested by his several companions: he merely puts the case 
hypothetically, in the vaguest manner. 

Original and Secondary Constructions.—In dealing with the 
Optative mode it is necessary to distinguish with care between 
Original and Secondary constructions. There are only three ori- 
ginal constructions of the optative: the expression of a wish, the 
15 potential use (with ἄν), and the pure conditional or conditional 

relative clause. In all other uses the optative is secondary — 

theoretically replacing the indicative or the subjunctive in a sub- 
ordinate clause under the influence of a verb of fas¢ time governing 
the sentence. We find that all subordinate clauses in Greek are 
20 to be assigned to one or the other of two great classes, marked 
by a fundamental difference of character. In one of these classes 
the Optative may of replace the indicative or the subjunctive in the 
subordinate clause under the influence of a verb of past time in the 
superior clause; so that all optatives occurring in clauses of this 
25 class, when the verb of the superior clause is not itself dependent, 
are original constructions, 1 14, 2 23, 5 6,7 22,27. In the other 
class the Optative may, with certain limitations, be so generated 
under the influence of the past time of the superior clause; and 
any optative not potential that occurs in a clause of this (second) 
30 class must be a secondary construction, 3 3, 4 24, 5 19, 7 7, 8. — 
The principle underlying this division must be briefly explained 
before presenting a tabular statement of the classification itself. 

Subordinate clauses are of the First or the Second class, accord- 
ingly as they designate purely external circumstances and condi- 
tions, or pertain inwardly in some way to the active consciousness 
of the subject of the superior clause. — Οἱ γονεῖς ἐπιμελοῦνται ὅπως 
οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῖς γένωνται ὡς δυνατὸν βέλτιστοι 51 2. Ὁ πατὴρ 
ἐπιμελούμενος ὅπως ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς γενοίμην, ἠνάγκασέ με πάντα τὰ 
Ὁμήρου ἔπη μαθεῖν 47 3. In these two sentences the subordinate 


wn 


I 


° 


2 


un 


84 


un 


20 


2 


wn 


30 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


clauses, denoting finality of care, belong to the Second class. The 
thought γενέσθαι βελτίστους, ἀγαθὸν γενέσθαι, pertains inwardly to 
the active consciousness of the parents, the father; it does not con- 
vey a purely external circumstance or limitation, stated as such by 
the speaker or writer. The optative γενοίμην is secondary, theo- 
retically replacing a subjunctive, and due to the past time of the 
superior verb ἠνάγκασε. Again, ἴστε ὅτι Ὅμηρος πεποίηκε σχεδὸν 
περὶ πάντων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 47 8: in the subordinate clause of this 
sentence the thought πεποιηκέναι Ὅμηρον is not expressed as denot- 
ing a purely external fact, but as an object of perception on the part 
of the subject of ἔστε, the persons whom the speaker is addressing. 
Therefore, had this verb tore been of past time, it might have 
caused πεποίηκε to be replaced by πεποιήκοι. Such, in general, is 
the principle underlying all subordinate clauses of the Second class. 
— Of the First class are the subordinate clauses of the following 
sentences: ἰδεῖν ἐπεθύμει, ὅτι ἤκουεν αὐτὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν εἶναι 1 17 ; 
ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις, εἰ ἀνάγκη σοι ἐπὶ πάντα ταῦτα διατείνειν τὰς 
χεῖρας 38 τ; ὅταν τούτων τινὸς θίγῃς, εὐθὺς ἀποκαθαίρει τὴν χεῖρα 
325; ὡς εἰς τὸ πεδίον ἦλθεν, ἀκοντίσας καταβάλλει τὴν ἔλαφον 9 9. 
Here, the causal ὅτι ἤκουεν, the pure conditional εἰ ἀνάγκη ἐστί, the 
indefinite temporal relative ὅταν θίγῃς, the definite temporal relative 
ὡς ἦλθεν, are seen to be merely explanatory or limiting terms or 
relations, stated as such by the speaker or writer, not as marking 
any effort or any act of perception or declaration on the part of the 
subjects of the verbs ἐπεθύμει, ἔχεις, ἀποκαθαίρει, καταβάλλει. In 
no clause of this nature could an optative be produced by the past 
time of the superior clause, but when an optative occurs in such a 
subordinate clause, it must, unless the verb of the superior clause 
is itself in some way dependent upon a verb of past time, be an 
original construction. Thus, the optative must be original in the 
sentence εἴ τινος δέοιτο ᾿Αστυάγης, πρῶτος ἠσθάνετο Κῦρος, ‘sup- 
posing Astyages to be in need of anything, Cyrus was regularly the 
first to perceive it,’ 7 27: the subordinate clause; being a pure con- 
ditional, is of the First class. But in such sentences as the two 
following, the subordinate clauses, denoting respectively an object 
of perception and finality of fear, would be of the Second class, and 
the optative would necessarily have been produced by the past time 
of the superior clause: πρῶτος ἠσθάνετο ὅτι δέοιτό τινος ᾿Αστυάγης 
(‘that Astyages was in need of something’); ἐφοβεῖτο μή τινος 


y 4, ρα 
ΕΝ 


5 


20 


WRITER’S GUIDE 85 


δέοιτο ᾿Αστυάγης (‘lest he might be in need of something’). In 
the former sentence δέοιτο is theoretically the past a of δεῦται ; 
in the latter, of δέηται. 

Scheme of Subordinate Clauses. 


{ Causal of 

( Relative Definite 

; Relative Indefinite (except 2/27) ᾿ ; 
Pure Conditional | 


First CLASS i 


Objective Conditional (μή or od) ] 
{ Declarative and Perceptive οὐ 

Interrogative of the Actual J 
SECOND CLASS Γ Subjective Conditional 





Interrogative of the Possible 
purpose ; 
viet care or effort as 
Final 
fear 
L expectation (zzz) 


The function of a subordinate clause of the First class ts to com- 
plete the judgment begun in the superior clause, either by adding 
some explanatory circumstance or relation (negatively with ov), or 
by conveying some term of limitation (negatively with μή). 3 

The function of a subordinate clause of the Second class ts not 
merely to complete the judgment begun in the superior clause, but 
also to mark some act of feeling, perception, or declaration (nega- 
tively with od), or some effort of intention (negatively with μή) on 
the part of its subject. 

A subordinate clause of the First class may have the Optative 
instead of the indicative or the subjunctive only when the verb of the 
superior clause is itself in some way dependent and the time of the 
sentence is past. —In the Symposium of Xenophon, Callias had said 
to his guests Ἢν zap’ ἐμοὶ συνδειπνῆτε, ἐπιδείξω τὴν ἐμὴν σοφίαν. 
In due time Socrates reminds them of the promise of their host: ἔφη 
γὰρ δήπου, εἰ συνδειπνοῖμεν, ἐπιδείξειν τὴν αὑτοῦ σοφίαν 46 18. The 
pure conditional ἢν συνδειπνῆτε, a clause of the First class, has 
come to sustain, now that its superior verb ἐπιδείξω has been made 
dependent on ἔφη, the same relation to the subject of ἔφη as a 
clause of the second class would sustain to the subject of its own 


86 


ur 


_ 
nr 


2 


ο 


2 


ur 


30 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


superior verb. Hence the Optative συνδειπνοῖμεν. Another illus- 
tration occurs 53 19, quoted and discussed below 87 34, where 
σπείσαιτο and πέμψειε are past phases of subordinate clauses of the 
First class. Cf. 29 8, 9; also below, 99 1, 8.— The Optative. 
is very rarely found representing an Aorist /zaicative in a clause of 
the First class. Thus 53 20, if Tissaphernes had originally said, not 
ots dy πέμψω, but ods ἔπεμψα, then the secondary form after ὥμοσεν 
would have been ἔπεμψε. For if the Optative could replace both 
the indicative and the subjunctive of the aorist stem, it would often 
involve a serious ambiguity of meaning. —In no case can the Opta- 
tive represent a Potential of the Past, nor a real condition limiting 
such a potential. 

The Past Phase. — The principle of the Past Phase is a principle 
of mental ferspect7ve. The idea conveyed by a subordinate clause 
is shifted to a position which, to the hearer or reader, shall be no 
longer merely the same as that which it must have occupied relatively 
to him who first conceived it. A new form enters to indicate a dif- 
ferent angle of vision, so to speak, at which the thought has come to 
be viewed. It is now seen in frofile. Callias had said ἢν συνδειπνῆτε, 
looking forward; Socrates says εἰ συνδειπνοῖμεν, looking back, but 
combining with this regard the original provision of Callias. Such 
is, in effect, the principle of the past phase — of all secondary con- 
structions of the Optative mode. It is not enough, however, merely 
to recognize the nature of the principle and its unity as a-law of 
expression: the student of Greek must familiarize himself widely 
with its concrete manifestations, and acquire, as can be done through 
sympathetic reading only, an appreciation of the human motives 
which at one time tend to call the law into active exercise, at another 
time to leave it inoperative. In formulating the principle as such, 
we can merely say that, in certain cases, the Optative may replace 
the indicative or the subjunctive when the time of the sentence is 
past. But to the author it is never a matter of indifference whether 
he avail himself or do not avail himself of this right; he is guided 
by an immediate motive to make clear his exact intention, the 
feeling that dominates him and the point of view that he is led to 
choose in a given case. 

The facility with which an original construction is enabled to 
retain its primary form, by resisting the influence of the past time 
of the sentence, with the consequent effects of variety and liveliness 


wm 


uw 


uw 


WRITER’S GUIDE 87 


of style, is one of the most striking characteristics of the ancient 
Greek language. Like the real condition of future time, like a 
present tense employed for the future, especially like what is known 
as the historical present, the idiomatic tendency which we are now 
considering is due to a quick and active imagination. Specifically, 
it evinces a ready faculty of recalling and reproducing the aspects 
of a former scene, the views and motives of a past occasion. The 
idiom manifests itself in varying degrees of force or frequency, 
according to the species of composition and the individuality of the 
writer. As regards the style of Xenophon, suffice it here to remark 
that he is not over-prone to resist the intrusion of the Past Phase, 
but betrays, comparatively speaking, a marked liking for the Opta- 
tive mode. Nevertheless, the idiom can be adequately illustrated 
from our models. 

In the year 396 B.c., three years after the Return of the Ten 
Thousand, when the Lacedaemonians and their allies were delib- 
erating in view of a public rumor that the Great King contemplated 
an attack upon Hellas, king Agesilaus ὑπέστη, ἐὰν δῶσιν αὐτῷ τριά- 
κοντα μὲν Σπαρτιατῶν, κτλ., διαβήσεσθαι εἰς τὴν ᾿Ασίαν καὶ πει- 
ράσεσθαι εἰρήνην ποιῆσαι, ἤ, ἂν πολεμεῖν βούληται ὁ βάρβαρος, 
ἀσχολίαν αὐτῷ παρέξειν στρατεύειν ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἕλληνας 53 4. The 
subordinate clauses ἐὰν δῶσιν (δῶτε) and ἂν βούληται are amenable 
to the law of the Past Phase, since the verbs of their superior clauses, 
διαβήσεσθαι (διαβήσομαι) and παρέξειν (παρέξω); are themselves de- 
pendent upon ὑπέστη. But the extraordinary success known at the 
time of writing to have been attained by the Spartan king in making 
good the promise, along with the writer’s warm admiration for the 
man, would naturally lead Xenophon to retain as far as possible 
the original form of expression. We seem to sit and listen, and 
are well-pleased to be present, while Agesilaus states about how 
many Greeks will be enough to keep the whole of Asia busy. — The 
campaign opens with a characteristic piece of oriental diplomacy. 
Not the Commander of the Faithful in person, but his dus Achates, 
appears upon the scene. Tissaphernes ὥμοσεν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ, εἰ σπεί- 
σαιτο ἕως ἔλθοιεν οὗς πέμψειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, διαπράξεσθαι 
αὐτῷ ἀφεθῆναι αὐτονόμους τὰς ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεις Ἑλληνίδας 53 το. 
The words of the oath were, ἢν σπείσῃ ἕως ἂν ἔλθωσιν ovs ἂν πέμψω 
πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, διαπράξομαί σοι κτλ. A ceremony of de- 
liberate perjury, soon revealed, at which most readers would xo? care 


88 


ur 


2 


° 


25 


° 


3 


35 


ATTIC PROSE 


to assist. At any rate there are reasons why the writer here might 
well prefer to throw the words of the viceroy into a remote and, by 
implication, deprecatory form. For while neither the insincerity of 
a promise nor any sort of unlikelihood of realization can ever be 
distinctly conveyed by the secondary phase as such, yet in matters 
of this kind the use of the Optative is sometimes a step in the right 
direction —just as, on the other hand, it behooves a writer to avoid 
the Optative when the absolute truth of a judgment transcends its 
relative value as a subordinate statement, 89 5. 

In the following passage of the eulogy of Agesiiaus certain ethical 
views of the Greek are offset against those of the Persian king. ‘I 
admire Agesilaus for the fact,’ says Xenophon, ὅτι οὐχ ὁπότερος 
πλείω TE χρήματα ἔχοι Kal πλειόνων ἄρχοι, τούτῳ ἡγήσατο μεῖζον 
φρονητέον εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ὁπότερος αὐτός τε ἀμείνων εἴη καὶ ἀμεινόνων 
ἡγοῖτο 60 1. The question that presented itself to the mind of the 
Spartan was, whether of the two ought to be the prouder, he who 
possessed the greater amount of property and ruled the greater 
number of subjects, or he who was the better man, with better men 
under his command. The clauses of this sentence assume the past 
phase naturally enough; the more readily, perhaps, in consequence 
of the negation of the first member. But the optative serves as a 
foil for what immediately follows: 6 μὲν yap Πέρσης, νομίζων, ἢν 
χρήματα πλεῖστα ἔχῃ, πάνθ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ ποιήσεσθαι, διὰ τοῦτο πᾶν μὲν 
τὸ ἐν ἀνθρώποις χρυσίον, πᾶν δὲ τὸ ἀργύριον, πάντα δὲ τὰ πολυ- 
τελέστατα ἐπειρᾶτο πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἀθροίζειν. Here, not only does the 
retention of the primary phase, ἢν χρήματα πλεῖστα ἔχῃ, point the 
contrast with ὁπότερος ἀμείνων εἴη, but there is a touch of satire in 
the vivid presentation of crude sentiment, just as it was entertained 
by the despot himself. — Similar, but with very different feeling, is 
the realization effected by retention of the primary phase in the 
proclamation and challenge issued by Agesilaus in Asia. All who 
craved deliverance and independence were to rally under his stand- 
ard; εἰ δέ τινες τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ἑαυτῶν ποιοῦνται (‘are disposed to claim 
as their own’), πρὸς τοὺς ἐλευθεροῦντας ἐν ὅπλοις παρεῖναι 55 6. 
The time of the sentence is past; but the writer does not give us 
εἰ ποιοῖντο --- he has forgotten that he is not even now present at 
the scene. 

Primary and secondary phase may appear in different clauses of 
the same sentence. Cyrus, now a conqueror, εἶτε τῷ Κυαξάρῃ ὅτι 





WRITER’S GUIDE 89 


οἶκος αὐτῷ eEnpynpévos εἴη ἐν Βαβυλῶνι καὶ ἀρχεῖα, ὅπως ἔχῃ καὶ ὅταν 

ἐκεῖσε ἔλθῃ εἰς οἰκεῖα κατάγεσθαι 25 18. Note that at the time of 

Cyrus’ speaking the setting apart of the mansion was an already 

accomplished fact, while the purpose of it all (ὅπως ἔχῃ xrA.), though 

past to the writer, was to the speaker yet unfulfilled. — There is, how- 
ever, not always a distinct ethical significance, nor even any note- 
worthy imaginativeness, attaching to the choice of alternate modes 
of expression ; but the motives for retention of a primary phase are 
often eminently practical and obvious. To revert to the lesson in 

1o justice impressed with the aid of birch upon the mind of the youthful 
Cyrus by his preceptor: ὁπότε δὲ κρῖναι δέοι ποτέρου ὁ χιτὼν εἴη: 
τοῦτ᾽ ἔφη σκεπτέον εἶναι, τίς κτῆσις δικαία ἐστί, κτλ. 7 8. The 
teacher said, ὁπόταν δέῃ κρῖναι, ποτέρου ὃ χιτών ἐστι, τοῦτο σκεπτέον, 
τίς κτῆσις δικαία ἐστί. In the first two clauses the past phase enters 

15 by presumption and in accordance with Xenophon’s prevailing man- 
ner; but the last clause, the question, What is rightful possession ?, 
retains the original construction, as well as the direct form of the 
interrogative word (ris, not ἥ τις), in consequence of the universality 
of the sentiment and its typical importance in illustrating the doc- 

20 trine to be inculcated. Cf. 8 24-27, where the Gnomic Aorist 
διέφθειραν and the Universal Present ἀσινεῖς εἰσιν are constructions 
that strongly resist the influence of a governing verb of past time. 
In the next sentence of the same passage the past phase asserts 
itself, ὅτι δέοι 8 28. Cf, further, 20 2, 61 20. 

25 It remains to explain and illustrate the nature of the clauses 
designated in the tabular scheme as Objective Conditional and Sub- 
jective Conditional. These are idiomatic uses of the Real and the 
Circumstantial Condition, wherein the connection of thought is such 
that the conditions, instead of denoting purely external limitations, 

30 have come to pertain inwardly to the active consciousness of the 
subject of the superior clause. When applied in this manner they 
may take the Optative, if the superior verb is of past time, and thus 
fall in the second class of subordinate clauses. The terms odjective 
and subjective are accommodated to the fact, that of these construc- 

35 tions one is virtually equivalent to a clause denoting an object of 
perception or feeling, the other to a clause denoting an effort of 
intention. 

Objective Conditional. — W7th verbs of surprise, indignation, pity, 
and other emotions a conditional clause with the Indicative (Real 


wn 


2 


2 


3 


3 


wn 


wm 


° 


uw 


Oo 


wn 


ATTIC PROSE 


Condition 79) may denote the object of feeling, but negatively 
oftener with μή than ov. 

‘Did you impart all this useful knowledge to your wife,’ asks 
Socrates of Ischomachus, ‘ or did she bring it from the home of her 
parents?’ ‘No, indeed!’ replies Ischomachus; οὐ yap ἀγαπητόν 
σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, εἰ μόνον ἦλθεν ἐπισταμένη ἔρια παραλαβοῦσα ἱμάτιον 
ἀποδεῖξαι; 41 17: 2.6. ‘Are you not content, that (if) when she 
came to me she should have known (knew) no more than how to 
weave a garment, ef/c.?’ Cf. οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ μηδ᾽ ἐπιχειρήσομεν (‘if 
we will not even attempt’) συνόντες ὠφελεῖν τι ἢ εὐφραίνειν ἀλλή- 
λους; 4613. In either of these sentences the condition, by virtue 
of the peculiar application of it, would be amenable to the law of the 
past phase; practically, however, in the former the Aorist Indicative 
ἦλθεν could not be replaced by the optative, were δοκεῖ to become 
ἐδόκει, cf. 86 4 ff. — There is a wavering between μή and οὐ in this 
construction (the sole instance in which the subdivision of the two 
Classes is not precisely determined by the particle of negation), 
accordingly as the conditional meaning of εἰ or the objective char- 
acter of the clause as a whole is uppermost in a given case. When 
ov is employed we should hardly expect to find it placed very near 
to εἰ: cf. Isocrates 1, 44 μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ 
πρέπει σοι πρὸς τὴν νῦν παροῦσαν ἡλικίαν, ‘do not be surprised if 
many of my precepts are unsuited to your present time of life.’ 

Learners must give careful attention to the past phase of the 
Real Condition of Future time, when applied as an objective con- 
ditional clause. A familiar illustration is from the Anabasis, I. 4, 7. 
Xenias and Pasion had absconded. A report went abroad that 
Cyrus was in pursuit of them. Of the Greeks, some prayed that the 
cowards might be captured; ot δὲ ᾧκτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο, ‘ while 
others thought it too bad if they should be taken.’ With the sym- 
pathizers the realization of the future contingency, εἰ ἁλώσονται, 
becomes an object of feeling. — Again, in The Taking of Babylon, 
the city is invested with the aid of races whom the besieged regard 
as at heart well-disposed toward themselves: τούτων κατεγέλων, 
ἐννοούμενοι εἰ σφᾶς Φρύγες καὶ Λυδοὶ φυλάξοιεν 23 17. ‘The very 
idea, that Phrygians and Lydians are to watch us (ἡμᾶς φυλά- 
ovow)!’ That is what the Babylonians were really laughing at. 

Subjective Conditional.— A conditional clause with the Sub- 


Junctive (Circumstantial Condition 79) or the Future Indicative 


un 


wn 


ο 


ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee te Se: he ee! tt 


WRITER'S GUIDE ΟΙ 


(Real Condition 79, 80 8) may be used subjectively, when some 
design or some feeling of apprehension ts implied with reference to 
the supposed case. 

The first time Cyrus goes out hunting, Astyages sends guards 
along with him (φύλακας συμπέμπει), ὅπως ἀπὸ τῶν δυσχωριῶν 
φυλάττοιεν αὐτὸν καὶ εἰ τῶν ἀγρίων τι φανείη θηρίων 8 19. One 
of the dangers that presents itself to the mind of the king and of 
the guards in their solicitude for the lad’s safety, is the possible con- 
tingency ἢν τῶν ἀγρίων τι φανῇ (‘make its appearance’) θηρίων. 
Under the influence of the past time conveyed by the historical 
present συμπέμπει, this ἢν φανῇ becomes εἰ φανείη. --- Socrates 
describes his method of investigating καλοκἀγαθία: πρῶτον μέν, ὅτι 
προσέκειτο TO καλὸς τῷ ἀγαθῷ, ὅντινα ἴδοιμι καλόν, τούτῳ προσῇειν 
καὶ ἐπειρώμην καταμανθάνειν, εἴ που ἴδοιμι προσηρτημένον τῷ καλῷ 
τὸ ἀγαθόν 40 3. ‘To begin with, seeing that “fair” was added to 
“ good,” whomsoever I saw that was fair, him I would approach and 
endeavor to make him out, hoping perchance to see the good 
attached to the fair.’ While ὅντινα ἴδοιμι is an original construction 
of the optative, the vague conditional relative clause, in εἴ που ἴδοιμι 
we have the past phase of ἤν που ἴδω, Subjective Conditional. 

A subordinate clause of the First class may not have the Sub- 
junctive when the time of the superior clause (being also principal 
clause) is past. But with the Subjective and the Objective Con- 
ditional the Subjunctive, or even the Future Indicative, may appear 
when the superior verb is of past time, by retention of the primary 
phase. Thus, εἰ ἁλώσονται, εἰ φυλάξουσιν, ἢν φανῇ, ἢν ἴδω 91 14 
(but ot ὅντιν᾽ ἂν ἴδω 91 13), might have been written in the several 
passages quoted above, 90 29, 34,915. Cf. Thucydides VII. 59 καὶ 
τάλλα, ἢν ἔτι ναυμαχεῖν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τολμήσωσι (‘in view of the 
Athenians still finding courage to fight by sea’), παρεσκευάζοντο. 
Demosthenes 19, 317 ἣν δ᾽ οὐδὲν μᾶλλον μέγ᾽ αὐτῷ καθ᾽ ὑμῶν οὐδ᾽ 
οὕτω πρᾶξαι, εἰ μὴ Φωκέας ἀπολεῖ, ‘but not a whit the more could 
he even thus accomplish anything important against you, unless he 
should destroy the Phocians.’ 

Final of Expectation.— Analogous to subjective conditional 
clauses are those introduced by relative words meaning wz?z/, or 
πρίν before (when not followed by the Infinitive), referring to an 
indefinite antecedent. With such clauses an effort of intention is 
always implied on the part of the subject of the superior verb. 


92 


2 


30 


3 


wm 


O° 


ur 


ur 


ATTIC PROSE 


They denote finality of expectation. When the Optative occurs it 
is never original, but always the past phase of the Subjunctive 
mode; and the Subjunctive may be retained when the verb of the 
superior clause, being also principal clause, is past. — Σῴζει ταῦτα 
ἔστ᾽ ἂν δέῃ χρῆσθαι (‘until there be need to use them’) 44 14. 
Were σῴζει to become ἔσῳζε, then either ἔστε δέοι or ἔστ᾽ ἂν δέῃ 
might be written. —’Amnydpeve μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλη- 
σθείη θηρῶν 12 6. What the king said was Μηδεὶς βαλλέτω, πρὶν 
ἂν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθῇ θηρῶν, ‘Let no one be for shooting, till Cyrus 
shall have had his fill of the sport.’ To ἐμπλησθῆναι Kipov θηρῶντα 
was the intention of the king. 


The Connective Particle. — “In continued discourse, every Greek 
sentence has, in general, a conjunction to connect it with what goes 
before. The absence of such connective is called asyudeton (ἀσύν- 
derov not bound together): it is most common in explanatory sen- 
tences. Sometimes it is preferred as a livelier and more striking 
form of expression.” H. 1039. The first example of asyndeton in 
this book is τοιαῦτα ἐποίει 4 12; thé second, ἐκβαλῶ σε 4 14; the 
third, ἔπειτα τά τε viv 5 27; the fourth, παῖς μέγας 71. But while in 
Greek asyndeton is the exception, with us it is the rule. In modern 
English prose only the more weighty adversative, causal, or inferen- 
tial relations are verbally expressed in introducing a new sentence. 
Due observance of this difference of idiom is highly important in 
translating. Especially the writer of Greek needs to cultivate a sense 
of the ubiquity and indispensability of the connective particle. 

The first sentence of a work, of a formal speech, or of a quoted 
remark, question, or reply, is naturally almost always asyndetic: 
60 24; 26 26, 30 12; 214,45,6. Butasa dialogue proceeds, the 
interlocutors will often pay regard to the mutual relation of their 
thoughts by means of a connective, 3 9, 18, 20, 22. The first sen- 
tence of a new paragraph or chapter, or even of what is called a 
book (as the beginning of the Second Book of the Anabasis), regu- 
larly has its connective. Sometimes the initial sentence of a whole 
treatise shows a conjunction, due to a certain feeling of continuity 
of subject-matter. Examples are the beginning of the Oeconomicus 
(Ἤκουσα δέ ποτε) and that of the Symposium (Αλλ᾽ ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ) of 
Xenophon — something more about Socrates. 

The particle μέν, which always looks forward, is not a connective 


wn 


cal 
ῳι 


20 


25 


ο 


3 


35 


WRITER’S GUIDE 93 


in any sense. If it stands alone, there is asyndeton, as 60 24 (the 
beginning of the Cynegeticus). The connective very often imme- 
diately follows μέν : μὲν γάρ, μὲν δή, μὲν οὖν. The particle cor- 
relative to μέν is always a connective: usually δέ, often μέντοι 2 18, 
in Xenophon sometimes γὲ μήν 111. Whenxai.. . δέ occurs, δέ is 
the connective, καί ‘even’ or ‘also,’ 6 4, 13 2, 4,13. A connective 
that is apt to be slighted by learners in writing Greek is yap, espe- 
cially when its force is rather explanatory than causal, 1 12, 3 9, 5 
I, 3, 7 23. Γάρ explanatory is like ‘namely,’ but lighter, and is 
rarely represented by any word in English. To omit it in Greek 
is to produce the most usual form of asyndeton, as 7 1. 

Parataxis of μέν. --- Since μέν is an anticipatory word, preparing 
the mind for something that is to follow, by way of comparison, 
opposition, or limitation — for this reason, what appears in English 
as a subordinate member of the sentence will in Greek often more 
naturally take the form of a μέν clause, codrdinated (παρατεταγμένον) 
with what follows. £.g. ‘While the girl placed the crown upon 
the head of Cyrus, Cyaxares said, efc.:’ ἡ μὲν δὴ παῖς ἐστεφάνου 
tov Κῦρον, ὃ δὲ Κυαξάρης εἶπε, κτλ. 25 26, cf. 57 21,23 12. But 
parataxis of μέν oftener indicates logical than temporal relations. 
Thus, φασὶ μὲν ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν ἄγειν τοὺς νέους, ἄγουσι δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοὐναντίον, 
‘although (while) they profess to lead the young to what is good, 
they really lead them in the opposite direction,’ 62 12, cf 15 f. 
The English idiom, however, is not lacking in paratactic equiva- 
lents of μέν: ‘to be sure,’ ‘indeed,’ ‘it is true,’ (Lat. guzdenz), 
10 3, 26 10, 57 28. Sometimes our ‘while’ answers not to per, 
but to δέ, 2 11. 

Aorist and Imperfect. — The distinction of zdefinitum and zmper- 
fectum, which the Greek marks with ease by the stem-form merely, is 
brought to view in English by means of a variety of devices. In 
turning English into Greek the form of expression becomes greatly 
simplified by skilful use of the Aorist and Imperfect stems. Shades of 
meaning can be thereby distinguished which we express by the use 
of radically different words. To ‘ascertain’ is πυθέσθαι 40 24; to 
‘inquire, ‘get accounts,’ πυνθάνεσθαι 8 22,12 26; to ‘bring down’ 
a wild boar, κατασχεῖν 9 18; to ‘control’ horses, ‘have in keeping’ a 
country, κατέχειν 49 8, 16 1, 4. Some verbs are naturally aoristic 
in their signification, while others are natural imperfects; and this 
truth helps to explain certain matters of stem formation and usage 


94 


wn 


» 
wm 


20 


25 


30 


35 


40 


ATTIC PROSE 


in Greek.! Thus, ‘to arrive’ is essentially an aorist, ‘to be able’ 
an imperfect; accordingly ἀφικέσθαι is of more frequent occurrence 
than ἀφικνεῖσθαι, but δύνασθαι more usual than δυνηθῆναι. The 
Historical Present, however, which stands for a Past-Aorist and is 
exceedingly common in Greek, helps to bring into familiar use the 
Imperfect stem of words of vitally aoristic signification, πίπτει 9 6, 
24 16, εὑρίσκουσιν 24 25, γίγνονται 25 16. 

The Past-Aorist (or the historical present) is the tense of narra- 
tion; the Past-Imperfect, that of description: where the one would 
simply inform us of a fact, the other presents a picture of the scene. 
The English periphrastic form (they ‘were crowning’ him) is of 
restricted range, in comparison with its simple Greek counterpart, 
ἐστεφάνουν 57 21. Hence many idiomatic phrases must be con- 
densed in translating into Greek: he ‘ would never leave’ his grand- 
father, οὐδέποτε ἀπέλειπε τὸν πάππον 7 24; ‘gave eager attention’ 
to all these instructions, πάντα ταῦτα ἐμάνθανε προθύμως 9 3; ‘pro- 
ceeded to give’ the game to the boys, ἐδίδου τοῖς παισὶ τὰ θηρία 10 
12; the water ‘began to move’ (ἐχώρει) down the ditches, 23 27, 
57 27. The idiom of “begin” illustrated in the last example is 
always represented by an Imperfect in Greek, and must not be 
confounded with the Ingressive Aorist; so when ἐπεί ( fostguam), 
which usually takes the Aorist, has an Imperfect ; ἐπεὶ παρεσκευάζετο 
(‘had begun to get ready’) 5 17. — Similar idioms are to be noted 
for the Aorist: he ‘came to see,’ ἔγνω 8 17,19 113; were to ‘ make 
its appearance,’ φανείη 8 21; ‘with a cast of the javelin,’ ἀκοντίσας 
9 9; ‘falling sick, ἀσθενήσαντος (Ingressive Aorist) 7 23.— 
Especially noteworthy is the use of the Aorist in Greek where we 
need a perfect, pluperfect, or future perfect form: διέφθειραν 8 25, 
κατακρημνισθῆναι 9 1, ἤκουσεν 9 5, ἔλθοι 9 13, ἔλαβε 9 21, δῶ (‘have 
given’) 9 26. The Greek Perfect stem is to be studiously avoided 
by the writer in such cases. 

1 Verbs whose vital meaning is aoristic have the second aorist; but the 
natural imperfects have the firs¢ aorist form. In a Greek dictionary verbs 
should be registered by the Infinitive of the Aovis¢ stem, when a second 
aorist is in use; of the Imperfect stem, when a first aorist is in use, or when 
there is no aorist. This method, formatively as well as rationally the true 
one, would convey the right impression as to meaning and predominant 
usage, and would prevent radically different words, such as ἑλεῖν and 


αἱρεῖν, ἐλθεῖν and ἔρχεσθαι, from being treated as if they were forms of the 
same verb, 








— 


: 


ie Ny Ae ee, 





wm 


20 


2 


un 


30 


35 


WRITER'S GUIDE 95 


The Perfect Stem.— The Perfect stem, under all modal forms, 
denotes a fixed state or condition that has been arrived at as the 
result of some action or occurrence. It differs from what is known as 
the perfect in English, mainly in the fact that in Greek the emphasis, 
even in the active or the middle voice, is rather upon the state or 
condition than upon the action or occurrence from which it resulted. 
Ὑπήκοον πεποιημένος Tov ᾿Αραβίων βασιλέα 14 19: not, “having 
made” subject to himself, which would usually be ποιησάμενος, but 
rather ‘the king of Arabia now his subject.’ ‘Eornxora αὐτὸν καὶ 
ἐσπασμένον Tov ἀκινάκην εὑρίσκουσι 24 24: not, “having drawn” his 
sword, but rather, standing ‘ with his sword drawn.’ In independent 
sentences the Indicative forms of the Perfect stem, the Present-Per- 
fect and the Past-Perfect, are usually equivalent to the perfect or the 
pluperfect in English: cf. 2 18, 5 8, 7 14,8 6,11 4,18 το. But 
in dependent clauses, and in many participial and infinitive con- 
structions, the English perfects are mostly represented by the 
Aorist stem, 94 27. Many Greek perfects, however, stand for 
what seems to be an Imperfect (usually labelled “ present”) in the 
modern idiom: δεδιέναι, ἑστάναι (ἐφέστηκεν ‘is in charge’ 43 6), 
κεκλῆσθαι 40 25, κεκτῆσθαι, μεμνῆσθαι, πεφυκέναι 43 20, τεθνάναι, 
and others. Here especially the distinctness of form in the Greek 


is a safeguard against mental confusion and vagueness. To any 


but a thoughtful writer the Perfect stem will prove elusive: ‘I was 
afraid there might be poison mixed in the bowl’ (two perfects), 
ἐδεδοίκειν μὴ ἐν TO KpaTHpL φάρμακα μεμιγμένα εἴη 4 23; ‘all cov- 
ered with blood,’ ἡματωμένα 10 4; ‘that there was a house set apart 
for him,’ ὅτι οἶκος αὐτῷ ἐξηῃηρημένος εἴη 25 19; ‘happened to be 
posted on the left wing,’ ἔτυχεν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ κέρατι τεταγμένος 
38 15; ‘are spread wide open,’ ἀναπέπτανται 48 15; ‘in flight,’ 
πεφευγότας 57 26. 

Infinitive and Participle. — The Participle, by virtue of its adjecti- 
val form, denotes an action or a state of being as immediately apper- 
taining to the subject or object with which it stands in agreement. 
Thus, being at once verb and adjective, it is adapted to supplement 
a predication in nearly the same way as a clause with ὅτι or os, 
denoting an object of perception, would supplement one. In such 
construction the Participle denotes a more direct or immediate per- 
ception than the clause: compare κατέμαθον (by seeing the drinkers 
tipsy) φάρμακα ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἐγχέαντα 4 26, with κατέμαθον (by infer- 


Oe ee eee 


96 ATTIC PROSE 


ence) ὅτι τοῦτ dp ἦν ἡ ἰσηγορία 5 10. Not only verbs of physical 
or mental perception, however, but others, such as ‘ begin,’ ¢ continue,’ 
‘cease,’ e¢c., with which ὡς and ὅτι are inadmissible, are naturally 
supplemented by the Participle. See the lists, H. 981-985. 

5 The Infinitive, on the other hand, a substantive, capable of stand- 
ing (when not accompanied by the article) in no closer agreement 
than that of apposition, and thus denoting a looser relation than the 
participle, remains to serve for the expression of opinion. Accord- 
ingly οἴεσθαι and its synonyms, together with φάναι, take the supple- 

10 mentary Infinitive only, never the participle, nor an objective clause 
with ὅτι or ws. Of the common verbs of saying, other than φάναι, 
the declarative clause is required by εἰπεῖν (except in the meaning 
‘command’ 54 24), while λέγειν admits either construction. But 
in the active voice λέγειν takes ore or ὡς oftener than the infinitive. 

15 φάναι, εἰπεῖν and λέγειν. --- The usage thus sketched is helpful 
toward an appreciation of the shades of meaning conveyed by the 
several synonyms. Φάναι, the verb of affirmation, reveals an ethical 
kinship with the οἴεσθαι group, while εἰπεῖν shows nothing in common 
therewith, and λέγειν (so ἐρῶ, εἴρηκα) is unstable. 

20 οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν, ἡγεῖσθαι, νομίζειν. --- The verbs of thinking them- 
selves betray no difference of signification, so far as regards the 
construction which follows them (barring the occasional use of the 
participle with νομίζειν in the meaning ‘ consider’) ; otherwise, how- 
ever, they have their several distinct suggestions: οἴεσθαι, of surmise, 

25 fancy; δοκεῖν, imagination, belief (δόξα) ; ἡγεῖσθαι, advancing or 

holding an opinion (cf. Lat. ducere) ; νομίζειν (νόμος), regard of 

custom or convention. Aoxeiv, mostly to ‘seem,’ sometimes (except 
in the 3d pers. sing.) to ‘think’ 19 16, 31 16, 34 7; impersonally, 

with the dative, δοκεῖ, ἔδοξέ μοι, ‘it seems good’ or ‘best,’ “1 

resolved,’ ‘decreed,’ ‘determined.’ Finally, δοκεῖν, as its specific 

meaning would lead one to expect, is the verb of dreaming, 29 23. 
γνῶναι. --- Γνῶναι, as the verb of mind-perception, is nearly related 

in signification to αἰσθέσθαι, the verb of sense-perception, with its 

specific parts ἰδεῖν, ὁρᾶν, ἀκούειν, etc. Properly, therefore, γνῶναι 
requires the supplementary participle, not the infinitive. But since 
mental perception or insight (γνῶσις) is ina high degree personal and 
fallible, γνῶναι may, in certain connections, verge closely upon δοκεῖν 
or νομίζειν, and take a supplementary infinitive. Of the “finding” 
of a judge, ἔγνων βέλτιον εἶναι κτλ. 7 4. The judge γιγνώσκει, 


° 


3 


3 


uw 








unr 


uw 








WRITER'S GUIDE 97 


‘sees,’ ‘recognizes,’ the bearings of the matter in hand. He forms 
a judgment, more or less satisfactory to himself, upon the case pre- 
sented. But to the public, for whom the decision is rendered, he 
has only declared an “ opinion” (δόξα). Hence the Infinitive. 
φαίνεσθαι, ἀκούειν. --- Similarly ἀποδεικνύναι, exceptionally with 
infinitive, of what the /aw ‘ ordains,’ ‘ pronounces,’ 43 27. — Again, 
φαίνεσθαι properly calls for the participle, as of something visible or 
apparent; but, since appearances are apt to be deceptive, it inclines 
often toward the meaning of δοκεῖν and takes an infinitive, 33 8. So 
‘seem’ and ‘appear’ are frequently interchangeable in English. ’Axov- 
εἰν likewise, where matters of “hearsay” are concerned, may take 
the infinitive construction, 1 18 (but cf. 13 1), 20 25, 21 6, 23 22. 

While, therefore, the meaning of οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν. φάναι is such 
that they can never have the participle, nor an objective clause ; 
while, for the same reason, αἰσθέσθαι and most of its sub-congeners 
can never have the infinitive: yet there are other verbs, whose shift- 
ing functions of expression, ranging as they do over the middle 
ground between the extremes indicated, enable them to have either 
of the two constructions, or at times require them to have that con- 
struction which to their strict primal signification would be inappro- 
priate. The mind of the Greek writer moved, here as elsewhere, 
not in accordance with established canons of language, but according 
to the sense, inevitably and surely. 

Adjuncts of Infinitive or Participle.— When the subject of an 
Infinitive is the same as that of the principal verb, it is not usually 
expressed in Greek. Ὠμνύετε ἄριστα ade (‘that your singing was 
of the best’) 5 5: what they swore was, ἄριστα ἄδομεν. "Ε φασαν 
κατερεῖν αὐτοῦ (‘that they would inform against him’) 9 13: they 
said, κατεροῦμέν cov. Cf. 59 8,15, 60 5 f., 62 12, 46 18,23. Predi- 
cate nouns with the Infinitive then appear in the nominative case: 
ἀνθρώπους οἶμαι ἱκανὸς εἶναι βελτίους ποιεῖν 46 25, 20 21, cf. 59 5 
(μέγιστος). “Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis or contrast, the 
subject of the principal verb is expressed also with the Infinitive ; it 
may then stand either in the nominative or the accusative, but αὐτός 
is usually nominative.” H.940b. ᾿Ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι 
37 11: Ctesias said, ἰώμην αὐτὸς (or ἐγὼ) τὸ τραῦμα. Cf. 39 13. 
The same principle of case-construction applies to the supplementary 
Participle: ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι, ‘when they have come to 
feel that they are disbelieved,’ 19 10. But 20 9 ἔγνων ἐμαυτὸν μὴ 
ATTIC PROSE — 7 


wn 


98 


I 


uw 


ur 


20 


2 


3 


un 


uw 


ATTIC PROSE 


ἱκανὸν (sc. ὄντα) ὑμῖν μάχεσθαι is preferred by the writer to the usual 
ἔγνων μὴ ἱκανὸς ov. ᾿ 

Personal and Impersonal. — A similar idiom is the Greek prefer- 
ence of the personal construction in most cases where either the 
personal or the impersonal would be grammatical. The adjectives 
δῆλος, δίκαιος, φανερός must be used personally, as far as possible, 
in writing Greek. ‘It was clear to all that he was exceedingly 
alarmed,’ δῆλος Hv πᾶσιν ὅτι ὑπερεφοβεῖτο 7 25, cf. 16. ‘It is right 
for me to recount,’ δίκαιός εἰμι λέγειν 27.1. ‘He was not seen to 
rejoice thereat,’ οὐκ ἐφησθεὶς φανερὸς ἐγένετο 59 19. — The personal 
construction is required also with the verbs δοκεῖν ‘seem’ and ἐοικέ- 
ναι ‘be likely.’ Thus δοκεῖ 43 11 and ἔδοξε 40 28 are necessarily 
personal: were they impersonal, the meaning would be different (96 
28), as 40 8,13. So the meaning of ἔδοξεν 29 23 would not have 
allowed the accusative and infinitive to follow it. “Eouwxe 31 209, 
33 9 has ψυχή for its subject, cf. 9 29, 42 11, also 43 11.— Verbs 
of saying have in the passive voice, presumptively, the personal con- 
struction, 1 1, 2f. 5, 10; but sometimes there are especial reasons 
for preferring the impersonal. Thus, λέγεται 3 11 stands imperson- 
ally, because it enters by way of variation (as it were parenthetically) 
in a passage beginning τὸν Κῦρον ἔφασαν λέγειν 3 5. Xenophon 
here will keep up strictly the appearance of a tradition, hence is prone 
to retain the od/igue case-form, τὸν δὲ Κῦρον (λέγεται) 311. Cf. 13 
12, 13, 15,20. Η. 9448. --- Especially in connection with a Potential 
Infinitive or Participle must the difference between the ancient and 
modern forms of expression be carefully observed. ‘I believe that 
you could make the best of conjectures as to this matter, ἄριστ᾽ ἄν 
μοι δοκεῖς εἰκάσαι τοῦτο 21 1, 33 6. Κῦρος, εἰ ἐβίωσεν, ἄριστος ἂν 
δοκεῖ ἄρχων γενέσθαι, ‘Cyrus, it seems to me, would have proved 
an excellent ruler, had he lived,’ 384. Whether the form in Eng- 
lish be personal or impersonal, the Greek equivalent is invariable 
when the meaning requires δοκεῖν, δῆλος, etc. 

Temporal Relations. — For the expression of Future time in depen- 
dent constructions the Greek, with its Infinitive, Participle, and Opta- 
tive of the Future stem, is explicit and more distinct than the English. 
Our idiom is apt to obscure and confuse the future and the potential 
idea when they come to be dependent upon a verb of past time. 
Thus, in translating the following passages it would require both skill 
and effort to preserve the important distinction between the Future 


Ee ae ee ae 





: ? WRITER'S GUIDE 99 


Ξ - and the Potential Optative or Infinitive. “Evoyufev, εἰ τοὺς Μήδους 
ἀσθενεῖς ποιήσειε, πάντων ye τῶν πέριξ ῥᾳδίως ἄρξειν 14 21: the 
. thought of the Assyrian king was, ἢν τοὺς Μήδους ἀσθενεῖς ποιήσω, 
πάντων... ἄρξω. But, again, ἔλεγον ὡς, εἰ ἐγὼ ἐθέλοιμι ἄρχειν, 
5 πάντες ἂν ἐμοὶ πείθοιντο 20 15: the flatterers said, εἰ σὺ ἐθέλοις 
Ξ ἄρχειν, πάντες ἂν σοὶ πείθοιντο. In the next pair, instead of Future 
Infinitive and Potential Optative we have Future Optative and Poten- 
tial Infinitive. Ev rus ἔξω ληφθείη, (κηρύττειν) ὅτι θανατώσοιτο 25 3: 
the couriers were to proclaim, ἦν τις ἔξω ληφθῇ, θανατώσεται. But, 

10 again, πᾶς ἰδιώτης πλούσιος ἂν ᾧετο γενέσθαι, εἴ τι Κύρῳ χαρίσαιτο 

29 το: Ζ.6. πλούσιος ἂν γενοίμην, εἴ τι Κύρῳ χαρίσαιμι. 

Dependent relations of Past time, on the contrary, are conveyed 
in Greek largely by implication or suggestion, where the English 
equivalent must be explicit. The Indicative is the only mode that 

15 can express time, except upon the future stem: the Infinitive, the 
. Participle, and the Optative of the other stems have no temporal 
i value, as present or past; they are of actzon, their office being to 
τ denote what is complete, incomplete, or indefinite. By virtue of 
: these qualities, however, which our language has no simple forms to 
20 embody, the Greek Aorist, Perfect, and Imperfect stems help the 
temporal relation to be inferred from the context without ambiguity 
in cases where some other modal form than the Indicative is needed. 
In the sentence quoted 98 25 we know that ἄριστος ἂν γενέσθαι 
is equivalent to the Potential of the Past, ἄριστος ἂν ἐγένετο, partly 
_ 25 from history, partly from the form of the condition εἰ ἐβίωσεν. 
9 Under other circumstances, or with a different context, the mean- 
ing might equally well have been ἄριστος ἂν γένοιτο. --- Φύσιν τοιαύ- 
ΞΕ τὴν ἔχων διαμνημονεύεται 1 το: here, the facts of the case show that 
ἔχων is for ὅτι εἶχε, while another context might have suggested ὅτι 
30 ἔχει. Cf. 38 18, where φιλοφρονεῖσθαι is seen to stand for ὅτι 
ἐφιλοφρονεῖτο, not φιλοφρονεῖται ; and above 97 32.— The Aorist 
infinitive and participle do, by virtue of the essential meaning of the 
stem (which forms an Indicative of the Past only), usually fall with 
a temporal relation that is past or prior. Yet often otherwise. 
35 Καλῶς ἐποίησας προειπών, ‘you have done well to forewarn me’ 
(not “in Aaving forewarned me”), 11 25,9 4,59 19. Thus always 
with τυχεῖν, λαθεῖν, etc. "Ἤδη πώποτε ἢ δακοῦσα κακόν τί σοι ἔδωκεν 
ἢ λακτίσασα, ‘did she ever harm you by biting or kicking?’ (‘give 
you a bite or a kick’), 51 το. --- Ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ προσελθὼν κρείττων 





ΡΣ ΤΩ IN sae H Sr 





100 ATTIC PROSE 


un 


I 


un 


20 


25 


30 


Ge 
un 


τις ἢ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον εἰπεῖν, κτλ., ‘seemed to say’ (not “to have 
said ”), 29 23.— The range of the Optative, whether Aorist or Im- 
perfect or Perfect, is unlimited as to time. In the passage quoted 
91 12 neither ὅντινα ἴδοιμι nor εἴ που ἴδοιμι has a temporal signifi- 
cance of its own, though in the premises the former gains a past, 
the latter a future, point of view. — The Subjunctive mode contains 
no positive indications of time; but negatively, the Past is excluded 
from its range of application. 

It will be observed that in English the supplementary participle 
can be used only as an Imperfect; an aoristic notion we must 
express by an infinitive. Εἶδεν ἔλαφον ἐκπηδήσασαν, ‘he saw a 
deer jump (inf.) out, 9 4: but εἶδε κάπρον προσφερόμενον, ‘saw 
a wild boar rushing toward him,’ 916. If not supplementary, the 
English participle may be aoristic when the meaning of the verb is 
appropriate, 93 37; and the gratuitous use of the perfect active 
participle in translating Greek aorists is an unscholarly habit. It is 
true that the Greek is enabled by its clear distinction of stem-forms 
to employ the combination of participle and verb to denote succes- 
sive actions more freely than our idiom permits; hence such a com- 
bination must frequently be used in writing Greek, where two verbs 
occur in English: ‘he dreamt that a shape came to him and said, 
etc., ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ προσελθών τις εἰπεῖν 29 23, 30 21 f. Nevertheless, 
the ancient and the modern idiom are very often strictly the same: 
εἰπών (‘exclaiming,’ not “having exclaimed”), Tov ἄνδρα δρῶ, ἵετο 
ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν 37 8. So γελάσας ‘smiling’ 40 27, ἀφικόμενοι ‘ arriving’ 
57 18, ἀρξάμενοι ‘beginning’ 62 5, αἰσθόμενος ‘perceiving’ (not 
“having perceived”) 8 8. 

—suddenly 
Seeing (ἰδών) Orlando, it unlink’d itself. 
As You Like It, IV. 3. 
So speaking (εἰπών), and here ceasing, Lancelot left 
The hall long silent. 
The Holy Grail, ad fin. 


Simplicity. — “Attempt to translate into Greek one of Pitt’s or 
Mirabeau’s discourses, or an extract from Addison or Nicole, and you 
will be obliged to recast and transpose the thought; you will be led 
to find for the same thoughts expressions more akin to facts and to 
concrete experience ; a flood of light will heighten the prominence 



















bt oe SNe a eee 


. < 
Pe ae aS te 
nS τος Κῇ =e 
pd τὰ τα , 





WRITER’S GUIDE > IOI 


of all the truths and of all the errors; that which you weré wont to 
call natural and clear will seem to you affected and semi-obscure, 
and you will perceive by force of contrast why, among the Greeks, 
the instrument of thought being more simple, it did its office better 
and with less effort.” The turning of English into Greek is indeed 
at once a simplifying and an illuminating process —a clearing of 
the ground, a tracking inward, a revelation finally of the mind’s 
elementary and truest movements. In Attic prose the thought is 
written large. Its essential features are presented in an outline 
10 sketch; gracious of form and rich in color, but never blurred by 
accretions. Much that we must explicitly enunciate, the Greek 
author only points at; but his indications are plain and unmistak- 
able. Straightforward the reader pursues his way, with lightsome 
step — like the Attics of old dei διὰ λαμπροτάτου βαίνοντες ἁβρῶς 
15 αἰθέρος. It is the privilege of the student of Greek to escape, for 
the time being, from an intellectual world of anxious explicitness, 
clouded and perplexed withal, to one of exhilaration, clairvoyance, 
unveiled realities pure and simple. 
In one of its aspects the simplicity of the Greek language is the 
20 modified simplicity of unification and compression. A single word- 
form can suggest a whole series of relations that are set forth piece- 
meal in modern phrase. The action-stems, the modes, the tenses, 
the voices — their several intimations are conveyed to the mind in 
one impulse. The illustrations of this truth are familiar even to the 
25 beginner; and such forms will appeal to him successfully in propor- 
tion as he is led to note how far each one of them is self-eluci- 
dating, and how far it shine? with borrowed light. — A like unity of 
comprehensiveness is exemplified in Case construction and usage. 
Each genitive, each dative, each accusative readily adapts itself 
3° to the environment, and the principle involved is readily grasped 
by the learner who is encouraged to depend upon a quick intuitive 
touch, not mystified and confounded by the crude rules and empty 
names of a minute, excessive subdivision. Szwzle confuso est, guid- 
quid usque in pulverem sectum est. Your thoroughbred gram- 
35 marian will take three cases and make three hundred of them. Yet 
the Greeks themselves were nearer to the sources of illumination. 
Thus each apparently assumed that every other was armed with the 
divining-rod of common sense. 


1H. Taine, Art in Greece, translated by John Durand. 


ωι 


ie 


102 ATTIC PROSE 


un 


I 


° 


I 


un 


20 


25 


° 


3 


3 


uw 


40 


That phase of simplicity which consists in the use of generic terms 
that must be resolved into specific ones to meet the exigencies of 
modern expression, is widely and variously illustrated in Greek, and 
is the chief source of the concreteness for which the language is dis- 
tinguished. Thus, λόγος appears in English as ‘tale,’ ‘discourse,’ 
‘subject,’ ‘argument,’ ‘reason,’ e¢c. Proper and metaphorical mean- 
ings, calling for separate designation in our idiom, are apt to be served 
by one word or by the several forms of the same word. Consider, for 
example, the many ways in which καταστῆναι, καθιστάναι must be 
translated. Mere stem-form does duty for a host of explicit terms.! 
The three modes, while they exhibit in a striking manner the pre- 


1 Every language must of course work more or less by suggestion and 
implication, in one direction or another. The Greek is remarkable for 
combining the utmost precision and lucidity with the greatest simplicity. 


᾿Εδύνασθε, poteratis, ‘ye could,’ are all similarly ambiguous: whether the 


state of being able at a particular past time, or of being able repeatedly in 
the past, is meant, we do not yet know. Ei dvacralynre ὀρχησόμενοι, οὐδ᾽ 
ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε 5 6: now we know that what is here meant by ἐδύνασθε 
is the state of being able repeatedly in the past—the ability or inability 
to do something or other every time on getting up to dance. This we 
know because a particular-past ἐδύνασθε would be inconsistent with the 
essential meaning of the Optative mode, which appears in the limiting 
clause. But that limiting clause, the condition ef dvacralnre (τὸ ἀναστῆ- 
vat), while supplying the specific interpretation of ἐδύνασθε, is itself com- 
pletely vague and incapable of specific interpretations. When’ we say 
that the “ point of view” is past or future, we mean merely that the sen- 
tence as a whole is of past or of future time; or when we say that a 
condition of this form is sometimes nof an original construction, but the 
past phase of another mode, we do not thereby describe an inherent quality 
of the clause, constituting a specific difference; we merely advance, for 
the sentence as a whole, a ¢heory of explanation.—In English the case 
is entirely different. To begin with, there is no Optative mode. The sense 
of the passage quoted can be expressed in a great variety of ways, all of 
them rather explicit, none of them very simple. Some would attack the 
sentence at the beginning, some at the end, some on both sides at once. 
We might say, ‘If (ever) you stood up to dance, you were unable even to 
hold yourselves erect,’ or, ‘If you stood up to dance, you were never able 
even to hold yourselves erect’; or, in case we happened to be very anx- 
ious to make our meaning clear, we could say, ‘If you ever stood up to 
dance, you were a/ways unable even to hold yourselves erect.’ See Good- 


win, Greek Moods and Tenses, § 462, translation of the first example in 
the last paragraph on p. 170. 


BE 
ον 


WRITER’S GUIDE ~ 103 


cision of Greek insight into the fundamental processes of thought, 
are yet content to mark off the essential only. The Vague Poten- - 
tial comes to be fairly shivered to fragments in English: εἴποις ἄν, 
‘you might,’ ‘can,’ ‘could,’ ‘would speak,’ ‘you may speak if you 
please,’ ‘hadn’t you better speak,’ e¢c. Even the Indicative mode, 
with its temporal attachments, is not to be excepted: the Greek 
Indicative of the future answers to both / shail and 7) will, expres- 
sions based upon a distinction which we are accustomed to regard 
as of serious moment. The ubiquitous connective particle might 
seem, at first blush, to form an exception to the characteristic we 
have been considering. But the exception is merely apparent. Con- 
junctions pertain to contour, not to.color or filling. Asyndeton is 
broken outline. 


vi 


I 


° 





DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE BOOK 


This book is designed to furnish materials and facilities for 
extensive practice in the writing of Attic Prose by beginners (while 
they are reading the Anabasis) before the stage of original composi- 
tion has been reached. Such writing should always take the form 
of connected discourse, never that of detached sentences intended 
to illustrate particular rules of grammar; and it should be made so 
easy that learners may do a great deal, very often, spontaneously 
and naturally, without severe mental effort. It must proceed by the 
following steps: — (1) neat and accurate copying, by the page or 
paragraph; (2) the writing of Greek αὐ hearing, from dictation ; 
(3) re-translation, or writing from memory; (4) re-combination, a 
sort of writing that is partly by memory, partly by imitation. 

It is indispensable that some facility in copying and in writing 
‘ - Greek at hearing be first acquired. An advance can then be made 
= to re-translation, pure and simple, by the use of one of the English 
= Exercises intended therefor: The Taking of Babylon (128), Ischo- 
3° machus’ Instructions (145), Battle of Coronea (162), Hunting as 

Education (166). Most learners will be led to commit the original 
Greek to memory, little by little, in connection with this work. 
The other Exercises have not been systematically constructed or 
arranged; nor has it been attempted to utilize to the utmost the 
35 material offered by each model, but room has been left for teachers 


I 


wn 


2 


ο 


2 


wn 


° 


τς 
&: 
a 
Βι ἢ 
τ 
τὰ, 
* 
ay 





ee 
— .».. ,».....ὕ 
--ὦ»......-..- 


104 ATTIC PROSE 


uw 


-_ 
° 


2 


° 


25 


30 


35 


40 


and students to frame supplementary exercises to suit themselves. 
Many of the Exercises in the book will be found to present but little 
variation from their respective models. There will be need of care- 
ful attention, however, in distinguishing between what is variation 
and what is translation— between essential departures from the 
thought of the original passage and such unessential amplifications 
or formal alterations as have resulted merely from the difference 
between the ancient and the modern idiom. Thus, in the first sen- 
tence of the first Exercise (107), there is no real departure from 
the model until we come to the omission of ὁμολογεῖται 1 2; then 
there is some variation that consists in both omission and re-com- 
bination, the latter part of the sentence becoming μητρὸς δὲ Μαν- 
δάνης τῆς ᾿Αστυάγους θυγατρὸς τοῦ Μήδων γενομένου βασιλέως. In 
the second sentence ὁμολογεῖται appears, replacing λέγεται καὶ ᾷδεται 
ἔτι καὶ νῦν ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων 1 5.—In case of doubt as to this 
matter, on the part of any who are unaccustomed to real translation, 
the presumption is that the words of Xenophon are to be reproduced, 
as nearly as they can be remembered. 

In general, the following rules of procedure must be observed in 
using the book : — 

I. No writing will ever be attempted until the appropriate model 
ts intimately and truly known. 

The several models are to be learned through intensive study 
directed upon the Greek text, and through repeated reading of the 
Greek aloud, so as to gather the thoughts in the order of their 
presentation, and comprehend the whole meaning exactly as the 
author intended to convey it. This cannot be done by translating ; 
of translating there must be none.!_ Written tests will be taken 


1 Intensive study begins and ends with the reading of the Greek — 
reading accompanied by thought, always with alert attention, never when 
tired or indifferent to the book. It includes, first, investigation or close 
observation of every word—the value of the word as determined by the 
proper, radical signification (apart from such metaphorical or secondary 
meaning as may be indicated by the context), by the form (not analytically 
viewed, but concretely, as involving the point of the grammatical construc- 
tion and rhetorical application at hand), and, as in the case of minor words, 
by the logical relations of the thought; secondly, observation of the effects 
of sound and arrangement — the right division or articulation in reading, 
rhythmical quality of the period with its cola and commata, the quantita- 
tive value of the vowels and the syllables, intonation and sentence-accent, 





ωι 


2 


ο 


30 


35 





EXERCISES AND GUIDE 105 


upon no part of any Exercise until the reading and study of the 
corresponding selection from Xenophon have been finished, and a 
new selection has been assigned. Thus, if re-translation is to be 
done, and The Taking of Babylon (21) has been chosen for the 


all in connection with the order of the words and the whole resulting sense; 
thirdly, inquiry into matters of fact of a historical, geographical, or anti- 
quarian character, so far as this may be needed to elucidate the author’s 
meaning. 

Some minds rapidly assimilate mznutiae, with great precision and com- 
paratively little effort, because they are satisfied with nothing short of a 
perfectly distinct image or concept (to which an exact knowledge of details 
is essential), and are thus naturally led to a habit of fine observation in 
reading. Other minds are hardly capable of intensive study of the phe- 
nomena of language in intelligible combinations, or even of understanding 
its importance; they are content to deal with a Greek or a Latin book, not 
by the imagination, but in a sort of algebraic way, by the use of purely 
verbal or literal contrivances. Learners, accordingly, must be left largely 
to their own devices, as far as the finer study of the models is concerned. 
The proof of it will be in their works ; and the stimulus should be applied 
negatively, through the criticism or reprehension of oral and written per- 
formance, rather than by positive precept. So far as some real reading 
and real writing comes to be done, it is well; while the boy or girl who 
is versed in pseudo-translation and the syntax catechism, but can neither 
read nor write, has gained nothing — ὀνόματα yap οὐκ ἂν παιδεύσειαν. 

The periods devoted to writing (there should be at least two weekly, 
along with three given to the Anabasis) may well be divided between the 
test occupying the latter part of the hour, and some discussion, during the 
first ten or fifteen minutes, of the preceding exercise —the papers now 
returned to their authors with corrections. The Anabasis ought to be read 
more rapidly in connection with the Writer of Attic Prose than would be 
feasible without such an accompaniment; the intensive study that would 
otherwise need to be given to portions of the Anabasis can be replaced by 
that due to the Writer, while, on the other hand, most of the oral practice 
demanded by the Writer might well be conjoined to the recitation of the 
Anabasis. ‘Thus, members of the class in the Anabasis will always bring the 
Writer with them, holding themselves in readiness to recite such portions 
of either book or of both books as have been duly studied and prepared. 

It is taken for granted that the Anabasis is read zz Greek. A Greek 
book can no more be read in English than an English book can be 
read in Greek or in Latin. Daily translation is waste and corruption. 
Translation is by far too important and valuable an exercise to be allowed 
to degenerate into sham and drivel. Only a small part of what is read can 
be translated. Of the Anabasis, for example, one chapter in each Book 


τεῦ τ ΑΤΤΙΟ ΡΕΟΒΕ 


purpose, there will be no written test until the whole of The Taking 

of Babylon has been read and studied, and the reading and study 

of Battle of Coronea (56), or of some other model, have begun. 

Il. The daily proficiency of learners must be tested, never by 
means of written work “handed in,” but always by performances 
in the class-room, with the book closed. 

The stage of copying is supposed to have been passed before 
re-translation or re-combination begins. — For each test, the books 
will be laid aside, and the teacher will dictate to the class, or put 
10 upon the blackboard, a part of some Exercise at which they have 

been privately working in connection with the reading and study of 

the model. — Sufficient matter should be presented on each occasion 
to keep the best scholar in the class busy during the time allowed, 
the others to write no more than they can severally do well, without 

15 hurry or anxiety. F 

lll. Ad written work will be minutely criticised in writing, pro- 

' vided it be sufficiently well performed to deserve credit or criticism. 
The marks should bear upon (1) details of orthography and 

grammatical construction, and (2) the order of the words and the 
idiomatic character of the writing. Give no credit for any perform- 
ance, as a whole, that is defaced by flagrant grammatical error or 
other forms of illegibility; nor for such portions of a composition 
as have clearly been made in a mechanical way, z.e. rather by rule 
than by force of sympathy and reminiscence. 

25 Students depending upon self-instruction can correct their own 
writing partly by the aid of grammar and lexicon, partly by com- 
parison with the Greek text upon which it has been based. Never 
make use of such a thing as an “ English-Greek ” dictionary, but if at 
a loss for a word, ask Xenophon about it—7z.e. read over your models, 

30 or read new ones or a chapter or two of the Anabasis, until the right 
expression finally presents itself. — In re-translating, if embarrassed 
by a too tenacious memory, increase your pace, and leave a longer 
interval between the study of the model and the written test. Go 
by the maxim: Wedll-got, well-forgotten. 


wm 


2 


° 


might be assigned for translation work, to be elaborated in English, little 
by little, after it has been read and explained in the class-room. The 
translations presented from time to time must always be iz writing. Each 
student should be called upon publicly to defend at every point the trans- 
᾿ Tation which he offers, as the candidate for a degree must defend his thesis. 


3 


ur 






¢. 
Ξ 
Ἢ 
Ὧν. 
: 





Bee ee ae Shae 


































EXERCISES FOR WRITING 


Cyrus the Great: his Lineage and Native Qualities 


The father of Cyrus is said to have been Cambyses, 
king of the Persians; his mother, Mandane, daughter 
of Astyages, who was king of the Medes. It is agreed 
that Cyrus was very handsome in person; of kindly 

5 disposition, fond of learning, and ambitious — ready 
to endure any sort of toil or danger for the sake of 
applause. Such in mind and body was our hero, ac- 
cording to national songs in which he is celebrated even 
to this day. It is also well remembered how he was 

το educated in the Persian mode. 


The Boy Cyrus at the Court of Media 


The details of this education we pass over. When, 
however, Cyrus was about twelve years of age, the king 
of Media, hearing that his grandson far excelled his 
mates, conceived a desire to see the boy. Accordingly 

15 Mandane paid a visit to her father, taking Cyrus with 
her. Upon their arrival Astyages could note for him- 
self the superior qualities of the child. He learned 


1. Guide 71. 4. person, disposition: antithetic, Guide 75. 6. en- 
dure: synonyms 49 10, 50 25, 51 6. 7 f. 6... τοιαύτην ἔχειν ἐκεῖνος 
ᾷδεται κτλ. 9. how: 60 τς f. 11. Τὰ μ. οὖν καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῆς π. τ. Tapar. 
12. The subjects cannot have a prominent position.— years of age: 41 14. 
14. conceived a desire: Ingressive Aorist, H. 841, G. 1260, B. 529. — to see: 
antithetic to ‘hearing’ above. 16. for himself: αὐτός. 17. superior quali- 
ties: 1,6. his καλοκἀγαθία 39. 


΄ 


107 


108 "ATTIC PROSE 


quickly whatever he had to learn, and everything he 
was seen to do was done in a handsome and manly 
way. 

The Median dress and modes of life were not so 

5 plain and inexpensive as the Persian. Accordingly, when 
Cyrus beheld this royal personage, his mother’s father, 
wearing his neck-chains and his armlets, and decked 
out with paint and false hair, as he gazed upon him he 
exclaimed, “ΟἿ, mother, what a beautiful grandfather 

10 I have got!” To his mother’s question, whether the 
Medes or the Persians seemed to him the handsomer, 
Cyrus made the apt reply, that while the garments and 
ornaments of the Medes were very beautiful, he had 
seen by far the handsomest mez among the Persians at 
15 home. 

However, Cyrus was soon wearing collars and brace- 
lets of his own. Child as he was, naturally fond of 
honor and of beautiful things, he was delighted with 
the fine dress in which his grandfather clothed him. 

20 And he was particularly glad to learn to ride. In 
Persia, owing to the difficulty of raising horses, moun- 
tainous as the country is, one scarcely ever even sees a 
horse. But now our hero could ride out mounted on 
a charger with golden bridle, in the same way as the 

25 king himself. 


4. were efc.: for the order, see 57 14. Say οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐν Il. φ. κτλ. 
6. this royal personage: τὸν βασιλικὸν δὴ τ. 7. wearing: 18 16, 89 4, 6. 
12, apt: dpa.— while: Guide 98 12, 13. had seen: Guide 94 27. 
16. however: ἀλλὰ yép.—soon: 714. 17. of his own: αὐτός. 20. par- 
ticularly: 81 29, 48 7. Use χαίρειν, not ὑπερχαίρειν. 23. νῦν δ᾽ ἐξῆν 
ἐκείνῳ κτλ. 








EXERCISES FOR WRITING 109 


At Dinner 


Astyages and his daughter Mandane believed that 
Cyrus would feel less homesick if he enjoyed his dinner 
highly. So, when they were all dining together, the 
king ordered various kinds of soups and side-dishes to 
5 be brought to him. He fancied this sort of a meal 
might seem to the boy much finer than the dinner in 
Persia. It is related, however, that Cyrus, on being 
questioned, replied as follows: “1 seems to me, grand- 
father, that you Medes take a great deal of trouble at 
to your meals. In our country there is a straight and 
narrow path to getting enough. We do not wander up 
and down over roundabout courses, but plain bread and 

meat lead directly to the desired end.” 
“Well, my boy,” said the king, “‘we are not exactly 
15 sorry to be upon this devious journey. Taste for your- 
self,.and you will see that it is all very nice.” ‘Nay, 
but I do observe, grandpa,” said Cyrus, ‘“ that you have - 
a strong dislike of your own for these viands; for 
when you take hold of the bread you don’t wipe your 
20 hand upon anything, but whenever you touch any of 
| these dainties you immediately clean off your hand with 
a napkin, as if you were very sorry to have got it soiled 

by them.” 


1-6. For the first and third sentences, Guide 98 33. or the synonyms, 
Guide 96 20.—Do not place the names first in Greek; these are no new 
people. — (all) dining together: Gen. abs. without subject, H. 972 8, 
G. 1568, B. 657 N. 1. Seealso46 19. 8. questioned: cf 6 10.—as foll.: 
18 26, 26 25.—it seems: Guide 98 το. Arrange Il. μ. 6. rp. κτλ. 10. in 
our country: παρ᾽ ἡμῖν. 13. To the desired end: ὅποι σπεύδομεν. 
14f. exactly: 57.—The same order in Greek, but different construction. 





110 ATTIC PROSE 


wn 


I 


° 


15 


20 


γε. 


“Tf such, then, are your views, my child,” rejoined 
Astyages, “ yet do at any rate try and make a hearty 
meal of the flesh and game that I here serve to you. 
If you mean to go home a young man, you must eat 
meat, and plenty of it, too.” 


The Court in its Cups 


“When I poured the wine for you just now, grand- 
father,” said Cyrus, “I did not imitate your cupbearer 
and drink up the wine myself. It would hardly be for 
my advantage to be drinking poison; and I found out 
for certain that this fellow drugged your wine when 
you entertained your friends at the birthday party.” 

“ And how pray did you come to discover this?” said 
the king, jestingly. ‘‘ Because, by Jupiter,” said Cyrus, 
“you were all so unsteady both in your minds and 
your bodies, and were doing just what you forbid us 
boys to do. In the first place, I heard you crying out 
all at the same time, without understanding each other, 
and singing in a very ridiculous manner, while swearing 
every one that your singing was of the best. Then 
again I saw you stand up to dance, and that, too, when 
you could not even hold yourselves erect. Nor, indeed, 
were you silent for a moment, but all of you had en- 


3. ταῦτα, ἅπερ 7. σ. κ. θ. κι τῶν Hu. 4. must efc.: δεῖ σε xp. ἐσθ. κ. πολλά 
6 f. The first “Τ᾽ is antithetic to ‘cupbearer’; the second ‘I,’ not ex- 


pressed in Greek. — just now: νῦν δή. 7. imitate and drink: cf 319 f.— 
hardly: οὐ... πάνυ. 14. you were efc.: οὕτως du. Fre κτλ. H. 981. Place 
ptcp.last. 15. just: the force of this word is shown in Greek by placing the 
relative before the antecedent clause. 20. stand (not “standing”): Guide 
100 9.— and that, too: καὶ ταῦτα, w. ptcp. H. 612 a, G. 1573 Ny B. 312 N. 


21. 


ΠΟΥ ἐΐε. ᾿ οὐδὲ μὴν οὐδεπ., cf. 58 & 








β 
Υ 









EXERCISES FOR WRITING III 


tirely forgotten that you were kings and rulers. But 
when / mix the drink, grandfather,” added Cyrus, “ you 
shall merely cease to be thirsty, and suffer no evil con- 
sequences whatever.” 


Cyrus decides to remain with his Grandfather 


wn 


Observing that his daughter was getting ready to 
return home to her husband, Astyages begged her 
to leave Cyrus with him. ‘At dinner,” he said, ‘the 
boy shall be at liberty to travel by whatsoever road he 
will to that which he regards as moderation; and, in 
1o general, whatever he may wish, he has only to inform 

me, and he shall not fail to get it.” 

To this Mandane replied: “To leave the child here 
against his will I should regard as a harsh proceeding ; 
perhaps, however, he will prefer to remain with you, if 

15 he can learn to ride, and to chase wild animals and bring 
them down, as grown men do. Were you to provide 
him with playmates, and offer him the use of your 
horses and the animals in the park, I do not think he 
would choose to go back to Persia for the present.” 

20 On being interrogated, Cyrus did not hesitate a mo- 

ment, but promptly declared that he preferred to stay. 

“For be sure, mother,” he said, ‘ that here is something 

which disturbs me greatly — because, while I seem to 


2. mix: dvaxepavvivar. — added: ἔφη, Guide 102. 5. Cf 49 14 f. 
8. be at liberty: 46 3,4. 9. καὶ τἄλλα δέ. 14. perhaps: 44 3.— prefer: 
βούλεσθαι. 15. can learn: Aor. of attainment. 18. Order, 17 22 f., 28 
Veb. 2 f., 88 6.— choose: ἐθέλειν. ---- ῸΓ the present: viv ye. Beware of 
the English ascending scale, here and everywhere, Guide 70 13. 20. Cf 


56 22. 23. while ec. Guide 98 12. 


112 ATTIC PROSE 


excel my mates in everything at home, here in Media 

I am clearly inferior in riding horseback. But if you 

leave me here, I shall try and learn to ride well, in 

order by.and by, when I visit grandfather again, to help 
5 him in war and be one of his best horsemen.” 


A Lesson in Justice 


It appears, from revelations made by Cyrus to his 
mother before her departure, that he used to be set 
by his teacher to act as judge for the other boys, and 
upon one occasion he had decided a case wrongly. He 

το found, namely, that it was fair if a man took and wore, 
not the shirt that was his own, but the one that fitted 
him. “If you take a man’s shirt away by force,” said 
the teacher, “that is not rightful possession; but he 
who has made or purchased what he wears is properly 

15 Called the possessor thereof. Do not you, therefore, — 
unless you happen to be fond of stripes, — choose to 
constitute yourself a judge of what is fitting, when you 
have solely to consider what is just or unjust.” 


Winning Ways of Cyrus 
Finally, when his mother had gone, while Cyrus 
20 remained at his grandfather’s, it was soon discovered 


2. Clearly inferior: οὐ 1 14. 4. by and by: elcad@&s.—visit: 1 19, 
or as M. 6. & ἐξ ὧν τῇ μ. ἀνεκάλυψεν ὁ K. π. ἀπελθεῖν αὐτήν. Cf 
8ὅ 29.— to be set: not passive voice inGreek. 9. had decided: 108 13 note. 
10, found: Guide 96 32.—namely: Guide 98 9.—a man: rls. — Ascending 
scale in this sentence. 13. that is not δ... οὐκ ἂν αὕτη xr. —he who etc. : 
ὃς av... ἔχῃ, οὗτος κτλ. 15 ff. μηδ᾽ οὖν σύ, εἴπερ μὴ xrd.—cChoose: 
ἐθέλειν. Construction, H. 874, G. 1346, B. 584. Cf 82 10, 88 1, but 21 
9 f.—to constitute yourself: γενέσθαι. --- solely: μόνον. 20, it was efc.: 
not passive voice in Greek. Preserve the order. 


— es Ύο 








un 


20 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 113 


by all who were on familiar terms with the lad, that 
they could accomplish a great deal by the aid of Cyrus. 
He made so much of his companions, that even their 
fathers, if they happened to want anything of the king, 
would prompt the boys to ask Cyrus to get it done for 
them, while he, for his part, deemed it of the utmost 
importance to gratify their wish. 

Indeed, he won over everybody by his kindly spirit, 
and particularly Astyages himself. As for the latter, 
he could refuse no favor that Cyrus asked. On the 
other hand, it was apparent to all that the boy was 
exceedingly fond of his grandfather. Once, when the 
old man fell sick, he never left him for a moment; but 
even in the night, if Astyages wanted anything, Cyrus 
would be the first to perceive it, and would jump up 
most unhesitatingly to render any service which he 
thought would please the king. 


Hunting 
The supply of animals in the park was speedily ex- 
hausted with Cyrus’ chasing and shooting and slaying 
of them, so that Astyages could no longer furnish live 
ones in considerable numbers. The boy, therefore, not 
wishing his grandfather to be at the trouble of search- 
ing for wild animals, and being at the same time very 


2. by the aid: διά w. acc. 3. made so much of: οὕτω γὰρ jor. 8. κ. 


πάντας μ. δὴ... μάλιστα δὲ κτλ. 9. ἐκεῖνος ydp.—refuse etc... H. 1034, 


G. 


13. 
18. 


1616, B. 435, ο΄ 46 22. το. ἔνδηλος δ᾽ αὖ κτλ. 12. exceedingly: 8 17. 
old man: 13 11. --- 611 sick: Ingressive Aorist. Reverse the order. 
The Greek is simpler than the English. Not passive voice. 19. Gen. 


abs.—- Place Cyrus’ name last; but the king’s comes to the front by contrast, 


ATTIC PROSE— 8 


114 ATTIC PROSE 


desirous of going out to hunt, entreated the king to 
send him forth in company with his uncle. ‘‘When I 
am hunting out there,” he said, “I shall regard all the 
wild beasts that I see as kept for my especial benefit.” 

Accordingly, when Astyages came to see that Cyrus’ 
heart was set on the business, he could not help grant- 
ing the favor. He sent along with the lad, however, 
not his uncle only, but guards on horseback, to protect 
him from dangerous localities, and to be ready in case 
any wild animal of the fiercer sort should make its 
appearance. In reply to the boy’s eager inquiries the 
attendants explained what kind of animals were not to 
be too confidently approached, stating that while the 
wild sheep and asses were harmless enough, it would 
not be safe to go very near to a bear or a wild boar. 
They added that dangerous places must be looked out 
for no less than animals, since men had frequently 
fallen over precipices with their horses. 

To all this Cyrus gave the readiest attention. But 
upon seeing a deer jump out, he forgot everything he 
had heard and gave chase, with an eye to nothing else 
except the direction of its flight. And somehow, while 


wm 


- 
° 


wm 


2 


ο 


1. entreated: Impf. 2. his uncle: 14 14 f. ς f. Simpler in the Greek, 
which does not avoid repetition of word or phrase. It would be right, how- 
ever, to say τοῦ ἔργου. 7. the favor: οὐδὲ τοῦτο, repeating the negative, 
H. 1030, G. 1619, B. 433. See also’? 23. 9. Guide 91 4. For the arrange- 
ment εἰ... θηρίων, Guide 74 8. 11. inquiries: use ptcp. 12. explained: 
becomes a simpler word in Greek. 13. (stating) that: Inf. 14. enough: 
implied in the concessive μέν. 15. be safe: Vcb. ἔχειν, o 406. 16. added: 
the specific meaning of the verb is implied in καὶ τοῦτος. 17. frequently: 
πολλούς, or πολλάκις. See Vecb. ἤδη. --- with their horses: H. 774 ἃ, 
G. 1191. B. 392, 3N. 19 f. Guide 94 13, 100 9. 








EXERCISES FOR WRITING 11 


taking a cross-leap his horse fell upon its knees, and 
came within a little of pitching Cyrus himself over its 
head. However, he kept his seat just barely, the horse 
got up, and upon coming to the level ground, with a 
cast of the javelin, Cyrus brought down the deer, a fine 
large animal. 

The boy was overjoyed. But the guards riding up 
began to berate him, pointing out what a risk he had 
run, and declaring that they would report his conduct. 
10 Cyrus stood where he had dismounted, and was sorely 
troubled while listening to these words. But of a sud- 
den, upon hearing shouts, he sprang upon his horse like 
one possessed; and when he saw a wild boar rushing 
straight toward him, rode to meet it, and with his full 
strength took a well-aimed shot at the forehead and 
brought down the boar. 

At this point Cyaxares also rode up, and declared 
that he had never witnessed such temerity. But Cyrus 
begged his uncle, notwithstanding these reproaches, to 
20 permit him to carry home and give to his grandfather 

all the game that he had taken with his own hands. 

‘He will scold, no doubt,” he added, “if he becomes 

aware that I went off in pursuit. But let him even give 

me a whipping, if he will, after I have once given him 

25 the game. And as for you, uncle, if you will grant me 
this favor first, you may end by inflicting any punish- 
ment you see fit.” 


7. began: Guide 94 18. 16. Vcb. μέντοι. 20. (all) ... that: ὅσα. 
21. no doubt: 67. 23. omce: Aor., Guide 94 27. 25. end: H. 968 a, 
G. 1564, B. 653N.2.—any .. . you see fit: 8 τι ἂν δοκῇ σοι. The English 
substantive is implied in the Greek verb. H, 716 b, G. 1054, B. 334. 


w 


-_ 
wn 





116 7 . ATTIC PROSE 


A Grand Hunting Party 
After that, it seemed to Cyrus that their hunting in 
the park was mere fooling, very much like chasing crea- 
tures that were tied. He described to his companions 
how fine and large appeared the animals in the hills 
and meadows — deer springing skyward, as it were on 
wings; wild boars rushing to the conflict like courage- 
ous men. “ You might see all this for yourselves, 
boys,” said he, “if your fathers would but let you go 
out to hunt.” “And indeed they would, easily enough,” 
10 was the reply, “if the king were to command it. All 
that you have to do is to mention it to him. Nobody 
is better able to prevail upon him than yourself. A 
sorry tale indeed you have to tell us, if such a talker as 
you is to fail to accomplish this thing, after all that you 

15 have got done for us before.” ἐς 
Upon hearing this Cyrus screwed up his courage and 
went in to his grandfather with a little scheme. This 


wn 


was the way he began: “Tell me, grandfather,” said 


he, “if one of your domestics run away and you take 
20 him, what shall you do with him?”’ ‘What else,” re- 
plied Astyages, “but put him in confinement and com- 
pel him to work?” ‘But if he come back of his own 
accord, how will you do?” “Why, give him a whip- 
ping, that he may not do so again, and employ him as 
25 at first.” “Then it were high time,” said Cyrus, “ for 
1. after that: 20 3, or 55 ο. --- φλ. ἐδόκουν. . . ὅτε, Guide 98 10. 


3. described: 38 19, 39 17, 42 2, or use λέγειν. 8. if .. . but: εἰ ἄρα. 
10. δεῖ δέ σε μόνον κτλ. 13. indeed: δή, cf 10 23. — such a talker as you: 


δεινὸς ὧν σὺ λ. 14. ὁ Too. ἤδη Hu. διαπραξάμενος. 17. with a little scheme: _ 


ἐπιβουλεύσας τι. 


‘ 
A 
: 

ὴ 
3 
{ 
ἕ 










' 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 117 


you to make preparations for whipping me, as I have 
a design of running away and taking my companions 
ona hunt.” “Then you have done well to tell me this 
beforehand,” Astyages said. ‘I forbid you to stir from 
5 the house. A pretty mess, were I to let my daughter’s 
child get away like a stray calf, for the sake of a few 
morsels of meat!” 
But although he talked in this way, the king never- 
theless meant to go out hunting himself with Cyrus, 
1o and to take along the boys as well. Accordingly he 
assembled a great many men on foot and on horseback, 
with the intention of driving the game together, so as to 
make a grand hunt. In order that his grandson might 
have his fill of the sport first, Astyages was for issuing 
15 orders that no one should shoot before him. Cyrus, 
however, would not allow this, but declared that if the 
king wished him to enjoy the hunting, all of his mates 
must be permitted to contend freely in the chase. 
Thereupon Astyages gave permission, and taking his 
20 Stand enjoyed the spectacle of the lads vying with each 
other in pursuing the game and hurling their javelins, 
unable as they were even to be silent for delight, but 
giving voice like so many full-blooded young dogs. 
Nor did he give the order to go home, until they had 
25 secured large numbers of game. 


3. Guide 99 34. 4. forbid: with μή, H. 1029, G. 1615, B. 434. 5. Guide 
81 24. 8. Cf 5327. το. as well: τοὺς ἄλλους. 12. with the intention: 
16 24, cf. 36 26.—so as: here ὅπως. 14. was for εἴ... Impf. 18. must: 
77.—freely: ἐλευθέρως. 20. the spectacle: θεώμενος. 22. unable evc.- 
οὐδὲ o. δυναμένους. ---- ἹἾΚ6 (80 many): ὥσπερ. 24. nor etc. - οὐδὲ μέντοι. --- 


_ until: πρίν, H. 922, 924 a; G. 1471, 2; B. 627. Cf 41 23. 


118 ATTIC PROSE 





Cyrus returns Home 


When Cambyses, the father of Cyrus, heard that his . 
son was already taking manly deeds in hand, he sum- 
moned him accordingly to return, that he might com- 
plete the prescribed discipline of the Persian state. 
Cyrus likewise, at this juncture, preferred to return, to 
avoid any displeasure on his father’s part or censure 
from the community. Astyages, again, perceiving that 
it was quite necessary to dismiss his grandson, presented 
him with such horses as he particularly desired to take, 

10 besides a great many other things which he packed up 

for him, and gave orders that the whole court, both 

young and old, should act as a mounted escort for 

Cyrus as he left the country. Then was there no one, 

it is related, but wept as they turned back, and Cyrus 
15 himself took his homeward way with many tears. — 

Many of the presents which Astyages had given him ~ 

he distributed among his companions; and finally he 

took off the Median dress which he wore and gave it to 
one of them, thereby making known that it was he 
20 whom he loved the best of all. 
Now those who had received and accepted these gifts 
returned them to Astyages. The king took them and 
sent them home to Cyrus. Cyrus, in his turn, sent 


uw 









| 
| 





1-7. Here the names hold prominent positions by antithesis. 5. preferred: 
Veb. βούλεσθαι. 7. perceiving efc.; very different from the M. Guide 97 
13. 9. such ...as: English idiom for relative pronoun. 13. as he 
left e¢.: look out for the ascending scale. 13. Then: 12 11.—no one but: τ 
Η. 1003 a, G. 1095, B. 485 N. 1.—turned back: Impf.—took his way: — 
Aor. 18, For the form of the relative sentence, cf 24 25, H. 995, G. 1037, — 
B. 485. 22. returned: first Aor., Veb. ἐνεγκεῖν. : 


wm 


15 


20 










EXERCISES FOR WRITING 119 


them back to Media again, with directions that any who 
had received a present from his hands must be allowed 
to keep it. 


He resumes the Persian Discipline 


Returning home under such circumstances, Cyrus 
was ranged for a year longer in the class of Boys. At 
first the boys are said to have taunted him with having 
learned luxurious habits among the Medes. Presently, 
however, upon seeing that he was still the stoutest of 
them all, they bowed down to him as before. In fact 
he ate and drank with the same relish as they did them- 
selves; and if there was feasting upon any holiday 
occasion, he showed himself rather inclined to give of 
his own portion than to ask for more. Again, after 
passing into the class of Youths, here, too, he main- 
tained his superiority, in all required exercises, in 
endurance, in respect for his elders and obedience to 
those in authority. 


Designs of the King of the Assyrians 


In the course of time, after the death of Astyages, 
when Cyaxares, the maternal uncle of Cyrus, had suc- 
ceeded to the throne of Media, the king of Assyria, as 


1. directions: use ἐπιστέλλειν. -- from his hands : would be παρά, but 


better follow the M. (ἐγώ becoming αὐτός). --- must: 7 7, with Inf. act. 
5. was ranged: Vcb. γενέσθαι. 6. to have taunted : σκώπτειν, Guide 99 30. 
—In what follows, note idiomatic ἥκειν. 7. ἔπειτα δέ, or μέντοι. 9. bowed 
down: still infinitive construction, as σκώπτειν above.—in fact: γάρ. 
12. showed efc.: φαίνεσθαι might be used 1 14, but the Impf. stem alone is 
enough. Greek is simple, and avoids unnecessary amplification. 14. main- 
tained ec.: Impf. 18-20. Gen. abs. 20. Ingressive Aorists, H. 841, G. 1260, 
B. 529. 


120 ATTIC PROSE 


5 


10 


20 


94 


19. 
ἔλεγεν, 18 26.— The direct quotation here constitutes a real departure from 
the M.; oratio directa and oratio obliqua are essentially different. 


history relates, conceived a design of making himself 
ruler of all the nations round about him. This, he 
thought, would be easily accomplished, could he but 
render the Medes powerless; for of the neighboring 
tribes this one seemed to him the strongest. It is said 
that he had reduced all the Syrians to subjection, had 
already brought the Arabians and Hyrcanians under 
his sway, and was besieging the Bactrians. Next, 
therefore, with a view to his campaign against Media, 
he sends abroad to all his dependencies, likewise to 
Croesus, king of Lydia, to the king of the Cappadocians, 
and to many others. Some are said to have been per- 
suaded by his arguments to form an alliance with him, 
while others were prevailed upon by means of bribes 
and largesses. 


Cyrus takes Command of a Persian Army 


Cyaxares, the son of Astyages, on becoming aware of 
the hostile design and the preparation of those who 
were combining against him, proceeded immediately to 
make such counter-preparations as he could at home, 
and sent to Persia also, addressing himself both to the 
community at large and to his brother-in-law Cambyses, 
who was its king. He likewise addressed Cyrus, in 
these words: “I beg you, if the commonwealth send 
any soldiers, to come as their commander; for I hear 
1. design: 1.4. the w7//. 3. Not passive voice. 8. was besieging: Guide 


11.— Next: ἔπειτα. 9. with a view: 16 24.—campaign: 27 21 f. 
at home: αὐτός. English ascending scale. 22. πέμπων ὃ. x. π. Κ. τ. 










EXERCISES FOR WRITING 121 


that you have completed the ten-year course of the 

Youths, and are now in the class of Grown Men.” 

Thus, upon Cyrus’ acceptance of the proposal, the 

council of elders chose him commander of the troops 
5 for Media. 


He marches to Media 


Being thus about to start upon his first military expe- 
dition, Cyrus begged his father to accompany him upon 
the march as far as the frontier. Cambyses assented, 
and after addressing their vows to Hestia, Zeus, and 

το the other gods they proceeded on their way. Immedi- 
ately there were auspicious thunderings and flashes of 
lightning; and no one failed to mark that these revela- 
‘tions were signs given by the supreme deity. 
When they arrived at the frontier, as they were about 
15 to cross into Media, an eagle made its appearance on 
the right hand and preceded them; and not until they 
had prayed to the tutelary gods and heroes of the Per- 
sian land to grant a favorable and gracious passage did 
they undertake to pass the border. When, however, 
20 they had passed over and had again offered prayer to 
the tutelary gods of ‘Media to give them a gracious and 
favorable reception, father and son took an affectionate 


6. about to: 84 1. 7. him: H. 683 a, G. 993, B. 471, cf 55 18. 8. as- 
sented: 26 10. 12. Note that λαθεῖν always has an object, expressed or under- 
stood; and the object often becomes the subject in English: ἀτακτῶν τοὺς 
θεοὺς οὐ λήθει, ‘The gods do not fail to note that he is out of order,’ 44 3. 


_ —revelations: φανέντα, not as substantive; 2.6. do not use the article, H. 673, 
᾿ς Ὁ. 945, B. 456. 13. signs: pred., not asin M. H. 669, G. 956, B. 449.— 
' given by: predicate Gen. (of possession), H. 732 a, G. 1094, B. 348, I. 
_ 16-18. The English idiom is negative, the Greek positive. H. 976 b. 


19. undertake to pass: Impf. 





ore ae ἀπ ee ee eee - 


122 ATTIC PROSE 


leave of one another; the former returned home; while 
Cyrus led the army to Cyaxares and the Medes. 


Capture of Sardis 


Learning that Croesus, the king of Lydia, who had 

retreated in the night on the homeward track, had 

5 already arrived at Sardis, Cyrus at once marched upon 
the city. When he came to the stronghold in Sardis, 
he proceeded to set up his engines and prepare scaling 
ladders as speedily as he could. Instead, however, of 
making an attack upon the wall, the next night he 

το caused a force of Chaldaeans and Persians to ascend the 
fortification at a point supposed to be its steepest part 
and hence left unguarded. The way was shown to them 
by a Persian, a man who had been the slave of a mem- 
ber of the garrison in the citadel, and had knowledge of 

15 a path leading down to the river, affording also means 
of ascent. 

The heights being thus in possession of the enemy, 
the Lydians no longer remained within the walls, but 
all took to flight, wherever each could best save himself 

20 throughout the city. Cyrus, marching in at break of 
day, issued an order that no man should stir from the 





3. king of Lydia: 14 25.—had retreated: Aor. Distinguish Aor. and 
Impf. with care throughout this exercise. 6. stronghold: note the synonyms 
τὸ τεῖχος, τὰ τείχη, τὸ ἔρυμα, τὰ ἄκρα, ἣ ἀκρόπολις. The arx, from different 
points of view. 8. instead of efc.: 59 5. 9-12. Remember the order in the Μ. - 
—hence: διὰ r.— left unguarded: ép. ὄντα φυλάκων». ---- Men of Chaldaea and 
Persia were chosen to execute this ruse, because their native haunts being moun- 
tainous afforded them practice in climbing steeps. 12. The passive voice in 
Eng. is often a device to secure a natural order. 14. had knowledge: Guide 
95. 17-20. Many words are saved in turning English into Greek. 














uw 


" 
wn 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 123 


ranks. Croesus, however, supposing that the soldiers 
would plunder the city, shut himself up in his palace 
and began to call loudly upon the name of Cyrus. 
Whereupon his conqueror, before establishing his army 
in camp, left a guard over Croesus, that no harm might 
come to him. 

Cyrus and Croesus 


Later in the same day he commanded Croesus to be 
led into his presence. When Croesus saw him, “ All 
hail, master!” he exclaimed; “ this name henceforward 
Fate ordains is thine to hear and mine to utter.” 
“All hail to thee likewise, Croesus,” was the reply, 
“seeing that we are indeed mortals both. — But, Croesus, 
will you perchance give me a bit of advice?” “In 
truth, Cyrus,” said he, “1 could wish to find some good 
thing for you; for I fancy it would prove good for me, 
also.” 

Cyrus accordingly went on to explain that it was the 
soldiers who must be helped. ‘“ Many toils and many 
perils have they undergone,” he said, ‘‘and now they 
believe themselves in possession of the wealthiest city 
in Asia, next to Babylon. Unless, therefore, they shall 
reap some reward of their labors, I cannot long retain 
their obedience. Now then I do not wish to turn the 
city over to them to plunder; for so not only would 


2. plunder: 183. 3. began: Guide 9419. 4. ἐκεῖνος 5¢.— before: 35 29. 


5. harm εἴς... 869. Here add κακόν. 7. later: 84 25. ---ἰπ {Π6 day: cf 16 


27. 


9. this n.: Vcb. δεσπότης. 17. it was the soldiers: the Greek follows the 


order of thought in a simpler way than the English. Guide 72 21. 18. must 


be 


helped: choose between δεῖ, ae ὠφελητέον (H. 990, G. 1597, B. eet 


ἄξιον 55 26, ἀξιοῦν M. 24. not only... but: τέ... τέ. 


124 ATTIC PROSE 


Sardis itself be destroyed, but in the sacking the worst 
class of men would have the best of it.” 
“Nay,” said Croesus, “let me see to preventing a 
pillage and the robbing women and children of their 
5 lives. I shall say to the Lydians that I have given you 
a solemn promise, provided you would not plunder the 
city, that you should have by the free gift of the people 
any fine thing there is to be found in Sardis. When 
they hear that, I am sure that every fine thing in pos- 
10 session of man or woman in this place zw2// come-into 
your hands. And in the same way next year you will 
again find the city full of good and fine things in 
plenty ; whereas, if you sack it, even your arts, which 
men call the wellsprings of luxury, will have gone to 
15 ruin. Now, when you have had a look at what comes 
in, you will be at liberty to consider anew the question 
of pillage.” 
Γνῶθι σεαυτόν 


“Tf you wish, then, Cyrus, I shall now tell you what 

has been the outcome of my dealings with the oracle of 
20 Delphi. For I have in truth, even as it is said, sedu- 
lously cultivated the favor of Apollo; and had I really 
known myself, I should have guided all my actions 
from the very outset in obedience to his commands. 
In fact, however, all my doings were of the contrary 


3. see to etc. διαπρ. Wore μὴ γ. dp. μηδέ, κτλ. Veb. γενέσθαι. 6. solemn 
promise: Vcb.# μήν. 11,13. you will find: your arts: ethical Dat. H. 770, 
G. 1171, B. 381. 18-24. Allone period in Greek, but in other respects simpler 
than the English. — No Aorist occurs until προσηνέχθην is reached. 21. really: 
Veb. εἴπερ. Cf worep ‘just as,’ ‘even as.’ 





ἊΜ 


| direkt dit ies. τὰς τὰ een sald Bay new arse ~ 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 125 


sort in relation to Apollo. To begin with, when I 
ought to have questioned the god as to anything that I 
: wanted, I neglected this for the sake of making trial of 
+ him, to see whether he could speak the truth. Yet 
δ; assuredly no one, not a god merely, but not even a man 


¥ 
wn 


who is fair and good, loves those who disbelieve him. 

And so he, after coming to feel that he was disbelieved, 

was wroth with me and would not help me. 

Ἃ “Such, then, being the strange thing that I was 

_ 10 doing, when finally I sent to consult the god about 
issue, at first he gave me no answer at all. When, 
however, by means of many offerings that I sent, I 
began to believe,that I had at last fully propitiated him, 
again I inquired what I was to do in order that children 

15 might be born to me. And he replied that I would 
have them. And here indeed he spoke not falsely; 
nevertheless, it would have been better had they never 
been born. For, once born, they availed me nought, 
seeing that one was dumb from first to last, while the 

















| 1. when I ought: express either by parataxis, or by Acc. abs. H. 973, 

_ G. 1569, B. 658. There is no ἄν either way. H. 897, G. 1400, B. 607, of 
ἐβουλόμην 19 3. 3. (for the sake of) making: in Greek the participle 
does not imply purpose, but rather cause ; in fact it exp/aius the neglect. A 
_ participle is only a participle: it is a perverse habit to hunt up an exact logical 
relation for every participle, as none in particular may be implied, or two or 

three at once. So with the cases, Guide 101 27. 7. coming to feel: Aor. 
τ 8. wroth: 51 26. 9. strange thing: here means τὸ ἀποπειρᾶσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ. 
_ But in the M. the plural alludes to certain odd devices of Croesus, related by 
_ Herodotus I. 46-48.—that I was doing: the relative form is an English 
makeshift to secure a natural order of thought, οὐ 123 17; there would be no 
_ relative in Greek. 10. when finally: ὅτε δή, with Impf. 11-13. When...I 

_ began: Guide 94 20.—at last: ποτέ. 14. Guide 71 36. 16. here: τοῦτο, H. 
+716 b, G. 1054, B. 334. 17. better: κρεῖττον, 19. first to last: Vcb, τελεῖν. 





126 ATTIC PROSE 


other, turning out excellently well, perished in the 
prime of life. Even by such misfortunes regarding 
my children was I oppressed, so that again I sent and 
asked the god what I should do to pass the remainder 
of my life thereby most happily. And he replied to 


ut 


ie. — 


‘ Thyself knowing, Croesus, happy shalt thou fare.’ 


“Delighted as I was with this prophecy, I believed 
that now at any rate the god meant to help me. For 
10 what easier condition could he impose in offering hap- 
piness than this one? A knowledge of one’s own 
nature I thought belonged to everybody in the world. 
And truly, in the time that ensued, had I kept quiet, 
probably I should have had no fault to find with my 
fortunes. But after the death of my son, having been 
prevailed upon by the Assyrian to take part in the 
campaign against you, Cyrus, although not competent 
to contend with you, then it was that I failed to know 
myself. At first, to be sure, though I encountered 
20 every peril, I was delivered unharmed, and was not 
disposed to blame the god; but subsequently I fared 
otherwise —I came off by no means safely, myself nor 
mine.”’ 


wn 


8. Remember that in the M. the personal pronoun is emphasized (by antith- 
esis). Often so in Greek, rarely in English. Cf 21 4, 9, 26 26, 82 21, 46 17, 
24, 47 12, 14, 20, 22; so the third pers. 9 11, 20, 16 12, 28 12, 57 21. 
9. meant: βούλεσθαι. g—12. Remember the order and construction in the M. 
14. probably: 44 3. 18. then it was: οὕτω δή. --- failed to know: Ingres- 
sive Aor., negatively. 19. at first: τὸ rp. 21. subsequently: 84 25. — fared: 
use πράττειν. 22. by no means: 31 20. See also H. 1030, cf 82 gf. 












wn 


ΕΣ 
uw 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 127 


Thus again, now that many begged him to become 
their leader, offering him rewards, and declaring that 
if 4e were but willing to hold command, all would mind 
him and he could be the greatest man in the world, — 
by such talk Croesus allowed himself to be puffed up 
and spoiled. Accordingly, when he was chosen as 
leader of the war by all the neighboring princes, he 
accepted the command, in very truth not knowing him- 
self, but fancying himself competent to war against the 
great Cyrus. 

Evdatpovia 

It was the belief of Cyrus that Apollo would yet 
prove true in declaring that Croesus was to be happy 
through self-knowledge. And of all men surely Cyrus 
might make the best conjectures as to this matter; for 
at that juncture he had the power to effect it. Indeed, 
as he reflected upon the former prosperity of the 
Lydian king, he was moved with pity, and promised 
to restore to him the possession of his wife and his 
daughters, his friends, his servants, and a festive board 
even such as that wherewith they all had been wont 
to live. 

For his own part Croesus averred that if Cyrus would 
do that for him whereof he spoke, he should himself 
thenceforward lead an existence the most blessed of all. 


1f. Gen. abs. 5. allowed δ... Impf. 11. Guide 9810. 13. The Vague 


Potential may be used when the time in mind is Past. Examples are numerous, 


Thuc. I. 9, 4, Herod. VII. 214. Cf Shak. Hamlet V. 1 (contemplating a 


skull) “This fellow might be in his time a great buyer of land.” Guide 
100 2. 15. at that juncture: ἐν τῷ τ. 22. Νοί αὐτός. Cf 57 7, though 


δέ alone would suffice. 24. thenceforward: ἤδη. 


128 ATTIC PROSE 


Of such an existence he declared that his wife had been 
the possessor; for that she, while participating equally 
with him in all comforts and all good cheer, had yet 
had no share of his anxiety to procure these blessings, 

5 nor of war and fighting. He thought, therefore, that 
he would owe new thank-offerings to Apollo, if Cyrus 
were to establish him in the same condition of life as 
he had himself secured to her. 


The Taking of Babylon 


Advancing on the road to Babylon, Cyrus reduced 
το the Phrygians in Great Phrygia, reduced the Cappado- 
cians, and made subjects of the Arabians. From all 
these sources he made up Persian cavalry to the num- 
ber of no less than forty thousand, besides distributing 
many horses belonging to the captives among all the 
15 allies. Thus he arrived at Babylon with a vast number 
of horsemen, a vast number of archers and darters, and 
slingers innumerable. When in the immediate vicinity, 
Cyrus first stationed his whole army round the city, and 
then rode over the circuit in company with his staff and 
20 officers of the allied force. Finally, after inspecting 
the walls, he withdrew his troops from the city. | 
When they had established their camp, Cyrus assem- 
‘1-3. had ec. Guide 99 30. 2. while: parataxis. 4. share: H. 734, G. 1997, 
2, B. 356. ὃ. had secured: Aor. /ndicative, if expressed at all. Guide 86 4. 
g. There must be a connective particle here, as everywhere. In The Taking of 


Babylon there is not one case of Asyndeton. Guide 92.—to B.: Veb. ἐπί, 
The Genitive is really the same as with a verb of aiming or hitting (partitive). 


17. Vcb. πρός. 18. stationed ... round: ΝΟ. ἱστάναι. Express the stationing 


merely as a fact, but make the riding descriptive. Guide 94 8. The Greek would 
also speak of Cyrus taking the ride im person. 20, Not a new sentence in Greek. 


Ss Abe 








EXERCISES FOR WRITING 129 


bled the commanders and addressed them. ‘“ Men of 

the allied armies, we have viewed the city from every 

side. Now as for taking such strong and lofty walls by 

assault, I for one am at a loss to see how the thing can 
5 be accomplished. On the other hand, the more people 
there are in the city,— seeing they do not come forth to 
fight, —the more speedily I suppose their capture can 
be effected by famine. Unless, therefore, you have 
some other plan to propose, this is the way I say the 
siege must be conducted.” 

And Chrysantas said: “Then, too, is there not the 
river yonder, flowing through the middle of the city, 


I 


° 


with a breadth of more than two furlongs?” “Yes, 
indeed!” rejoined Gobryas, ‘‘and deep enough to be 
over the heads of two men, the one standing upon the 
other’s shoulders; so that the river makes the city 
even stronger than do the walls.” ‘“ Well, Chrysantas,” 
said Cyrus, “leaving alone all that lies beyond our 
power, what we have to do is to measure off without 
20 delay such portion of the distance as falls to each of 
us, and go to work and dig a trench, as wide and as 
deep as possible, that we may need the smallest possible 
number of guards.” | 
Accordingly, measuring the distance round the wall, 

25 leaving only room enough for large towers at the banks 


I 


uw 


3-5. Here the M. ought to have been committed to memory verdatim. — 
ὅπως ἄν τις ἕλοι, Vague Potential in indirect question. 13. with: H. 968b, 
G.1565, Β. 653 Ν. 3. 18-21. all etc. Vcb.dc0s. 19. have to do: xp7.— meas- 
ure and dig: Guide 10016. 21. goto workanddig: Impf. 24-25. meas- 
uring: the middle is not needed here as above 19. room: Vcb. λιπεῖν. ---- at 
the banks: Vcb. ἀπό. 


ATTIC PROSE—9 


130 ATTIC PROSE 


of the river, he proceeded to dig on either side of the 
fortification a moat of enormous dimensions. The earth 
the besiegers threw up on the side toward themselves. 
First he built towers at the river, to convey the strong- 
est possible impression that he was getting ready to 
invest the city. Then he erected a great many towers 
also upon the earth which was thrown up, in order to 
have a very large number of guard-stations. 

While this work was going on, the people within the 
το walls made merry over the siege, averring that they had 


uw 


provisions for more than twenty years. Upon hearing 
this, Cyrus divided his army into twelve sections, each 
to keep guard during one month in the year. When 
the Babylonians heard of that, they ridiculed the be- 
1s Siegers more than ever, amused at the prospect of being 
watched by Phrygians, Lydians, Arabians, and Cappa- 
docians, all of whom they regarded as more friendly 
disposed toward themselves than toward the Persians. 
The digging of the trenches was now completed. 
20 Cyrus had heard of a certain festival in Babylon, when 
the whole population spend the entire night in drinking 
and revelry. Waiting for this occasion, as soon as it 


2. The earth: not a new sentence. The Greek does not mind the change 
of subject, hence has no need to mention ‘ besiegers.’ 4. to convey the im- 
pression e/c. - ἐοικέναι with ptcp. Dat. 9. Guide9312. 10. averring: implied 
in ὡς with ptcp. 12. into sections: Vcb. νέμειν. --- each efc. Acc. abs. H. 974, 
G. 1570, B.658N. Cf. also 5212 and 16 24. 14. the Babylonians: strongly 
contrasted, cf 577. 15. Guide 90 32.— being watched: not passive voice. 
18. themselves: Vcb. σφᾶς. το. completed: Guide 95. Cf 182 20. 
20. heard of: Guide 97 10. 22. (waiting for) this (occasion): the force 
of this expression is conveyed in Greek by placing the relative before the 
antecedent clause. Thus often, cf 51 f., 21 12 f., 80 το, 42 29. 





Ι 


2 


wm 


° 


ur 


ο 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 131 


grew dark he took a large force of men and opened up 
the trenches to the river. This being done, the water 
began to move down the trenches in the night, while 
the way through the city gradually became passable for 
men. While the river way was thus made ready, Cyrus 
issued an order to the Persian chiliarchs of both horse 
and foot to appear before him, each with his command 
drawn up two-deep; the allies to follow in the rear, 
drawn up in the usual manner. They accordingly pre- 
sented themselves. Cyrus sending down his working 
force, foot and horse, into the dry part of the channel, 
ordered them to take note when the bottom of the river 
became traversable. 

When these reported that the passage was clear, they 
finally began their march. Of those who met them, 
some were struck down and slain, some turned and fled 
to the heart of the city, some fell to shouting. Gobryas 
and his men joined their voices to the others, pretend- 
ing to be revellers themselves; and proceeding the 
quickest way they could, arrived at the royal residence. 
The troops under the command of Gobryas and Gadatas 
found the gates of the palace closed; but those who 
had been detailed against the guards of the vestibule 
burst in upon them, where they were drinking by a 


25 brilliant light, and immediately put them to the sword. 


A great din and clamor ensued. The people inside 


2. done: Vcb. γενέσθαι. 3. began: Guide 9418. 4. gradually: implied 


in the Impf. stem. 7. with: ἄγων. H.968b, G. 1565, Β. 653 Ν. 3. 12. when: 
Greek ‘whether,’ ‘if Vcb. ef. 16. some: always accent the article when 
used as a pronoun, ὃ μέν, ὃ δέ, εἴς. H. 654, B. 443, 1.—slain: Vcb, ἀποθανεῖν. 
26. Use the Historical Present freely along here. 


[32 ATTIC PROSE 


perceiving the uproar, the king commanded them to 
see what was the matter, whereupon some opened the 
gates and ran out. When Gadatas and his men saw 
the gates standing wide they burst in, and following up 
with blows the fugitives who retreated within the build- 
ing, came to the king himself. They found him already 
risen from his seat, holding the sword that he wore 
drawn from its scabbard. He was soon overpowered 
by the numerous force of Gadatas and Gobryas; while 
10 his courtiers fell dead one by one, some endeavoring to 
screen their persons, others in flight, others still making 
whatever defence they could. Cyrus sent his squad- 
rons along the various highways, with orders to slay 
such as they found abroad; while as for the people in 
15 the houses, those who understood Assyrian should pro- 
claim that they were to remain within; if any one were 
caught outside, he would be despatched. 
While this was going on, Gadatas and Gobryas ar- 
rived. And first of all they gave thanks to Heaven, 
20 for that their vengeance upon the wicked king was now 
complete; then they covered the hands and feet of 
Cyrus with kisses, with many tears and other manifes- 
tations of their joy. When day dawned, and those who 
held the heights perceived that the city had been taken 


5. with blows: ptcp. 7. risen eéc.: Vcb. orfvar. —that he wore: see 118 
18 note. 8. drawn efc.: Guide 95 10. Greek is simple. 8-12. Here the 
descriptive Past-Imperfect sets in again. The Historical Present stands for a 
Past-Aorist. 9-12. The M. should have been got by heart. 11. others 
still: Vcb. γέ. In a series γέ gives a new turn to the thought, cf 45 1. 
13. Guide 996. 18. Cf above 1309.— Gadatas and Gobryas were Assyrians 
who had been wronged by their own sovereign, and gone over to Cyrus. 
22. tears ¢fc.. use participle. 


wn 





σε τ ee eee 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 133 


and the king was dead, they surrendered the heights 
also. Cyrus immediately took possession, sent gar- 
risons to occupy the heights, and gave up the dead to 
their relatives for burial. 


Cyrus’ Dower 


ς When in the course of their march they arrived at 
the Median territory, Cyrus turned aside to visit Cyaxa- 
res. Greeting him affectionately, Cyrus said: “A house 
has been set apart for you in Babylon, Cyaxares, as a 
royal residence, that when you visit the city you may 

το have private quarters for your accommodation. And I 
bring you likewise many fine presents now.” Cyaxares 
accepted the gifts, and declared that he would give 
Cyrus his daughter to wife —the same whom Cyrus as 
a child, when at their house, had often tended. And he 

15 said he would give as her marriage portion the whole 
land of Media. To this Cyrus made reply, that for the 
family and for the maid herself he had naught but 
praise; that he preferred, however, before ratifying the 
contract, to have the consent of his father and his 

20 mother. With these words he proceeded on his way to 
Persia. 

5. Hist. Pres. in both clauses. 7. The direct quotation is an essential 
departure from the M. Conversely below, 12 ff.— In the M. the ‘house’ and 
the ‘residence’ are not the same. 10. accommodation: Vcb. ἀγαγέσθαι. 
II. now: beware of the ascending scale, Guide 7013. 13. to wife: predicate 
substantive.— Do not repeat the name in Greek, where the masculine and 
feminine forms make all clear. 15. marriage portion: Vcb. δοῦναι. The 
dowry is given ‘over and above’ (ἐπί) the bride. 17. ἐπαινῶ is a polite form 


of declining (here, provisionally) an offer. 18. The English idiom is negative 
in form; the Greek shows the sense by the order, cf 16 1 f. 





134 ATTIC PROSE 


un 


20 


The Charge of Cambyses 


Being at once the king of the Persians and the father 
of Cyrus, Cambyses was naturally a well-wisher to both 
parties. It was his right, as he affirmed, so far as he 
recognized what was good for both, to recount it in public 
before them all. In the past, he said, the Persians had 
made his son great by giving him an army and appoint- 
ing him its leader, while Cyrus, at the head of it, had 
made them famous, not in Asia only, but throughout 
the world. 

“Now then,” said the king, after assembling the 
authorities and inviting his son into their presence, “ if 
ye wish to be to each other the authors of many bless- 
ings, continue hereafter to see things as ye see them 
now. Do not thou, Cyrus, becoming elated by thy 
present fortunes, undertake to govern the Persians in 
a spirit of inequality; nor do ye, fellow-citizens, ever 
envy him his power and attempt to depose him from 


‘the command.” In order that the good event might 


come about, the Persians and Cyrus offered sacrifice in 
common, and calling the gods to witness they made 
a covenant. He swore that in case of an invasion of 
the Persian territory, or any attempt to break up the 
Persian customs, he would come with all his might to 


I. at once: τέ... καί. 3. his right: Guide 98.—as he affirmed: 


not parenthetical in Greek, but in about the same position. 10. Paraphrase 
this; the Greek will hardly bear so long an interpolation inside a direct quo- 
tation. — In translating, never interchange oratio directa and oratio obligua. 
The difference is an essential one. 13. continue to see: de. γιγνώσκειν, 


not γνῶναι. For the meaning of the verb here, cf 8 28 f. 14-18. Negative 
commands; see 112 15 note. 





κῶν Oe 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 135 


the rescue. And they, for their part, swore that if any 
one were for suppressing the rule of Cyrus, or if one of 
his subjects were to undertake to revolt, they would 
come to their own rescue and to his, according to his 
order. 


wm 


Thereafter, so long as Cambyses lived, his was the 
kingdom among the Persians. But upon his death his 
son Cyrus became king. And whenever he came to 
Persia he performed in behalf of the community the 

10 same sacrifices that had previously been performed by 
his father. But when Cyrus was away from home they 
selected from the nation that man who seemed to be 
the noblest, and bade him fulfill the rites of religion. 


Length and Breadth of the Empire 

Hear, O people, what proclaims your king. — “‘ Upon 
15 the completion of a year I shall assemble forces at 
Babylon, until they amount to six hundred thousand 
foot and a hundred and twenty thousand horse. Then, 
when my preparations are all made, I intend to set in 
motion an expedition for the purpose of reducing all 
20 the tribes that inhabit the region between Syria and 
the Erythraean Sea. Next after that, if all go well, 

I hope to take the field against Egypt. 
“Thenceforward my empire will be of such extent 
as to have extremes uninhabitable by reason of heat, 
25 or cold, or excess or lack of water. I shall myself 
6. so long as: ci 4 12. Definite relative clause.— his: ἐκείνου. 8. In- 
gressive Aorist. 14. ᾿Ακούετε \eg.— proclaims: Vcb. ἀγορεύειν. 16. until: 


Guide 91 35.—amount: γενέσθαι. 18. all made: Guide 95. 21. all go 
well: 282f. 22. take the field: 27 21 f. 





136 ATTIC PROSE 


dwell in the central portion thereof, passing the Winter 

season in Babylon, where the climate is sunny; the 

Spring at Susa; and Midsummer at Ecbatana. This 

I shall do, to the end that I may live in the mildness 
ς and the coolness of perpetual Spring. 

“ And the disposition of the people toward me will 
be such that every nation will seem to be the worse off 
if it cannot send to me any fine thing that either grows 
or is raised or manufactured within its territory. Every 

10 city will feel likewise, and every individual will think 
that he might become rich if he could but gratify me 
in something. For, receiving from each community 
that whereof the givers possess an abundance, I shall 
give in return that of which I perceive they have but 

15 little.” 

Συσκευάζου, ὦ Κῦρε 

Thus the years rolled on, until Cyrus, now a very old 
man, arrived in Persia for the seventh and last time 
during his own reign. His father and mother were, in 
the course of nature, long since dead. He, as was his 

20 wont, offered the regular sacrifices and made the cus- 
tomary distribution of gifts. This done, he lay down 
to sleep in the royal house of his fathers. 

That night a dream, as Xenophon relates, appeared 
to Cyrus, whereby God meant to indicate that the end 

25 of his life was near at hand. He dreamt that one of 
mightier than human mien came to him and said, 
“Cyrus, get ready for a march; thou wilt go now to 


τ. dwell: Vcb. δίαιτα, διαιτᾶσθαι. τό. until: 5817. 21. done: not pas- 
Sive voice. 23. Xenophon: 35 10. See also 3710. 26. said: Guide 99 39. 


Ee Δι κα ὰ ὡ .......... 


a 





un 


10 


20 


25 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 137 


join the gods.” Awaking, he immediately proceeded 
to offer sacrifice to the paternal Zeus and to Helios, 
as is the Persian custom, upon the heights; and to 
them and to all the gods he prayed that they would 
accept the victims which he brought as thank-offerings 
for many noble successes in the past. He owed them 
deep gratitude, he averred, for that he, on his side, 
had ever recognized their care, and had never felt 
greater pride in his good fortune than becomes a 
mortal man; and he besought them to bestow blessings 
now upon his children and his wife, upon his friends 
and his native land, and to grant unto himself an end 
even such as the whole life which they had given. — 
After the prayer he summoned his sons into his pres- 
ence to hear his last injunctions. 


Last Words of Cyrus the Great 

Perceiving clearly as he did that the end of his life 
was near, and wishing to indicate with certainty the 
succession to the throne, that it might not become a 
subject of dispute and cause trouble for his sons, Cyrus 
gave the chief sovereignty to the elder; to the younger, 
the viceroyalty of Media and Armenia. In this way, 
he declared he could not see what human delectation 
either of them would ever lack. And he solemnly 
enjoined upon his sons that they should honor one 
another, if they cared at all for gratifying their father. 
He denied that they could know for certain, that their 
3. Const., 16 1-5. 8. Not Perf. stem. Avoid past phase. 14. prayer: 


52 4.— injunctions: use ἐπισκήπτειν. 23. solemnly: 12 1, or 8 17. 


24. enjoined: ἐπισκήπτειν, with Inf. 26. denied: Vcb. φάναι. 


138 ATTIC PROSE 


father was as nothing any more, after departing from 
this human life: for himself, he had never been 
brought to believe that the soul lives while inclosed 
within the mortal body, but after being released there- 
5 from is dead. —If, then, they believed as he did, the 
dying man affirmed, they would respect his soul, and 
would do all that he asked; for he believed that the 
soul leaves the body, and does not die with it. Yet, 
though it were otherwise, let them at any rate so fear 
the gods and stand in awe of all mankind as never to 
be guilty of aught impious or unholy, in word or deed. 


I 


ο 






















The Death of Cyrus the Younger 


They had not yet arrived at the place where they 
were to halt, when a Persian, one of Cyrus’ faithful 
followers, came in view, riding at full speed. When 

1s near, he shouted to all whom he met that the king was 
approaching with a large army ready for battle. Then 
all were alarmed, lest the enemy might fall upon them 
while in disarray. Cyrus, springing from his chariot, 
donned his cuirass and mounted his horse, while the 





20 Greek commanders gave orders to their men to equip 
themselves at once. At first there was great confusion ; 
but presently, with much ado, they got into position, each 
in his proper place. They were drawn up as follows: | 


9. though: Vcb. e/.—let them δ. still Inf. 10. For the negatives, H. 
1030, G. 1619, B. 433. 12. Remember the connective, Guide 92. Here καί, as : 
often in this M., in accordance with its character of rapid narrative. Cf Battle — 
of Coronea. 13. halt: Vcb. λύειν. --- when: for the word, 57 10; the construc- — 
tion, which is rather modern, is used by Xenophon twice inthis M. 17. them: — 
Veb. σφᾶς. 21. at first: 1913. 22. but presently: 257. 23. as follows: 
11 16, > 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 139 


Clearchus on the right, by the Euphrates, and stationed 
by him a thousand foreign cavalry together with the 
Greek peltast force; on the left, Menon, and Ariaeus 
the lieutenant of Cyrus; Proxenus and the rest of the 
Greeks in the center. 

Before the enemy came in sight, a white cloud of 
dust was seen extending far over the plain. Some time 
later, as they drew near, there was a gleaming of brass, 
and directly the lances and the lines of men were 
10 visible. Cyrus in person, riding past, shouted to 

Clearchus to lead his army against the enemy’s center, 

since the king was there; if they should be victorious 

at that point, their whole work had been accomplished. 
The Greek army, remaining just where it had halted, 


ur 


15 was forming its lines as the men still continued to 
arrive, while the foreign force advanced with even 
front. At this juncture, Cyrus left his own position 
and rode along to make inspection, directing his gaze 
alternately upon friends and foes. Riding up to meet 

20 him Xenophon of. Athens, who was in the Greek army, 

inquired of Cyrus if he had any word to communicate. 

Cyrus stopped and directed that all should be informed 

that the sacrifices were propitious. As he pronounced 

these words he heard a murmur passing through the 
ranks, and inquired as to the meaning of it. Clearchus 
explained that the watchword was being passed along, 
now for the second time. Cyrus then asking what the 
watchword was, Clearchus replied, “ Zeus the Deliverer 


2 


uw 






I. stationed: not passive voice in Greek. 22. stopped: Vcb. ἱστάναι. 
27. Cyrus... asking: ἐρομένῳ. ᾿ 


140 ATTIC PROSE 


and Victory.” Though wondering who promulgated 
the sign, Cyrus nevertheless seemed pleased and de- 
clared that he accepted it. 
The two lines were about three furlongs apart, when 
5 the Greeks sounded the paean and began their advance 
upon the enemy. As they proceeded there was some 
undulation of the line, whereupon the portion left 
behind began to go on the double-quick. When this 
occurred, the others also ran; and all raised the war- 
shout to Enyalius, and made a clatter with their shields 
against their spears, to frighten the horses of the 
enemy. And not a single arrow had yet reached its 
mark, when the foreigners turned and fled. Here the 
Greeks pursued, preserving their order as far as pos- 
sible, and called to each other to open ranks when they 
saw the scythe-chariots coming, which were speeding in 
every direction, without their drivers. Only one of the 
Greeks was overtaken in this way, and no harm came 


-_ 
° 


I 


wm 


even to him. q 
20 When the immediate followers of Cyrus saw the 
Greeks victorious and in pursuit of the forces opposed 
to them, they began to make their obeisance to him — 
as king. But even so he was not induced to take part 
in the pursuit, but still held in close array the body of 
25 six hundred cavalry which attended him. Being well 
aware that the king occupied a central position in the 














1. though e/c. - 58 13,15. 2. seemed: here φαίνεσθαι, not δοκεῖν. 5. began — 
etc.: Vcb. ἄρχειν. The word in the M. is probably not from ἔρχεσθαι, which ~ 
is very rare in Attic prose in the Past-Imperfect, as well as in Subjunctive, — 
Optative, Imperative, and Participle. 22. began to make: Guide 94 19. 
23. hé: see 126 8 note. —induced: Vcb. ἀγαγεῖν. ΄ 


un 


_ 
° 


20 


25 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 141 


Persian army, Cyrus watched attentively to see what he 
would do. So much the more numerous were the royal 
forces, that the king, though he held the center of his 
own, was yet brought beyond the left wing of Cyrus; 
and at that moment, perceiving that no one engaged 
him in front, he proceeded to wheel about for a flank 
movement. 

Here Cyrus, fearing lest the king might get in the 
rear of the Greek army, rides to the attack; and charg- 
ing with his six hundred, he overcomes the force mar- 
shaled in front of the king and puts the six thousand 
to flight. At the same time that the rout occurred, 
however, the six hundred of Cyrus were also scattered, 
as they gave themselves up to the pursuit, except a 
very few who remained about his person. While with 
them, on espying the king he straightway exclaimed, 
“1 see the man!” and rushing upon him struck at his 
breast, piercing him through the cuirass; but as he 
dealt the blow he was himself forcibly struck by a 
javelin below the eye. In the conflict that ensued 
Cyrus and eight of his noblest followers were slain. 
The king was subsequently cured of his wound. 


Traits of the younger Cyrus 


When the kings of ancient times had donations to 
confer, they were wont to summon in the first place 
those who had proved their bravery in war, seeing that 


16. Xenophon must have reflected on this scene when he composed the 


_ deathbed injunctions of the elder Cyrus. C/. esp, 32 25-28. 23. of ancient 


» times: 631. 25. proved efc.: Vcb. γενέσθαι, 






᾿ 





142 ATTIC PROSE 


no good comes of tillage far and wide, unless it have 
its defenders. In the second place, they invited such 
as best equipped and rendered productive their estates, 
in the belief that even the valiant could not live, were 

5 the tillers of the soil not there. “1 now,” observed 
Cyrus once upon a time, “might fairly receive the 
donations due to both parties; for I am as good at 
improving the country as at defending the improve- 
ments; and I could wish to gain renown no less for ren- 

το dering the land productive than for warlike prowess.” 

Yes, to be sure, Cyrus would have proved an excel- 
lent ruler, had he not been slain on the expedition that 
he made to fight with his brother for the crown. A 
convincing proof was furnished by the fact that all 

15 were prompt to obey him and ready to stand by him 

_ inthe hour of peril. The king’s friends would hardly 
have fought with him while living, or died with him 
when he died, as Cyrus’ followers fought and died for 
their leader. 

22. Lysander the Lacedaemonian had a guest-friend in 
Megara, to whom they say he related once upon a 
time how many friendly offices were shown him when 
he conveyed to Cyrus the presents of the allies, espe- 
I. no good (comes): ΝΡ. ὄφελος. The copula is regularly omitted with 

this word, as with ἀνάγκη, χρή, ἕτοιμος, ῥᾷδιον. --- Guide 81 24. 4. in the belief 

etc.: 50 14.— were δίς. Guide 75 19. 5. oratio dirécta, an essential varia- 
tion from the M.—I now: 46 24. 7. as...as:7é... καί. 11. yes: Vcb. 
γέ. 14. convincing: μέγα. --- was (furnished): simply ἦν, or ἐγένετο. 

The verb in the M. is not passive but middle (subject, Cyrus). 16. hardly: 

οὐ πάνυ. 20. had: εἶναι has the first position in narrative and descriptive 


statements, ἐγ 57 14. 22. how many etc. ὅσα. The substantive is implied 
in the verb, Not passive voice in Greek. 23. especially: Vcb, ἄλλος. 











EXERCISES FOR WRITING 143 


cially in that the prince exhibited his park at Sardis. 

While they were walking round together in the park, 

Lysander greatly admired everything and said, “ Would 
| I might also see, O Cyrus, the happy man who meas- 
5 ured off and arranged these fine trees! Who is he?” 
Cyrus, pleased at hearing these words, replied, “ You 
will not only see him, but will shake hands with him, if 
you wish. I arranged them all myself, and some, too, 
I planted with my own hands.” 


Καλοκἀγαθία 


1o Τὸ Critobulus, one of his companions, Socrates re- 
lated circumstantially how he came to meet a man 
who seemed to him truly to deserve the appellation 
“fair and good.” His study of the matter, as he 
turned it over in his mind, appears to have been 

15 about as follows: ‘How, pray, am I to investigate 
the people who bear this worshipful title of ‘fair and 
good’?—to make out what work they do to deserve 
such a name. As for the good joiners, good smiths, 
good painters, good sculptors, and the rest of that ilk, 

20 I have already gone the round of them and viewed 





their works which are approved as fazr. But here the 
man himself is called fair; and, besides, to fair is added 
good: so that, perhaps, if I see anybody who is fair, I 
might go to him and endeavor to make him out, and 






a 2. while δε. - ptcp., H. 624 d, 6. 914, B. 319. 3. Vague wish. 8. some: 
_ Veb.és. το. Critobulus: 48 20.— his companions: of συνόντες. 14. ἐνθυ- 
μεῖσθαι πρὸς €.— 15. about as follows: 29 22, add τὶς. 15. The change to 
_ primary phase is an essential departure from the M. 17. do to deserve: οὔ. 
(19 17, 23, 42 28,4616. 21. but here: νῦν δέ. 


























144 ATTIC PROSE 


thus find the fair and the good in combination. How- 
ever, that is not very apt to be the case: many with 
whom I fancy I am already well acquainted are fair in 
person, but sorry enough as to their souls. I believe, 
5 therefore, I will let alone the fair appearance, and go 
straight to one of the very persons who are called ‘ fair 
and good.’ Now then, as I hear that Ischomachus is 
so named by everybody, men and women, Athenians 
and strangers, I shall endeavor to have an interview 
το With him.” 

One day, accordingly, Socrates, —as he related to 
Critobulus, —when he saw the man seated apparently 
at leisure in the colonnade of the temple of Zeus the 
Liberator, approached him, and taking a seat by his 

15 Side addressed him: ‘‘How comes it, Ischomachus, 
little accustomed as you are to be at leisure, that I 
find you seated? Almost always I see you in the 
market-place, engaged in some business, or certainly 


anything but unoccupied.” ‘Nor should I be unoccu- 
20 pied now,” said he, “had I not agreed to await certain 
friends from abroad in this place.” “But when you 


are not attending to something of this sort, pray tell 
me,” said Socrates, “where do you spend your time, 
and what do you do? I am strongly desirous of ascer- 
25 taining from you, how in the world you employ your- — 
self to have earned the name of ‘fair and good.’ You — 
certainly do not pass the time indoors. Nothing in ~ 
your appearance bears evidence of that.” t 


4.1 believe δέ... Guide 74 8. 8. by: Vcb. πρός. Not quite the same | 
in meaning as ὑπό. 










EXERCISES FOR WRITING 145 


To this, with a smile, Ischomachus replied, that by 
what name people who happened to be talking with 
Socrates were pleased to call him, he knew not; those 
who sought him out on serious business called him 

5 plain /schomachus, adding the name of his father. “As 
to your question, now, Socrates,” he went on to say, 
“T certainly do not pass the time indoors by any 
means. Be sure, my wife is abundantly capable of 
managing everything there is to be done in my house.” 


Ischomachus’ Instructions to his Wife 


10 Nay, but here, too, is something, I said, that for my 
part I should be extremely glad to learn from you, 
Ischomachus; and that is, whether you yourself edu- 
cated the woman to such accomplishment, or whether 
she already knew how to manage what devolves upon 

15 her, at the time you took her from her father and her 
mother. ‘“ And what cou/d she know, Socrates,” said 
he, “at the time I received her?— when she came to 
my house a girl not yet fifteen years of age, whose 
whole life up to that moment had been carefully 


"20 watched, to the end that she should see as little, hear 


as little, and say as little as possible. Ought you not 
to be content, if when she came she knew no more 
than how to weave a garment of a stent of wool or 
inspect the wool-work weighed out to the maids?” 
25 Then, said I, did you, Ischomachus, yourself educate 


1. to this: 514. 2-4. The relative clauses become participles in Greek. 
10, The re-translation of this exercise will often require strict memorizing of 
the M. 16. Guide 71 36. 21. Guide 90. 23. weave: the Greek says 
‘exhibit,’ 2.6. deliver, all woven, Vcb. δεικνύναι. 


ATTIC PROSE — I0 


146 ATTIC PROSE 


the woman to a competency for her position in all 
other respects? ‘Not, indeed,” replied he, “not, 
Socrates, till I had done sacrifice, and had prayed 
that I might be led to teach and she to learn that 
5 which for both of us was the best!” Now for 
Heaven’s sake, Ischomachus, said I, what was the 
first thing that you undertook to teach her? Tell me 
the story; I had rather hear you tell this tale than 
describe the finest gymnastic or equestrian contest 
10 in the world! 

“Why, then, Socrates,” he replied, “after she had 
begun to get used to me, and was gentle enough to 
be willing to converse, I questioned her somewhat in 
this wise: ‘Tell me, my wife, did you ever give thought 

15 to this thing, what end your parents and I can have 
had in view when they gave you to me and I took you? 
It was the deliberations of your parents on your behalf 
and my deliberations on mine, wondering what partner 
of hearth and home either of us,could best take, that 

20 resulted in my choosing you, and your father and 
mother making their choice, such as fate permitted, 
of me. Now, then, we have this house in common. 
I make a showing of all my property to go to the 
common fund, and you have put in all that you 


2. other respects: look out everywhere for the English ascending scale, 
Guide 70 13. 2. not till: Vcb. πρίν. 4. be led: to a religious Greek τύχη 
(τυγχάνειν) would be equivalent to divine guidance. 5-7. Translated by 
Cicero, guid igitur, pro deum immortalium fidem, primum eam docebas ? 
8. Connective ws, Vcb. Thus often ἐπεί, instead of γάρ. 11. had begun: 
Guide 9421. 15. canhave had: ποτέ. 17. Preserve the order in the main; the 
idioms are very different. As usual, the Greek is far simpler than the English, 








δ 
a 
ὯΝ 







EXERCISES FOR WRITING 147 


brought as marriage portion. And what we need 
to be reckoning up is not, which one of us has con- 
tributed numerically the larger share; but this is what 
we are to know for certain, that whichsoever of us 

5 proves the best partner in the business, that one’s 
contribution is worth the most. 

“To these words, Socrates, my wife replied, ‘But 
in what thing,’ said she, ‘would I be able to act with 
you? It is on you that everything depends. My 

1o mother said that my business was to behave well.’ 
‘By the powers,’ I exclaimed, ‘exactly what my father 
said to me, wife! Yet ’tis a mark of prudent behavior, 
certainly, in man or woman, to take the best possible 
care of what one already possesses, and adopt every 

15 fair and honorable means of getting as much as pos- 
sible more.’ ‘But what,’ said my wife, ‘do you see 
that I can do to help in increasing the estate?’ ‘Truly,’ 
said I, ‘if there be something which by the divine gift 
of nature you are qualified to perform, with the sanc- 

20 tion of human law, try to do ¢/at as well as you possibly 
can.’ ‘And what is that?’ said she. ‘Not, I fancy, 
the least weighty matters,’ was my reply, ‘unless for- 


1. brought efc.: Vcb. ἐνέγκασθαι. 3. this: Vcb. ἐκεῖνος. 10-12. The 
largest ingredient of καλοκἀγαθία is σωφροσύνη, cf. 46 2, 52 18, 61 29. 
νοῦ. σώφρων. The Romans translated σωφροσύνη by temperantia or modestia 
(modus, modestus). Ischomachus is atrifle sly in the turn that he gives to the 
σωφρονεῖν of his wife. 13. Clauses “ final of care or effort” (ὅπως with future 
Ind.) are copiously illustrated in the M. See the list H. 885. Πειρᾶσθαι 
usually takes the Infinitive. Sometimes Xenophon forgets that he has said . 
ὅπως, and the Infinitive follows it, 48 25. 20. that: made forcible in 


_ Greek by placing the relative before the antecedent clause, see 180 22 note. 


22. weighty: ἄξιος (ἄγειν ‘ weigh’). 


148 ATTIC PROSE 


sooth, it is the least weighty matters that are presided 
over by the queen bee in the hive! For I believe, 
wife,’”” so Ischomachus told me that he said to her, 
“<T do believe, that particularly in making up this 
yoke-pair which is called male and female, the gods 
gave profound consideration to its mutual helpfulness 
in union —by originally adapting, as it seems to me, 
the nature of the woman to the works and cares within, 
and the nature of the man to the works and cares with- 
10 out. The body and the spirit of the man they so 

equipped as to be better able to endure extremes of 

heat and cold, long journeys and marches afield — thus 


on 


imposing on him the outside labors; while in creating 
the body of the woman with less power in these direc- 
1s tions, thereby, as it seems to me,’”’ Ischomachus de- 
clared he said, ‘“‘God enjoined upon her the inside 
labors. Because the nature of both is not equally well 
adapted to the same things all round, for this reason 
the man and woman have greater need of each other, 
20 and the pair has been made more helpful unto itself, 
the one yoke-fellow being able to do those things in 
which the other yoke-fellow is deficient. It behooves 
us now, my wife,’ said I, ‘knowing as we do what 
duties God has severally enjoined upon us, to endeavor 

25 to perform them severally, in the best possible manner.’ 
““* Custom likewise adds its sanction,’”’ he continued, 

as he told me, “‘in joining man and wife together; and 


2. I: emphasized in Greek, see 126 8 note. 3. so Ischomachus ec. ἔφη 
φάναι. Greek simplicity. 7. it seems: Guide 98 10. 21. in which: ἅ in the 
M. is under the influence of δυνάμενον. ἐλλείπεται alone would have the 
genitive. 26. Custom and law are covered by the same word. . 


! 
$ 
q 








wn 


2 


2 


ο 


uw 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 149 


what God has given either one the more power to do, 
that the law declares is well. It is handsomer for the 
woman to abide within than to tarry without, while for 
the man it is more unhandsome to remain within than 
to attend to the affairs without. And in case of any 
one contravening these laws of nature, it may be that 
Heaven does not fail to note that he is out of order, 
and he pays the penalty for neglecting his own busi- 
ness and doing the woman’s work. — And it seems to 
me,’ I added, ‘that the queen bee has just such a set 
of labors divinely imposed upon her to perform.’ 

“*¢ And pray how can it be,’ she said, ‘that the queen 
bee has labors just like those which I have got to do?’ 
‘Because,’ said I, ‘she, too, remaining within the hive, 
will not suffer the bees to be idle, but sends forth to 
their work such of them as must be busy without. The 
honey that each one brings in she takes note of and 
receives, and saves it all until there be need to use it. 
Then, when the proper time for using it has arrived, 
she dispenses to each one of the bees its just portion. 
Furthermore she has charge of the construction of the 
combs within the hive, that they may be framed with 
excellent despatch; and she attends to the rearing up 
of the progeny that comes to light. And when the 
rearing is complete, and the young bees are equal to 
labors of their own, she sends them off to found a new 
community, with one of the number as their queen.’ 

2. is well: Guide 975. 6. contravening: Vcb. παρά. 7. fail to note: 


cf. 15 23, 121 12 note. 12. pray: Vcb. ποῖος. 18. until: Guide 91 35. 
24. progeny: τόκον stands in the M., instead of the Gen. which ἐπιμελεῖσθαι 
regularly takes, because it is the anticipated subject of ἐκτρέφηται. H. 878. 


150 ATTIC PROSE 


“« And is this, then,’ said my wife, ‘what Z will have 
todo?’ ‘You will certainly have to remain indoors,’ I 
said, ‘and help in sending forth those domestics whose 
work is done outside; while such of them as have 

5 inside work to do, you must oversee. You must re- 
ceive the produce that is brought into the house: as 
much of it as needs to be expended must be disbursed 
by you, while any surplus that needs to be put by, you 
must look out for, and take care that the store intended 

το for a year be not used up in a month. When your 
wool has been brought in, you must see that garments 
are woven for any who need them. Yes, and you must 
have the cereals admirably prepared for food. —There 
is just one of the duties devolving upon you,’ I said, 


1s ‘that will perhaps seem a trifle ungracious: if ever a 


wn 


member of the household is sick, you must see to it in 
every case that he is tended and made well.’ ‘ Nay, 
rather say most gracious,’ she rejoined, ‘at least if 
those who have been well tended will thank me and 
be more friendly than ever.’ 

“Then I,” pursued Ischomachus, “admiring her 
answer, said: ‘Is it not of precisely such attentions on 
the part of the queen bee that the disposition of the 
other bees toward their leader comes? — so that when 


2 


° 


5. must: the M. well illustrates the construction of the verbal adjective in 
-τέος, ΤΙ. 988-992, G. 1594 ff, B. 633 ff. 9. that the store e¢c. - Οἷς. me sumptus 
annuus menstruus fiat. 12. woven: Vcb. γενέσθαι. 13. prepared for food: 
7.2. by grinding (crushing). Perhaps, however, σῖτος is here meant to include 
more than breadstuffs; dried fruits, forexample. 19. will: not “shall.” Here 
μέλλειν, but the Fut. Ind. might be used, cf 46 14, Guide 108 5. 22. Is it not 
etc.: English makeshift to secure a natural order of thought, cf 128 17 note, 
125 9. 





wn 


10 


20 


25 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING I51 


she quits the hive, not a bee of them thinks she ought 
to be abandoned, but one and all they follow.’ To this 
my wife responded: ‘I should be surprised,’ she said, 
‘if the work of a leader does not pertain rather to your- 
self than to me. All my guarding of what is within, 
all my dispensing would appear ridiculous enough, I 
think, were yow not taking care that something be 
brought in from without.’ ‘ Equally ridiculous,’ said I, 
‘would my bringing-in appear, were no one there to 
keep safe what has once been brought. Don’t you 
see how the people in the fable who draw water to fill 
the perforated jar are commiserated, because their toil 
seems to be in vain?’ ‘Upon my word,’ said she, 
‘they are to be pitied, if that is what they do!’ 
«Still other personal cares there are,’ said I, ‘ which 
must prove pleasant to you, my wife—when, for ex- 
ample, you take a maid unskilled in wool-work and 
impart to her the requisite skill, till she becomes worth 
twice as much to you; or when, receiving one that is 
without skill in housework and service, you make her 
skillful and devoted, and have in her an invaluable 
servant; when, too, you find yourself at liberty to 
reward the steady slaves who are useful to your house, 
and to chastise any who reveals himself as bad; but 
pleasantest of all, if you prove better than I, and make 


4. does not: either τείνει or τείνοι. The Objective Conditional may be 


attracted to an Optative. 7. be brought: the final clause may have the Optative 
by attraction. 9. to keep safe: when a relative clause is strictly final it has the 
Future Indicative, H.911, G.1442, B.591. But ὅστις σῴζει may denote some- 
thing like a resu/t, Ἡ. 910. Inthe M. σῴζοι appears, by attraction to the other 
Optative. 11, fable: of the punishment of the daughters of Danaus, in Hades. 


[52 ATTIC PROSE 


me your servant—having no need to fear lest with 
advancing years you become less honored in the family, 
but trusting that as you grow older, the better help- 
meet and mother the house you watch over shall find 
in you, so much the more honored will you be in it. 
For,’ said I, ‘it is not the charms of person, but the vir- 
tues of the mind, that make human life rich in all things 
fair and good.’” 


un 


Learning Homer 


In the opinion of Socrates, when sensible men were 
το dining together it was too bad if they would not at 
least make some attempt to benefit or entertain each 
other. We learn from Xenophon, about what sort of 
subjects, in the way of pleasantry, may be touched 
upon to secure this end. Once when several persons 
were banqueting at the house of Callias of Athens, 
their host promised, if all the rest would publicly con- 
tribute each his best piece of knowledge, that he would 
for his own part explain whereon he prided himself the 
most. The finest wisdom, he averred, consisted in 
20 improving men; nobody, therefore, should begrudge 

some account of any art whereby one fancied himself 
enabled to effect this thing. 

Thereupon Niceratus, the son of Nicias, being asked 

upon what sort of knowledge he prided himself, de- 
25 clared that it was upon the ability to recite the whole 


I 


wn 


6. virtues: in order to possess the ἀρεταί, ἃ woman must be ἀρίστη, or, 
in other words, καλὴ κἀγαθή. See 168 note. 9. sensible: φρόνιμος 2. 
10. would not: Guide 90 9; cf 150 19 note. 12, Xenophon: 35 10. 


19 17, 23. 20. should: δέοι or δεῖν, 


13. in the way of pleasantry: ἐν παιδιᾷ. -- For the idiom, Guide 71 36. Of 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 153 


Iliad and Odyssey from memory. ‘ Whoever,” he said, 
“has once learned all the verses of Homer, knows how 
to improve his associates in pretty nearly everything 
that pertains to man. Everybody is of course aware 

5 that Homer has written about economics, civil elo- 
quence, strategy, and all that. Whoever, therefore, 
cares to become the counterpart of Achilles or Ajax, 
Nestor or Odysseus, let him cultivate the most accom- 
plished of the poets.” 


Beauty of Socrates 


10 ‘We hope now,” said Callias, “that Critobulus will 
stand up to the contest of beauty with Socrates, and 
will not back out. He has been summoned to a pre- 
liminary examination; and he must take care to give 
the cleverest possible answers, otherwise this ogre here 

15 will be sure to make himself out the handsomest.”’ 

First of all, Socrates asked him whether he believed 
beauty to exist in man only, or elsewhere as well. — It 
was to be found, the other said, in many things, both 
living and lifeless. He knew, at any rate, of a shield 

20 being beautiful, or a sword or spear.— Then Socrates 
went on to ask, how it were possible for things which 
bore no resemblance to each other to be all beautiful. 
— Whereat Critobulus replied, that if they were well 
constructed for their respective uses, or naturally well 


2. has once learned: not Perf., Guide 94 27.— verses: Vcb. ἔπος. 
13. must take care: 45 2. 14. clever: copés.—this here: obroci.—ogre: 
Σειληνός. 15. Use ἀναπείθειν. 16, The change from direct to indirect 
_ quotation is an essential departure from the M. 19. he knew: Infinitive, 





154 ATTIC PROSE. 


adapted to their required ends, they were consequently 
beautiful. 
Socrates accordingly proceeded to show, in view of 
these replies, that if what we need eyes for is to see 
5 (which Critobulus admitted), his own eyes were the 
more beautiful. For while those of his friend looked 
only straight ahead, his own, as he declared, could by 
reason of their prominence, look sideways as well. 
Of their noses, he affirmed that his own was certainly 
το the more beautiful, at any rate if the gods gave men 
noses to smell with. For while Critobulus’ nostrils 
looked toward the earth, his were turned upward and 
outward, ready to receive the odors from every quarter. 
In fact, a snub nose, he maintained, was handsomer 
1g than a straight one, because the former did not wall 
off the eyes from each other in the threatening and 
insolent manner of the lofty nose. 
As the philosopher was about to pass to the mouth, 
with its biting-off power and other capacities, his friend, 
20 seeing that such arguments were unanswerable, con- 
cluded to yield the point in advance, and acknowledged 
himself defeated. 


Xanthippe, his Wife 


“Tf any one of you, gentlemen, happens to have a 
shrew of a wife, and is at a loss what to make of her, 


3: ἀποφαίνειν. ----ἰῃ view of: πρός with acc. 4. replies: 45 10. 6. while: 
parataxis. 7. ashe declared: not parenthetical in Greek. 10. No past phase, 
Guide 86 4. 18. philosopher: 62 25.— pass: ἐλθεῖν, w. ἐπί. 19-22. Con- 
strue as 5212. 20, unanswerable: ἀνέλεγκτος 2,— concluded: 4013. 21. in 
advance: mpérepos.— acknowledge: 1 2. 24. at a loss: use ἀπορεῖν Impf. 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 155 


let him not despair, but be of good heart and try to 
give her an education. Possibly her nature is nowise 
inferior to that of her husband, only she is a little too 
high-spirited, and lacks judgment and self-control. I 
believe I shall not come far wide of the mark in say- 
ing that this would be a capital way to learn how 
to get along with mankind in general — by having the 
crossest kind of a helpmeet, and understanding how 
to bear up with her and make her better. A wise man, 
10 I fancy, who wanted to make a jockey of himself would 
get, not the tamest, but the most mettlesome horses he 
could find; for he might be sure that if he could con- 
trol them, he would find the managing of all other 
horses an easy matter.” 


ui 


Filial Gratitude 


1s “Some men are called ungrateful, as we know: 
those, namely, are thus stigmatized who, though able 
to requite favors received, yet fail to do so. We reckon 
the ungrateful likewise among the unjust; for when 
a man has received benefit from friend or foe, and 
20 makes no effort to requite it, he is most assuredly a 
wrong-doer. Accordingly we must admit that ingrati- 
tude is a form of injustice, pure and simple. 
“Furthermore, the greater the good received without , 
return, the greater the injustice. But certainly we can 


5. in saying: Circumstantial Condition.—this would eé.: οὕτω. .. 
μάλιστ᾽ ἄν τις μ. 7. by having efc.: Vague Condition. Use participle and 
verb, Guide 100 16. το. make of himself: γενέσθαι. 15. as we know: 
not parenthetical in Greek. 22. a form of: τὶς. 


156 ATTIC PROSE 


find none that have greater benefit from others than 
children have from their parents. Were it not for our 
parents we ourselves should not exist — we could not 
see all the beautiful sights, or have a share in all the 
blessings, which the gods prepare for mankind. To 
leave this life behind us is what of all things we shun 
the most. Governments, therefore, have made death 
the penalty of the greatest offenses, in the view that 
there is no graver evil whereby men can be deterred 


un 


το from wrong-doing. 
“ There is the father, who cherishes his wife, and for 
the children they may have provides in advance every- 
thing that he believes will profit their lives, to the full 
extent of his ability. The mother, again, nourishes and 
τς tends her babe, though it knows not its helper nor can 
signify its wants; but she must divine the needs and 
gratifications which she attempts to supply, and through 
the long period of nursing she undergoes hardships by 
night and by day, knowing not what return she is to 
receive therefor. Nor is it enough for the parents 
merely to rear their offspring; but as soon as they 
believe the children old enough to learn, they first 
teach them whatever good things they can themselves ; 
and then, if there be anything which they think another 
25 is more competent to impart, they incur the expense of 

sending their children to such a teacher —thus taking 

care in every way to have them made as good as possible. 


2 


ο 


1. The plur. of οὐδείς occurs, but not very often. 2. were it not for: εἰ μὴ 
διά. 3. exist: εἶναι. 11. There is the father: in Greek the prominent 
(antithetic) position conveys the force of this phrase. 23. can: Vcb. ἔχειν. 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 157 


‘Now then, after one’s parents have done so much, 
if either of them happens to be somewhat harsh of dis- 
position, let no child imagine that he cannot endure 
such harshness, especially on a mother’s part —not 

5 even if what she may say be as hard as possible to 
bear; but let him reflect, how much trouble in word 
and deed he has himself caused her, from infancy, by 
his fretful nature, and by his illness how much pain. 
Let him be sure that such a mother, who has suffered 

το thus much for his sake, not only means no harm to 
her child in saying what she says—no more than 
actors really mean the abuse which they heap upon 
each other on the tragic stage — but, on the contrary, 
she wishes him well above everybody in the world. 

15 Nay, let him not even say that she is harsh who means 
thus well by him, who cares for him to the utmost of 
her power when he is sick, that he may recover and 
may lack nothing that he needs; who, moreover, offers 
fervent prayers and fulfills solemn vows to Heaven on 

20 his behalf.— We know that the state, while taking 
cognizance of no other sort of ingratitude, but disre- 
garding as it does all other persons who fail to requite 
the favors which they receive, yet imposes a penalty 
upon him who honors not his parents. Ay, if one 

25 neglect to decorate the tomb of his deceased parents, 
the state deems even this a wrong. Finally, let a man 
2. somewhat harsh: comparative degree of adj. 3. Cf 33 13 (where 

ἴδῃ would have been more usual), H. 874, G. 1346, B. 584. Here the Imperfect 
is required.— endure: synonyms 1 9, 87 8, 49 το. 6. let him reflect: 


μεμνήσθω. 13. but, onthe contrary: ἀλλὰ καί, 15. Nay e¢c.: καὶ μὴν μ., Om 
cf- 219. 20. Parataxis. 26. Finally: 7 12. 


ν 


158 ATTIC PROSE 


wm 


-_ 
wn 


20 


3. 


beware lest, if he fail to honor his father and his mother, 
he find himself alone, bereft of friends; for whoever 
is conceived to be ungrateful toward his parents, to 
him men can show no favor with any hope of a return.” 


Agesilaus in Asia 

Agesilaus had but recently assumed the royal 
authority when news came from Asia that the Great 
King was engaged in collecting a large army, by sea 
and by land, with hostile designs upon the Greeks. 
While the matter was under discussion at Sparta, 
Agesilaus, judging it best so to order the impending 
struggle as to stake the interests, not of Hellas, but 
of Asia, upon the issue, arose and spoke as follows :— 
“Upon a former occasion, Lacedaemonians and allies, 
the Persian crossed over into Greece, in the hope of 
making us his slaves. My choice now is to cross in 
turn against him, and substitute a war of invasion for 
one of defense. We shall thus carry it on mainly at 
his expense, not merely at our own. Give me, then, 
an army of eight thousand men, and I will sail to Asia 
and endeavor to make peace; or, if the foreigner pre- 
fers war, I promise to keep him too busy for any cam- 
paigning against the Greeks.” 

Once in Asia, his first action was to set the perjury 
of Tissaphernes in so clear a light as to establish a 
universal opinion of the faithlessness of the viceroy; 
exhibiting at the same time a piety on his own part 


1. beware: 8 28. 2. Not passive. 9. Gen. abs. H. 972 a, G, 1568, 
657 N. 1.—Sparta: Σπάρτη. 15. δουλοῦν. 23. Once in Asia: cf 16 23, 


175,28 26. 25. viceroy: 30 25. 


ee ee ee 


eS ee rr  ΌΘΟΟΘΟΘΌΘΡΟΣ 





EXERCISES FOR WRITING 159 


that caused all, Greeks and foreigners alike, to join him 
with confidence in any desired undertaking.  Tissa- 
phernes, namely, declared himself able to bring about 
for Agesilaus the liberation and political independence 
5 of the Greek cities in Asia. “ You have only to grant 
me a truce,” he said, “against the arrival of the mes- 
sengers whom I shall send to the king, fixing such 
length of time as you will as the limit of the trans- 
action.” Accordingly they struck a truce, swearing 
100n both sides that they would observe their covenants 
without guile. Tissaphernes, however, so far from 
keeping peace, proceeded to send to the king for a 
large force of men in addition to that which he already 
had. Agesilaus, on the other hand, although he per- 
15ceived what was going on, nevertheless stood firm to 
the truce. In this way it became publicly evident that 
he was a man steadfast in the observance of an oath, 
incapable of proving false to an agreement. 
Tissaphernes thereafter, believing, since his home 
20 was in Caria, that Agesilaus would invade that region 
first of all, transported his infantry thither, and stationed 
his cavalry in the plain of the Maeander. Agesilaus, 
however, proceeding by the shortest route directly from 
Ephesus to Sardis, marched for three days through a 
25 country abandoned by the foe and affording abundant 
supplies for his army, until the arrival of the enemy’s 
cavalry on the fourth day. Hereupon he determined 
to join battle at oncg, while the foreign infantry was 


3. namely: Guide 989. 5. μόνον... δεῖ κτλ. 24. Ephesus: Ἔφεσος, ἡ. 
26, until: 58 17. 3 


160 ATTIC PROSE 


uw 


_ 
ᾳι 


20 


25 


still absent. Leading the line of his heavy-armed 
against the opposing array of horse, with an advance 
movement of the targeteers on the double-quick, he 
commanded his cavalry to charge also, on the under- 
standing that they had in the rear the support of the 
whole army and the general himself. The best among 
the Persians received the cavalry charge, but turned 
when confronted with the terrors of the combined 
attack, some of them plunging straight into the Pacto- 
lus, while others made off in flight. 

Upon arriving at Sardis, while the suburbs of the 
capital were given over to fire and pillage, Agesilaus 
made known what he meant to do, by issuing a procla- 
mation, as follows: “1 am come, the king of the 
Lacedaemonians, to set the Greek cities free, and to 
suppress those who see fit to wrong them. Such of 
you, therefore, as stand in need of deliverance, come 
to me as to one who battles for the common cause. 
If any there be who claim Asia as their own, let them 
appear in arms, and try the issue with her liberators.” 
— As no one came forth in response to this challenge, 
thenceforward Agesilaus conducted the remainder of 
the campaign with fearless confidence, securing immu- 
nity from plunder to the territory of friends, while 
reaping a rich booty from that of the foe. — Nor indeed, 
even after the death of Tissaphernes, whom the king 
beheaded, holding him to blame for the ill-success of 
his arms, did the cause of the, foreigner become more 


14. as follows: 29 22. 14. oratio directa. 16. suppress: cf 27 24, but 


ἀποπαύειν would be better here. 








EXERCISES FOR WRITING 161 


encouraging. Embassies were dispatched from all 
the nations to treat with Agesilaus; and many, striking 
boldly for liberty, came over to him in open revolt. 


Recalled to Hellas 


Thus Agesilaus cherished the intention and the hope 
of effecting a speedy dissolution of that empire which 
had formerly taken arms against Greece. By this time 


uw 


his authority extended over a very large number of 
cities upon the- continent of Asia, and, now that the 
state had annexed the fleet to his command, over many 
islands also; and he was growing greater day by day 
in power and renown. The end, however, of all these 
achievements upon foreign soil came in the form of an 
order from the home government to return to Hellas 
and do battle in behalf of his native city with the 
15 Thebans and other Greeks who were in combination 


I 


° 


against her. Here, though under the existing circum- 
stances he might have proceeded just as he chose, the 
king hesitated not a moment, but promptly obeyed the 
five ephors. Crossing the Hellespont he made his way 
20 through the same nations as had been traversed by 
Xerxes with his enormous armament; and what had 
been a year’s journey for the Persian was completed by 
Agesilaus in a single month. Arriving at the Boeotian 
frontier, there he found a force of Thebans, Athenians, 
25 Argives, Corinthians, Aenianians, Euboeans, and Locri- 
ans arrayed to dispute his passage. Accordingly he 
4. Cherished e/c.: Guide 9411. 11. Say 76de,then γάρ. 12. upon foreign 


soil: ἐν τῇ βαρβάρῳ. 21. See 180 22 note. 
ATTIC PROSE—TII 


162 ATTIC PROSE 


5 


Io 


-_ 
un 


25 


drew up his own army for battle in plain sight, having 
no allies from the vicinity except Phocians and Orcho- 
menians. 

Battle of Coronea 

This battle was equaled by no other of my time. 
They met in the plain near Coronea: Agesilaus with 
his command moving from the river Cephissus; the 
Thebans and their allies, from Mt. Helicon. They saw 
their lines of infantry quite evenly matched, and the 
cavalry also were about equal in numbers on either 
side. Agesilaus held the right of his‘own force, with 
the Orchomenians on his extreme left. On the other 
side the Thebans themselves occupied the right, the 
Argives the left wing. 

As they drew near, for a time there was a deep 
silence on both sides; but when they were about a fur- 
long apart the Thebans raised the battle shout and 
charged upon the double-quick. While there was still 
an interval of a hundred yards, a counter-charge upon 
the run from Agesilaus’ line was made by mercenaries 
under Herippidas’ command. These consisted of such 
as had enlisted for the Asiatic campaign at the start, 
together with some of the Cyreans, besides Ionians, 
Aeolians, and Hellespontians who stood next in line. 
All of those mentioned took part in the counter-charge, 
and arriving within spear reach turned their opponents. 


4. The banishment of Xenophon (for his Laconian sympathies) was prob- 


ably not decreed till after the battle of Coronea, August, 394 B.c. It was 
afterwards revoked, when friendly relations between Athens and Sparta had 
been restored. See Vol. IX. of Grote’s History of Greece. 22. Cyreans: a 
remnant of the “Ten Thousand Greeks,” with Xenophon himself at their head. 


ἰδέ ee ὺὕὕν.... οὖ γενν 


αι 


20 


25 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 163 


Nor, indeed, did the Argives withstand Agesilaus and 
his men, but fled to Mt. Helicon. 

At this moment, while some of his friends were 
already decking Agesilaus with the wreath of victory, 
word is brought to him that the Thebans had cut 
their way through the Orchomenians and were among 
the camp-followers. Immediately facing about he led 
against them. The Thebans, in their turn, as they saw 
their fellow-combatants in full flight in the region of 
Helicon, began a vigorous march, bent on breaking 
through to their own party. Right here, while Agesi- 
laus may be pronounced beyond all question brave, yet 
he certainly chose anything but the safest way. When 
he might have let pass the troops who were breaking 
through, followed them up, and overpowered them in 
the rear, he did nothing of the sort, but met the The- 
bans with a crash, squarely, front to front. Striking 
their shields together, it was a scene of shoving, fight- 
ing, killing, dying. There were no shouts to be heard, 
nor indeed was there silence, but the sort of suppressed 
utterance that the wrath of battle might be expected to 
produce. Finally, some of the Thebans broke their 
way through to Helicon, many fell back and were slain. 

After the victory had declared itself on the side of 
Agesilaus, and he had been borne severely wounded to 
his troop, certain of the cavalry riding up informed him 
that eighty of the enemy with their arms were under 


3. Guide 98 17. 8. Emphasize the subject. Cf 1268 note. 9. in the 


region of: Vcb. πρός. 11. A note of disapproval. The Agesilaus of Xeno- 
phon is a exlogy (ἐγκώμιον), 14. Acc. abs., H. 973, G. 1569, B. 658. 


πα. eee ee ee 


164 ATTIC PROSE 


the shelter of the temple, and inquired what was to be 
done. Then, though his whole body was covered with 
wounds inflicted by all sorts of weapons, he still did 
not forget the claims of religion, but gave orders that 
the men should be allowed to depart unmolested; and 
he detailed the cavalry who were in attendance upon 
him to escort them on their way, until they arrived at 


tn 


a place of safety. 
When the fighting had ceased, the place where they 
το had met in combat presented a fearful sight: the earth 
stained with blood, friend and foe lying dead together, 
crushed shields, shivered spears, daggers stripped of 
their sheaths, some lying upon the ground, some fixed 
in the bodies, others still held in the hands of men. 
15 That evening, for it had come to be quite late, drawing 
the Spartan dead within the lines, they made a supper 
and slept. In the morning he ordered Gylis the pole- 
march to draw up the army in fighting order; further, 
that every man should wear a garland in honor of the 
20 god, and all the musicians should play. They did so; 
and the Thebans sent a herald asking for a truce to 
bury their dead. The truce was granted, and Agesilaus 
continued his homeward march. — Such had been his 
choice: not to be the greatest man in Asia, but to 
25 govern and be governed by the Spartan law. 


1. temple: of Itonean Athena. As suppliants the men ought not to have 
retained their arms. 5. unmolested: Vcb. ἐᾶν. 10. fearful sight: Vcb. 
θεᾶσθαι. 15. had come tobe: ἤδη. 19. the god: Apollo, to whom the song 
of triumph would be addressed. 21. The victory is thus finally conceded 
to Agesilaus. 23. Not a new sentence in Greek. 





a Εν 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 165 


Panhellenic Patriotism 


Xenophon has recounted in praise of Agesilaus that 
the Laconian loved not his native city alone, but as a 
Greek was a lover of Greeks. He who shrank from 
no dangers, spared no expense, pleaded no excuse of 
health or age, provided he could confer some benefit 
upon his own state, the same man deemed it a calamity 
to be victorious in a war with Greeks, and commiserated 


wn 


Hellas for her senseless annihilation of her own sons 
in mutual combat. The Spartan thought it enough if 

10 his erring brethren should be chastened. In the same 
way Corinthians, Thebans, and Athenians were for 
chastening any who might err. But between those 
who were in the wrong and those who were in the 
right, they could never agree in distinguishing. 

Spartan Simplicity 

15 The house of the Spartan king was the house of a 
man who knows how to adjust his expenses to his 
income. A sight of its doors would lead one to con- 
jecture they were the same that Aristodemus, the son 
of Heracles, had managed to find and set up on his 


1. Xenophon: 35 10.—hasr. in pr.: 268. Not Perf.in Greek. 2. The 
past phase may enter, cf 14 1 f. The clauses are not causal.—the L.: 
ὁ Λάκων. 3. he who eéc.. ptcp. w. article. 5. provided: 10 7, H. 953 b., 
G. 1453, B.596. 6. the same m.: ἐκεῖνος. 7. Cf 45 22. 8. senseless: use 
ἀφρόνως, the opp. of σωφρόνως. Ch σωφρονίζειν in the M. 9. δεῖν... μόνον. 
Not p.v. 10. inthesamew.: 2910. 11. werefor: ἐβούλοντο. 12. τοὺς dd. 
κι τ. μή. 14. agree: 50 2.—in dist.: ὥστε διαγιγν. 15. Spartan: 53 5. 
15. The Greek sentence would take the form seen 58 6.—a man e/c.- ptcp. 
w. τὶς. 17. Asight: ptcp. 19. managed δ... Vcb. λαβεῖν. The idiomatic 
(colloquial) participle with tone of indifference. 


166 ATTIC PROSE 


uN 


2 


° 


ἡ. 


return from exile. Equally plain and inexpensive were 
the furnishings of the interior. Moderate and simple, 
too, was the feasting of the king at the public sacri- 
fices; and we are told that it was an ordinary citizen’s 
carriage in which his daughter used to go down to Amy- 
clae. — Thus Xenophon was enabled to speak of Agesi- 
laus as having equipped his mind to be, like Sparta 


‘herself, impregnable — open to no attack of fear, cupid- 


ity, or luxury. 


Hunting as Part of a Liberal Education 


This discovery, of hunting with hounds, is due to 
the gods Apollo and Artemis. By them imparted as 
a reward of righteousness to Chiron the Centaur, he 
gladly received and availed himself of the gift; and 
among his disciples, in hunting as well as in other noble 
arts, were Theseus, Odysseus, Diomed, Castor and Pollux, 
Aeneas, Achilles. They came to be severally honored 
by divine grace in due season. Theseus, who swept 
away the foes of all Hellas single-handed, is admired 
even to the present day also for advancing his native 
city to distinction. To Odysseus and Diomed, aside 
from their brilliant individual achievements, belongs in 
the main the credit of Troy’s capture. As for Castor 
and Pollux, their signal exhibitions in Hellas of what 


1. plain and inexpensive: 212. 2. Moderate and simple: 5 26, 3 12. 
as having e/c.: Inf. 17. Theseus, the national hero of Athens; as a 


pioneer of civilization, a sort of Attic Heracles. 20. A famous hunting adven- 


ture of Odysseus is recounted in the Odyssey, XIX. 393-466. 21. αἴτιος may 
take Inf. with or without the article. 





oo Ὅτ’. 





a ow 


i iE a ed ion a eae Sie ala 
EXERCISES FOR WRITING 167 


they had gained from Chiron have seemed a worthy 
ground for their deification. Aeneas delivers his 
paternal and maternal gods, delivers his own father 
from destruction; earning thereby a reputation for 


5 piety that secured to him and his, even at the hands 


of the victorious enemy, the unique privilege of immu- 
nity in the sack of Troy. Achilles, finally, educated 
in this mode, transmitted to posterity such a monu- 
mental record of great deeds that no one ever grows 


10 weary in reciting or listening to his tale. In such wise 


15 


2 


αι 


were they enabled to approve themselves through the 
training Chiron gave them. 

For myself, I advise our youth to despise no part of 
education ; least of all, hunting. Hunting makes men 
good in war, as in all matters that require brave think- 
ing, speaking, and acting. They who set their hearts 
upon this business will be helped by it in a great many 
ways: they will secure health for the body, improved 
eyesight and hearing, comparative immunity from old 
age; and, above all things, it is a good discipline for 
war. It was clearly seen by our ancestors, that of all 
the pleasures of youth, hunting is the only one that 
produces a large share of benefit; since, because it is 
an education in the spirit of truth, it makes for temper- 
ance and righteousness. A noteworthy illustration is 
furnished by the heroes of olden time whom I named 
as pupils of Chiron: beginning with hunting in their 
youth, they acquired many noble arts, and arrived at 
an excellence that renders them objects of admiration 


30 to this day. It is a patent fact that all men desire to 











168 ATTIC PROSE 


excel; but the most stand aloof, because true excellence 
is attainable only through toil. The achieving of suc- 
cess is too uncertain, while the labor involved is con- 
spicuously present. 

5 The persons known as sopfhists excite my wonder, 
in that, while professing, as the most of them do, to 
lead our youth to what is good, they really lead them 
in the opposite direction. We have seen no man, I 
fancy, who has been put right by the sophists of the 

1o present day. I am myself not a professional teacher, 
but I know that what is good is best learned from 
nature herself ; while the next best thing is to learn from 
men who are truly possessed of some excellent knowl- 
edge, not from people whose business is to deceive. 

15 Perhaps I do not express myself in a sophisticated 


1. toexcel: 1.6. ἄριστοι γενέσθαι, ἀρετὴν κατεργάσασθαι. 2. through toil: 
this sentiment, illustrative of the meaning of ἀρετή, was a commonplace of 
Greek literature, from Hesiod’s line (quoted by Xenophon, Memorabilia II. 
I, 20), 8 Ἂ 
) τῆς ὃ ἀρετῆς ἱδρῶτα θεοὶ προπάροιθεν ἔθηκαν, 
to Aristotle’s lyrical fragment, which begins: 


᾿Αρετὰ πολύμοχθε γένει Bporely, 
θήραμα κάλλιστον βίῳ, 

σᾶς πέρι, παρθένε, μορφᾶς 

καὶ θανεῖν ζαλωτὸς ἐν Ἑλλάδι πότμος 
καὶ πόνους τλῆναι μαλεροὺς ἀκάμαντας. 


— Plato strikes off a popular definition of ἀρετή, Menon 71 E: αὕτη ἐστὶν 
ἀνδρὸς ἀρετή, ἱκανὸν εἶναι τὰ THs πόλεως πράττειν, Kal πράττοντα τοὺς μὲν 
Φίλους εὖ ποιεῖν, τοὺς 5 ἐχθροὺς κακῶς, καὶ αὐτὸν εὐλαβεῖσθαι μηδὲν τοιοῦτον 
παθεῖν. εἰ δὲ βούλει γυναικὸς ἀρετήν, οὐ χαλεπὸν διελθεῖν, ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὴν τὴν 
οἰκίαν εὖ οἰκεῖν, σῴζουσάν τε τὰ ἔνδον καὶ κατήκοον οὖσαν τοῦ ἀνδρός. 8. Along 
with this it is only fair to read what Xenophon says of his friend Proxenus 


the Boeotian, who had given a fee to the distinguished sophist, Gorgias of 
Leontini, Anabasis II. 6, 16 ff. 





πο τς Ἰρτὰσ  Ψ οΎῪν 


wn 


ΕΝ 
° 


+5 


20 


25 


EXERCISES FOR WRITING 169 


manner, as far as language is concerned. But that 
is not the end I seek: my aim is to recount what is 
needed for the high purpose of a liberal education as 
the outcome of sound thought and judgment. Words 
cannot give an education; but maxims can, if good 
ones. There are many besides myself who are dis- 
posed to censure the sophists of the present time, as 
distinguished from the philosophers, because theirs is 
the wisdom not of ideas, but of words. My advice, 
accordingly, is to beware of the sophists and their 
professions, while nowise failing in regard for the 
conclusions of true philosophers. 

There are ancient legends to the effect that the gods 
like hunting, whether engaged in the work themselves 
or witnessing it on the part of others. Taking this 
tradition to heart, the young who act upon my advice 
are assured at the outset as to their godliness and piety, 
when they think of what they do as seen by an eye that 
is divine. These are the sort of youth who honor their 
parents, and serve well not only their country at large, 
but their individual compatriots and friends. — Hunt- 
ing, finally, has been the making not merely of men 
who were enamored of the art, but likewise of women 
to whom the goddess of the chase has vouchsafed her 
gift, an Atalanta, a Procris, many another. 


6. It was the corrupting influence of the mercenary spirit that gave the 


sophists their bad name; a philosopher, pursuing knowledge without regard 
to material interests or the vanity and ambition of would-be learners, was 
supposed to have no motive for ‘making the worse appear the better reason,’ 
τὸν ἥττω λόγον κρείττω ποιεῖν. 


ABBREVIATIONS AND EXPLANATIONS 


Regular substantives, masc. and fem. of the First, and masc. and neut. 
of the Second Declension, are registered in the Vocabulary without desig- 
nation of the genitive or the gender: veavias, πολίτης, βία, γῆ, δόξα, οἶκος, 
ὅπλον. Regular adjectives of the First and Second Declension, of three or of 
two endings, are designated as such by the numeral: ἄξιος 3, ἀργός 2. 

. Verbs are registered by the Infinitive: of the Aorist stem, when a 2 aor. 
is in use; of the Imperfect stem, when a I aor. is in use, or when there is 
no aorist. See Guide 93 37. Both forms thus often come to be given: 
στῆναι, ἱστάναι; φῦναι, φύειν. For the sake of clearness of definition, the 
Active and Middle forms of many verbs are separately presented: ἑλεῖν, ἑλέ- 
σθαι; ἱέναι, teoOar.— Infinitives in -εἶν are aorists, unless marked as imper- 
fects: εὑρεῖν, but θεῖν impf. 

All words formed from different roots are separately registered: ἀγαθός, εἷς, 
ἐνεγκεῖν, κρείττων, μία, φέρειν. ; 

Verbs compounded with a preposition must be looked for under the simple 
verb, if the simple is in use in Attic prose: ἀφελεῖν, under ἑλεῖν. But if the 
simple verb is not prosaic, the compounds are independently registered: ἀφεῖ- 
ναι, ἐπαινεῖν, παρανεῖν. 

Words inclosed in parentheses are of common origin with the word to 
which the parenthesis is annexed. English and Latin words so inclosed are 
always cognates, never derived or borrowed words; but the Greek words may 
be derivatives, or merely collateral forms. 

In connection with such verbs as are entirely regular there is no mention 
of forms: πηδᾶν, ὑφαίνειν (H. 422, 431; G. 663, 672; B. 213, 204).— The 
Vocabulary is meant to be in no respect exhaustive, but its lists are extensively 
supplemented by references to the grammars. 


H.= Hadley and Allen’s Grammar. G.=Goodwin’s Grammar. B,= Bab- 
bitt’s Grammar. M.= Model. Vcb. = Vocabulary. 


antith. = antithesis, antithetic. postp. = postpositive. 
arr. = arrange, arrangement. ptcp. = Participle, participial. 
of. = confer, compare. p. v. = Passive Voice. 
const. = construction, construe. 5c. = sctlicet, to wit. 
Eng. = English. sent. = sentence. 
f. or ff. = the following (one) or (sev- subst. = substantive. 
eral) lines, pages, efc. syn. = synonym, synonyms, 
id. = idiom, idiomatic. vb. = verb, 
κΤᾺ. = kal τὰ λοιπά, ef cetera. w. = with. 


References to all parts of the book except the Vocabulary are by page and 
line, with heavy-faced numerals to denote the pages. Thus 128 means page 
one hundred and twenty-eight; 88 5 f., 17-19 means page thirty-eight, lines 
five and six, and seventeen to nineteen inclusive. 

170 





ΝΡ σύ θα σοθππτττ ΔΟΥ 


—— 


VOCABULARY 


A. 


ἀγαγεῖν (ἀγ-, agere, ἀγών, ἄξιος) : 20 
lead, carry ; ἄξω, ἦχα, ἦγμαι, ἤχθην, 
ἄγω. σπονδὰς ἄξειν, ‘would keep 
truce,’ 53 23. 

— ἀπαγαγεῖν, 
‘back,’ 22 11. 

— διαγαγεῖν, διάγειν, ‘to pass time,’ 
‘continue,’ 11 29, 12 23. 

— ἐξαγαγεῖν, ἐξάγειν, ‘to lead out’ or 
‘forth,’ 12 2; ἐξήχθη, ‘was carried 
away,’ by the temptation, 36 13. 

— περιαγαγεῖν, περιάγειν, ‘to lead 
round,’ 2 24. 

— προσαγαγεῖν, ‘to bring to,’ 3 3. 
ἀγαγέσθαι: Σ᾽ lead for oneself or 
something of one’s own, 56 25. 
- καταγαγέσθαι, κατάγεσθαι, ‘to 
put in’ to port, ‘to turn in,’ ‘put 

up’ for lodging, 25 21. 

ἀγαθός 3: good. Syn. χρηστός. 

ἀγάλλεσθαι: fo glory, be proud. 

— ἔπαγάλλεσθαι, ‘to exult’ or ‘glory 
in, ἐπί rim, 38 1. 

ayav: too (much), very. 

ἀγαπᾶν : 20 love, cherish, to be content. 

Syn. στέργειν, φιλεῖν, ἐρᾶν. 
ἀγαπητός 3: beloved» ἀγαπητόν ἐστιν, 
‘one must be content,’ 41 17. 
ἄγασθαι: Zo admire; ἠγασάμην or 
ἠγάσθην, 45 9. 
ἀγγέλλειν : 20 announce; ἀγγελῶ, ἤγ- 


‘to lead away’ or 





yea, ἤγγελκα, ἤγγελμαι, ἠγγέλ- 
θην. Const. ptcp., ὅτι or ὡς. 

- ἀπαγγέλλειν, ‘to report duly,’ the 
farewell word, 33 23. 

— ἐξαγγέλλειν; ἐξηγγέλθη, ‘ word was 
brought out,’ from Asia, 52 28. 

— ἐπαγγέλλειν, ‘to lay orders upon,’ 
‘issue command,’ 27 26. 

— παραγγέλλειν, παραγγεῖλαι, ‘to 
transmit orders,’ ‘pass the word 
along,’ 34 11, 17 8. 

ἀγγελία: news, tidings. 

ἄγγελος : messenger. 

ἄγειν : ἀγαγεῖν. 

ἀγείρειν : fo collect; ἤγειρα. 

— συναγείρειν, ‘to muster,’ 28 13. 

ἀγήρατος 2 (γῆρας): ageless. 

ἀγνοεῖν impf.: 20 know not, aor. to fail 
to know, 20 26. 

ἀγορά: assembly, place of assembly 
market-place ; ἀγορὰ πλήθουσα, " full- 
market,’ to denote the business hours 
of the forenoon, 33 27. 

ἀγορεύειν : 20 harangue. The simple 
vb. is rare in prose; the compounds 
(impf. only) are frequent. 

Syn. -εἰπεῖν, -ειρηκέναι, ete. 

— ἐπαγορεύειν, ‘to forbid,’ 12 6;° ‘to 
give up,’ ‘ grow weary,’ 61 18. 

— προαγορεύειν, ‘to proclaim.’ 

— προσαγορεύειν, ‘to address’ by a 
name, apply it, 17 18, $1 12. 

ἄγρα: @ catching ; plur. ‘the chase.’ 


171 








172 ATTIC 

ἄγριος 3: wild, fierce. 

ἀγριότης, τητος, 7): frerceness. ᾿ 

ἀγρός: field, land, the country. 

ἀγών, -Bvos, ὁ: public game, contest. 

ἀγωνίζεσθαι : 20 struggle, contend. 

— διαγωνίζεσθαι, ‘to contend mutu- 
ally,’ 12 10. 

Sens, -ἐΞ: fearless. Adv. ἀδεῶς. 

δειν (Hom. ἀείδειν) : 20 sing, celebrate 
in song; ἄσομαι, Joa, ἤσθην. 

ἀδελφή : sister. 

ἀδελφός : brother. 

ἄδηλος 2: xot evident, uncertain. 

ἀδήωτος 2 (δῃοῦν) : unravaged. 

ἀδιήγητος 2: indescribable. 

ἀδικεῖν impf.: 20 be unjust or in the 
wrong, to do wrong, injure, τινά, 

ἀδίκημα, -ατος, τό: a wrong, crime. 

ἀδικία: injustice, wrong-doing. 

ἄδικος 2: unjust, wrong, wrong-doer. 

ἄδολος 2: guileless. Adv. ἀδόλως. 

ἀδύνατος 2: unable, impossible. 

ἀεί: always; ‘for the time being,’ 
‘from time to time,’ 32 12. 

ἀετός : eagle. 

ἀθάνατος 2 or 3: 
mortal. 

ἀθροίζειν : 20 get together in crowds or 
heaps, Zo muster. 

ἀθρόος 3: in crowds, heaps, or masses. 

ἄθῦμος 2: spiritless, despondent. 

αἰδεῖσθαι: 20 be modest or bashful, to 
feel shame, respect, or mercy, τινά, 
‘before one’; αἰδέσομαι, ἠδέσθην. 

— καταιδεῖσθαι, ‘to stand in awe of,’ 
a’ departed soul, 82 2. 

αἰδώς, -ofs, ἡ: shame, respect, mercy. 

αἷμα, -aros, τό: dlood. 

αἱματοῦν : 20 make bloody, pass. 10 4. 

αἴρειν (ἀρ-, dep-): to lift, pick up; ἀρῶ, 
ἦρα, ἦρκα, ἧρμαι, ἤρθην. H. 431 Ὁ, 


deathless, im- 





PROSE 


G. 674, B. 729 (List of Verbs). dpas 
10 12 is more specific than λαβών. 
— ἐπαίρεσθαι, ‘to be elated’; ἐπᾶρ- 
θείς, 27 13. 

αἱρεῖν impf.: fo fake, seize, capture ; 
aiphow, ἥρηκα, ἥρημαι, ἡρέθην. No 
impf. pass. 

Syn. ἑλεῖν, ἁλῶναι, ἁλίσκεσθαι. 

— ἀφαιρεῖν, ‘to take away,’ τινί τι 
(dat. of disadvantage) 21 8. 

αἱρεῖσθαι: fo choose, elect; αἱρήσομαι, 
ἥρημαι mid. or pass., ἠρέθην pass. 

Syn. ἑλέσθαι. 

— ἐξαιρεῖσθαι, ‘to choose out’; ἐξῃρη- 
μένος, ‘set apart,’ 25 19. 

αἰσθέσθαι: to apprehend by the senses, 
perceive; αἰσθήσομαι, ἤσθημαι, al- 
σθάνομαι. 

αἴσιος 2: boding well, auspicious. 

αἰσχρός 3: ugly, disgraceful, base ; 
αἰσχΐων, αἴσχιστος. Adv. αἰσχρῶς. 

αἰσχύνειν : 20 make ugly, disfigure, to 
disgrace, put to shame. 

αἰσχύνεσθαι: τ be ashamed, as at 
something unseemly, τὲ; ‘before 
one,’ τινά; ἠἡσχύνθην. ἐπί rim, ‘at’ 
something, 5117. Syn. αἰδεῖσθαι. 

αἰτεῖν, αἰτεῖσθαι: Zo ask, crave. 

— παραιτεῖσθαι, ‘to beg from’ or 
‘obtain by prayer,’ 52 18. 

αἰτία: cause, fault, accusation. 

αἰτιᾶσθαι: 20 allege as the cause, to 
blame, accuse. 

αἴτιος 3: causing, author, to blame or 
to thank for ; w. inf. 61 8. 

αἰχμάλωτος 2 (αἰχμή, ἁλῶναι) : taken 
by the spear, prisoner of war. 

αἰών, :ῶνος, ὁ, (αἰρο-, aevum, del): 
lifetime, age. 

ἀκινάκης : @ short sword. 

ἀκμή: the highest point, prime. 


i τὰν... 








ATTIC 


ἀκοντίζειν : 40 hurl the javelin. 

ἀκόντιον: dart, javelin. 

ἀκοντιστής : darter, javelin-man. 

ἀκούειν: Zo hear; ἀκούσομαι, ἤκουσα, 
ἀκήκοα, ἠκούσθην. Const. τινός τι; 
ptcp., ὅτι or ὡς, Inf. only w. meaning 
‘hear said,’ ‘ hear tell,’ 1 18, 21 6. 

ἄκρα: peak, height. 

ἀκριβής, -és: exact. Adv. ἀκριβῶς. 

ἀκριβοῦν: to make exact, to be perfect 
in something, ri. 

ἀκροᾶσθαι: 20 listen to, τινός. 

ἀκρόπολις, -ews, 7: upper or higher 
city, citadel, 

ἄκρος 3: highest, topmost; τὰ ἄκρα, 
‘the heights.’ 

ἄκων, -ουσα, (ἀρεκ-, éxdv): unwill- 
ing, unwillingly. 

ἀλαλάζειν : Zo shout ἀλαλαί, raise the 
War-cry. 

ἀλεεινός 3: open to the sun, warm. 

ἀλήθεια: “ruth. 

ἀληθεύειν : 20 be truthful. 

ἀληθής, -ές, (ἀ-, λαθεῖν, λήθεινν) : true. 

ἁλίζειν: Zo assemble. — 

— συναλίζειν, ‘to get together,’ 12 3. 

ἅλις : adv. enough. 

ἁλίσκεσθαι : ἁλῶναι. 

ἄλκιμος 2: stout, valiant, poetic. 

ἀλλά: Sut. ‘Well, 105,47 16. ἀλλὰ 
γάρ, ‘ however,’ often shows that the 
speaker is drawing near the end 
of his discourse, 88 8. ἀλλὰ... 
γέ, ‘yet at any rate’ (after a cond.), 
41,825. ἀλλά τοι, 51 4. οὐ μὴν 
ἀλλά, ‘not but that,’ 9 7. 

ἀλλάττειν (ἄλλος) : 20 alter, change, 
exchange ; ἀλλάξω, ἤλλαξα, ἤλλαχα, 
ἠλλάγμαι, ἠλλάγην, ἠλλάχθην. 


 -- ἀπαλλάττειν; ἀπαλλαγῆναι, ‘to be 


delivered from,’ ‘ get rid of,’ 81 22. 





PROSE 173 

ἅλλεσθαι (ἁλ-, salire) : to leap, bound; 
ἁλοῦμαι, ἡλάμην, ἁλάμενος, H. 
431 Ὁ. 

ἀλλήλων : of each other, one another. 
H. 268, G. 404, B. 142. 

ἄλλος, ἄλλη, ἄλλο: other, else. With 
τέ... kal, to enforce what follows, 
‘in particular,’ 38 5 f.,17-19. ἄλλο 
κακὸν οὐδέν, no evil ‘ besides,’ evil 
‘consequences,’ 5 15. 

ἄλλως : otherwise, in vain; ἄλλως τε 
kal, “ especially.’ 

ἄλυπος 2 (λύπη): without pain. 
Adv. ἀλυπότατα, ‘with the least 
offense,’ 11 14. 

ἁλῶναι: 20 be taken, caught, captured ; 
ἑαλων or ἥλων (H. 489,13; G.799), 
ἁλώσομαι, ἑάλωκα or ἥλωκα, ἁλίσκο- 
μαι. Syn. ἑλεῖν, αἱρεῖν. 

ἅμα (σα-, same, simul, semel, ἅπαξ) : 
at the same time, together (with). 

ἁμαρτεῖν: 20 miss the mark, 20 err; 
ἁμαρτήσομαι, ἡμάρτηκα, ἡμάρτημαι, 
ἡμαρτήθην, ἁμαρτάνω. οἱ ἁμαρτά- 
νοντες, ‘the erring,’ 59 26. 


GpBords, -άδος, (ἀναβαλεῖν) : adj. 
thrown up, γῆ, 23 10. 
ἀμείβειν : to change, exchange. Rare 


in prose; syn. ἀλλάττειν. 

— é€apelWas, ‘passing from,’ Macedon 
into Thessaly, 56 17. 
ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον : detter. 

ον Ὁ: ΒΕΙ6ι 
ἀμελεῖν, impf.: 20 be careless, to neglect, 
τινός; w. Inf. 19 7. 
— παραμελεῖν, ‘to be disregardful of.’ 
ἀμελής, -és, (μέλειν) : negligent. 
ἁμιλλᾶσθαι : Zo compete, contend, vie ; 
deponent passive, H. 497 a. 
Syn. ἀγωνίζεσθαι. 
ἀμύνειν : fo ward off. 


He 2545.55 


174 ATTIC 

GpiverBar: Zo repel, to defend oneself 
against, τινά. H. 813 a. 

ἀμφί (ambo, ambiguus, dupbrepos) : 
on both sides of, about ; prep. w. gen. 
(rare in prose) and acc. of ἀμφὶ 
Τωβρύαν, ‘G. and his men,’ 24 11. 
ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν, ‘ about full- 
market time,’ 33 27. 

ἀμφιεννύναι (ἐσθής): fo clothe; ἀμφιῶ, 
ἀμφιέσομαι, ἠμφίεσα, ἠμφίεσμαι. 
Augm. H. 361, G. 544, B. 172. 
Const. H. 724, G. 1069, B. 340. 

ἀμφίλογος 2: subject to dispute. 

ἀμφότερος 3: oth, 

ἄν: postpositive modal adverb. H. 
857-864, G. 1299, B. 436-439. 

dv: ἐάν. 

ἀνά: πκῤ, preposition with acc. H. 
792, G. 1203, B. 401. ἀνὰ κράτος, 
‘at the top of his speed,’ 34 3. 
In comp., ‘ up,’ ‘back’ or ‘ again.’ 
ἀνάβασις, -ews, ἡ : a going up, ascent. 
ἀναβιβάζειν: 20 make go up. 
ἀναγκαῖος 3: mecessary, unavoidable. 
ἀναγκάζειν : zo constrain, compel. 
ἀνάγκη : constraint, necessity. Often 
as a predication (sc. ἐστί), cf. χρή. 
el ἀνάγκη σοι, ‘if you must,’ 3 6. 

ἀναδύεσθαι (ἐκδῦναι, ἐνδῦναι) : το draw 
back, ‘back out,’ 47 16. 

ἀνάθημα, -aros, τό, (ἀναθεῖναι) : a 
votive offering set up in a temple. 

ἀνακλάζειν : Zo give voice, as a dog. 

ἀνάκρισις, -ews, ἡ : 2zguiry , at Athens 
a * preliminary examination’ of par- 
ties to a lawsuit, 47 19. 

ἀναλίσκειν : 20 spend, use up; ἀνᾶ- 
λώσω, ἀνήλωσα, ἀνήλωκα, ἀνήλωμαι, 
ἀνηλώθην. 

ἀνάλωτος 2 (ἁλῶναι) : 
taken. 


not to be 





PROSE 


ἀναμάρτητος 2 (d-, ἁμαρτεῖν) : un- 
erring. 

ἀναμφιλόγως : indisputably. 

ἀναρίθμητος 2 (ἀ-, ἀριθμός) : 
less. 

ἀναστομοῦν (στόμαν : 20 furnish with 
a mouth, open up. 

ἀνατλῆναι (Tad-) : 20 bear up, endure. 
Mostly poetic. 

ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι : 
one, fo kidnap. 

ἀνδράποδον : s/ave, esp. one taken in 
war and reduced to servitude. 

ἀνδρεῖος 3: brave, courageous. 
ἀνδρείως. 

ἀνδριαντοποιός : 
sculptor. 

ἀνδριᾶς, -dvros, ὁ, the image of a man, 
a statue. 

ἀνεπιστήμων, -ov, (d-): 
standing, unskilled in, τινός. 

ἀνήλωκα : ἀναλίσκειν. 

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, 6: man, husband. H. 
188 b, 189; G. 278, B. 105. 

ἀνθρώπινος 3: of man, human. 

ἄνθρωπος, ὁ, 7: human being, man or 
woman, person; plur. ‘mankind.’ 

ἀνία: grief, distress. 

ἀνιᾶν: 20 grieve or hurt one. 

ἀνιᾶρός 3: grievous, grieved. 

ἀνοίγειν or ἀνοιγνύναι : 20 open; avéw- 
γον, ἀνοίξω, ἀνέῳξα, ἀνέῳγα, ἀνέῳχα, 
ἀνέφγμαι, ἀνεῴχθην. 

ἀνόσιος 2: unholy. 

ἀντεξέδραμον : see δραμεῖν. 

ἀντί: instead of, for; prep. w. gon. 
δέξασθαι, ἑλέσθαι τι ἀντί Tivos, ‘to 
prefer’ one thing to another, 56 11, 
59 5. In composition, ‘against,’ 
‘in return’ or ‘in turn,’ 

ἀντιδιαβῆναι : see βῆναι, 


count- 


to make a slave of 


Adv, 


a maker of statues, 


not under- 


ATTIC 


ἀντίδοσις, -ews, ἡ: ὦ giving in ex- 
change, ‘antidosis’; at Athens a 
form whereby a citizen charged with 
a liturgy, such as the τριηραρχίᾶ or 
xopnyla, might call upon any other 
citizen, who had been passed over, 
and whom he thought richer than 
himself, either to exchange proper- 
ties or to submit to the charge him- 
self, 41 2. 

ἀντιμέτωπος 2: front to front, 58 2. 

ἀντίος 3: set against or in front of, 
opposite. ἀντίοι ἰέναι τινί, ‘to go to 
meet,’ 35 23. 

ἀντλεῖν (rad-) impf.: Zo draw water, 
and pour ets τι, 45 21. 

ἀνυδρίᾶ (d-, ὕδωρ) : want of water. 

ἀνύτειν : 20 accomplish ; ἤνυσα, ἤνυκα. 

— κατανύσαι, ‘to bring to an end.’ 

ἄνω: up, upwards. 

ἀξιοεργός 2: fit for work. 

ἀξιόπιστος 2: “rustworthy. 

ἄξιος 3: of like weight, worth, worthy. 
τὰ ἐλαχίστου ἄξια, ‘what is of least 
value,’ 43 4. ἄξιον (sc. ἐστί), ’t is 
‘right,’ he deserves it, 55 26. 

ἀξιοῦν: fo deem or think worthy, to 
see fit, to expect, to ask, to deign. 

ἀξίωμα, -aros, τό: esteem, reputation. 

ἄοκνος 2 (ὀκνεῖν) : without fear or 
hesitation. Adv. ἀοκνότατα, ‘most 
unhesitatingly,’ 8 1. 

ἀπαλλαγῆναι : see ἀλλάττειν. 

ἀπαντᾶν (ἀντίος) : to meet; ἀντήσομαι. 

ἅπᾶς, ἅπᾶσα, ἅπαν, (σα-, mas): 
(quite) all, all (together). 

ἄπει : see lévat. 

ἀπειλεῖν impf.: 20 threaten. 

ἀπιστεῖν impf.: 20 disbelieve. 

ἄπιστος 2: not believing or obeying, 
not to be believed, faithless. 





PROSE 175 


ἁπλοῦς, -f, -otv, (σα-, simplex) : 
simple ; comparative, 8 12. 

ἀπό: from, off, away; prep. w. gen., 
denoting source or starting-point. 
τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, ‘ henceforward,’ 17 18, 
55 9. ἀπὸ τοῦ σκοποῦ, ‘wide of’ 
the mark, 49 12. ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ 
τῶν κυνηγεσίων, beginning ‘with’ 
hunting, 62 5. 

In comp. w. ἀπό, esp. in vbs. of 
going and giving, not the point of 
departure, but the destination, is 
mainly considered: ἀπελθεῖν, ‘to 
return,’ ‘go home’; ἀφικέσθαι, ‘to 
arrive’; ἀποδοῦναι, ‘to give back’ 
what is due; ἀπαγγέλλειν, ‘to re- 
port’ duly. In some vbs., esp. those 
of saying, ἀπό has a force seemingly 
negative: ἀπειπεῖν, ἀπαγορεύειν mean 
sometimes ‘ to forbid,’ sometimes ‘to 
give up exhausted,’ say off (‘I can- 
not’), 

ἀποβουκολεῖν impf.: 20 let stray from 
the herd, 11 27. 

ἀποδεκτέον (δέχεσθαι) : one must 
receive from another, 44 25. 

ἀποδρᾶναι : 20 run away; ἀποδρᾶσο- 
μαι, ἀποδέδρᾶκα, ἀπέδρᾶν, ἀποδιδρά- 
oxw. H. 489, 3; G. 799. 

ἀποθανεῖν: to die or be killed; ἀπο- 
θανοῦμαι, τέθνηκα, τέθναμεν, τεθνάναι 
(to be dead) Ἡ. 490, 4, ἀποθνήσκω, 
θνήσκω. Used as pass, to κτείνειν. 

--- συναποθανεῖν, ‘to die with’ or ‘at 
the same time,’ 38 13, 32 4. 

ἀπόκρισις, -ews, ἡ : reply, answer. 

ἀπολειπτέον: one must forsake or 
abandon, 45 13. 

ἀπολέσθαι (dA-): Σὺ perish, be lost or 
ruined; ἀπολοῦμαι, ἀπωλόμην, ἀπό- 
λωλα, ἀπόλλυμαι. 


176 ATTIC 

ἀπολλύναι: Zo losé, destroy; ἀπολῶ, 
ἀπώλεσα, ἀπολώλεκα. 

ἀπότομος 2 (τεμεῖν): abrupt, pre- 
cipitous. 

ἀποψῆν :: Zo rub or wipe off, mid. 3 25. 
Η. 412, G. 496. 

ἅπτειν (aptus, adipisci): to fasten, to 
kindle; ἅψω, Fa, Fupar, ἥφθην. 

- προσάπτειν; προσῆψεν αὐτῷ, ‘an- 
nexed to’ his command, 56 2. 

— συνάπτειν; μάχην συνάψαι, ‘to join 
battle,’ 54 21. 

ἅπτεσθαι: to take hold of, touch, τινός. 

Syn. θιγεῖν, Paver. 

ἀπών: see εἶναι. 

apa: then, accordingly, so; Ῥοβίρ. 
inferential conj. ‘Be it known,’ 
4 17. ws dpa ἐφλυαροῦμεν, what 
fooling it was ‘after all,’ 10 13. 

dpa: interrogative particle. H. 1015, 
1016, 120; G, 1603; B. 571, I. 

Gpas: αἴρειν. 

ἀργός 2 (ἔργον) : not working, idle. 

ἀργύριον: a piece of silver, money. 

ἄργυρος : szlver. 

ἀργυροῦς, -ἂ, -οὖῦν : of silver. 

ἀρετή (ἄριστος) : subst. answering to 
the adj. ἀγαθός, excellence. See 168 
note. ai dperal, ‘the virtues, 46 11. 

ἀρήγειν: 20 be defender, to succor, 
τινί; fut. 87 20. 

ἀριθμός : zzmber. 

ἀριστερός 3: left, on the left, ominous. 

ἄριστον: breakfast. 

ἀριστοποιεῖν impf.: 20 prepare break- 
fast; mid. 17 14. 

ἄριστος 3: dest, excellent. Of noble 
birth, 27 8. Adv. ἄριστα, 21 1. 

ἀρκεῖν impf. (arcére, arx, ἀρήγειν) : 
to suffice; ἀρκέσω, ἤρκεσα. 

ἄρκτος, ὁ, 7: a bear, the North. 





PROSE 


ἅρμα, -ατος, τό: chariot. 

ἁρμόττειν (ἀρ-, arm, αγ5, artus, ἀριθμός, 
ἀρετή, ἄριστρς, dpua) : to fit together, 
join, to fit; ἁρμόσω, ἥρμοσα, ἥρμο- 
chal, ἡρμόσθην. 

— ἐφαρμόττειν, ‘to adapt to,’ 60 18. 

ἀροῦν (ardre): to plough, till. 

ἁρπαγή : plundering, pillage. 
ἁρπάζειν: 40 snatch, seize; ἁρπάσω, 
ἥρπακα, ἥρπασμαι, ἡρπάσθην. 

— διαρπάζειν, ‘to plunder,’ 18 3, 17. 

ἄρρην, -ev: male. 

aptav: 20 attach, hang. 

—mpowaprav; προσηρτημένον τῷ καλῷ 
τὸ ἀγαθόν, the good ‘in combination 
with’ the beautiful, 40 5. 

ἀρτᾶσθαι: 40 attach to oneself. 

--ἀναρτᾶσθαι; ἀνήρτητο, ‘he had 
gained their attachment,’ 7 16. 

ἄρτι: just (now), but just, 52 28. 

ἄρτος : wheaten bread, a loaf. 

ἀρύειν : 20 draw or dip; ἤρυσα, 4 18. 

ἄρχειν: zo be in advance, in com- 
mana, to rule, to begin (act. and 
mid. H. 816, 4). Const. τινός, ptcp. 

οὐκ ἐᾷ ἄρχειν, forbids him ‘to 
hold office,’ 52 11. ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ 
τῶν κυνηγεσίων, ‘beginning with’ 
hunting, 62 5; cf ὅθενπερ ἄρχεται, 
‘where it begins,’ 88 9. 

— προάρχεσθαι, ‘to begin before’ or 
‘first’ (πρότεροι), w. inf., 35 23. 
See 140 5 note. 

— ὑπάρχειν, ‘to be first underneath’ 
or at the bottom, ‘to be there to 
begin with’ or ‘start with’; thus 
often a strong syn. of εἶναι. Impers., 
‘it is a bottom fact,’ 63 3. 

ἀρχεῖον : government building; plur. 
‘imperial quarters,’ 25 20. 

ἀρχή : deginning, rule,empire ; ἀρχαί, 





ATTIC 


‘magistrates,’ 26 19 (cf τέλη). ἐξ 
ἀρχῆς, ‘anew,’ ‘as at first,’ 11 21. 
ἄρχων, -ovTos, ὁ: ruler, commander, 

ἀσεβής, -és: sacrilegious, impious. 

ἀσθενεῖν impf.: Zo be weak, ill. ἀσθε- 
νήσαντος, when he “ fell sick,’ 7 23. 

ἀσθενής, -és, (ἀ-, σθένος) : weak, ill. 

ἀσινής, -ἐς : harmless. 

ἀσκεῖν impf.: 20 train, to practise. 

ἀσπάζεσθαι : fo greet warmly, welcome 
or take leave of affectionately, to 
love. 

— ἀντασπάζεσθαι, ‘to embrace in 
turn,’ 2 21. 

ἀσπίς, -ίδος, ἡ : shield. 

ἀστός (ἄστυ) : cownsman, citizen. 

ἀστραπή: lightning. 

ἀστράπτειν: 40 lighten, to flash or 
gleam \ike lightning, 34 27. 

ἄστυ, -εος, τό: Ζοτυ:, city. 

ἀσφαλής, -és, (σφάλλειν) : safe, se- 
cure. Adv. ἀσφαλῶς. 

ἀσχολία (σχολή) : want of leisure, 
occupation. 
ξειν xrX., would give him too much 
to do,’ ‘keep him too busy,’ 58 8. 

ἀτακτεῖν impf.: fo be out of order. 

ἄτακτος 2 (τάττειν) : not in. battle- 
order, 34 8. 

ἀτάρ (Hom. αὐτάρ) : but, however. 

ἅτε: inasmuch as, seeing that ; w. ptcp. 
implying cause or reason, 2 25. 

ἀτιμάζειν : 20 hold in no esteem, deem 
worthless, 52 23. 

Gripos 2: wnhonored; ἀτιμοτέρα, ‘less 
prized,’ 46 6. 

ἄτοπος 2 (τόπος) : out of place, 
strange, absurd, 19 11. 

ἀτριβής, -ἔς : unworn, indestructible. 

ἀτυχεῖν impf.: 20 de without share in, 
to fail to get, τινός; to be unlucky. 

ATTIC PROSE — I2 


ἀσχολίαν αὐτῷ παρέ- 





PROSE 177 


ἀτυχής, -és: missing, without share 
in, unlucky. 

αὖ: on the other hand, on the con- 
trary ; postpositive. 

αὖθις : again. 

αὐλεῖν impf.: 2Σ9 play on the flute. 

αὐλητής: piper, flute-player. 

αὐλός: pipe, flute. 

αὐξάνειν or αὔξειν (ἀρεξ- wax, augére, 
byujs): to increase, make great; 
αὐξήσω, ηὔξησα, ηὔξηκα, ηὔξημαι. 

— συναύξειν, ‘to help in increasing.’ 

αὐξάνεσθαι or αὔξεσθαι: fo grow up, 
grow great, ηὐξήθην. 

— ἐπαύξεσθαι, ‘to go on increasing.’ 

αὐτίκα : forthwith. 

αὐτόθεν: from right there, from the 
immediate locality, 56 24. 

αὐτόματος 2: selfmoving; ‘of his 
own accord,’ 11 9. 

αὐτομολεῖν impf.: Zo desert. 

avrév: ἑαυτόν. 

αὐτόνομος 2: zzdependent. 

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό: self, same; but 
in other cases than nom., when not 
in agreement w. another word and 
not preceded by the article, nor 
emphatically placed, ‘him,’ ‘her,’ 
‘it,’ ‘them.’ 

παρὼν αὐτός, present ‘in person,’ 

12 6, 84 28. εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ ἡμῖν, to 
‘the same’ end as we, 315. αὐτοῖς 
τοῖς ἵπποις, ‘horses and all,’ 9 1. 

αὐτοῦ: in the very place, right there. 

ἀφαιρεῖν : see αἱρεῖν. 

ἀφανίζειν: 20 put out of sight, make 
away with, destroy. 

ἀφεῖναι (ἱέναι) : to let go, to dismiss, to 
allow ; ἀφῆκα, ἀφεῖμεν, ἄφες, ἀφεῖκα, 
ἀφεῖμαι, ἀφείθην, ἀφεθῆναι. 

ἀφελεῖν : see ἑλεῖν. 


178 ATTIC 

ἀφέσθαι (ἕεσθαι) : ἐο let go of; ἀφείμην. 
ἀφέμενον τῆς καλῆς ὄψεως, ‘giving up 
the beautiful appearance,’ 40 9. 

ἀφθονία (φθόνος) : abundance. 

ἀφικέσθαι (ἱκέτης, ἱκανός) : to arrive, 
reach the point set out for, see ἀπό; 
ἀφίξομαι, ἀφῖγμαι, ἀφικνοῦμαι. 

ἀχαριστεῖν, impf.: 20 de ungrateful. 

ἀχαριστία: ingratitude. 

ἀχάριστος (χάρις) 2: thankless, un- 
grateful, unpleasant. 

ἄχθεσθαι: Zo be vexed, sorry; ἀχθέ- 
σομαι, ἠχθέσθην. 

ἄχθος, -ους, τό: burden, sorrow. 

ἄψῦχος 2 (ψυχή) : [78165:. 

Β. 


βάθος, ους, τό: depth. 

βαθύς, -eta, -ὖ: deep, 

βαίνειν : βῆναι. 

βαλεῖν: τὼ throw, cast, shoot; βαλῶ, 
βέβληκα, βέβλημαι, ἐβλήθην, βάλλω. 

— ἀναβαλεῖν, ‘to throw up.’ 

— ἀποβαλεῖν, ‘to throw away,’ ‘ sacri- 
fice,’ 32 17. 

— ἐκβαλεῖν, ‘to cast out,’ ‘ banish.’ 

— ἐμβαλεῖν, ‘to attack,’ ‘engage’ the 
foe, 36 28, 54 25, ‘to invade,’ 54 το. 

- καταβαλεῖν, ‘to throw down,’ 
‘shoot,’ or ‘ bring down,’ 6 3, 9 9. 

— προσβαλεῖν, ‘to make an assault 
upon,’ ‘attack,’ 16 24, 59 24. 

— συμβαλεῖν, ‘to throw together,’ 
‘close’ shield to shield, 58 3. 

— ὑπερβαλεῖν, ‘to march over,‘ cross’ 
the mountains, 56 18. 

βαλέσθαι: 40 throw for oneself. 

— προβαλέσθαι, ‘to hold up before 
oneself’ in defense, 24 27. 

— συμβαλέσθαι, ‘to contribute’ to a 
common stock, 42 16, 18, 


PROSE 


βάπτειν: ὦ dip; βάψω, ἔβαψα, Bé- 
βαμμαι, ἐβάφην. 

βαρβαρικός 3: δαγδαγίε, foreign; τὸ 
βαρβαρικόν, ‘the Persian army,’ 84 
17. βαρβαρικῶς, ‘in Persian,’ 34 4. 

βάρβαρος 2: dardarian (not Greek). 

βασιλεία: Aingdom,; ‘the succession 
to the throne,’ 30 20. 

βασίλειον: palace; usually plural. 

βασιλεύειν : Zo be hing. 

βασιλεύς, -ews, ὁ: Ling, prince. 

βασιλικός 3: ingly, royal. Adv. 
βασιλικῶς, ‘in royal style,’ 12 6. 

βελτίων, βέλτιστος : detter, best. 
βῆναι: 2 walk, go; βήσομαι, βέβηκα, 
βαίνω. Η. 489, 1; 490, 2; G. 799. 

— ἀναβῆναι, ‘to go up,’ ‘ascend,’ 
‘mount’ a horse (ἐπί), 34 Io. 

— ἀποβῆναι, ‘to turn out,’ ‘result.’ 

— διαβῆναι, ‘to go through,’ ‘ cross,’ 

— — ἀντιδιαβῆναι, ‘to cross over in 
turn,’ 53.12, 

— καταβῆναι, ‘to go down,’ ‘de- 
scend’; εἱστήκει καταβεβηκώς, ‘stood 
where he had dismounted,’ 9 14. 

— ἐκβῆναι, Συρίαν ἐκβάντι, “45 you 
pass from’ or ‘beyond’ S., dat. of ref- 
erence, H. 771 b, G. 1172, 2, B. 382, 

Bia: force, violence ; Bld, ‘in spite of. 

βιάζεσθαι: 20 overpower, compel forci- 
bly; βιάσομαι, ἐβιᾶσάμην. 

βίαιος 3: forcible, violent. 
βιαίως. 

Bios: 1172. 

βιοτή: Zife, existence. 

βιῶναι: fo live; éBlwy (H. 489, 14; 
G. 799; B. 729 (List)). ἐβίωσα 
(rare), βιώσομαι, βεβίωμαι. 

Syn. ζῆν, διαιτᾶσθαι. 
βλαξ, βλακός, ὁ, ἡ, (μαλακός) : slack, 


Adv. 





lazy, ‘blockhead,’ 11 7. 


ATTIC 


βλέπειν : 0 look, see, behold ; βλέψομαι, 
ἔβλεψα. Syn. ὁρᾶν, θεᾶσθαι, ἰδεῖν. 

- ἀναβλέπειν, ‘to look up,’ raise the 
eyes, 11 5. 

— ἀντιβλέπειν, ‘to look one in the 
face,’ τινί, 55 13. 

— ἀποβλέπειν, ‘to look (away) to- 
ward,’ 35 8, 39 3. 

— ἐμβλέπειν, ‘to gaze upon,’ 2 13. 

βοᾶν: 20 shout, cry, call loudly. 

— συμβοᾶν, ‘to shout with,’ ‘join in 
shouting,’ τινί, 24 11. 

βοή: shout, call, cry. 

βοηθεῖν impf.: 20 come to the rescue. 

βοηθός (βοή, θεῖν) : helper. 

βούλεσθαι (βολ-, will, vel/e, voluntas, 
βελτίων) : ἐο wish, will, mean to do 
something; βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, 
ἐβουλήθην. Syn. ἐθέλειν. 

“Τὸ prefer,’ w. or without μᾶλλον, 

53 14, of. 6 8, 9. ἐβουλόμην οὕτως 
ἔχειν, ‘I could wish’ it were so, 19 3. 

βουλεύειν : 20 take counsel, determine, 
to advise, τινί. 

— ἐπιβουλεύειν, ‘to plot against,’ ‘to 
plan,’ ‘scheme,’ 11 14. 

— συμβουλεύειν, ‘to advise.’ 

βουλεύεσθαι: Zo deliberate, form one’s 
plan, w.inf.21 το, Η. 814 ἃ. 

βουλή: will, design, counsel, βουλήν 
μοι δὸς περὶ τούτου, ‘give me time 
to think it over,’ 21 3. 

Bots, Bods, ὁ, ἡ: ox, cow. H. 206, 
G, 268, 269; B. 111. 

βρέφος, -ους, τό: dade. 

βροντή: thunder. 

βρῶμα, -ατος, τό: food, meat, 


πὰ 


γαμεῖν impf.: 40 marry, of the man; 
γαμῶ, ἔγημα, γεγάμηκα. 


"eae 





PROSE 179 

γαμεῖσθαι: 2 marry, of the woman, 
τινί, 26 4, οἱ τ. 

yap: for, namely; postpositive. H. 
1050, 4. ἀλλὰ γάρ, ‘ however,’ often 
near the end of a discourse, 33 8. 
καὶ ydp,'7 23; but 7 26, καί modifies 
ἐκ νυκτός (‘even’), 

γέ: encl. postp. intensive or restric- 
tive particle. H. 1037, 1. Its force 
can often be represented in English 
only by the tone, or by italics in 
writing. 

ἀλλὰ... γέ, ‘yet at any rate’ 

(after a cond.), 41, 82 5. καὶ 
βάθος γε, ‘yes, and depth too,’ 22 
25, 46 20, ‘ nay’ 47 20, ὃ δέ ye καὶ 
ἀμυνόμενος, ‘ay, and another even 
defending himself,’ 24 28. ἐπεί γε 
μήν 58 19, cf. 59 12, transitional; 
so 1 11, correlative to μέν. 

γελᾶν: fo laugh; γελάσομαι, ἐγέλασα, 
ἐγελάσθην. : 

— καταγελᾶν, ‘to laugh at,’ τινός. 

γέλοιος 3: laughable, ridiculous. 
Adv. γελοίως. 

γέλως, -wTos, ὁ: 
ridicule, 

γενέθλιος 2: of one’s birth; τὰ γε- 
νέθλια, ‘the birthday feast,’ 4 25. 

γενέσθαι (kin, kid, gignere, géns, 
yévos): to come into being, be born, 
to be made or done, to become, get 
somewhere or into some state or 
condition; γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι, 
γέγονα, γίγνομαι. Usual passive to 
ποιεῖν or ποιεῖσθαι, 45 27, 28; 23 26, 
28 21, 59 4. 

ἔτη πεντεκαίδεκα γεγονυῖα, “ fif- 

teen years old,’ 41 14. τοὺς πολέμῳ 


laughter, object of 


ἀγαθοὺς γεγονότας, ‘men who have 
proyed themselves brave in war,’ 








180 ATTIC 
87 19 (ἀγαθὸς γενέσθαι very often 
inthis sense). ἡ νίκη adv’ Αγησιλάῳ 
ἐγένετο, the victory ‘ declared itself’ 
on the side of Agesilaus, 58 9. 

— διαγενέσθαι; διαγεγένηνται φίλοι, 
‘have proved kind from first to last,’ 
32 24. 

— ἐπιγενέσθαι; τὸ ἀεὶ ἐπιγιγνόμενον, 
as each generation ‘comes succes- 
sively into being,’ 32 12. 

-- προγενέσθαι; οἱ προγεγενημένοι, 
‘former generations,’ 32 23. 

— προσγενέσθαι, ‘to be added,’ 42 27. 

— συγγενέσθαι, ‘to have an inter- 
view with,’ 39 17. 

γενναῖος 3: high-born or bred, noble. 

γένος, -ovs, τό: race, descent, nation. 

γεραίτεροι : elders, senators, 

γέρων, -οντος, 6: old man. 

γεύειν : fo give a taste of. 

γεύεσθαι: fo taste, τινός. 

- ἀπογεύεσθαι, ‘to keep taking a 
taste of,’ 3 8. 

γεωργικός 3: of farming, agricultural, 

γεωργός (γῇ, ἔργον) : farmer. 

γῆ: earth. 

γῆρας, γήρως, τό: old age. 
G. 228, Β. 106. 

γηράσκειν: fo grow old; γηράσω or 
γηρᾶσομαι, ἐγήρᾶσα, γεγήρᾶκα. 

γιγνώσκειν : γνῶναι. 

γνώμη: judgment, view intellectual; 
γνῶμαι, ‘maxims,’ opinions of wise 
men, 62 23 (adapted to ἐγνωσμένα 
22), of. νοήματα 26, ἐνθυμήματα 28. 

γνῶναι (γνο-, can, ken, know, (g)2d- 
Scere, nomen, ὄνομα, νοῦς): fo see 
with the mind, come to know, form 
a judgment or decision; γνώσομαι, 
ἔγνωκα, ἔγνωσμαι, ἐγνώσθην, γιγνώ- 
σκω. Syn, εἰδέναι, ἐπίστασθαι. 


H. 191, 





PROSE 


ὀρθῶς ἐγνωσμένα, ‘sentiments 
rightly conceived,’ 62 22. ἐπειδὰν 
γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι, when men 
‘come to feel’ that they are dis- 
believed, 19 10. With gen., like 
αἰσθέσθαι, ἔγνω ἄτοπα ἐμοῦ ποι- 
οὔντος, 19 11. 

— καταγνῶναι, ‘to note definitely,’ 
‘find out,’ 4 27. 

— συγγνῶναι; ἐγὼ συνεγίγνωσκον ad- 
τοῖς, ‘I shared their views,’ 21 13. 
Often ‘to pardon,’ cf 52 19. 

γονεῖς, -€wv: parents. 

γόνυ, -ατος, τό, (knee, gent) knee. 

γοῦν (γέ, οὖν): at any rale; postp. 
intensive particle. H. 1037, 2. 

γυμνικός 3: gymnastic. 

γυμνός 3: naked, bare. 

γυναικεῖος 3: of women, feminine. 

γυνή, γυναικός, 7, (queen): woman, 
wife. H.216,4; G.291,8; B, 115, 4. 


A. 


Saxetv: 2Σ0 dite, sting; δήξομαι, δέδηγ- 
μαι, ἐδήχθην, δάκνω. 

— ἐποδακεῖν, ‘to bite off,’ 48 22. 

δακρύειν : 20 shed tears, weep. 

Sdxpvov: fear. 

Samavav: 20 expend, incur expense. 

δαπάνη: expense, ‘stores to be ex- 
pended,’ 44 28. 

δέ: dut, and; postp. conjunction of 
contrast. H. 1046, I. 

καὶ ὁ Κῦρος δέ, ‘and’ Cyrus also 

(καί), 18 2,5; 94 27, 48 27. 

δεδιέναι: 20 fear; ἔδεισα, δέδοικα (“1 
fear’). Η. 490, 5; G.804; B. 535. 

δεικνύναι (dicere, index): to point 
out, show; δείξω, ἔδειξα, δέδειχα, 
δέδειγμαι, ἐδείχθην, 








ATTIC 


— ἀναδεικνύναι, ‘to lift up and show,’ 
‘exhibit,’ 32 16. 

— ἀποδεικνύναι, ‘to show forth,’ ‘to 
declare,’ w. inf. ‘ pronounce,’ 43 28; 
‘to render,’ ‘deliver,’ as one pre- 
sents for inspection that which he 
has been ordered to make, 41 19. 

— ἐπιδεικνύναι, to put on exhibition,’ 
‘display,’ ‘ show.’ 

— — ἀντεπιδεικνύναι, ‘to exhibit in 
turn’ or ‘on the contrary,’ 54 2. 

Sein: afternoon. 

1. δεῖν: ὦ lack, need; δεήσω, édénoa, 
dedénxa. As a personal verb, the 
act. δέω is found only w. genitives 
of quantity, πολλοῦ, εἴς. Impers., 
τινί τινος, ‘that we may need as 
few as possible,’ 23 3. See δεῖσθαι. 

2. δεῖν: to bind, imprison; δήσω, 
ἔδησα, Sédexa, δέδεμαι, ἐδέθην. H. 
411; G. 495, 2; B. 199, 2 n. 

3. δεῖν: impers. δεῖ, ome ought, must, 
should, w. inf.; ἔδει, δεήσει, ἐδέησε. 

δεινός 3 (δεδιέναι) : fearful, dreadful. 
In Attic colloquially weakened to 
‘skilful,’ ‘ clever,’ w. inf.; δεινότατος 
λαλεῖν, ‘a terrible chatterbox,’ 11 8. 
τὰ δεινά, ‘the terrors’ of the battle- 
field, 54 28, cf 38 τι. 

δειπνεῖν impf.: 40 be at dinner, dine. 

— συνδειπνεῖν, ‘to dine together,’ 46 
19. 

δεῖπνον : dinner. 

δειπνοποιεῖσθαι: 20 have dinner. 

δείσας : δεδιέναι. 

δεῖσθαι: 20 want, to beg of; δέομαι, 
δεήσομαι, δεδέημαι, ἐδεήθην. Const. 
H. 743 a; G. 1114. See 1. δεῖν. 

— προσδεῖσθαι, ‘to require in addi- 
tion’ 60 10, ‘to ask for more’ 14 5. 

δέκα: sen. 





PROSE 181 


δέκατος 3: the tenth; δεκάτην, “ἃ 
tithe, 55 16, 

SévBpov: tree, fruit tree. 

δεξιός 3: on the right, auspicious; 
ἡ δεξιά, sc. χείρ, ‘the right hand.’ 

δεξιοῦσθαι : fo greet with the right 
hand, 88 25, cf. το. 

Sépn: neck. H. 138 a; 6. 176. 

δεσπότης : master, in relation to slaves. 

δεύτερος 3: the second. 

δέχεσθαι: 40 receive, accept; δέξομαι, 
ἐδεξάμην, δέδεγμαι, ἐδέχθην H. 499. 

— προσδέχεσθαι, ‘to wait for,’ ‘be 
ready to receive,’ 48 15. 

— ὑποδέχεσθαι, ‘to undertake,’ ‘take 
on oneself,’ ‘engage.’ 

δή: postp. asseverative particle. H. 
1037, 4. The effects of 67 must be 
learned by observation. μὲν δή, 
very often, but the μέν has its sepa- 
rate appropriateness, 1 1 (μέν correl. 
to δέ), 1 10 (μέν correl. to γὲ μήν); 
in both cases 67 marks the connec- 
tion of the thought with what has 
preceded. Often w. rel. words, ola 
δή, 2 2. πῶς δή, ‘how so, pray?’ 
485. With a tone of irony: τοῦ δὴ 
... μὴ λυσιτελεῖν avbrots, ‘obviously’ 
that it may not be well for them to 
poison the wine, 4 19. 

δῆλος 3: manifest, clear; δῆλον ὅτι, 
‘evidently,’ H. 1049, 1 a. 

δηλοῦν: 20 make evident, show, publish. 

δημηγορικός 3 (ἀγορεύειν) : of or fit 
for haranguing the people, 41 το. 

δῆμος : people, community, public. 

δῃοῦν: 2 slay, ravage. 

δήσας: 2. δεῖν. 

δηχθῆναι : δακεῖν. 

Δία, Aut, Διός : Ζεύς. 

διά (two, between, twin, twilight, 22, 


182 ATTIC 


δύο): through; prep. w. gen. and 
acc. H. 795, G. 1206, B. 404. 

In composition διά denotes inter- 
val, διέχειν ‘to be apart’; dis- 
tinction, difference, διαφέρειν ‘to 
differ’; continuance, διάγειν ‘to 
pass time’; succession, διαδέχεσθαι; 
mutual action, διακελεύεσθαι. 

διαβιβάζειν (βα-, βῆναι) : to make go 
through or across, to transport. 
δίαιτα : mode of life, arbitration. τὴν 
δίαιταν ποιησάμενος, ‘living,’ ‘ mak- 
ing his home,’ 29 1. 
διαιτᾶν: 20 arbitrate. H. 362 Ὁ. 
διαιτᾶσθαι: Zo pass life, live; διῃ- 
τώμην, διαιτήσομαι, δεδιήτημαι, 
ἐδιῃτήθην. Syn. ζῆν, βιῶναι. * 
διακελεύεσθαι: 20 encourage one an- 
other, to exhort oneself, τινί, 11 13. 
διᾶκονία: domestic service, 45 29. 
διᾶκονικός 3: good at service. 
διαλέγεσθαι : 20 discuss, converse; δια- 
λέξομαι, διείλεγμαι, διελέχθην. 
διανεμητέον : one must apportion. 
διανομή : an apportioning. 
διαφερόντως : differently. 
διαφθαρῆναι: see φθείρειν. 
διαχειρίζειν (χείρ) : fo have in hand, 
manage; mid. 18 1. 
διδασκαλία: ὦ Zeaching, instruction. 
διδάσκαλος : Zacher. 
διδάσκειν : 20 teach, instruct, to ap- 
prise; διδάξω, ἐδίδαξα, δεδίδαχα, 
δεδίδαγμαι, ἐδιδάχθην. 
διδάσκεσθαι: 2Σῶῷ0 get instructed in, 
learn, 62 17. 
διδόναι: Zo offer, give; δοῦναι. 
διεῖχον : see ἔχειν. 
διεσκεμμένως (ἐσκεμμένος, σκέψασθαι): 
with discriminating care, 48 7. 
διηρώτων : see ἐρωτᾶν. 


PROSE 


δικάζειν : 20 act as judge, give judgment. 
δικάζεσθαι: “0 be at law, get judgment. 
δίκαιος 3: just. δίκαιός εἰμι λέγειν, ‘it 
is right for me to recount.’ Η. 944, 
G. 1527, B. 634. Adv. δικαίως. 
δικαιοσύνη : justice, righteousness. 
δικαιότης, -τος, ἡ : like δικαιοσύνη; 
attributed to Chiron as the most 
civilized being of his time, 60 26. 
δίκη: right, a case at law, legal safis- 
faction or penalty. δίκην δοῦναι, 
‘to be punished’; ἔχω τὴν δίκην, 
‘I have my punishment,’ 20 26. 
διπλάσιος 3: double, twice as much. 
δισχίλιοι 3: Δύο thousand. 

διψῆν: to thirst, be thirsty; διψήσω. 

διώκειν: Zo pursue, chase; διώξω and 
διώξομαι. 

δοκεῖν impf.: 20 seem to the mind, fo 
think, believe ; impers. w. dat., 20 seem 
best; δόξω, ἔδοξα, δέδογμαι. Const. 
inf. Syn. (1) φαίνεσθαι, (2) νομί- 
ζειν, οἴεσθαι, ἡγεῖσθαι. 

— συνδοκεῖν, impers. συνέδοξε Κύρῳ, 
‘it seemed good to Cyrus also,’ 
‘Cyrus acquiesced,’ 28 5; acc. abs. 
συνδόξαν, ‘with the consent’ of his 
parents, 28 Io. 

δοκιμάζειν : 20 test, prove, approve. 

— ἀποδοκιμάζειν, ‘to reject on scru- 
tiny’ or ‘trial,’ as unworthy to hold 
office, 52 11. 

δοκιμασία: examination or scrutiny, 
as of qualification for office, 52 16. 

δόκιμος 2: approved, in good repute. 

δόξα (δοκεῖν) : opinion, belief, also the 
opinion which others have of one, 
hence repztation, fame. Aeneas 
won ‘the name’ of piety, 61 13. 

ϑορκάς, -άδος, ἡ : antelope, gazelle. 





δόρυ, -ατος, τό, (tree, δρῦς) : spear, 





ἌΣ wR, 9 LIS oie βυὼξ 


yeaa: Ache, 


ΠΑΡ 


Pe ae ee ee ζω, 








ATTIC 


lance. els δόρυ (1.6. els δόρατος πλη- 
γήν) ἀφικέσθαι, ‘ within spear-reach,’ 
‘a spear’s length,’ 57 17. 

δοῦλος : slave. 

δοῦναι (δο-, dare, dinum, δῶρον) : to 
give; ἔδωκα, ἔδομεν, δώσω, δέδωκα, 
δέδομαι, ἐδόθην, δίδωμι. 

— ἀντιδοῦναι, ‘to give in return.’ 

— ἀποδοῦναι, ‘to give back,’ ‘give 
what is one’s due,’ ‘ pay,’ restore.’ 
— διαδοῦναι, διαδιδόναι, to‘ give sever- 

ally,’ ‘ distribute,’ 4 8, 12. 

— ἐνδοῦναι; ὅτι ἐνδιδοῖτο αὐτοῖς ἡ πόλις, 
‘offered to surrender,’ ‘was ready 
to put itself in their hands,’ 59 22. 

— ἐπιδοῦναι, ‘to give over and above,’ 
as marriage portion, 26 5; similarly 
14 4; ‘to increase,’ ἢν τοσοῦτον ém- 
διδῶ, ‘if I go on at this rate,’ 11 6. 

— παραδοῦναι, ‘to hand over,’ ‘to 
hand down’ or ‘transmit,’ 61 17. 

δουπεῖν (δοῦπος) impf.: 20 sound 
heavy, ‘to strike’ or ‘beat loudly,’ 
85 28. Not a prose word. 

δραμεῖν: Zo run; Spayodua, δεδρά- 
μηκα. Syn. τρέχειν, θεῖν. 

— ἐκδραμεῖν, ‘to run out’ or ‘ forth.’ 

— — ἀντεκδραμεῖν, ‘to charge in turn 
on the run,’ 57 12. 

- — συνεκδραμεῖν, ‘to charge’ or 
‘sally forth together,’ 57 17. 

δρεπανηφόρος 2 : scythe-bearing. 

δρόμος (δραμεῖν) : a running, course. 
δρόμῳ θεῖν, to charge ‘ on the double- 
quick,’ 35 25. 
δύναμις, -ews, 7: the adility or power 
to do or effect anything, influence. 
Syn. ἰσχύς, σθένος, κράτος, ῥώμη. 
δύνασθαι: 40 de able; δυνήσομαι, δεδύ- 
νημαι, ἐδυνήθην. H. 355 b, G. 517. 
δυνατός 3: able, powerful. ἐκ τῶν 





PROSE 183 


δυνατῶν, ‘as the best they could do,’ 
out of the possible chances, 42 11. 
δύο, δυοῖν: Zwo. 
δυσκολαίνειν : 20 be fretful, worrisome. 
δυσοίκητος 2: bad to dwell in. 
δύσφορος 2: hard to bear. 
δυσχωρία: rough ground, dangerous 
locality, 8 20, 28. ; 
δώδεκα : swelve. 
δωρεῖσθαι: Zo give, present, present 
with. 
δῶρον: gi/z. 


ἑάλωκα : ἁλῶναι. 

ἐᾶν: fo let or leave alone, permit; 
εἴῶν, ἘΠ. ΟΣ ΟΣ ΒΟ, Gr Wel by 1 Cy 
ovK ἐᾶτε, ‘ye forbid,’ 5 1, 52 11; 
cf ov φημι, ‘I deny.’ H. 1028. 

ἐάν (εἰ, dv): zf w. subjunctive; also 
ἄν, ἢν. 

ἔαρ, ἔαρος or ἦρος, τό, (ver): Spring. 

ἐαρινός 3: of Spring, vernal. 

ἑαυτόν, ἑαυτήν, ἑαυτό: himself, her- 
self, itself; often contracted αὑτόν, 
etc. Reflexive pron. The gen. as 
possessive has the attributive posi- 
tion, μετεπέμψατο τὴν ἑαυτοῦ θυγα- 
τέρα, ‘his (own) daughter,’ 1 16. 

ἕβδομος 3: 246 seventh; τὸ ἕβδομον, 
‘for the seventh time,’ 29 17. 

éyyvav: zo give as a pledge. 

— παρεγγυᾶν, ‘to pass the watch- 
word’ or ‘ word of command,’ 28 29. 

ἐγγύη : pledge, surety. 

ἐγγύς : adv. zear; ἐγγύτερον, 84 26. 

ἐγείρειν : 40 wake, rouse; ἔγερῶ, ἤγειρα, 
ἠγέρθην. 

— ἐξεγείρειν; ἐξηγέρθη ‘he awoke.’ 

ἔγνωκα, ἔγνων : γνῶναι. 

ἐγχεῖν impf. (ἐν, χυ-): 120 pour in; 
ἐγχέω ἴαϊ., ἐνέχεα, ἐνεχύθην. 





184 ATTIC 

ἐγχειρίδιον (xelp): dagger. 

ἐγώ: 7, ἔγωγε, ‘1 for my part; ’ ‘That 
I have,’ 49 19, cf. ἔμοιγε 22. 

ἔδαφος, -ovs, τό: base, bottom, ground. 

ἐδεστέον : one must eat. 

ἐδώδιμος 2: eatadle. 

ἔθηκα : θεῖναι. 

ἔθνος, -ous, τό: tribe, nation. 

el: if, whether ; εἴπερ, ‘if really,’ ‘that 
is if,’ 48 4; καὶ εἰ, ‘even if, neg. οὐδ᾽ 
el, μηδ᾽ εἰ, 82 18; εἰ καί, concessive, 
‘though,’ ‘if she λας done all this,’ 
514. Often interrogative, εἰ καιρὸς 
εἴη 8 16, 24 6. 

el: (1) εἶναι, (2) ἰέναι. 

εἰδέναι (ἰδεῖν); Zo know, οἶδα, ἴσμεν, 
εἰδώς, ἤδη, εἴσομαι. H. 491, G. 820, 
B. 259. Syn. γνῶναι, ἐπίστασθαι. 

εἶδον : ἰδεῖν, 

εἶδος, -ους, τό: appearance, looks. 

εἰκάζειν: fo make like to, liken, to 
conjecture, 21 τ. 

εἰκός, τό, (ἐοικέναι) : that which ts like, 
natural, probable, reasonable, right. 
Ady, εἰκότως. 

εἰλικρινής, -és: unmixed, pure, sheer. 

εἰμί : εἶναι. 

εἶμι : ἰέναι. 

εἶναι: Zo be; εἰμί encl., ἢ or ἣν, ἔσομαι. 
Η. 478-480, G. 806, B. 362. ‘To 
exist,’ 50 8. τῷ ὄντι, ‘in reality,’ 
‘in very truth,’ 39 18. τὰ ὄντα, 
‘what there is already,’ 42 25. 

— ἀπεῖναι, ‘to be absent,’ 33 24. 

— ἐνεῖναι, 62 10. 

— ἐξεῖναι, impers. ‘it is allowable,’ 
‘one is at liberty,’ const. τινί, inf. 
Agesilaus ‘may’ be pronounced 
brave unquestionably, 57 28. ἐξὸν 
αὐτῷ παρέντι, κτλ., ‘when he might 
have let them pass,’ e¢c., 57 29. 





PROSE 


— μετεῖναι, ‘to be among’; impers., 
πολέμου καὶ μάχης οὐ μετῆν αὐτῇ, 
‘of war and fighting she had no 
share,’ 21 18. 

— παρεῖναι, ‘to be on hand’ or ‘ pres- 
ent’; ἐν τῷ παρόντι, ‘at the present 
time,’ 21 1; impers. ‘there is an 


opportunity,’ const. τινί, inf.; παρὸν 


αὐτῷ χρῆσθαι, ‘when he might’ 
have availed himself, e/c., 56 3, 58 
19. 

— συνεῖναι, ‘to be together,’ 46 14; 
‘to associate with,’ 47 7. 

εἰπεῖν (ρεπ-, vocdre, vox, ἔπος) : to 
utter, state, say; εἶπον, imp. εἰπέ, 
aor. I εἶπα. Const. ὅτι, ws; inf. 
only in sense of ‘command,’ 54 24, 
25 1. Syn. ῥηθῆναι, φάναι, λέγειν, 
and, in comp. w. prep., ἀγορεύειν. 

— προειπεῖν, ‘to state beforehand,’ 
11 25; ‘to publish an order,’ 25 1. 

εἴπερ: if really, that is if. See el. 

εἴργασμαι : ἐργάζεσθαι. 

εἰρήνη (ῥηθῆναι) : a peace. 

εἰρῆσθαι: ῥηθῆναι. 

eis: info, to; prep. w.acc. H. 796, G. 
1207, B. 405. els τὸ ταχὺ μανθάνειν 
διαφέρων, superior to others ‘in 
learning quickly,’ 1 14. els δύο, 
‘two abreast,’ 24 1; sometimes also 
of the depth of a column, els δώ- 
dexa μυριάδας, ‘to the number of,’ 
‘about’ 120,000, 28 14. 

εἷς, ἕν, gen. ἑνός : one. See μία. 

εἴσομαι : εἰδέναι. 

εἱστίασα : ἑστιᾶν. 

εἰσφορά: a bringing in. 

εἴσω: 20 within, into, within. 

εἶτα: then, next, and so. 

εἴτε: εἴτε... εἴτε, whether... or. 

εἶχον : ἔχειν. 


ATTIC 


εἰωθέναι: Zo be wont, accustomed; 
εἴωθα, εἰώθειν. H. 369; 6. 537, 2; 
689. 

ἕκαστος 3: cach, every. 

ἑκάτερος 3: ether, each one, of two. 

ἑκατέρωθεν : from or on either side. 

ἑκατέρωσε: i” either or each direction. 

ἑκατόν: a hundred. 

ἔκδημος 2: away from home. 

ἐκδῦναι: 20 pass out of, ‘to take off,’ 
one’s own clothes. H. 500, 4 a. 

ἐκδῦσαι: 20 make pass out of, ‘to take 
off,’ another’s clothes, τινά τι. 

ἐκεῖ : (over) there. 

ἐκεῖθεν : thence. 

ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο: shat (there, 
yonder), he, she, that thing. ἐκεῖνο 
anticipates what follows (Cicero, 
illud), ‘this,’ 42 16. 

ἐκεῖσε: thither. 

ἐκεκράγειν : κέκρᾶγα. 

ἐκλέγειν : fo pick out. See συλλέγειν. 

ἐκπίομαι : see πιεῖν. 

ἐκπλαγῆναι : see πληγῆναι. 

ἐκτραχηλίζειν (τράχηλος) : of a horse, 
to throw over the head, 

ἑκών, -otora, (fex-): willing(ly). 

ἐλάττων, ἐλάχιστος : less, fewer, least, 
fewest. Ἡ. 254,4; G. 361,5; B. 136. 

ἐλαύνειν: Zo drive; ἐλῶ, jaca, ἐλή- 
Aaka, ἐλήλαμαι, ἠλάθην. For the 
future, H. 424; G. 665, 2; Β. 212, 1. 

— ἀπελαύνειν, ‘to ride back.’ 

— ἐξελαύνειν, ‘to drive out,’ ‘to march 
on’ from camp. 

— παρελαύνειν, ‘to ride along by.’ 

— περιελαύνειν, ‘to drive round.’ 

— προσελαύνειν, ‘to ride up to,’ 58 11. 

— συνελαύνειν, ‘to drive together.’ 

— ὑπελαύνειν, ‘to ride up,’ so as to 
meet one, 35 Io. 





PROSE 185 


ἔλαφος, 7: hind, roe. 

ἐλέγχειν: 20 cross-question, confute, 
convict, ἐλήλεγμαι. 

ἑλεῖν : 40 take, capture; εἷλον. 

Syn. αἱρεῖν, ἁλῶναι. 

ἐλελίζειν : Zo cry ἐλελεῦ, raise the battle 
shout. 

ἑλέσθαι: Zo take for oneself, choose, 
elect; εἱλόμην. Syn. αἱρεῖσθαι. 

— ἀφελέσθαι, ‘to deprive,’ 7 10. 
Const. H. 748 a, G. 1118, Β. 362 N. 

ἐλευθέριος 2 or 3: Like a free man, 
liberal; as epithet of Zeus, ‘the 
Liberator,’ 40 15. 

ἐλεύθερος 3: free. 

ἐλευθεροῦν : fo make free, liberate. 

ἐλθεῖν : 2Σ0 come, go; imp. ἐλθ΄, ἐλεύσο- 
μαι, ἐλήλυθα. Syn. ἔρχεσθαι, ἰέναι. 
With inf. 56 7, ‘word came’ that he 
must defend, eéc. 

— ἀπελθεῖν, to go away’ or ‘back,’ 
‘to come off,’ safely, 20 1ο. 

— διελθεῖν, ‘to go through,’ ‘to enu- 
merate,’ ‘relate.’ 

— εἰσελθεῖν, ‘to come in,’ ‘ enter.’ 

— ἐξελθεῖν, ‘to come out.’ 

— κατελθεῖν, ‘to come down’; ‘to 
return from exile,’ 60 13. 

— παρελθεῖν, ‘to go by’; τὰ maped- 
θόντα, ‘in the past,’ 27 3. 

— περιελθεῖν, ‘to come’ or ‘go 
round,’ of the revolving seasons or 
cycle of the year, 28 13. 

— προσελθεῖν, ‘to come near’ or ‘up 
to.’ 

ἑλιγμός (ἑλίττειν) : a rolling, turn- 
ing round, roundabout way, 8 16. 

ἑλίττειν : fo wind, roll round, εἵλιττον. 
H. 359; G. 537, 2; B. 172, 2; 

— ἐξελίττειν, τὴν φάλαγγα, ‘to de- 
ploy,’ 57 24. 





186 ATTIC 

ἕλκειν: 29 draw, drag; ἕλξω, εἵλκυσα, 
εἵλκυσμαι, εἱλκύσθην. See ἑλίττειν. 

— συνέλκειν, ‘to draw together,’ 58 25. 

ἐλπίζειν : 40 hope. 

ἐλπίς, -ίδος, ἡ : hope. 

ἐμαυτόν, ἐμαυτήν : myself. 

ἔμβαμμα, -ατος, τό, (βάπτειν) : sof, 
soup, 8 4. 

ἐμβλέπειν : see βλέπειν. 

ἐμέ: me; ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, accented; ἔμοιγε, 
49 22, cf. ἔγωγε. Enclitic forms 
are μέ, μοῦ, pol. 

ἐμός 3: my, mine. 

ἐμπεδοῦν : 2o make firm, keep firmly. 

ἐμπλησθῆναι : see πιμπλάναι. 

ἐμποδών: before the feet, in one’s way. 
ἐμποδών τινί τινος εἶναι, ‘to hinder 
one from something,’ 27 17. 

ἔμπροσθεν : 272 front, before. 

ἐμφανής, -ἐς : clear, conspicuous. 

ἐμφανίζειν : Zo show or prove conspicu- 
ously, 54 1. 

ἐν: in, among; prep. w. dat. ὅσον ἐν 
ἐμοί, ‘as far as in me lies,’ 30 24. 
ἐν σοὶ πάντα ἐστίν, ‘everything 
depends on thee,’ 42 21. 

ἐναντίος 3: opposite, contrary; Tobv- 
αντίον, ‘on the contrary’; οἱ évay- 
τίοι, ‘the enemy.’ ἐναντία πρᾶξαί 
τινι, ‘to adopt ἃ hostile course 
toward one,’ 32 26. 

ἐνδεής, -és: wanting in, in need of. 

ἔνδηλος 2: clear, evident. 

ἔνδοθεν: from within, from the house. 

ἔνδον : within, indoors. 

ἐνδῦναι: 20 pass in or under, ‘to put 
on,’ one’s own clothes, H. 500, 4 ἃ. 

ἐνδῦσαι: Zo make pass in or under, 
‘to put on,’ another’s clothes, τινά τί. 

ἐνέγκασθαι : Σὺ bear or bring for one- 
self. Syn. φέρεσθαι, οἴσεσθαι fut. 





PROSE 


ὅσα ἠνέγκω, ‘all that you brought 
as your portion,’ 42 14. 

— ἐξενέγκασθαι, ‘to earn’ or ‘ win,’ as 
a prize, 61 14. 

ἐνεγκεῖν : 20 bear, bring; ἤνεγκον, in 
prose (for indicative) preferably 
ἤνεγκα, ἐνήνοχα, ἐνήνεγμαι, ἠνέχθην. 

Syn. φέρειν, οἴσειν future. 

— ἀπενεγκεῖν, ‘to bring back,’ 18 20. 

-- εἰσενεγκεῖν; εἰσενεχθῆναι ‘to be 
brought in,’ 44 29. 

— προσενεγκεῖν, προσενέγκαι, ‘to 
bring toward,’ ‘near to,’ 47 18; 
προσενεχθῆναι, to be brought in,’ 
58 10; ‘to be related,’ ‘behave 
toward’ one, w. ptcp. 19 4. 

— συνενεγκεῖν, ‘to prove advanta- 
geous,’ 32 27. 

ἐνέδυν, ἐνέδυσα : ἐνδῦναι, ἐνδῦσαι. 

ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν: for the sake of, as 
regards, τινός, 

ἐνεκάλουν : see καλεῖν. 

ἐνεργός 2: at work, effective or pro- 
ductive, 38 2, 

ἐνετύγχανον : see τυχεῖν. 

ἔνθα: where; ἔνθα δή, ‘thereupon.’ 
Η. 284. 

ἐνθάδε: there, thither. 

ἔνθεν : whence, thence. ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν 
τοῦ τείχους, ‘on either side of the 
wall,’ 2.6. on the two sides of the 
city parted by the river, 23 6. 

ἐνθένδε : thence. ' 

ἔνθεος 2: full of the god, possessed, in- 
spired. 

ἐνθουσιᾶν (ἔνθεος) : 20 be inspired. 

ἐνθυμεῖσθαι: to dear in mind, lay to 
heart, τινός. Dep. pass., H. 497. 

ἐνθύμημα, -ατος, τό: a thought, senti- 
ment. 

ἐνιαύσιος 3: of or lasting a year. 





; 
4 
; 


ATTIC 


ἐνιαυτός : year. 

ἔνιοι 3: some. 

ἐννοεῖν : see νοεῖν. 

ἐνταῦθα : here, there, thereupon. 

ἐντεῦθεν : thence, thereupon. 

ἔντιμος 2: 27 honor, prized. 

ἔντριψις, -ews, 7: a rubbing in, 2 6. 

ἐξ (before consonants ἐκ): out of, 
Jrom ; prep. w. gen. ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν, 
‘as the best they could do,’ 42 11. 
ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦ καὶ δικαίου, ‘by fair 
and rightful means,’ 42 26. ἐξ οὐκ 
ὄντων, ‘after being naught,’ ‘ when 
non-existent before,’ 50 8. 
δίου, ‘from infancy,’ 51 14. 
φανεροῦ ‘in plain sight,’ 56 22. 

ἕξ: six. 

ἑξακισχίλιοι 3: six chousand. 

ἑξακόσιοι 3: six hundred. 

ἐξαπατᾶν (ἀπάτη) : 20 deceive. 

ἐξέπλησα : see πιμπλάναι. 

ἔξεστι, ἐξῇ : see εἶναι. 

ἐξετάζειν : to examine well, scrutinize. 

ἐξηγέρθην : see ἐγείρειν. 

ἑξήκοντα : sixty. 

ἐξῃρημένος : see αἱρεῖσθαι. 

ἐξήχθην : see ἀγαγεῖν. 

ἐξικέσθαι: Zo arrive at the end of a 
journey, veach the mark, 35 29. See 
ἀφικέσθαι. 

ἐξιλασάμην : see ἱλάσκεσθαι. 

ἕξις, -εως, ἡ, (ἔχειν) : a having, habit 
of body, condition, 40 26. 

ἐξομοιοῦσθαι : see ὁμοιοῦν. 

ἐξόν : see εἶναι. 

ἐξυφαίνεσθαι : see ὑφαίνειν. 

ἔξω : without, on the outside. 

ἔξωθεν : from without. 

- ἐοικέναι (ρικ-): fo be like; ἔοικα, 

εἰκώς, ἐῴκη H. 358 ἃ. ὡς ἐοίκασιν, 

‘as appears likely,’ 42 11, H. 944 8. 


ἐκ παι- 
ἐκ τοῦ 





ἑορτή: festival, holiday. 

ἐπαινεῖν (ἐπί) impf,: 20 commend, 
praise; ἐπαινέσω or ἐπαινέσομαι, 
ἐπήνεσα, ἐπήνεκα, ἐπῃνέθην. 

— συνεπαινεῖν, ‘to join in approving,’ 

ἐπᾶρθείς : see αἴρειν. 

ἐπεί: after, since; ἐπειδή, the same 
strengthened. 

ἐπειδάν (ἐπειδή, dv) : after, w. subjunc. 

ἐπείπερ: since (really), seeing that, 
17 το, 22 18. 

ἐπεισπίπτειν : see πεσεῖν. 

ἔπειτα (ἐπί, εἶτα) : thereafter, there- 
upon, again, in the next place. 

ἐπελελήσμην : ἐπιλαθέσθαι. 

ἐπεμνήσθην : see μνησθῆναι. 

ἐπερέσθαι : see ἐρέσθαι. 

ἕπεσθαι (σεπ-, 5671], socius): to fol- 
low , εἱπόμην, ἕψομαι; the aor. only 
in comp., ἐπισπέσθαι. 

— ἐφέπεσθαι, ‘to follow up,’ 24 23. 

ἐπεστησάμην : see ἵστασθαι. 

ἐπηγαλλόμην : see ἀγάλλεσθαι. 

ἐπηρεάζειν : Σὼ threaten overbearingly. 

ἐπηρόμην : see ἐρέσθαι. 

ἐπί: on, upon, prep, w. gen., dat., 

τ andacc. H. 799, G. 1210, B. 408. ἐφ᾽ 
ἵππου, ‘on horseback,’ 2 23. τὴν 
ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνος, ‘the road to Baby- 
lon,’ 21 25. 
‘within,’ ‘in the course of’ his own 
reign, 29 17. ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, ‘in our 
time,’ 56 26. 

ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ, ‘with a view to 

personal advantage,’ 27 14. ὁπόσα 
ἐπ’ ἀνδρὶ εὐδαίμονι νομίζεται, what 
is customary ‘over,’ ‘at the funeral 
of, a fortunate man, 88 19. ἐφ᾽ ols 
τὸ ὄνομά ἐστι, ‘to whom the name 
is applied,’ 39 19. ἐπὶ τῷ βίῳ, ‘in’ 
‘in the course of’ one’s life, 51 12. 


ἐπὶ τῆς αὑτοῦ ἀρχῆς, 





188 ATTIC 


τὸ ἐπὶ σέ, "5 far as you are con- 

cerned,’ 11 11. ἐπὶ πολύ, ‘to a 
great distance,’ 84 25. 

ἐπιβουλή : hostile design, plot. 

ἐπιδεής, -és: 17: want of. 

ἐπιθυμεῖν (Gvuds) impf.: Zo set one’s 
heart upon, to desire, τινός. 
τὸ ἐπιθυμῆσαι, ‘the conceiving of 
this desire,’ 53 11. 

ἐπικαίριος 2 (καιρός) : iw fit time or 
place, important; οἱ ἐπικαίριοι, ‘ the 
officers,’ 22 ro. 

ἐπιλαθέσθαι (λαθεῖν) : 20 forget; ἐπι- 
λήσομαι, ἐπιλέλησμαι, ἐπιλανθά- 
vowat. Past-perfect, 5 8, 

ἐπιμέλεια : care. 

ἐπιμελεῖσθαι or ἐπιμέλεσθαι: 20 care 
for, watch over carefully, τινός , 
ἐπιμελήσομαι, ἐπεμελήθην. : 

ἐπιμέλημα, -ατος, τό: thing cared for, 
ὦ care. 

ἐπιμελητέον : one must take care. 

émlopkos 2 (ὅρκος) : swearing falsely, 
forsworn. 

ἐπιοῦσα : next, ensuing, day or night: 
see ἰέναι. 

ἐπιπόλαιος 2: on the surface, promti- 
nent, 48 7. 

ἐπίστασθαι (στα-, στῆναι) : to under- 
stand, know how to do something; 
ἠπιστάμην, ἐπιστήσομαι, ἠπιστήθην. 
H. 487, 6. 720, 742, B. 200 N. 

ἐπιστάτης : overseer, superintendent. 

ἐπιστατητέον : one must oversee. 

ἐπιστήμη : special knowledge, skill. 

ἐπιστήμων, -ov: skilled in, τινός. 

ἐπιστῆσαι: see ἱστάναι. 

ἐπιτήδειος 3: suitable, necessary; τὰ 
ἐπιτήδεια, “ provisions.’ 

ἐπίχαρις, --ἰ (xdpis): gracious, accept- 
able ; ἐπιχαριτώτερος, -ὦτατος 45 6. 


τοῦτο 





PROSE. 


ἐπιχειρεῖν impf.: 20 put one’s hand to, 
attempt, undertake. 

ἐπιχώριος 3 or 2 (x wpa): in or of the 
country; τὰ ἐπιχώρια, of the Per- 
sian national discipline, 18 2. 

ἔπος, -ovs, τό, (εἰπεῖν) : utterance, 
word; plur. ἔπη, verses, poetry, epic 
or other. 

ἑπτά : seven. 

ἐρᾶν: zo be in love, to love, τινός ; 
ἠράσθην, ἐρασθῆναι, ‘to become 
enamored of,’ 68 8. 

Syn. φιλεῖν, στέργειν, ἀγαπᾶν. 

ἐργάζεσθαι : Zo work, to do or perform ; 
ἐργάσομαι, εἰργασάμην, εἴργασμαι 
mid. or p., εἰργάσθην p. H. 359; 
G. 537, 2; B. 172, 2. εὖ εἰργασμένα, 
‘well wrought’ or ‘ constructed,’ 47 
27. Syn. δρᾶν, ποιεῖν, πράττειν. 

-- ἀπεργάζεσθαι, ‘ to work out,’ ‘effect.’ 

— κατεργάζεσθαι; τὸ κατεργάσασθαι, 
‘the achieving,’ 62 9. 

ἐργαστέον : one must do or perform. 

ἔργον (fepy-, work, γεωργός) : work, 
deed. ἐμὸν ἔργον, ‘my business,’ 
‘my part,’ 42 21. 

ἐρέσθαι: 40 ask, inguire; ἠρόμην. 

Syn. ἐρωτᾶν. 

— ἐπερέσθαι, ‘to put a question,’ 3 22. 

ἐρημία: solitude, dearth or absence of. 

ἔρημος 2: lone, deserted, unoccupied. 

ἔρια, τά, (fep-, wool, vellus) : wool. 

ἑρμηνεύς, -έως, ὁ, (“Epuis): interpreter. 

ἐρρωμένος (ἐρρῶσθαι, ῥωννύναι) : in 
full strength or health, stout, vig- 
orous ; ἐρρωμενέστερα, 55 21. Ady. 
ἐρρωμένως, 57 27. 

ἐρυθρός 3: ved. 

ἔρυμα, -ατος, τό: fence, fortification, 
bulwark. 

ἔρχεσθαι: zo come; impf. only, and 


ee 


ATTIC 


defective, H. 539 2a. See 140 5 
note. Syn. ἐλθεῖν, ἰέναι. 

— παρέρχεσθαι, ‘ to pass along,’ 35 15. 

— προςέρχεσθαι, ‘to come besides,’ 
‘come on,’ 16 14, 34 6. 

ἐρωτᾶν : 20 ask questions, inquire, in- 
terrogate. Syn. ἐῤέσθαι. 

— διερωτᾶν, ‘to ask for a decision,’ 
past-imperfect, 6 7. 

— ἔπερωτᾶν, ‘to put questions,’ ‘ask,’ 
19 23, 6 Io. 

ἔσει: εἶναι. 

ἐσθής, -ἢτος, ἡ, (ρεσ-, wear, vestis, 
ἀμφιεννύναι) : dress, clothing. 

ἐσθίειν (ἐδ-, eat, fret, edere, ésurire): 
to eat, ἔδομαι (H. 427, G. 667, B. 
216), ἐδήδοκα, ἐδήδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην. 

Syn. φαγεῖν. 

ἑσπέρα (vesper): evening, the West. 

ἔστε: until, 44 14, 58 17. 

ἕστηκα : στῆναι. 

ἔστησα : ἱστάναι. 

ἑστία (ρεσ-, Vesta, ἄστυ) : hearth; 
Ἑστία, Hestia, goddess of the 
hearth-fire, 15 17. 

ἑστιᾶν : 20 entertain, εἱστίᾶσα, εἰστί- 
kas ΕἸ .456; Ὁ. 537, 2; B. 172, 2. 

ἑστιᾶσθαι: fo feast. 

ἔσχατος 3: the farthest, extreme. 

ἕτερος 3: other or one of two; θἄτερον, 
τὸ ἕτερον. 

ἔτι: still, yet, further. ἔτι καὶ νῦν, 
‘even to this day,’ 1 5. 

ἔτος, -ous, τό, (Feros, vetus): year. 

εὖ: well, Syn. καλῶς. 

εὐγώνιος 2: well-cornered, regular in 
line and angle. 

εὐδαιμονεῖν impf.: 20 be dlest, happy. 

εὐδαιμονία: happiness. 

εὐδαίμων, -ov: with a good genius, 
happy ; adv. εὐδαιμονέστατα, 19 24. 





PROSE 189 


εὔδηλος 2: perfectly evident. 

εὐδόκιμος 2: of good repute, popular, 
distinguished. 

εὐεργετεῖν impf.: 20 be a benefactor, 
to benefit, do good to. 

εὐθέως : zmmediately. 

εὐθύ: straight toward, τινός. 

εὐθυμία: cheerfulness. 

εὐθύς, -εἶα, -ὖ: straight, direct. τὸ 
kar εὐθύ, ‘straight ahead,’ 48 6. 

εὐθύς : directly, forthwith. 

εὐκλεής, -és, (κλέος) : of good report, 
famous, glorious. 

εὔκλεια : renown, glory. 

εὐμενής, -€s: favoring, gracious. 

εὔνους, -ovv: well-minded, well-dis- 
posed ; plur. εὖνοι, H. 158 b; G. 203, 
2; B. 91, 3. Comparison, H. 251 Ὁ; 
G. 353, B. 133. 

εὐόφθαλμος 2: with beautiful eyes. 

εὐπειθής, -és: obedient, docile. 

εὑρεῖν: Zo find, imp. εὑρέ, εὑρήσω, 
ηὕρηκα, ηὕρημαι, ηὑρέθην, εὑρίσκω. 

εὕρημα, -ατος, τό: that which ts found, 
an invention, 60 24. 

εὐσέβεια : piety. 

εὐσεβής, -és: pious. Adv. εὐσεβῶς. 

εὔστοχος 2: aiming well. Adv. εὐὖ- 
στόχως, ‘with good aim,’ 9 17. 

εὐτελής, -és, (τελεῖν) : easily paid for, 
cheap, inexpensive. 

εὐτυχία (τύχη) : good luck, success. 

εὐφραίνειν (φρήν) : Zo make cheerful 
or happy, to gladden. 

εὐφραίνεσθαι: fo be glad, rejoice; 
ηὐφράνθην, H. 498. 

εὐφροσύνη : mirth, festive time, plur. 
2117. A poetic word. 

εὔχεσθαι : Zo pray, with vows. 

— ἐπεύχεσθαι, ‘to add a prayer,’ 
30 I, 





190 ATTIC 

— προσεύχεσθαι, ‘to offer up vows,’ 
‘address one’s prayers to,’ 15 17, 25. 

εὐχή: Prayer, vow. 

εὐώνυμος 2 (ὄνομα) : of good name, 
well-omened, on the left hand, left. 

εὐωχεῖν impf.: 20 entertain, feast one. 

εὐωχεῖσθαι: Zo feast on, cat in plenty, 
41; εὐωχήθην. 

εὐωχία: feasting, good cheer. 

ἐφεῖναι: 20 let go upon, let loose, per- 
mit, Til; ἐφῆκα, ἐφεῖμεν, ἐφεῖκα, 
ἐφεῖμαι, ἐφείθην. See ἱέναι. 

ἐφέπεσθαι : see ἕπεσθαι. 

ἐφέστηκα : see στῆναι. 

ἔφηβος (ἥβη) : a youth 16 or 17 years 
old. According to Xenophon’s ac- 
count of the Persian discipline, men 
were ἔφηβοι until the age of 26 or 
27, during ten years between the 
παῖδες and the τέλειοι ἄνδρες. 

ἐφῆκα : ἐφεῖναι. 

ἔφην : φάναι. 

ἐφήσθην:: see ἥδεσθαι. 

ἐφορεῖον: 216 court of the Ephors at 
Sparta, 56 9. 

ἔφορος (ἐπί, ὁρᾶν) : overseer, guar- 
dian; plur. the Spartan ‘ Zphors,’ 
‘the Five,’ cf 56 το. 

ἔχειν: fo have in hand, hold, keep; 
εἶχον. See σχεῖν. Often intrans., 
and so reg. w. adv., μετρίως ἔχειν, 
‘to be moderate,’ 5 26, 28 1, 2 f. . οὐκ 
εἶχε συλλέγειν θηρία, ‘was unable’ 
to collect animals, 8 8, 25 20, 50 28; 
‘thus oftenest w. vb. of saying, 22 20. 
“Τὸ have to wife,’ 15 8. ἱματίων 
ὧν εἶχε, which ‘ he wore,’ 39 4, 6. 

— ἀντέχειν, ‘to resist’; could not 
‘help’ gratifying him, 7 23. 

— ἀπέχειν, ‘to be distant from,’ τινός ; 
ὅσον στάδιον, 57 10, 





PROSE 


— διέχειν, ‘to be apart,’ separated by 
an interval, 35 21. 
— κατέχειν, ‘to hold down,’ ‘ occupy,’ 
16 1; ‘control,’ 49 8; λόγοι Karé- 
Xovow ws, ‘prevail,’ to the effect 

that, δε. 63 1. 

— μετέχειν, ‘to participate,’ ‘have a 
share,’ τινός, 21 17. . ; 

— παρέχειν, ‘to have at hand,’ ‘fur- 
‘nish,’ ‘render,’ 55 14. 

— συνέχειν, ‘to hold’ or ‘keep to- 
gether,’ 32 7. 

— ὑπερέχειν, ‘ to be above,’ τοῦ ὕδατος, 
22 26. 

ἔχεσθαι: 20 hold on by, cling to, τινός; 
to be the next in a series, or in line, 
34 15, 57 τό. 

— ἀνέχεσθαι, ἀνασχέσθαι, ‘to hold 
out,’‘ to endure’ something oppres- 
sive or offensive; ἠνειχόμην, H. 
361 a, G. 544, B. 175, I n. οὐκ 
ἠνέσχετο, ‘he could not stand it,’ 
87 8,516. Syn. ὑπομένειν, ὑποφέρειν, 

- παρέχεσθαι; παράσχοιτ᾽ ἄν, ‘might 
be expected to produce,’ ze. bring to 
expression on the part of the persons 
engaged, 58 6. 

ἐχθρός 3: hated or hating, an enemy. 

ἐωθούμην : ὠθεῖσθαι. 

ἕως, ἕω, ἡ : dawn, the East, H. 161, 
Ὁ. 199, B. 92, 3. 

ἕως :. while, as long as, until. 


Z. 


Levyvivar ({vy-, yoke, iugum, iungere, 
ζυγόν) : ἔζευξα, ἔζευγμαι, ἐζύγην. 

— συζευγνύναι, ‘to yoke’ or ‘join © 
together,’ as man and wife, 43 27. 
ζεῦγος, -ovs, τό: a yoke or team of 

. animals, any couple or pair, 





ATTIC 


Ζεύς (Acc, Acevs, Tuesday, divus, diés, 
luppiter): Zeus, the supreme god; 
Διός, Act, Δία, Zed. 

ζημία: 2055, damage, a penalty. 

ζημιοῦν : fo cause loss, to fine or punish, 

tav® to live; ἔζη, 21 8. H. 412, 
G. 496, B. 199, 3. 

Syn. βιῶναι, διαιτᾶσθαι. 

ζητεῖν impf.: Zo seek. 

ζωγράφος: one who paints living 
things, a painter. 

{gov (ζῆν) : animal. 


ΤΙ 

ἤ: or, than. 

I. q: interrogative particle. H. 1015, 
G. 1603. ἢ καὶ δίδως, ‘do you 
really (καί) offer?’ 4 5. 

2.4: really, truly; intensive particle. 
ἢ μήν, used in declarations under 
oath, 18 12. H. 1037, 9. 

Wo, ἤειν, ἤεσαν : ἰέναι. 

ἥβη: youthful prime, youth At 
Sparta, up to the age of 18, so that 
τὰ δέκα ἀφ᾽ ἥβης means ‘the men 
of 28, 54 23. 

ἤγαγον : ἀγαγεῖν. 

ἡγεῖσθαι: Zo go before, lead the way, 
be guide or leader, to hold as an 
opinion, think, believe in. 

Syn. νομίζειν, οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν. 

- διηγεῖσθαι, ‘to narrate,’ ‘ relate.’ 

— ἐξηγεῖσθαι, ‘to explain,’ 46 16. 

— προηγεῖσθαι, ‘to go first to lead 
the way,’ 15 25. 

— ὑφηγεῖσθαι, ‘to go just before.’ 
ἡγεμών, -ovos, ὁ, ἡ, (ἡγεῖσθαι) : guide, 
leader. ‘yy. μέλιττα, ‘queen bee.’ 

dev, ἤδη : εἰδέναι. 

ἥδεσθαι (σραδ-, sweet, sudvis, ἡδύς, 





PROSE IQI 
ἡδονή) : to be delighted, to take pleas- 
ure, enjoy; ἥσθην, ἡσθήσομαι. 

— ἐφήδεσθαι; οὐκ ἐφησθεὶς φανερὸς 
ἐγένετο, ‘was not seen to rejoice 
thereat,’ 59 19. 

— συνήδεσθαι, ‘to rejoice with,’ 38 15. 

ἡδέως : with zest or pleasure, gladly ; 
ἥδιστα, 46 17. 

ἤδη: dy this time, already. πολλοὺς 
ἤδη, ‘many ere now,’ 8 24. Thus 
often w. gnomic aor., 32 25; cf ἤδη 
ποτέ 49 23, πώποτε 519. ‘Now,’ 
‘at once,’ 21 5. ‘ Without going 
farther’, 48 4. 

ἡδίων, ἥδιστος : ἡδύς, 

ἦδον : ἄδειν. 

ἡδονή : pleasure. 

ἡδυπαθεῖν impf.: 20 be given to good 
living, to be dainty or luxurious. 

dvs, ἡδεῖα, ἡδύ, (ἥδεσθαι) : sweet, 
pleasant, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος. 

ἥκειν: 20 come, to have or be come; 
ἥξω. H. 827, G, 1256, B. 521 N. 

— προσήκειν, ‘to have arrived at,’ 
‘to belong’ or ‘pertain,’ ‘ be related 
to’; of προσήκοντες, ‘ their relatives,’ 
25 15. 
volves upon him,’ 48 25; and so 
often impersonally, τινί. 

ἦλθον : ἐλθεῖν. 

ἠλίθιος 3: sz/ly. 

ἡλικία: age, time of life. 

ἡλικιώτης : fellow, mate. 

ἡλιξ, ἥλικος, ὁ, ἡ: of the same age, 
mate, comrade. 

ἥλιος: the sun; Ἥλιος, Helios, the 
sun-god, 29 27. 

ἡματωμένος : αἱματοῦν. 

ἡμεῖς : we; ἡμῶν, ἡμῖν, ἡμᾶς. 

ἡμέρα: day. 

ἥμερος 2: fame. 


τὰ προσήκοντα, ‘what de- 





192 ATTIC 

ἥμισυς, -εια, -v, (s2mi-, ἡμίονος) : half. 

ἠμφίεσα : ἀμφιεννύναι. 

ἤν: ἐάν. 

ἠνεγκάμην : ἐνέγκασθαι. 

ἠνεσχόμην : see ἔχεσθαι. 

ἡνίκα : when. 

ἡνίοχος : holding the reins, driver. 

ἤπειρος, 7: continent, mainland. 

ἥπερ: ὅσπερ. 

ἠρξάμην : ἄρχειν. 

ἥρως, -wos, 6: ero, inferior local 
deity. H. 197, G. 243, B. 113. 

ἦσθα: εἶναι. 

ἥσθην : ἥδεσθαι. 

ἡσυχία : stil/ness, quiet, peace. ἡσυχίαν 
ἔχειν, ‘to keep quiet,’ mind one’s 
business, 20 4. 

ἥττων, ἧττον: inferior, less. 


254, 2; G. 361, 2; B. 136. 


H. 


Θ. 


θάλαττα: sea. 
θάλπος, -ους, τό: heat, warmth ; plur. 
‘extremes of heat,’ 43 13. 
θάνατος : death. 
θανατοῦν: 20 put to death; fut. mid. 
as pass., 25 4. H. 496, G. 1248. 
θάπτειν: to bury; θάψω, ἔθαψα, ré- 
θαμμαι, ἐτάφην. 
θαρρεῖν impf.: 0 be of good courage, 
be not afraid. 
Oarepov: τὸ ἕτερον. 
θάττων, θᾶττον: ταχύς. 
θαυμάζειν: 20 wonder, marvel at, be 
surprised. 
θεᾶσθαι: fo view as a spectacle, see, 
behold. Syn. ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν, βλέπειν. 
— καταθεᾶσθαι, ‘to look down upon,’ 
_ ‘contemplate,’ aor. 22 11. 
θεῖν ἱπιρῇ, : 20 run; θεύσομαι. 
Syn. τρέχειν, δραμεῖν. 





PROSE 


— ἐκθεῖν, ‘to run out,’ 24 20. 

θεῖναι (θε-, do, condere, θησαυρός) : to 
put, place; θήσω, ἔθηκα, ἔθεμεν, 
τέθεικα, ἐτέθην, τίθημι. 

— ἀναθεῖναι, ‘to put up.’ 

— διαθεῖναι, ‘to dispose’ insome way, 
πρός τινα, ‘toward one’; passive 
45 12, where, if a completed and 
not a continued action were meant, 
διάκεινται would be the word. 

— ἐπιθεῖναι, ‘to place upon,’ ‘ impose,’ 
a penalty 52 11. 

— καταθεῖναι, ‘to put’ or ‘ pay down,’ 
‘deposit,’ 42 14. 

— συνθεῖναι, ‘to put’ or ‘join to- 
gether,’ 43 8. ; 

θέσθαι: “ put or place for oneself. 

— συνθέσθαι, ‘to make a covenant,’ 
27 21, 545; ‘to engage,’ 40 21. 

θεῖος : uncle. 

θεῖος 3: of a god or gods, divine. τὸ 
θεῖον, ‘the divine Being,’ 33 17; 
‘religion,’ 58 15. 

θέλειν : ἐθέλειν. 

θεός, ὁ, ἡ : god, goddess. 

θεράπαινα: maid servant. 

θεραπεύειν : 2Σ0 be an attendant, to wait 
on, serve, court, to heal, restore to 
health, 45 6; ‘to honor,’ one’s 
parents 52 10. 

θεραπευτής : attendant, servant. 

θεράπων, -ovros, ὁ: servant. 

θέρος, -ovs, τό: summer. 

θῆλυς, -εια, -v: female. 

θήρ, θηρός, 6: wild beast, wild animal. 

Onpa: chase, hunt. 

θηρᾶν: 20 hunt, take in the chase. 

θήρειος 2: of wild animals or game. 

θηρίον : deast. 

θησαυρός: ¢reasure, treasure-house. 


θῆτε: θεῖναι. 


΄ 





ATTIC 


θιγεῖν (dig, dough, fimgere): £0 touch, 


handle, τινός, θίξομαι, θιγγάνω. 
Syn. ἅπτεσθαι. 
θνήσκειν : see ἀποθανεῖν. 
θνητός 3: Liable to death, mortal. 
θοινάζειν : fo feast. 
θόρυβος: zoise, clamor, disturbance, 


24 19; ‘murmur,’ 35 13. 

θρασύς, -eta, -b: bold, audacious. 

θρασύτης, -τος, 7: doldness, rash- 
ness. 

Opavev: fo break in pieces, break 
down, θραύσω, ἔθραυσα, TéOpau(c)- 
pat, ἐθραύσθην. Rare in prose. 

— συνθραύειν; συντεθραυσμένα, " shiv- 
ered ’ lances, 58 23. 

θρέψαξ: τρέφειν. 

θρύπτειν : fo break down, to weaken, 
enervate,; θρύψω, τέθρυμμαι. 

— διαθρύπτειν, ‘to crush,’ 58 22; ‘to 
spoil,’ ‘make vain,’ 20 13. 

θυγάτηρ, -τρός, 7: daughter. H. 189, 
G. 274, B. 105. 

θύειν : 20 sacrifice. 

- ἀποθύειν, ‘to offer up,’ 55 16. 

θυμοειδής, -és: high-spirited. 

θύρα (door, foris): door, gate. 

θυραυλεῖν impf.: 70 live out of doors. 

θυσία: sacrifice. 


θώραξ, -akos, ὁ: 


cutrass, breastplate. 


I. 

ἐᾶσϑαι: to heal, cure ; ἰάσάμην, ἰάθην, 
H. 499. 

tarpés: physician. 

ἰδεῖν (ειδ-, wit, witness, vidére, εἰδέναι, 
εἶδος) : 20 see; εἶδον, ἰδέ. Syn. ὁρᾶν, 
ὀφθῆναι, βλέπειν, θεᾶσθαι. 

— προιδεῖν, ‘to see before’ or ‘ be- 
forehand,’ 36 6. 

ATTIC PROSE— 13 





PROSE 193 

— προσιδεῖν, ‘to look upon,’ 88 11. 

ἴδιος 3: peculiar, private, one’s own. 

ἰδιώτης: one in a private station, an 
individual, 29 10; ‘unprofessional,’ 
not a sophist 62 15. 

iSpotv: fo sweat, 84 3, 39 11. 

ἱδρώς, -ὥτος, 6: swear. 

ἰέναι: 40 go; ἦα, few, εἶμι fut. 
H. 477, G. 808, B. 261. 

Syn. ἐλθεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι. 

— - ἀπιέναι, ‘to go away’ or ‘back.’ 

— εἰσιέναι, ‘to go into,’ ‘enter.’ 

— ἐξιέναι, ‘to go out’ or‘ forth.’ 

— — ἀντεξιέναι, ‘to come forth to 
meet’ one in battle, 55 9. 

— — συνεξιέναι, ‘to go out together.’ 

— ἐπιέναι, ‘to ensue’; ἡ ἐπιοῦσα wet 
or ἡμέρα, ‘the next,’ 16 27; ‘to in- 
vade,’ 88 13. 

— κατιέναι, ‘to go down,’ 60 17. 

— παριέναι, ‘to go by,’ ‘to surpass.’ 

— προιέναι, ‘to advance.’ 

— προσιέναι, ‘to go’ or ‘come to,’ 
‘to approach,’ ‘come up.’ 

-- συνιέναι, ‘to come 
‘meet,’ 56 27. 

ἱέναι: fo let go, send; ἴημι, ow. Ἡ. 
476, G. 810, B. 260. For aor. and 
perf. see compounds ἀφεῖναι, efc. 

ἱερεῖον : victim, sacrifice. 

ἱερός 3: sacred; ἱερά, sacrifices, rites. 

ἵεσθαι: Zo send oneself, hasten, rush. 

— ὑφίεσθαι, ‘to yield,’ ‘give up,’ τινός, 
48 20; ‘to relax,’ 59 9. 

ἱκανός 3 (ἀφικέσθαι) : sufficient, able, 
competent. Adv. ἱκανῶς. 

ἱκετεύειν : 20 come as an ἱκέτης, to sup- 
plicate, beseech. 

ἱκέτης (ἀφικέσθαι) : suppliant. 

ἱλάσκεσθαι (Hews) : 40 propitiate; 
ἱλάσομαι, ἱλασάμην, ἱλάσθην. 


together,’ 





194 ATTIC” 
— ἐξιλάσκεσθαι, ‘to propitiate com- 
pletely,’ aor. 19 15. 
ἵλεως, των: propitious. 

306, B. 119. 
ἱμάτιον: an outer garment, mantle; 
plur., clothes, 39 4. 

tva: where, in order that. 

ἱππάσιμος 3: fit for riding. 

ἱππεύειν: 20 be a horseman, to ride. 

ἱππεύς, -έως, 6: horseman. 

ἱππικός 3: of a horse or horses, eques- 
trian, 42 1; ἡ ἱππική, sc. τέχνη, 
horsemanship, 8 4; ἱππικόν, “ἃ 
cavalry force,’ 27 10. 

ἱππόδρομος : race course, hippodrome. 

ἵππος : horse. 

Vodou: εἰδέναι. 

ἰσηγορία (ἀγορεύειν) : egual freedom 
of speech, equality, 

ἴσϑι: (1) εἶναι, (2) εἰδέναι. 

ἰσόμαχος 2: egual in the fight. 

ἰσοπληθής, -és: egual in numbers. 

ἴσος 3: equal. ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου, * the same 
as before,’ 115. δύ ἴσον, ‘at equal 
distances apart,’ 38 22. 

tows: probably, perhaps. 

ἱστάναι: Zo set, station; στήσω, 
ἔστησα, ἐστάθην. See στῆναι. 

— ἀνιστάναι, ‘to set up,’ 16 24. 

— καθιστάναι, ‘to establish,’ ‘ap- 
point,’ 27 5; ‘to institute,’ 53 17; 
‘to put in camp,’ ‘plant,’ 54 11. 

— περιιστάναι, ‘to set’ or ‘station 
round,’ aor. 22 8. 

ἵστασθαι: intrans. 20 station oneself, 
or trans. 20 se¢ up for oneself; 
στήσομαι intrans., éornoduny trans. 
See στῆναι. τρόπαιον ἵστασθαι, ‘to 
erect a trophy,’ 58 29. 

-- ἀνθίστασθαι, ‘to stand up against,’ 
stand forth as antagonist, 47 16. 


H. 226, G. 





PROSE 


— ἀφίστασθαι, ‘to revolt,’ 27 24; ‘to 
stand aloof from,’ 59 9, 62 9. 

— διίστασθαι, ‘to stand apart, ‘open 
ranks,’ 36 6. 

- ἐφίστασθαι; 1 aor. θύρας λαβὼν 
ἐπεστήσατο, took (the first doors 
that came to hand) and ‘set them 
up’ on his house, 60 14. 

— καθίστασθαι, ‘to take one’s posi- 
tion,’ 34 12. 

-- συνίστασθαι, ‘to unite forces,’ 
‘combine,’ 15 5. 

ἰσχῦρός 3: strong. Adv. ἰσχῦρῶς. 

ἰσχύς, -ὕος, 7: strength. 

Syn. σθένος, κράτος, δύναμις, ῥώμη. 


Κ. ¢ 


κάγαθός : Kal ἀγαθός. 

κἀγώ : καὶ ἐγώ. 

καθαίρειν : 20 cleanse, purify; καθαρῶ, 
ἐκάθηρα, κεκάθαρμαι, ἐκαθάρθην. 

--- ἐποκαθαίρειν, ‘to clean off’; mid., 
one’s own hand 8 26. 

καθαρός 3 (castus, καινός) : clean, pure. 

καθῆσθαι: Zo be seated; to sit still, 
doing nothing, 40 18. H. 484, G. 
815, B. 265, 1. 

καθίζειν (l5-, sit, obsidére, ἱδρύειν) : fo 
make sit down, seat, ἐκάθιζον (H. 
361, G. 544, B. 174, 1), καθιῶ 
(H. 425; 6. 665, 3; B. 215), ἐκάθισα 
or καθῖσα. 

καθίζεσθαι: Zo seat oneself, sit; καθι- 
ζήσομαι, ἐκαθισάμην. 

— παρακαθίζεσθαι, ‘to sit down be- 
side’ one, 40 17. 

καθιστάναι : see ἱστάναι. 

καθίστασθαι : see ἵστασθαι. 

κἄειν or καίειν: fo burn; καύσω, 
ἔκαυσα, κέκαυκα, κεκαύμαι, ἐκαύθην. 


Η. 520, 1; G, 1692, p. 387; B. 729. 











—— ee 


ATTIC PROSE 


καί: and, also, even. H. 1040, 1042. 
πολλὰ Kal ἀγαθά, ‘many blessings,’ 
27 12. καὶ μάλα, 19 11,4917. εἰ 
καί, concessive, ‘though,’ 514. ἢ 
καὶ δίδως, do you ‘ really’ offer, 4 5. 


' καίπερ: w. ptcp., καίπερ αἰσθόμενος 


ταῦτα, ‘though he perceived’ all 
this, 58 27, 58 13. 

καιρός : ὦ critical time, the right time. 

καίτοι: and yet, now. 

κἀκεῖ : καὶ ἐκεῖ. 

κἀκεῖνος : καὶ ἐκεῖνος. 

κακόνους, -ουν: 2//-minded, bearing 
malice ; nom. plur. κακόνοι. H. 158; 
Οὐ ΟΣ, 2: B. 91, 3. 

κακός 3: dad; κακίων, κάκιστος. Adv. 
κακῶς. Syn. πονηρός. 

καλεῖν impf.: fo call; καλῶ (Η. 423; 
G. 665, 1; B. 212, 1), ἐκάλεσα, 
κέκληκα, κέκλημαι (‘am called’ 40 
25), ἐκλήθην. 
μενοι, the sophists ‘so-called,’ 62 12. 

— ἀποκαλεῖν, ‘to call away’ or ‘ back,’ 
‘call home,’ 18 1; ‘to call by a 
hard name,’ ‘stigmatize by,’ 49 19. 

— ἐγκαλεῖν, ‘to bring acharge against,’ 
‘lay blame on,’ τινί, 20 4. 

— εἰσκαλεῖν, ‘to invite,’ ‘summon.’ 


οἱ σοφισταὶ καλού- 


--- παρακαλεῖν, ‘to summon to be 
present’; ‘to cheer on,’ 12 16. 

— συγκαλεῖν, ‘to call together.’ 

καλεῖσθαι: 20 summon, under form of 
law, 47 20. 

— προσκαλεῖσθαι, ‘to issue a summons 
upon one,’ ‘ to cite ’ or ‘summon into 
court,’ 41 5. 

κάλλος, -ους, τό: deauty. 

καλοκἀγαθία: che guality of being 
καλὸς καὶ ἀγαθός. 

καλός 3: beautiful; καλλίων, κάλλισ- 
τος. Adv. καλῶς, syn. εὖ. 





195 


Of sacrifices, ‘favorable,’ 35 12 f. 

καλὸς κἀγαθός, or καλός τε κἀγαθός, 
a highly complimentary phrase, used 
however sometimes of things, 18 13, 
46 το. ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦ καὶ δικαίου, by 
‘honorable’ and righteous means, 
42 26. The opposite of καλόν is 
αἰσχρόν, in all senses. 

καλύπτειν : 20 cover ; καλύψω, ἐκάλυψα, 
κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκαλύφθην. 

καλύπτεσθαι : 20 cover for oneself. 

--- ἐγκαλύπτεσθαι; ἐγκαλύψασθαι, ‘to 
cover one’s face,’ 88 12, 25. 

καμεῖν: fo grow weary, fall sick; 
καμοῦμαι, κέκμηκα, κάμνω. 

κάμνειν : 20 de weary, sick: καμεῖν. 

κάμπτειν : fo bend, ἔκαμψα, κέκαμμαι, 
ἐκάμφθην. 

— ἐπικάμπτειν, ‘to wheel to’ the 
right or the left, 36 25. 

Kav: (1) καὶ ἄν, (2) καὶ ἄν. 

κάναθρον : ἃ kind of carriage, 60 16. 

κάνδυς, -vos, ὁ: 
upper garment with wide sleeves. 


Median gown, an 


κἀνταῦθα : Kal ἐνταῦθα. 

κάπρος : weld doar. 

καρκίνος : ε7αὐ. 

καρπός: fruit, produce, return. 

καρποῦσθαι: Zo reap the fruits of, τὶ; 
‘to appropriate,’ 55 12. 

καρτερεῖν (κράτος) impf.: 20 be patient, 
to bear with fortitude. 

κατά: down, prep. w. gen. and acc. 
H. 800, G. 1211, B. 409. 

τοὺς κατ᾽ ἐμέ, ‘those of my age,’ 

12 9. καθ᾽ ὅ τι ἂν ἐπαγγέλλῃ, 
‘according to his command,’ 27 26. 
κρείττων τις ἢ κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, one 
of ‘mightier than human’ mien, 
29 23. τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτούς, the force 
‘opposed to’ them, 86 11. κατὰ 





196 ATTIC 
Kopwrelav, ‘nigh to’ Coronéa, 56 
27. 

In composition, κατά sometimes 
means ‘against,’ κατερεῖν αὐτοῦ, 
‘would inform against him,’ 9 13. 
It strengthens verbs (e.g. κατακαί- 
νειν); often by denoting that the 
action is directed ‘down’ upon a 
definite point, καταμαθεῖν, καταγνῶ- 
vat, or likely to be lasting or per- 
manent, καταλιπεῖν, καταστῆναι. 

κατάβασις, -ews, 7: @ going down, 
descent, 17 3. 

καταβιβάζειν : Zo make go down. 

κατακαίνειν: 20 £2//, 251. H. 518, 7. 

κατακρημνίζειν (κρημνός) : fo throw 
over a precipice. 

καταρροφεῖν : see ῥοφεῖν. 

κατασκευή: furnishing, furniture. 

καταφανής, -ἔς : clearly seen, in sight. 

KaTep@: see ῥηθῆναι. 

κατήνυσα: see ἀνύτειν. 

κάτω : δείοτυ, downwards. 

κεῖσθαι: fo lie, be situated, placed; 
κεῖμαι, κείσομαι. Ἡ. 482, G, 818, B. 
264. Used as a perf. and fut. pass. 
of θεῖναι. 
δαπάνη, the expense ‘set down’ for 
the year, 44 28. 

— διακεῖσθαι, to be in a certain state 

Ζ ly, to be dis- 
posed or affected in some way; 
olxelws, ‘on terms of intimacy,’ 
715. Cf διατίθενται, impf., 45 12. 

— προσκεῖσθαι, ‘to be (placed) there 
in addition,’ the word καλός besides 
the word ἀγαθός, 40 3. 

κέκλημαι : καλεῖν. 

κέκρᾶγα: J cry out; ἐκεκρἄγειν. 

κεκτῆσθαι: 40 possess; κτᾶσθαι. 

κελεύειν: fo urge, bid; κεκέλευσμαι, 


ἡ els Tov ἐνιαυτὸν κειμένη 





ly or relat 





PROSE 


ἐκελεύσθην. For mid. 
pounds, διακελεύεσθαι, etc. 
κενός 3: emply. 
Kepavvivar: Ζ20 mingle, mix; éxépaca, 
κέκρᾶμαι, ἐκράθην or ἐκεράσθην. 
— συγκεραννύναι, ‘to mingle together;’ 
mid., of social intercourse, 7 14. 
κέρας, Képaros or κέρως, τό: horn, 
wing of an army. H. 181, G, 237, 
B. 115, 10. 

κεφαλή: head. 

κεχαρισμένος : χαρίζεσθαι. 

κηρίον : honeycomb. 

κηρός (εὖ7γ4) : beeswax. 

κήρυγμα, -ατος, τό: proclamation. 

κῆρυξ, κήρῦκος, 6: herald. 

κηρύττειν: fo proclaim. ‘As for the 
people in the houses, those (of the 
couriers) who understood Assyrian 
should proclaim that they were to 
remain within,’ 25 2. 

κινδυνεύειν : 20 incur danger. 

κίνδυνος : danger, risk. 

κινεῖν impf.: 40 move, stir, meddle with. 

κλάειν : 20 weep; κλαύσομαι. 

κλείειν: Zo shut; κλείσω, ἔκλεισα, 
Kéxrer(o) mat, ἐκλείσθην. 

— κατακλείειν ; κατακλείσασθαι, ‘to 
shut oneself up,’ 17 9. 

κλῖμαξ, -ακος, ἡ : adder, staircase. 

κλίνειν : Zo make incline, lean; κλινῶ, 
ἔκλινα, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην. 

— ἐγκλίνειν, ‘to bend in,’ turn about. 

— ἐκκλίνειν, ‘to bend out,’ give way. 

κοιμᾶσθαι: 20 lie down to sleep, sleep; 
ἐκοιμήθην. 

κοινός 3: common, κοινῇ, ‘in com- 
mon,’ ‘publicly’; τὸ κοινόν, ‘the 
commonwealth,’ ‘ community,’ 15 7. 

κοινωνεῖν impf.: το have in common, 
to have part in, τινός, 


see com- 


— ee eee 


ATTIC 


κοινωνία : partnership. 

κοινωνός : Partner. 

κολάζειν : 20 chastise, punish. 

κολακεύειν : 20 flatter. 

κολεός or κολεόν : sheath, scabbard. 

κολοβός 2: docked, mutilated. 

κόμη: air. 

κομίζειν: ΣὯ take charge of, to convey 
to a place of safety. 

—eloxoulfer, ‘to fetch in,’ ‘take 
home,’ 9 21. 

κονιορτός: dust raised or stirred up. 

κοπίς, -ίδος, ἡ: cleaver, scimeter. 

κόπτειν (chop, κοπίς) : fo knock, smitte, 
cut by striking; κόψω, ἔκοψα, κέκοφα, 
κέκομμαι, ἐκόπην. 

— διακόπτειν, ‘to cut a way through.’ 

— κατακόπτειν, ‘to cut down,’ 36 28. 

κοσμεῖν impf.: 20 set in order, adorn. 

κόσμος : order, ornament, decoration, 
the world or universe. 

κρατεῖν impf.: Zo be stronger, to be 
master, to conquer, τινός. 

Kparhp, -ἣρος, ὁ, (κεραννύναι) : mix- 
ing vessel, punch bowl. 

κρατιστεύειν : 20 be strongest or best. 

κράτιστος 3: strongest, best. 

κράτος, -ovs, τό: superior strength, 
might; ἀνά, κατὰ κράτος, cf. παντὶ 
σθένει. 

Syn. ἰσχύς, δύναμις, ῥώμη, σθένος. 
κραυγή (κέκραγαλ) : shout, shouting. 
κρεάδιον: a morsel of meat. 
κρέας; τως, τό: flesh, meat. 
κρείττων, κρεῖττον : stronger, supe- 

rior, better; κράτιστος. H. 254,1; 
G. 361, 1; B. 136. 
κρίνειν (cernere, certus, crimen): to 
separate, to judge; κρινῶ, &xpiva, 
κέκρικα, κέκριμμαι, ἐκρίθην. 
κρίνεσθαι : Zo separate for oneself. 





PROSE 197 

— ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ‘to answer,’ 

— διακρίνεσθαι, ‘to have a matter 
decided,’ settled by an armed con- 
test, 55 8. 

κριτής (κρίνειν) : judge. 

κρύπτειν: fo hide; κρύψω, ἔκρυψα, 
κέκρυμμαι, ἐκρύφθην. 

- ἀποκρύπτειν; ἀποκρύπτεσθαι, ‘to 
keep hidden away,’ 82 13. 

κτᾶσθαι: 0 acquire, get; κτήσομαι, 
ἐκτησάμην, κέκτημαι, “1 possess.’ 
Η. 365 b, 465 a; G. 525, 734. 


- ἀνακτᾶσθαι, ‘to get back,’ ‘win 


over,’ 8 2. 

κτείνειν: Zo Rill; κτενῶ, ἔκτεινα, 
Ξ 
ἀπέκτονα. For the passive, regu- 


larly ἀποθανεῖν, etc., 58 4. 

— ἀποκτείνειν, more frequent than the 
simple verb, 58 4. 

κτῆμα, -ατος, τό: a possession, thing 
possessed. 

κτῆσις, -Ews, 7: a2 acquiring, posses- 
ston ἢ 9. 

κτύπος (τύπτειν) : a loud noise, crash, 
clash of arms. 

Kvabos: cup, dipper. 

κύκλος: circle, ring, κύκλῳ, ‘round 
about’ 22 15. 

κύκλωσις, -εως, 7: ὦ Surrounding. 

κυμαίνειν (κῦμα) : fo swell or rise in 
waves. 

— ἐκκυμαίνειν, ‘to wave out,’ ‘ undu- 
late,’ 35 24. 

κυνηγέσιον (κύων, ἡγεῖσθαι) : a hunt 
with hounds; plur., ‘hounds and 
hunting,’ 61 1, 21. 

κύριος 3: having authority or power 
over, decisive, valid. 

κύων, κυνός, ὁ, ἡ, (hound, canis) : dog ; 
voc. κύον. H. 216,10; 6. 291, 18; 

B. 115, 12. 


198 ATTIC PROSE 


κωλύειν : to hinder. H. 496 ἃ. 
κωμάζειν (κῶμος) : fo revel. 
κωμαστής : reveller. 

κωφός 3: dumb. 


A. 


λαβεῖν: fo take, seize, receive; λήψο- 
μαι, εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι, ἐλήφθην, λαμ- 
βάνω. Often λαβών, ‘took and,’ 
10 12, 60 14. 

— ἀπολαβεῖν, ‘to take what is due,’ 
receive fulfilment of 46 18, grate- 
ful return for 50 26. 

— καταλαβεῖν, ‘to overtake,’ 36 6. 

— παραλαβεῖν, ‘to take along,’ 12 22; 
‘to receive from,’ 18 22, 25 13. 

— ὑπολαβεῖν, ‘to suspect,’ ‘appre- 
hend,’ 52 24. 

λαθεῖν: “Σὺ lie hid, escape the notice of 
one, τινά, H. 712, G. 1049; Ajow, 
λέληθα, λανθάνω, λήθω (rare in 
prose) 44 3. Const. ptcp., H. 984, 
G. 1586, B. 660 N. For mid., see 
compounds, ἐπιλαθέσθαι, etc. 

λακτίζειν: fo hick. 

λαλεῖν impf.: fo prattle. 

λαμβάνειν : λαβεῖν. 

λαμπρός 3: brilliant, illustrious. 

λαμπτήρ, -fpos, ὁ: light, lamp. 

λανθάνειν : λαθεῖν. 

λέγειν (legere, λόγος) : 20 tell, recount, 
speak, say; λέξω, ἔλεξα, λέλεγμαι, 
ἐλέχθην. Syn. ἀγορεύειν, εἰπεῖν, ῥη- 
θῆναι, φάναι. 

— ἀντιλέγειν, ‘to speak in opposi- 
tion,’ ‘ object,’ 46 22. 

— ἐπιλέγειν, ‘to say besides,’ ‘ add.’ 

«λειμών, -ὥνος, 6: meadow. 

λείπειν : λιπεῖν. 

λείπεσθαι: Zo remain, be behindhand 
or inferior, 





— ἐλλείπεσθαι, ‘to be wanting’ or 
‘deficient in,’ τινός; in 48 22, & is 
under the influence of δυνάμενον. 

— καταλείπεσθαι, καταλιπέσθαι, ‘to 
fall behind,’ ‘ prove inferior.’ 

λεκάριον: a@ little dish. 

λεπτός 3: peeled, fine, thin, eae 

λευκός 3: white. 

λέων, -οντος, 6: lion. 

λήγειν (lag, danguére, laxus): to leave 
off, end, cease, 58 19. 

λήθειν : λαθεῖν. 

λήσων :: λαθεῖν. 

ληφθῆναι, λήψομαι : λαβεῖν. 

λιμός: Aunger, famine. 

λιπαρεῖν impf.: Zo be importunate, to 
entreat, beg or pray earnestly. 

λιπαρός 3: sleek, 

λιπεῖν: Zo leave; λείψω, λέλοιπα, λέ- 
λειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, λείπω. 

For mid., see λείπεσθαι. 

— ἀπολιπεῖν, ‘to leave room,’ 23 4; 
‘to forsake,’ 7 24, 88 9. 
— ἐκλιπεῖν, ‘to fail,’ 33 8; 

the hive,’ 45 13. 

— καταλιπεῖν, ‘to leave behind.’ 

— παραλιπεῖν, ‘to leave by the way,’ 
‘pass over.’ 

-ἕ ὑπολιπεῖν, ‘to leave in the rear,’ 
impf. pass. ptcp. 35 24. 

λογίζεσθαι: 40 calculate, take into 
account, 42 15. 

— καταλογίζεσθαι, ‘to put down in 
the reckoning,’ ‘ reckon,’ 49 22. 

λόγος (λέγειν) : Zale, count, account, 
that which ts said or spoken, ‘speech,’ 
‘argument,’ ‘ subject’ of discourse. 

λόγχη: spearhead, lance. 

λοιδορεῖν, λοιδορεῖσθαι: Zo rail at, 
upbraid, scold, Const. H. 764, 2 Ὁ. 

λοιπός 3 (λιπεῖν) : remaining, the 


‘to quit 


ne ὑπο en See a Sok 





ns δῶ 


τ idl δὺ 





ATTIC 


vest; τὸ λοιπόν, ‘for the future, 12 
20. H. 719 b, 6. 1060. 

λύειν: το loose; λύσω, ἔλυσα, λέλυκα, 
λέλυμαι, ἐλύθην. H. 393 a, G. 471, 
Β. 103.Σ; 

— διαλύειν, ‘to dissolve’; of “ disso- 
lution’ by death, 31 22. 

— καταλύειν, ‘to undo,’ ‘ unyoke’ for 
pitching camp, 34 1; ‘to depose’ 
27 16, ‘put an end to’ 56 5. 

λυπεῖν impf.: 20 give pain to, annoy. 

λύπη: pain, trouble. 

λυσιτελεῖν impf.: 20 be profitable or 
Jor one’s advantage, 4 20. 

λυσιτελής, -és, (λύειν, τέλος) : Paying 
for expenses incurred, profitable, 
advantageous. 


M. 


pa: used in oaths, μὰ Ala, etc. H. 
1037, 13; 723; G. 1066-8. 

μαθεῖν: Zo earn; μαθήσομαι, μεμά- 
θηκα, μανθάνω. 

— καταμαθεῖν, ‘to learn definitely,’ 
‘for certain,’ 5 Io. 

μαθητής : learner, disciple. 

μακαρίζειν : Zo pronounce happy. 

μακάριος 3: dlessed, happy, 21 12, 15. 

μάλα: strongly, very; μᾶλλον, μά- 
λιστα. καὶ μάλὰ ἄτοπα, ‘very 
strange things indeed,’ 1911. ‘Yes, 
indeed,’ 49 17, 27. 

μαλακός 3 (μαλ-, μλα-, mollis, blan- 
dus, Bat): soft, comfortable, 21 16. 

μάλιστα: most, especially. μάλιστα 
τὸ ζεῦγος τοῦτο, this one ‘particu- 
larly,’ more than any other, 43 7; 
‘best,’ 46 16. 

μᾶλλον : more, rather. 

μανθάνειν : μαθεῖν. 

μαντεία (μάντις) : oracle, prophecy. 





PROSE 199 

μάντις, -ews, 6: seer, prophet. 

μαρτύρεσθαι (μάρτυς) : to call to wit- 
ness, to protest. 

— ἐπιμαρτύρεσθαι; ἐπιμαρτύρασθαι θε- 
οὖς, ‘to invoke gods as witnesses,’ 
‘appeal to them,’ 28 7. 

μάρτυς, -upos, ὁ, 7: witness. 

μαστιγοῦν: zo whip. 

μάσττξ, -tyos, 7: whip. 

μάτην: vainly, in vain. 

parrev: to knead, smear; μάξω, 
ἔμαξα, μέμαχα, μέμαγμαι, ἐμάγην. 

μάχεσθαι: fo fight; μαχοῦμαι, ἐμαχε- 
σάμην, μεμάχημαι. 

— προσμάχεσθαι, ‘to fight against,’ 
‘assault,’ 22 16. 

— συμμάχεσθαι, ‘to fight along with.’ 

μάχη: fighting, battle. 

μέ: me, μοῦ, μοί, enclitic. 
forms are ἐμέ, ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα: ογεαί, large; of 
persons, ζαζέ, μείζων, μέγιστος. 

μέγεθος, -ους, τό: size, magnitude. 
μέθη : strong drink, intoxication. 
μεθύσκειν (mead, μέθη): 20 intoxi- 
cate, ἐμέθυσα, ἐμεθύσθην. 
μεθύσκεσθαι: ὦ vet drunk. 

μείζων, μέγιστος : μέγας. 

μειονεκτεῖν impf.: 20 have too little, ‘to 
be the poorer,’ 29 8. 

μείων, petov: smaller, less. 
0 ΟΣ 3655.55; bib 30: 

μελανία: a blackness, 84 25. 

μέλας, μέλαινα, μέλαν : dlack. 

μέλειν : impers. μέλει, 2¢ concerns one, 

‘one is interested in some- 


Accented 


H. 254, 


τινί; 
thing,’ τινί τινος; μελήσει. 
μελετᾶν : 20 practice, study, exercise. 
μέλι, -ιτος, τό, (mel): honey. 
μέλιττα : dee. 
μέλλειν: 20 be about or going to do or 





200 


to be; ‘to delay,’ 6 9; μελλήσω, 

ἐμέλλησα. Const. H. 846, G. 1254. 

B. 533. τὰ μέλλοντα, ‘things fu- 

ture,’ ‘the future,’ 31 28. 
μεμνῆσθαι (meminisse): to remember ; 

μεμνήσομαι. H. 465 a, G. 734, B. 

227 Ν. See μιμνήσκειν. 
μέμφεσθαι : Zo dlame. 

μέν : postp. particle of emphasis, often 
foll. by δέ, sometimes by μέντοι or 
other particles of contrast. μέν is 
never a connective, and always looks 
forward, never to what precedes the 
clause in wh. it stands. H. 1037, 12. 

ἐπιχαριτώτατον μὲν οὖν, ‘nay, 
rather,’ 45 7. ἐγὼ μέν, ‘I for one,’ 
‘that I do,’ 47 22. ἀνδρεῖον μέν, 
brave ‘to be sure,’ 57 28. 

μένειν: Zo remain; μενῶ, ἔμεινα, pe- 
μένηκα. 

— ἀναμένειν, ‘to wait for,’ 40 21. 

— διαμένειν, ‘to continue,’ 28 7. 

— ἐμμένειν, ‘to abide by,’ 58 28. 

— ἐπιμένειν, ‘to stay on,’ stick to the 
saddle, 9 8. 

— καταμένειν, ‘to remain behind.’ 

— παραμένειν, ‘to stand by’ one. 

— ὑπομένειν, ‘to remain steadfast,’ 
‘to endure’ 1 9, syn. ὑποφέρειν, 
ἀνέχεσθαι; ‘to await’ invasion, 5313. 

μέντοι : postp. particle of emphasis, 32 
11, 39 13; but usually adversative 
in force, ‘however,’ and thus often 
correlative to μέν, 2 17, 10 6. 

μέρος, -ovs, τό: share, part, portion. 

μεσημβρίαᾶ (ἡμέρα): midday, noon, 
the South. 

μέσος 3: middle, in the middle; eis 
τὸ μέσον, ‘in public,’ ‘before you 
all,’ 27 3,46 21. ἐν μέσῳ, ‘midway 
between,’ 28 27, 57 12. 





ATTIC PROSE 


μετά: amid, among; prep. w. gen. and 
acc. Η. 801,G,1212,B.410. μετὰ 
τοῦ θείου, ‘with’ God, 88 17; thus 
rather than σύν rim, except in Xen- 
ophon. μετὰ θεούς, ‘after’ the gods, 
82 11. In composition μετά some- 
times has a partitive meaning, μετέ- 
xe τινός; sometimes denotes 
change, μεταμέλει μοι, ‘I repent.’ 

μέτεστι, μετῆν : see εἶναι. 

μετουσία (μετεῖναι): a sharing in, 
partaking of. 

μετρεῖν impf.: 20 measure. 

— διαμετρεῖν, ‘to measure off,’ 39 1; 
διαμετρήσασθαι τὸ μέρος ἑκάστου, 
‘to have the share measured off,’ 
that falls to each of us, 22 29. 

— καταμετρεῖν, ‘to measure out.’ 

μέτριος 3: within measure, moderate. 
Adv, μετρίως, 5 26. 

μέτρον : measure. 

μέτωπον (ὀπ-, ὀφθῆναι) : space be- 
tween the eyes, forehead, front, 

μέχρι : until, up to, as far as, τινός. 

μή: neg. particle, to be distinguished 
from ov. H. 1018 ff., G. 1607 ff., 

— μηδαμῶς, ‘by no means.’ [B. 431 ff. 

— μηδέ, ‘nor,’ ‘and not,’ ‘not even,’ 
‘not at all.’ 

— μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, ‘no one,’ 
‘nothing,’ ‘ no.’ 

— μήπω, μηπώποτε, ‘not yet.’ 

— μήτε... μήτε, ‘neither... nor,’ 

μήν : postp. asseverative particle. H. 
1037, 11. ἢ μήν, used in declara- 
tions under oath, 18 12. οὐ μὴν 
ἀλλά, ‘not but that,’ 9 7. H. 1035 c. 
οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ σιγή, ‘nor in truth 
silence either,’ 58 5. ἐπαιδεύθη γε 
μήν, 1 11; so often in Xenophon, 
by way of contrast or transition. 





a ey 








οὐδ νον σον 


ATTIC 


μήν, μηνός, ὁ, (moon, ménsis) : month. 

μήτηρ, -τρός, 7: mother. H. 189, 
G. 274, B. 105. 

μητρῴος 3: maternal, of one’s mother. 

μηχανή : contrivance, machine, engine 
of war, 16 24, 59 23. 

pla, μιᾶς : oe. See els. 

μιγνύναι (miscére): to mix; μίξω, 
ἔμιξα, μέμτγμαι, ἐμΐχθην, ἐμίγην. 

μῖκρός 3: svadl, little. μικροῦ, ‘little,’ 
‘almost’; H. 743 Ὁ, G. 1116 b, Β; 
642 N. 

pipet Oar: fo imitate; μεμίμημαι. 

μιμνήσκειν : ὁ remind; μνήσω, ἔμνησα. 
Η. 530, 6; 6. 1692, Ρ. 392; Β. 729. 

μισθός : pay, wages. 

μισθοφόρος 2: receiving pay or wages ; 
plur. mercenaries. 

μνῆμα, -ατος, τό: memorial, sepul- 
chral monument, tomd, 88. 15. 

μνημεῖον : memorial, record. 

μνήμη : memory, mention. 

μνημονεύειν : Zo call to mind, remem- 
ber, mention. 

— διαμνημονεύειν, ‘to remember from 
first to last,’ ‘ mention frequently.’ 


μνησθῆναι: 20 call to mind, mention ;. 


μνησθήσομαι. See μιμνήσκειν. 
-- ἐπιμνησθῆναι; ὧν ἐπεμνήσθην, ‘of 
whom I made mention,’ 62 4. 
μόλις : hardly. [‘ only,’ ‘ merely.’ 
μόνος 3: alone, only; adv. μόνον, 
μόρᾶ: @ mora, one of the main divi- 
sions of the Spartan infantry. 
μορφή: form, shape. 
μοχθηρός 3: miserable, bad. 
Syn. πονηρός (πόνος, syn. poet. 
μόχθος), κακός. 
μυκτήρ, -fpos, 6: rose, nostril, 48 14. 
μῦριάς, -άδος, ἡ : the number of ten 
thousand. 





PROSE 201 
μύριοι 3: Zen thousand. 
μυσάττεσθαι : 20 feel disgust at, loathe. 


N. 

val: yes, surely. 

vads: cenple, 58 13. 

ναυτικός 3 (vais): of a ship or ships; 
τὸ ναυτικόν, ‘the fleet,’ 56 1. 

veavlas: young man. 

νεανίσκος : youth, young man till 
forty, 49 17. 

νεκρός : dead body, corpse. 

νέμειν : £0 deal, distribute ; νεμῶ, ἔνειμα, 
vevéunka, νενέμημαι, ἐνεμήθην. 

— διανέμειν, ‘to assign,’ ‘apportion 
severally,’ 44 15. 

— κατανέμειν, ‘to divide’ into por- 
tions, 23 15. H. 725 b, G. 1076, 
B. 340. 

νεοδαμώδεις (δᾶμος Doric for δῆμος) : 
newly enfranchised; at Lacedae- 
mon, Helots freed by the state in 
return for services in war, 58 5. 

νεός 3: new, young; ol νεώτεροι, 61 28. 

νεοττός : young bird, young bee, 44 19. 

νεφέλη : cloud. [18 16. 

νέωτα: next year; adv. εἰς νέωτα, 

vf: used in oaths, νὴ Ala, edc. Always 
affirmative. See μά. 

νῆσος, 7: zsland. 

νικᾶν: fo conquer, be victorious. 

νίκη : victory. 

νοεῖν (νοῦς) impf.: to think, note, 
notice, intend. 

— ἐννοεῖν, ἐννοεῖσθαι, ‘to have in 
mind,’ ‘ consider’; laughing ‘at the 
idea’ that they were to be watched 
by Phrygians, e¢c, 28 18. 

— ἐπινοεῖν, ‘to intend,’ 56 5. 

— κατανοεῖν, ‘to note definitely,’ ‘ take 
thought,’ 42 6. 








202 ATTIC 


νόημα, -ατος, τό: a thought, idea. 

νομίζειν : zo hold as a custom or usage, 
to believe in, regard, think; νομιῶ, 
ἐνόμισα, νενόμικα, νενόμισμαι, évo- 
μίσθην. τὰ νενομισμένα ἱερά, ‘the 
usual sacrifices,’ 29 19. εὖ ποιῆσαι 
ὁπόσα νομίζεται, to bestow all the 
benefactions (said of the funeral 
feast) that ‘are customary,’ 33 19. 

Syn. ἡγεῖσθαι, οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν. 

νόμιμος 3: 22 accordance with law or 
usage, lawful, customary. 

νόμος : custom, law. 

viv: αἱ present, now. 
however,’ 19 3. 

νύξ, νυκτός, 7: night; ἐκ νυκτός, ‘in 
the night time,’ 7 26. 


νῦν δέ, fin fact 


Ξ. 
ξεναγεῖν impf.: 20 de a leader of mer- 
cenaries, 57% 13. 
ξένος: a guest or host, guest-friend, 
stranger ; plur., ‘ mercenaries.’ 
ξηρός 3: ary. τὸ ξηρὸν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, 
‘the dry bed of the river,’ 24 5. 
ξίφος, -ovs, τό: sword, 


Ο. 


ὁ, ἢ, τό: the. Accented when used 
as a pronoun, 7 δέ, δ 19; thus often 
ὃ μέν... ὃ δέ, 94 27. οἱ μέν... 
οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι, 54 29, 59 1. H. 654, 

ὀγδοήκοντα (ὀκτώ) : eighty. [B. 443, I. 

ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε: rhis (here) man, 
woman, or thing, he, she; ‘the fol- 
lowing,’ ‘as follows,’ 18 26, 

ὁδοιπορία: wayfaring, travel, 48 14. 

ὁδός, ἡ : way, street, journey. 

ὄζειν (ὀδ-, odor) : to smell, be redolent ; 
ὥζησα. 





PROSE 


ὅθεν : whence ; ὅθενπερ, ‘just whence’; 
‘just where,’ in the case of all men 
when dying, life first begins to fail 
(2.6. at the extremities) 33 9. 
ol: for him; enclitic, 8 9. H. 685, 
G. 987, B. 139. 
οἷα: οἷος. 
οἶδα, οἶσθα: εἰδέναι. 
οἴεσθαι : ὁ think, surmise, fancy; 
«οἴομαι or οἶμαι, φόμην or ᾧμην, 
οἰήσομαι, φήθην. οἶμαι is often inde- 
pendent of the const., 5 16, 
Syn. δοκεῖν, νομίζειν, ἡγεῖσθαι. 
οἴκαδε: omeward, home. Instead of 
οἴκοι 3 3, because the boy’s yearn- 
ing would be directed homeward. 
οἰκεῖν impf.: Zo dwell, live, inhabit. 
— διοικεῖν, ‘to administer,’ ‘ manage.’ 
οἰκεῖος 3: delonging to house or family, 
one’s own ; plur. neut., ‘ private man- 
sion,’ 25 20. Adv. οἰκείως, ‘inti- 
mately,’ 7 15. 
οἰκέτης : house-slave, slave, domestic. 
οἰκία: house, dwelling. 
olkifev: 40 colonize, settle. 
— ἀποικίζειν, ‘to send away to a new 
home,’ 44 19. 
οἰκοδομεῖν impf.: 40 duzld,as a house. 
— περιοικοδομεῖν, ‘to inclose by build- 
ing,’ ‘ wall in,’ perf. pass. 10 25. 
οἴκοι : at home. 
οἰκονομικός 3: pertaining to or fit for 
housekeeping or managing an estate. 
οἶκος (ροικ-, bailiwick, Greenwich, 
vicus, Villa): house, home, estate. 
οἰκτείρειν (οἶκτος, of ‘alas’) : 
pity. 
οἶμαι : οἴεσθαι. 
οἶνος (ροὶν-, vinum, vitis): wine. 
οἰνοχοεῖν impf.: 20 be cupbearer, pour 
out wine, 4 16, 


to 











ATTIC 


οἰνοχόος (χεῖν) : wine-pourer, cup- 
bearer, 417. 

οἷος 3: of which (what) sort, (such) 
as, capable; adv. olov, ola, w. ptcp. 
causal,2 2. H.977, G.1575, B.656,1. 

οἷόσπερ 3: just (such) as, 21 8; 
adv. olévrep, 10 15. 

οἷός τε 3: able, possible, 11 4. 

ols, olds, ἡ, (dft-, ewe, ovis): sheep. 
ἘΠ᾿ 210, G, 269, B. 115, 16. 

οἴσειν fut.: οἴσω, 7 shall bear, bring. 

Syn. ἐνεγκεῖν, φέρειν. 

— συνοίσειν, ὅσα ἂν οἴηται αὐτοῖς, all 
that he believes ‘will be for their 
advantage,’ 50 18. 

- ὑποίσειν; ef ταύτην ὑποίσω, ‘if I 
shall endure Aer,’ 49 το. 

οἰωνίζεσθαι: ὦ take omens, from 
birds. 

olwvds: bird of augury, omen. 

ὀκνεῖν impf.: 20 hesitate, shrink from 
doing anything, ¢o fear, dread. 

ὀκνηρός 3: Aesifating. Adv. ὀκνηρῶς; 
ὀκνηρότερον, ‘with less confidence,’ 
815. 

ὀλίγος 3: few, little. 

ὅλος 3: whole, entire; τὸ ὅλον, ‘in 
general,’ ‘in the main,’ 61 8; ἡ τῶν 
ὅλων τάξις, ‘the universe,’ 32 6. 

ὁμαλός 3: even, level. Adv. ὁμαλῶς, 
‘with even front,’ 35 5. 

ὁμιλεῖν impf.: 20 associate with, hold 
converse with, τινί, 49 9. 

Sptdos: throng, crowd, multitude. 

ὄμμα, -aros, τό, (ὀφθῆναι) : eve. 

ὀμνύναι: fo swear; ὀμοῦμαι, ὦμοσα, 
ὁὀμώμοκα, ὀμώμο(σγμαι, ὠμό(σγθην. 

— ἀντομνύναι, ‘to swear in turn.’ 


ὅμοιος 3: like, resembling. Adv. 


ὁμοίως, ‘in like manner.’ 
ὁμοιοῦν: ἡ make like, 





PROSE 203 

— ἐξομοιοῦν; ἐξομοιοῦσθαι, ‘to have 
one’s own’ works ‘ made quite like,’ 
τινί, 44 9, 

ὁμολογεῖν impf.: 20 agree, admit. 

— συνομολογεῖν, ‘to agree with,’ ‘ give 
assent,’ 50 2. 

ὁμόλογος 2: assenting, agreeing. 

ὁμόσε: fo one and the same place, to 
close quarters, together, 10 22. θεῖν 
ὁμόσε αὐτοῖς, ‘to charge them on the 
run,’ 54 23. 

ὁμότιμος 2: egually valued or hon- 
ored, οἱ ὁμότιμοι, ‘the peers of the 
realm,’ 16 15. 

ὁμοτράπεζος 2: sitting af che same 
table with, ‘table-companion,’ 87 6. 

ὁμοῦ: 27 the same place, together. 

SpodvAros 2 (φῦλον) : of the same race 
or ¢ribe; ‘of kindred nature’ (dust 
to dust), 31 23. 

ὄναρ, τό: dream. 

ὀνινάναι: 20 benefit, give joy; ὀνήσω, 
ὥνησα, ὠνήμην, ὠνήθην. 

ὄνομα, -ατος, τό: γα716, word, 62 20. 

ὀνομάζειν : 20 71Ω7)16. 


| — ἐπονομάζειν, ‘to give another name 


to,’ ‘call by a name,’ pass. 40 13. 
ὀνομαστί: by name. 

ὄνος : ass. ; 

ὄπισθεν : dehind, in the rear. 

ὁπλίζειν : fo arm, equip. 

— ἐξοπλίζειν; ἐξοπλίζεσθαι, ‘to arm 
oneself completely,’ ‘get under 
arms,’ 34 12. 

ὁπλίτης: a heavy-armed foot-soldier, 
‘hoplite.’ 

ὅπλον: implement; plur., arms. ἐπὶ 
τοῖς ὅπλοις, ‘under arms,’ 17 13. 

ὅποι: in which direction, whither. 

ὁποῖος 3: of which or what sort, (such) 
as, 





204 ATTIC 

ὁπόσος 3: of which or what quantity 
or number, (as much) (as many) as. 

ὁπόταν (ὁπότε, dv): when, whenever. 

ὁπότε: (on a time) when, as, since. 

ὁπότερος 3: which (ever) of the two. 

ὅπου : where. 

ὅπως: as, how, that, in order that. 
μὴ ὅπως, ‘not only,’ 5 7, H. 1035 a, 
G. 1504; οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν, ‘in no way 
whatever,’ 12 18. 

ὁρᾶν (fop-, ware, wary, veréri, ἔφορος, 
φρουρός) : to look out, look, look at, 
see; ἑώρων, ἑώρᾶκα or ἑόρᾶκα. ὁρᾶν 
χρή, ‘we must beware,’ 59 27. 

Syn, ἰδεῖν, ὀφθῆναι, βλέπειν, θεᾶ- 

σθαι. 

— ἐνορᾶν, ‘to see something zz one,’ 
or ‘iz the premises,’ 22 17. 

— ἐφορᾶν, ‘to be watchful over,’ ‘ over- 
see,’ 82 5. 

— καθορᾶν, ‘to espy,’ 37 7. 

— περιορᾶν, ‘to overlook,’ ‘allow,’ 
const. ptcp., ἀποδιδόντας 52 9. 

— προορᾶν, ‘to foresee,’ 31 28. 

ὀργή: semper, passion, anger. 

ὀρέγεσθαι : 20 reach for, ‘crave,’ τινός, 
55 23; ὠρέχθην or ὠρεξάμην. Aor. 
rare in prose. 

ὀρεινός 3: mountainous. 

ὄρθός 3: straight, upright, correct. 
Adv. ὀρθῶς, ‘rightly,’ 6 26. 

ὀρθοῦν: fo set straight or erect, to 
correct, guide aright. 

ὀρθοῦσθαι: Zo hold oneself erect, to go 
Straight, succeed. 

ὁρίζειν : 40 divide as a border, to bound, 
limit, define. 

ὁρίζεσθαι : “τὴ have limits fixed for one- 
self, ‘settle the time,’ 58 23. 

ὅριον: ound; τὰ ὅρια, ‘ the frontier.’ 

ὅρκος: oath. 





PROSE 


ὁρμᾶν: 20 set in motion, 28 17; to 
rush, aor., 37 5. 

ὁρμᾶσθαι: 20 set out, start, hasten; 
ὡρμήθην. 

ὅρος : limit, boundary. 

ὄρος, -ovs, τό: mountain, range, 56 
18. 

ὀρύττειν: 20 dig; dptiw, ὥρυξα, ὀρώ- 
ρυχα, ὀρώρνγμαι, ὠρύχθην. 

ὀρχεῖσθαι: fo dance; ὀρχήσομαι, ὠρ- 
χησάμην. 

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ: who, which; rel. pron. ἧ, 
‘what way,’ ‘where,’ 24 12. “καὶ 
ὅς, ‘and he,’ 35 16,47 3; H. 275 Ὁ; 
G. 1023, 2; B. 144 a. éorw 4, 
‘some’ of them, 39 2; H. 998, 
G. 1029. ἥπερ, ‘ (in the same way) 
as,’ 24 4. οἵπερ, ‘(precisely those) 
who,’ 26 24. 

ὅσιος 3: sanctioned by divine law, 
holy. Adv. ὁσίως; ὁσίως ἂν ἔχοι, 
‘it would be lawful,’ 28 1. 

ὅσος 3: how much, how many, as 
much, as many. ὅσων ἑώρακα, ‘of 
all whom I have seen,’ 2 18. ἀπεῖ- 
xov ὅσον στάδιον, ‘about’ a stade 
distant, 57 το. ἀπολιπὼν ὅσον τύρ- 
σεσι, ‘leaving room enough for 
towers’ between the trench and the 
river, 238 5. ὅσῳ πλέονες... TO- 
σούτῳ θᾶττον, ‘the more... the 
quicker,’ 22 17,46 8. ὅσαπερ, ‘just 
as many as,’ 26 21. 

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι: who(ever), which 
(ever), whatever; ὅτου, ὅτῳ HH. 
280a; G. 425; B.150,1. Indef. 
rel, or interrog, pron. ὅστις ἄνθρωπος, 
‘what kind of a fellow,’ 11 4. οὐδένα 
ὅντινα οὐ, ‘every one,’ 18 12; H. 
1003 a. ἔστιν ὅστις, ‘some one,’ 
36 6; cf ἔστιν ἅ, 89 2. 











ATTIC 


ὀσφραίνεσθαι (ὀσμή, ὄζειν) : Zo smell. 

ὅταν (ὅτε, dv): when, whenever ; 
ὅτανπερ 26 22, cf. ὅσαπερ, οἵπερ. 

ὅτι: chat, because; never suffers eli- 
sion, ὅτι μάλιστα, ‘as much as 
possible,’ 23 9, 42 26; cf ws in the 
same usage. μὴ ὅτι, ‘not merely,’ 
‘not to mention,’ 19 8, οἱ 5 7, H. 
11035 a, G. 1504. 

ὅτου, ὅτῳ: ὅστις. 

οὐ, οὐκ : negative particle, to be dis- 
tinguished from μή. Π. 1018 ff., 
G. 1607 ff., B. 431 ff. Accented οὔκ, 
μο, δ It; Η. 112 ἃ, G. 138, B. 69, 1. 

— οὐδαμῶς, ‘by no means,’ 

— οὐδέ, ‘nor,’ ‘and not,’ ‘not even,’ 
‘not at all’ 19 13. 

— οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, ‘no one,’ 
‘nothing,’ ‘ no.’ 

— οὐδέποτε,οὐδεπώποτε, ‘never,’ ‘never 
yet,’ 51 16, cf 9. 

— οὐκέτι, ‘no longer,’ ‘no more.’ 

—otxovy, οὐκοῦν, ‘therefore not,’ 
‘therefore.’ H. 1048, 2a; ἃ. 1603. 

— οὔπω, ‘not yet.’ 


οὔτε, ‘neither... ? 


-- οὔτε... nor. 

— οὔτοι, ‘certainly not,’ $1 20. 

οὖν: therefore, accordingly ; postposi- 
tive. H. 1048, 2. μὲν οὖν, ‘nay 
rather,’ ‘ but rather,’ 45 7. 

οὐρά: Zazl, rear of an army. 

οὐράνιος 3: of or in heaven, heavenly. 

οὐρανός : heaven, sky. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο: 2115, that (when 
the antecedent of a relative pron.), 
‘he,’ ‘she,’ ‘ yonder’ 22 22. 

οὕτω, οὕτως : this, 50. 

ὀφείλειν : 20 owe, be obliged to; ὀφει- 
λήσω, ὠφείλησα, ὠφείληκα, ὠφειλή- 
θην. 


ὄφελος, τό: advantage. τί ὄφελος, 








PROSE 205. 
‘what good?’ 
use,’ 37 20. 

ὀφθαλμός : eye. 

ὀφθῆναι (ὀπ-, oculus, ὀφθαλμός, ὄμμα, 
ὄψις) : to be seen; ὥφθην, ὦμμαι, 
ὄψομαι J shall see. 
Syn. ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν, βλέπειν, θεᾶσθαι. 
ὀψέ: late. 

ὄψις, -εως, ἡ : appearance, look, looks ; 
plur., of the eyes, 48 18. 

ὄψομαι : ὀφθῆναι. 


II. 


πάγκαλος 3: a/l-beautiful, 28 12. 

παθεῖν : fo be affected in any way, suffer 
good or ill treatment, fo experience ; 
πείσομαι, πέπονθα, πάσχω. εὖ, κακῶς 
παθεῖν, is felt as passive, hence ὑπό 
τίνος, 49 27, 51 11. 

παιανίζειν : fo chant the paean or war- 
song, 35 22. 

παιδάριον : child, ‘small boy,’ 11 8. 

παιδεία : draining of a child, education. 

παιδεύειν : Zo train, educate. 


οὐδὲν ὄφελος, ‘no 


παίειν : 20 εἰγίξε, παίσω, ἔπαισα, ἐπαι- 

σάμην. Rare exc. impf., and in Xen. 
Syn. πληγῆναι, πατάξαι, τύπτειν. 

παίζειν: Zo play as a child, sport; 
παιξοῦμαι, ἔπαισα, πέπαισμαι. 

παῖς, παιδός, ὁ, ἡ : child, boy or girl; 
voc. παῖ, plur. gen. παίδων. ἐκ 
παιδός, ‘from a boy,’ ‘from child- 
hood up.’ 

πάλαι : long ago, all along. 

παλαιός 3: ancient, old. 

πάλιν: dack, back again, again. 

παλτόν: dart, javelin. 

παμπληθής, -és: of or with the whole 
multitude, multitudinous. 

πάμπολυς, -πόλλη, -πολὺ : Very much, 
very many, a great many. 


206 ATTIC 


παντάπᾶσι: altogether, wholly. 

παντοδαπός 3: of every kind, all sorts. 

πάντοθεν: from all sides. 

παντοῖος 3: of all kinds, all sorts of. 

πάντοσε: 171 all directions; ‘in every 
part’ of his person, 58 14. 

πάντως : wholly, by all means. 

πάνυ: very, very much, guite; οὐ 
πάνυ, ‘not at all,’ ‘hardly,’ 40 19. 

πάππος : grandfather. 

παρά: beside, by, along by, to or from 
a position beside; prep. w. gen., dat., 
andacc. H. 802, G, 1213, B. 411. 
map ἐμοῦ, farewell ‘from me,’ 38 23, 
4618; παρὰ Xelpwvos, ‘at the hands 
of Chiron,’ 61 19. παρ᾽ ἡμῖν, ‘with 
us,’ in Persia, 3 12; wap ἐμοί, ‘at my 
house,’ 5 23, 26 3; of παρὰ Xelpwu, 
‘Chiron’s disciples,’ 62 4. mapa 
νόμον, ‘contrary to law,’ of 44 2; 
παρὰ τοὺς πέντε, ‘in the presence 
of’ the Ephors, the acc. with the 
thought of exzering their presence, 
56 το. 

παράγγελμα, -ατος, τό: announce- 
ment; σοφιστῶν παραγγέλματα, 
* professions,’ 62 27. 

παράδειγμα, -aros, τό, (δεικνύναι) : 
example, 62 3. 

παράδεισος: park. 

παράδοξος 2 (δόξαν) : contrary to opin- 
zon or belief, strange. 

παραινεῖν impf.: ¢o advise, τινί; for 
forms, see ἐπαινεῖν. 

παρασκευή: ὦ vetting ready, prepara- 
tion, force, equipment. 

παράσχω, Tapéox par: see σχεῖν. 

πάρδαλις, -ews, ἡ : leopard, panther. 

πάρειμι, παρών : see εἶναι. 

παρεῖναι (ἱέναι) : fo let go by; for 
forms, see ἀφεῖναι. παρέντι τοὺς 


PROSE 


διαπίπτοντας, ‘letting pass’ those 
who were breaking through, 58 1, 
παρήγγνησα: see ἐγγυᾶν. 
παρημέληκα : see ἀμελεῖν. 
παροψίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (ὄψον, anything 


eaten with bread): side-dish, 
‘entree,’ 3 4. 

πᾶς, πᾶσα, wav: all, every. 

πάσχειν : παθεῖν. 

πατάξαι: 20 strike. H. 514, 5 a. 


Syn. πληγῆναι, παίειν, τύπτειν. 

πατεῖν (path, footpad, passus) impf.: 
to tread, walk, trample on. 

— περιπατεῖν, ‘to walk round,’ 38 24. 

πατήρ, πατρός, ὁ: father. HH. 180, 
G, 274, B. 105. 

πάτριος 2: paternal. κατὰ τὰ πάτρια, 
‘according to the custom of his 
fathers,’ 29 20. 

πατρίς, -ίδος, ἡ : one’s country, native 
land ox city, 56 8. 

πατρόθεν : from or ‘after’ a father, 
adding the father’s name, 41 5. 

πατρῷος 3: paternal, of one’s fathers. 

παύειν : 20 make cease, stop. 

— καταπαύειν, ‘to suppress,’ ‘ depose’ 
from power 27 24. 

παύεσϑαι : 20 cease, leave off. 

πεδίον : plain, field. 

πεζικός 3: on foot or by land, of a foot- 
soldier or foot-soldiers. 

melds 3: on foot or by land, foot-soldier. 

πείθειν : 20 urge, try to persuade, aor. 
to persuade ; πείσω, ἔπεισα, πέπεικα, 
πέπεισμαι, ἐπείσθην. 

— ἀναπείθειν, ‘to prevail upon.’ 

πείθεσθαι: Zo believe, obey, τινί; mel- 
σομαι. 

πειρᾶν: to make trial of, prove, τινός. 

πειρᾶσθαι: Zo attempt, try; πειρά- 





σομαι, πεπείρᾶμαι, ἐπειράθην. 





ATTIC 


— ἀποπειρᾶσθαι, ‘to hazard trial,’ 
‘venture to try,’ 197. This is the 
meaning rather of the act. than of 
the mid., but the compounds of this 
verb are mostly deponent. 

πελάζειν: fo approach, érédaca. 

πελταστής : dearer of the light shield 
(πέλτη), ‘peltast.’ The ‘hoplite’ 
carried the ἀσπίς or heavy shield. 
πελταστικόν, τό: che peltast-force. 
πέμπειν : 20 conduct, send. 

— ἀναπέμπειν, ‘to send up.’ 

— ἀποπέμπειν, ‘to send away’ 
‘back,’ ‘to dismiss,’ 33 20. 

— διαπέμπειν, ‘to send abroad’ or 
‘round,’ 24 29. 

- ἐκπέμπειν, ‘to send out,’ ‘send 
forth.’ 

— — συνεκπέμπειν, ‘to help send 
forth,’ 44 23. 

— καταπέμπειν, ‘to send down,’ to 
the coast from the interior, 55 19. 


or 


— μεταπέμπεσθαι; μεταπέμψασθαι," ἴο 
send after’ or ‘for’ one to come to 
oneself, 1 16. Mid. of πέμπειν in 
prose only in compounds. 

— προπέμπειν, ‘to escort,’ 13 Io, 

— — συμπροπέμπειν, ‘to take part in 
escorting,’ accompany the march. 
— προσπέμπειν, ‘to send’ or ‘con- 

duct to’ one, 25 23. 

— συμπέμπειν, to send along with.’ 

πέντε: five. 

πεντεκαίδεκα: fifteen. © 

πεπληγέναι : fo have struck: πληγῆναι. 

πέρ : encl. postp. intensive particle, in 
prose rarely separated from the 
word emphasized by it; εἰ μή περ 
(εἴπερ), 48 4. H. 1037, 3; 118. 

περᾶν: 20 pass through or over, fare. 

πέρας, -ατος, τό: end, extreme, 28 25. 





PROSE 207 

περί: around, about; prep. w. gen., 
dat., acc., 21 3, 2 10,19 22. περὶ 
παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι, to regard as ‘all- 
important,’ 7 21. 

περιῆγον : see ἀγαγεῖν. 

πέριξ: round about. 

περιττεύειν : 20 be in excess, ‘to be 
saved over,’ 44 27, 

περιττός 3 (περί) : more than enough, 
superfluous. 

περιῳκοδομημένος : See οἰκοδομεῖν. 

πεσεῖν: fo fall; πεσοῦμαι, πέπτωκα, 
πίπτω. 

- διαπεσεῖν, ‘to break 
57 26, impf. 58 1. 

— εἰσπεσεῖν, ‘to burst in,’ historical 
present 24 22. 

— — ἐπεισπεσεῖν, ‘to burst in upon,’ 
historical present 24 16. 

— ἐπιπεσεῖν, ‘to fall upon,’ ‘ attack.’ 

— συμπεσεῖν, ‘to meet in conflict.’ 


through,’ 


πεταννύναι: 20 expand, spread, πετῶ, 
ἐπέτασα, πέπταμαι. 

- ἀναπεπτάσθαι, ‘to be spread wide 
open,’ 48 15. 

πέφυκα : φῦναι. 

πηγή: spring, well; plur., source. 

πηδᾶν: 20 jump; πηδήσομαι. 

-- ἀναπηδᾶν, ‘to jump up,’ spring 
into the saddle 9 15. 

— διαπηδᾶν, ‘to leap across,’ take a 
ditch 9 6. 

-- ἐκπηδᾶν, ‘to jump out,’ ‘spring 
away,’ 9 4. 

— καταπηδᾶν, ‘to jump down,’ 84 9. 

πιέζειν : 20 press, oppress, 19 22. 

πιεῖν (pot, potus, bibere): to drink; 
πίομαι (H. 427, ἃ. 667, B. 216); 
πέπωκα, πέπομαι, ἐπόθην, πίνω. 

— ἐκπιεῖν, ‘to drink up,’ 4 16. 

πίθος : wine jar. 





208 ATTIC 

πιμπλάναι (fill, full, zplére, plénus) : 
to fill; πλήσω, ἔπλησα, πέπληκα, 
πέπλη(σ)μαι, ἐπλήσθην. 

— ἐκπιμπλάναι, ‘to fill up,’ “ complete’ 
a number 22 2. 

— ἐμπιπλάναι; ἐμπλησθῆναι, ‘to be 
filled,’ ‘ get enough’; w. ptcp. 12 7. 

πίνειν : πιεῖν. 

πίπτειν: πεσεῖν. 

πιστεύειν: 20 put faith in, trust, be- 
lieve, τινί. 

πιστός 3: faithful, credible. 

πλάγιος 3: slanting, sideways. 

πλανᾶν : fo make wander. 

πλανᾶσθαι: 20 wander; πλανήσομαι, 
πεπλάνημαι, ἐπλανήθην. 

— περιπλανᾶσθαι, ‘to wander round.’ 

πλάτος, -ους, τό: width, breadth. 

πλατύς, -eta, -ύ, (flat, planta, planus): 
wide, broad. 

πλατύτης, -τος, 7: breadth, bulk. 

πλέθρον : a measure of length, about 
100 feet, ‘ plethron.’ 

πλέκειν (πλακ-, fold, flax, plicare, 
complexus, πλοκή) : to twine, plait, 
weave » ἔπλεξα, πέπλεγμαι, ἐπλάκην. 

πλέον, πλεῖστα: πολύς. 

πλεονεκτεῖν impf.: Στ have the larger 
share, to have the advantage. 

πλεονεξίᾶ : greed, personal advantage. 

πλέως, πλέα, πλέων: full. H. 227. 
‘Soiled,’ 3 27. 

πληγή : Slow, stroke, stripe. 

πληγῆναι (rray-, plaga, plangere): 
to be struck; πέπληγμαι, πεπλήξο- 
μαι, πληγήσομαι. H. 514, 5 ἃ. 

Syn. πατάξαι, παίειν, τύπτειν. 

- ἐκπλαγῆναι, ‘to be dismayed,’ 
‘terror-stricken,’ 86 7. H. 471 a. 

πλήθουσα: see ἀγορά, 

πλήν : except, τινός. 





PROSE 


πλήρης, -es: full. 

πληροῦν: Zo fill. 

— ἐκπληροῦν, ‘to satisfy,’ 50 23. 

πλησιάζειν : ὦ approach, 8 24. 

πλησίον : near. 

πλοκή (πλέκειν) : ὦ plaiting, weaving. 

πλούσιος 3: rich, wealthy. 

πλουτίζειν : “Σὺ enrich, 

πλοῦτος : wealth, riches. 

ποθεῖν impf.: 0 yearn for, miss, regret. 
H. 504, 8; G. 639 b. 

ποιεῖν impf.: ὁ make, do; w. inf., 
‘cause,’ 27 10; εὖ, κακῶς ποιεῖν τινα, 
‘to do good’ or ‘evil’ to one, ‘treat 
well’ or ‘ill,’ 88 18. Of the creative 
art of the poet, 47 8. 

Syn. δρᾶν, πράττειν, ἐργάζεσθαι. 

ποιεῖσθαι: 2Σῶ make or make out for 
oneself; ἑαυτῶν τι, ‘claim’ as their 
own, ὅδ 7. περὶ παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι, 
‘to regard as all-important,’ 7 20. 
Often in periphrases, δίαιταν ποιησά- 
μενος (instead of διαιτηθείς) 29 1. 

motos 3: of what sort, what kind. 
In Attic usually with tone of sur- 
prise or irony, 44 8. 

πολέμαρχος: general of a division, 
‘ polemarch,’ 

πολεμεῖν impf.: Zo be at war, make 
war, fight. 

— ἀντιπολεμεῖν, ‘to war against.’ 

πολεμικός 3: of war, warlike. 

πολέμιος 3: hostile; ol πολέμιοι, ‘the 
enemy.’ ᾿ 

πόλεμος : war. 

πολιορκεῖν impf.: 20 invest a city, 
besiege. 

πολιορκητέος 3: fo be taken by siege. 

πολιορκία: siege. 

πόλις, -εως, ἡ : city, state, 18 4; of τὸ 
Περσῶν κοινόν, 15 12. 


+ 





ATTIC PROSE 


πολίτης : citizen, fellow-citizen. 

πολῖτικός 3: of citizens or the state, 
civic; π. κάναθρον, 1.6. not differing 
from that of a private citizen, 60 16. 

πολλαπλάσιος 3: many times as 
many, many times more. 

πολύς, πολλή, TOAD: much, many a, 
plur., many ; πλείων, πλεῖστος; also 
πλέων, πλέον, πλεῖν, H. 254, 5; Ὁ. 
361, 8; Β. 21. στράτευμα πολύ, 
‘numerous,’ ὅ8 25. ἐπὶ πολύ, ‘toa 
great distance,’ 84 25. οἱ πολλοί, 
‘the commons,’ ‘the rank and file,’ 
27.9; but 62 13, ‘the most’ of them. 
τὰ πλεῖστα, ‘for the most part,’ 
‘most of the time,’ 40 19. 

πολυτελής -és, (τελεῖν) : expensive, 
costly ; πολυτελέστατα, 60 8. 

πονεῖν impf.: 20 ¢oz/, suffer. 

— διαπονεῖσθαι, ‘to carry out with 
labor,’ “ toil at,’ 44 7. Mid. in comp. 

πονηρός 3 (πόνος) : miserable, bad. 

Syn. μοχθηρός, κακός. 

πόνος: toil, labor. 

πορεύειν (πόρος) : ἔο make go, to carry. 

πορεύεσθαι: to travel, march, go; 
πορεύσομαι, ἐπορεύθην. 

πορεύσιμος 2: passable. 

πορθεῖν impf.: ὁ ravage, sack a city. 

πόρος (fare, ferry, porta, portus, ἔμπο- 
pos, ἀπορεῖν) : passage, way, means. 

πορσύνειν : 20 make ready, provide. 

πορφυροῦς, -ἃ, -οῦν : pur fle, anciently 
a dark red or crimson. 

πόσος 3: how large, how many. 

ποταμός : Fiver. 

ποτέ: once upon ἃ time, ever ; encl. 

πότερος 3: whether of the two, which 
one; πότερον, πότερα, ‘ whether.’ 

ποῦ: where? 

πού: somewhere, anywhere ; enclitic. 

ATTIC PROSE— 14 





209 


πρᾶγμα, -ατος, τό: ching done, affair, 
proceeding, πράγματα ἔχειν, παρα- 
σχεῖν, to have, make ‘trouble,’ 8 Ὁ, 

πρᾶξις, -ews, ἡ: 2 doing, acting, an 
action, transaction, achievement. 

πρᾶττειν: to act, proceed, do; wpatw, 
ἔπρᾶξα, πέπρᾶγα, πέπρᾶχα, πέπρᾶγ- 
μαι, erpaxOnv. εὖ, κακῶς πράττειν, 
“ἴο fare’ well or ill, of success and 
the opposite. εἰρήνην πράττειν, ‘to 
observe’ peace, 53 25. 

Syn. δρᾶν, ποιεῖν, ἐργάζεσθαι. 

- συμπρᾶττειν, ‘to help’ one ‘in do- 
ing’ something, τινί τι, 42 20. 

πράττεσθαι: 20 do or act for oneself. 

— διαπράττεσθαι, ‘to accomplish’ 
something for ‘oneself’ or ‘get’ 
something ‘ done,’ 7 19,1715; perf, 
of gaining a request, 18 Io. 

πρέπειν : impers. πρέπει, 1: is becom- 
ing, fitting. 

πρεσβεύειν : 20 be an ambassador. 

πρεσβεύεσθαι : 20 send ambassadors, to 
go on an embassy. 

πρεσβύτερος 3: older, elder. 

πρεσβύτης : o/d man. 

πρίασθαι: Zo buy; ἐπριάμην. H. 444, 
445; G. 729, 742; B. 211 N. 

Syn. ὠνεῖσθαι. 

πρίν: before; after a negative, until. 
H. 1055, 9; G. 1469 ff.; B. 627. 

πρό: before; prep. W. gen. Η. 804; 
G. 1215; B. 413. 

In composition, πρό often means 
‘forth, as of publicity, προειπεῖν; 
or of rejection, abandonment, προ- 
δοῦναι ‘to betray,’ “ sacrifice.’ 

πρόγονος : ancestor. 

προηρχόμην : see ἄρχειν. 

προθυμεῖσθαι: to be right willing, 
eager, zealous. 








210 ATTIC 


πρόθυμος 2 (θῦμός) : very willing, 
eager, zealous. Adv. προθύμως. 

προνοητέον : one must bear in mind 
beforehand, 44 27. 

πρόνοια: forethought, providence. 

πρός : coward, at; prep. w. gen., dat., 
acc. H. 805, G. 1216, B. 414. πρὸς 
θεῶν, ‘in the name of heaven’; 
πρὸς πάντων ἐπονομαζόμενον, so 
designated ‘on the part of all,’ 40 
11. οὐ πάνυ πρὸς τῷ στρατεύματι, 
not very ‘close to’ the army, 35 7, 
57 26. πρὸς φῶς πολύ, ‘by’ a bril- 
liant light, 24 16. 

προσήγαγον : see ἀγαγεῖν. 

προσήκειν : see ἥκειν. 

προσηνέχθην : see ἐνεγκεῖν. 

προσήρτημαι: see ἀρτᾶν. 

προσῆψα: see ἅπτειν. 

πρόσθεν : before. 

πρόσθετος 2: added, put or fitted to; 
of false hair, 2 7. 

προσίτω : see ἰέναι. 

προσκυνεῖν impf.: Zo kiss the hand to, 
make obeisance, salute. 

πρόσοδος, ἡ : income, revenue. 

προστάτης : one who stands before or 
first, chief, leader. 

πρόσω (πρό) : forwards, further on, 
far off from, τινός, 19 12. 

προύπεμπον : προέπεμπον. 
πειν. 

προφασίζεσθαι (πρόφασις) : 20 set up 
as a pretence, allege by way of ex- 
cuse; προὐφασιζόμην. 

πρωΐ: early, in the morning. 

πρῶτος 3 (πρό) : first; (τὸ) πρῶτον, 
‘at first,’ 19 13. 

πτηνός 3: winged. 

πτήσσειν : to crouch, cower; ἔπτηξα, 
ἔπτηχα. 


See πέμ- 





PROSE 


— ὑποπτήσσειν, ‘to bow down to,’ 
figuratively, 14 7. 

πυθέσθαι: fo learn by inquiry, ascer- 
tain; πεύσομαι, πέπυσμαι, πυνθά- 
νομαι. 

πύλη: gate. 

πυνθάνεσθαι: fo institute inguiries, 
endeavor to ascertain: πυθέσθαι. 

πύργος : cower. 

πώποτε: (not) ever yet; reg. w. neg. 
expressed or implied, 519. Οὗ 
οὔπω. 

πῶς: how, in what manner? ‘How 
comes it that, e/c.?’? 49 1; thus 
often. πῶς δέ, ‘how so?’ 19 5, 

πώς: somehow; enclitic, 


τὸ 


ῥᾷδιος 3: easy; ῥᾷων, ῥᾷστος. Adv. 
ῥᾳδίως. 
ῥεῖν: ῥυῆναι. 
ῥηθῆναι (ρερ-, word, verbum): to be 
said; ἐρῶ, εἴρηκα, εἴρηται, ἐρρήθην. 
Syn. εἰπεῖν, λέγειν, φάναι, ἀγο- 
ρεύειν in compounds, : 
— κατερεῖν, αὐτοῦ ἔφασαν, said they 
‘would inform against’ him, 9 13. 
ῥῖγος, -ovs, τό: -co/d; plur. ‘extremes 
of cold,’ 48 13. 

pts, ῥῖνός, ἡ : z05¢. 

ῥοφεῖν impf.: Zo gulp down, sup up. 

— ἀπορροφεῖν; ἀπορροφῆσαι, ‘to take 
-a swallow of,’ 4 23. 

— καταρροφεῖν, ‘to swallow,’ 4 10. 

ῥυθμός (ῥυ-, ῥεῖν): measured flow, 
regular motion, time in music or 
dancing, rhythm. 

ῥνῆναι: Zo flow, ἐρρύην, ῥεύσομαι ot 
ῥνήσομαι, ἐρρύηκα, péw. 

ῥώμη: strength. . 

Syn. ἰσχύς, δύναμις, κράτος, σθένος, 





ATTIC PROSE 


Σ. 


σατράπης: viceroy, ‘satrap.’ 

σαυτόν, σεαυτόν: thyself. H. 266 a. 

σαφηνίζειν: to make clear, indicate 
with certainty, 80 20. 

σαφής, -és: clear, sure. Adv. σαφῶς. 

σέ, σοί, σοῦ: σύ. 

σεμνός 3 (σέβειν): worshipful, solemn. 

σεσοφισμένως (σοφίζεινν) : subtly; be- 
side the sophists themselves Xen. 
regards himself as ‘ unsophisticated’ 
in the matter of language, 62 20. 

σημαίνειν : 20 show by a sign, signify. 

σημεῖον : sign, signal. 

σθένος, -ους, τό: in prose only in the 
phrase παντὶ σθένει, ‘with all one’s 
might,’ 27 23. 

Syn. ἰσχύς, δύναμις, κράτος, ῥώμη. 

σιγᾶν: fo be silent; ἐσίγησα, σεσί- 
Ynka, σεσΐγημαι. 

σιγή: silence; σιγῇ, ‘silently,’ 

Syn. σιωπή. 

σῖμός 3: flat-nosed; τὸ σιμόν, ‘the 
snubbiness,’ 48 16. 

σίνεσθαι : to harm; impf. only. 

σῖτος, ὁ, plur. σῖτα, τά: bread-stuff, 
food, victuals. 

σιωπᾶν: 20 keep silent, pass, over in 
Silence; σιωπήσομαι, ἐσιώπησα, σε- 
σιώπηκα. 

σιωπή : silence. Syn. σϊγή. 

σκεπτέον : one must consider. 

σκεῦος, -ους, τό: vessel, utensil; τὰ 
σκεύη, ‘the baggage,’ ‘trappings.’ 

σκέψασθαι (σκεπ-, σκοπ-, spy, conspi- 


cere): to look to, view, consider; 


σκέψομαι, ἔσκεμμαι, σκοπῶ. 

— ἐπισκέψασθαι, ‘to make a study of,’ 
‘investigate,’ 39 28. 

σκέψις, -ews, ἡ : consideration, study. 





211 


σκῆπτρον: staff, scepter. 
σκοπεῖν impf.: σκέψασθαι. 
15 a; 6. 1692, p. 400. 
σκοπός: a lookout-man, a mark is 
ἀπὸ τοῦ σκοποῦ, “ wide of the mark.’ 
σκότος : darkness, obscurity. 
σκυθρωπός 2 (ὀπ-): of sad or angry 
countenance, sullen, gloomy. 
σκύλαξ, -ακος, ὁ, ἡ : a young dog. 
σκώπτειν: to jeer ; σκώψομαι, ἔσκωψα, 
ἐσκώφθην. 


H. 513, 


- ἔπισκώπτειν, ‘to jest,’ ‘quiz,’ 4 21. 

σμῆνος, -ους, τό: dechive, swarm. 

σός 3: thy, thine. 

σοφία : zwzsdom, intellectual cleverness 
or accomplishment. 

σοφίζειν : to make wise or clever ; pass. 
‘be wise,’ 62 26. 

σοφιστής : ‘sophist,’ one who teaches 
for pay (in higher education); con- 
trasted with φιλόσοφος, 62 25. 

σοφός 3: wise, clever. The ‘most 
accomplished’ of poets, 47 8; σοφόν 
Tt, ‘any accomplishment,’ 47 17. 

σπᾶν: 20 draw, pull, wrench ; ἔσπασα, 
ἔσπακα, ἔσπασμαι, ἐσπάσθην. ἐσπα- 
σμένον τὸν ἀκινάκην, “ with his sword 
drawn,’ 24 24. 

— διασπᾶν, ‘to tear asunder,’ ‘ break 
up’ the Persian customs 27 22. 

σπανίζειν: ¢o be scarce, to lack, τινός. 

σπάνιος 3: scarce; arare thing, 2 29. 

σπείρειν: fo sow, σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα, 
ἔσπαρμαι, ἐσπάρην. 

— διασπείρειν, ‘to scatter,’ pass. 37 3. 

σπένδειν: 20 pour, offer libations ; 
σπείσω, ἔσπεισα, ἔσπεισμαι. 

σπένδεσθαι : 20 pour mutual libations, 
make a truce or treaty, 58 19. 

σπέρμα, -ατος, τό, (σπείρειν) : seed. 

σπεύδειν: 20 urge on, hasten, haste. 








212 ATTIC 


σπονδή (σπένδειν) : drink-offering, 
libation; plur., @ solemn treaty or 
truce, 58 23, 28. 

σπουδή: haste, eagerness. 

στάδιον, plur. στάδιοι: “4 stade,’ 
about ἃ furlong; @ race course, race. 

σταθμός : station, a day’s march. 

στέλλειν: 20 equip, send, despatch; 
ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα,ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλην. 

— ἐπιστέλλειν, ‘to send word to,’ ‘to 
enjoin, 13 25. Cf ἐπιστολή, “ letter.’ 

στέρνον : breast. 

στέφανος : crown. 

στεφανοῦν: fo crown, with garlands 
in honor of victory, 57 21, 58 29. 

στῆναι (στα-, stire) : to come toa stand, 
stand; ἔστην, ἕστηκα, εἱστήκη or 
ἑστήκη, ἑστήξω. See ἵστασθαι. 

- ἀναστῆναι, ‘to stand up.’ 

— — ἐξαναστῆναι, ‘to get up out of, 
the ditch, 9 8. 

- ἐπιστῆναι; ἐφεστάναι, ‘to be in 
charge of, 48 6. ( ἐπιστάτης. 
- ὑποστῆναι, ‘to undertake,’ ‘en- 

gage’ to do something, 53 4. 
στῖφος, -ους, τό, (στιβ-, stamp, orel- 
βειν)ὴ: a compact body, dense array. 
στίχος: row, line. 
στοά: portico, colonnade; often ad- 
joining a temple, 40 15. 
στολή (στέλλειν) : equipment, dress. 
στόμα, -ατος, τό: mouth; ἀπὸ στό- 
ματος εἰπεῖν, to recite by memory. 
στοχάζεσθαι: 20 aim or shoot at, to 
guess, 50 22. 
στρατεία: expedition, campaign. 
στρατεύειν, στρατεύεσθαι: fo take 
the field, serve as soldier, 58 9, 20 6. 
— ἐπιστρατεύεσθαι, ‘to march against.’ 
— συστρατεύεσθαι, ‘to serve with,’ 
‘share in one’s campaigns,’ 27 8. 





PROSE 


στράτευμα, -ατος, τό: army. 

στρατηγία: che office of general, com- 
mand, 20 19. 

στρατηγικός 3: pertaining to or fit 
for leading an army. 

στρατηγός (ἄγειν) : leader ofan army, 
general. 

στρατιά: army, expedition. 

στρατιώτης : soldier. 

στρατοπεδεύειν, στρατοπεδεύεσθαι: 
to encamp. 

— καταστρατοπεδεύειν, ‘to establish 
in camp.’ 17 11; mid., ‘to take up 
a position,’ 22 13. 

στρατόπεδον: army encamped, camp. 

orperros: collar, an ornament of 
twisted or linked metal, 2 9, 39 5. 

στρέφειν: Ζῶ twist, turn round; 
στρέψω, ἔστρεψα, ἔστροφα, ἔστραμ- 
μαι, ἐστράφην. 

στρέφεσθαι: 20 twist or turn oneself. 

— ἀποστρέφεσθαι, ‘to turn away’ or 
‘back,’ 18 13. 

— καταστρέφεσθαι; καταστρέψασθαι, 
‘to reduce to subjection,’ 14 17. 

σύ: thou; σοῦ, σοί, σέ, accented or 
enclitic. 

συγγνώμων, -ov: forgiving, indulgent. 

σύλᾶν: iy strip, despoil. 

συλλέγειν : 40 collect, gather ; συλλέξω, 
συνέλεξα, συνείλοχα, συνείλεγμαι, 
συνελέγην. 

συμμαχεῖν impf.: 20 de an ally, to aid 
in fighting. 

συμμαχία: alliance in war. 

σύμμαχος 2: fighting along with, 
allied, an ally. 

συμπαίστωρ, -opos, 6: Alaymate. 

συμπαρομαρτεῖν impf. : Zo follow along 
with, figuratively 88 24. ὁμαρτεῖν 
is a poetic word, 


ATTIC 


συμφορά: a bringing together, an 
event, misfortune. 

σύν: with, 1.6. in company or in con- 
nection with; prep. w. dat. σὺν τῷ 
θεῷ, ‘with the help of the god,’ 
20 10, 27 5. In prose, except in 
Xenophon, μετά τινος rather than 
σύν τινι. 

συναινεῖν impf.: 20 consent; for forms, 
see ἐπαινεῖν. 

συναίτιος 2: (being) joint cause, τινί 
τινος, 12 24. 

συναντᾶν : 20 meet with. Cf. ἀπαντᾶν. 

συναράττειν: 20 dash together, 58 2. 

συνεκεκράμην : see κεραννύναι. 

συνεξῇα : see ἰέναι. 

συνεπαινεῖν : see ἐπαινεῖν. 

συνήγειρα : see ἀγείρειν. 

συνησθήσομαι : see ἥδεσθαι. 

συνθήκη (θεῖναι) : @ covenant. 

σύνθημα, -ατος, τό: watchword. 

σύνταγμα, -ατος, τό, (τάττειν): a 
body of troops drawn up in order ; 
τῶν συμμάχων, their ‘ contingent.’ 

συντεθραμμένος : see τρέφειν. 

σύντομος 2 (τεμεῖν) : cut up, cut short, 
concise ; τὴν συντομωτάτην, ‘by the 
shortest cut,’ ‘ route,’ 54 7. 

συνωμολόγουν : see ὁμολογεῖν. 

συσκοταζειν (σκότος) : to grow dark ; 
impers. 23 24, of the ‘gathering’ 
of the shades of night. 

συσπειρᾶν (σπεῖρα) : to roll up together, 
form in close order, perf. pass. 36 14. 

συχνός 3: long, numerous, frequent. 

σφαγιαζεσθαι: fo have victims slain, 
to sacrifice, aor. 54 21. 

σφάγιον (σφάττειν) : a slain victim. 

σφάλλειν (fall, fell, fallere, falsus, 
ἀσφαλής) : to trip up, make fall or 
totter, to deceive; σφαλῶ, ἔσφηλα. 





PROSE 213 

σφάλλεσθαι: ὦ de unsteady, to totter, to 
be deceived, fail ; σφαλοῦμαι, ἔσφαλ- 
μαι, ἐσφάλην. 

σφᾶς: them; σφῶν, cplovencl. Pers. 
pron., in prose used as an indirect re- 
flexive. H.683a, 685; G.987; B.472. 

σφάττειν: 20 slay, properly by cut- 
ting the throat, 20 butcher; σφάζω, 
ἔσφαξα, ἔσφαγμαι, ἐσφάγην. 

σφενδονήτης : slinger. 

σφόδρα: very much, exceedingly. 

σχεδόν (σχεῖν) : nearly, pretty well, 
of an approximate statement, 87 6. 

σχεῖν (cex-): 10 get in hand, fake, 
hold; ἕξω or σχήσω, ἔσχηκα, ἔσχη- 
μαι, ἔχω. For impf., and for mid., 
see ἔχειν. 

— κατασχεῖν, ‘to bring down,’ 9 18. 
— μετασχεῖν, ‘to get a share,’ ‘be- 
come participant in,’ τινός, 50 9. 

σχολαΐζειν : Zo be at leisure, 40 16. 

σχολή: spare time, leisure. 

σῳΐειν: 20 save; σώσω, ἔσωσα, σέσωκα, 
σέσω(σ)γμαι, ἐσώθην. 

- διασῴζειν, “ἴο keep safe,’ ‘ preserve.’ 

σῶμα, -atos, τό: Jody, in life. 

σωτήρ, -ῆρος, ὁ: 

σωφρονεῖν impf.: 29 be sound- or 
sober-minded, temperate, virtuous. 

σωφρονίζειν : zo bring one to his senses, 
to chasten, 59 26. 

σώφρων, -ov, (σῴζειν, φρήν) : sound- 
minded, temperate, virtuous ; of any 
kind of mental or moral restraint. 


a he 
radacla (rad-, ‘ weigh’): wool-spin- 
ning. 
ταλάσιος 3: of wool-spinning. 
τἄλλα: τὰ ἄλλα. 
ταμιεία : stewardship, housekeeping. 


savior, deliverer. 


214 ATTIC 

τἀναντία: τὰ ἐναντία. 

τάξις, -εως, ἡ : an arranging, array, 
a rank or line, post in battle. 

Topaxos: confusion, disorder. 

τάττειν (Tay-): to arrange, draw up, 
array, post, order; τάξω, ἔταξα, 
τέταχα, τέταγμαι, ἐτάχθην. 

- ἀντιτάττειν, ‘to array against,’ 
pass. 54 22. 

— διατάττειν, ‘to set off in order.’ 

— ἐπιτάττειν, ‘to assign to,’ 43 16; 
‘to detail,’ ‘commission,’ 58 17. 

— παρατάττειν, ‘to draw up.’ 

— — dvtirapardrrey, ‘to draw up 
against,’ 56 22. 

— προστάττειν, ‘to impose an order,’ 
or ‘a condition upon,’ 19 28. 

—ovvrdrrev, ‘to form in battle 
order,’ pass. 35 6. 

τάττεσθαι: fo arrange for oneself; 
of soldiers, 40 fall in. 

— παρατάττεσθαι, ‘to draw up’ one’s 
forces. 

— — ἀντιπαρατάττεσθαι, ‘to draw up 
one’s forces against’ or ‘on the 
other side,’ 54 17. 

τάφος (θάπτειν) : burial, a grave. 

τάφρος, ἡ : trench, moat. 

τάχα: soon, presently, 84 26. 
prose usually ‘ perhaps.’ 

ταχύ: quickly; θᾶττον, τάχιστα. 

τέ (gue): and; enclitic. Mostly τέ 

. καί,οτ τέ... τέ. HH, 1040. 


In 


τεθεραπεῦσθαι : θεραπεύειν. 

τεθνάναι: fo be dead. See ἀποθανεῖν. 

τείνειν (Tev-, thin, zenuis, tendere, τό- 
vos) : to stretch ; rev, ἔτεινα, réraka, 
τέταμαι, ἐτάθην. πρὸς σὲ τείνει τὰ 
ἔργα, ‘pertain’ to you, 45 16. 

τείνεσθαι: 20 stretch for oneself or 
something of one’s own. 





PROSE 


— διατείνεσθαι, ‘to exert oneself’; δια- 
τεινάμενος, “ with all his might,’ 9 17. 

τειχίζειν : 20 wall or fortify. 

— διατειχίζειν, ‘to wall off,’ separate 
by a wall, perf. 48 το. 

τεῖχος, -ovs, τό: wall, walled town, 
fortification. 

τεκεῖν : 20 bring forth, beget, give birth 
to; τέξομαι, τέτοκα, τίκτω. 

τεκμαίρεσθαι: fo judge from tokens, 
infer; τεκμαροῦμαι, ἐτεκμηράμην. 

τεκμήριον : sign, token, proof. 

τέκνον : plur. τέκνα, ‘ children,’ 

τέκτων, -ovos, ὁ: carpenter, builder. 

τελεῖν impf.: 40 bring to completion, 
to pay ; τελῶ, rarely τελέσω, ἐτέλεσα, 
τετέλεκα, τετέλεσμαι, ἐτελέσθην. 

— ἀποτελεῖν, “ἴο fulfil,’ ‘ perform’ due 
observances, 28 4. 

— διατελεῖν, ‘to finish,’ ‘complete’ a 
course, 15 13; ‘to continue,’ ‘be 
from first to last,’ w. ptcp., 19 20. 
H. 981, 6. 1580, B. 660. 

— ἐπιτελεῖν, ‘to bring to an end,’ ‘fin- 
ish,’ 18 2. 

τέλειος 3: perfect, full-grown; τέλειοι ᾿ 
ἄνδρες, third grade of the Persian 
discipline, after the age of twenty- 
five, 15 14. 

τελεστήρια, τά: thank-offerings of 
success, 30 2. 

τελευταῖος 3: Jast, final. 

τελευτᾶν : 20 end, finish, to die; βίου 
τελευτῆσαι, ‘to decease’ from life, 
81 17; τελευτῶν, ‘at last,’ he ended 
by saying, 9 28, H. 968 a, G, 1564, 

τελευτή : an ending, end. [B.653N. 2. 

τέλος, -ous, τό: consummation, end; 
pl. réAn, ‘ magistrates,’ 28 6, 56 8, 
cof. ἀρχαί. Adv., τέλος, ‘at last,’ 7 
12. 





ATTIC 


τεμεῖν : fo cut; τεμῶ, τέτμηκα, ἐτμή- 
θην, τέμνω. 

— ἀποτεμεῖν, ‘to cut off,’ 55 19. 

τέταρτος 3: the fourth. 

τέτταρες, τέτταρα: four. 
G. 375, Β. 155. 

τετρακισμύριοι 3: four times ten thou- 
sand, 40,000. 

τετρημένος 3: bored, perforated, 45 21. 

τετρωμένος : τιτρώσκειν. 

τεύξομαι: τυχεῖν. 

τεχνᾶν: 20 make by art. 

τέχνη: art, handicraft. 

τέως : so long, for a while. 

τιθασεύειν : Zo came. Past-perf. pass., 
42 4. y 

τίθημι : θεῖναι. 

τιθηνεῖσθαι : 20 nurse, tend asa child; 
aor. 2d pers. sing., 26 3. 

Tipav: fo value, prize, honor. 

τιμή: price, value, honor, office 4 15. 

τίμιος 3: prized, held in honor. 

Tipwpetv impf.: 20 avenge, 
Const. H. 764, 2 b; G. 1163. 

τιμωρεῖσθαι: fo take vengeance on, 
punish. FH. 764, 2 Ὁ; G. 1246. 

Tipwpos (τιμή, fop-, ὁρᾶν) : avenger. 

tis, tl: who, what. H. 277, G. 416, 
B. 148. 

τὶς, τὶ : some one, something, any one, 
anything, one; enclitic. H. 277, G. 
416, B. 148. πολλούς τινας, “ἃ 
great many, 8 15. βλάξ τις, ‘a 
regular blockhead,’ 11 7; χαλκός 
τις, ‘a gleam of brass,’ 34 26; eid- 
κρινής τις ἀδικία, ‘a kind of out and 
out wrong-doing,’ 50 2. 

τιτρώσκειν : 20 wound; τρώσω, ἔτρωσα, 
τέτρωμαι, ἐτρώθην. 

τλήμων, -ovos, ὁ, ἡ, (ταλ-): full of 
suffering, miserable. A poetic word. 


H. 290, 


SUuCCOr. 








PROSE 215 

τοί: encl. postp. intensive particle. 
H. 1037, 10, The frequently occur- 
ring compounds οὔτοι and μέντοι 
illustrate its intensive force. Cf 
οὐδὲ yap viv τοι, 81 18; ἀλλά τοι, 
‘but, I tell you,’ 51 4. 

τοίνυν: chen, so then, now ; postp. in- 
ferential conj. καὶ τοίνυν, 6 25. 

τοιόσδε, τοιᾶδε, τοιόνδε: sch (here), 
‘such as follows,’ 29 22. 

τοιοῦτος, -αὐτη, -olTo(v): of this 
sort, such. 

τοκεύς, -έως, ὁ, (τεκεῖν) : Parent. 

τόκος (τεκεῖν): birth, offspring. 

τόλμα (ταλ-}: daring, assurance. 
Ἡ 139. ¢,,G..1974; Bs 82: 

τολμᾶν: to dare, have the heart to do. 

τοξεύειν : 29 shoot with the bow, pass. 
‘to be shot with an arrow,’ 36 Io. 

τόξευμα, -ατος, τό: an arrow shot 
from a bow. 

τόξον : dow. 

τοξότης : dowman, archer. 

τόπος: place. 

τοσοῦτος, -αὐτη, -οὔτο(ν) : so much, 
so great, plur. so many. 

τότε: at that time, then. 

τοῦ, τῷ: τίς or Tis. 

τοὐμόν : τὸ ἐμόν. 

τοὐναντίον: τὸ ἐναντίον. 

τοὔνομα: τὸ ὄνομα. 

τραγῳδία (ᾷδειν) : tragedy. 

τράπεζα: Zable, style of living, 21 7. 

τραῦμα, -ατος, τό: wound. 

τραφῆναι: τρέφειν. 

τράχηλος : »εέεζ. 

τρεῖς, τρία: three. Ὁ. 375, B. 155. 

τρέπειν : 20 urn, in another direction; 
τρέψω, ἔτρεψα, τέτροφα, τέτραμμαι, 
ἐτράπην. τρέψασθαι τοὺς πολεμίους, 
‘to put to flight,’ 57 18; of τρόπαιον. 


216 ATTIC 

τρέφειν: fo nourish, rear, keep animals 
or persons, cherish; θρέψω, ἔθρεψα, 
τέτροφα, τέθραμμαι, ἐτράφην. 

— ἐκτρέφειν, ‘to bring up,’ 44 18. 

— συντρέφειν, ‘to bring up with one,’ 
perf. pass. 2 4. 

Tpiaxovra: zhirty. 

τρίβειν: 29 rub, wear away; τρίψω, 
ἔτριψα, Térpipa, τέτριίμμαι, ἐτρίβην. 

— διατρίβειν, ‘to pass time,’ 40 23. 

τριηραρχίᾶ (τριήρηΞ) : ‘ trierarchy,’ at 
Athens the fitting out of a ‘ trireme,’ 
or ship of war, for the public service. 

τρισμύριοι 3: “hrice ten thousand. 

τρίτος 3: the third. 

τρόπαιον (τρέπειν) : ‘trophy,’ a monu- 
ment of the enemy’s defeat, 58 29. 

τροπή: 2 turning, rout, defeat. 

τρόπος : urn, way or manner, ‘bent’ 
of mind or disposition. 

τροφή (τρέφειν) : nourishment, food. 

τυγχάνειν : τυχεῖν. 

τύπτειν (fundere, τύπος): to strike; 
τυπτήσω, ἐτύπην. H. 513, 18 a. 

Syn. πληγῆναι, πατάξαι, παίειν. 

τύρσις, -ἰος, ἡ : turret, tower, 23 5. 

τυχεῖν: Zo hit the mark, fo happen, to 
get, τινός; τεύξομαι, τετύχηκα, τυγ- 
χάνω. ἔτυχε τῆς βασιλείας, ‘came 
to the throne,’ ὅῷ 27. ἔτυχε τεταγ- 
μένος, ‘happened to be posted’ 
there, 38 14,569. ἐμέ re τυγχάνειν 
διδάσκοντα καὶ ἐκείνην μανθάνουσαν 
τὰ βέλτιστα, ‘that I might be led 
(by divine guidance, τύχη) to teach 
and she to learn what was best,’ 41 
24; disclaiming any positive(human) 
knowledge as to what was really for 
the best. 

— ἐντυχεῖν, ‘to fall in with,’ ‘ encoun- 
ter,’ τινί, 84 4. 


PROSE 


τύχη: chance, luck, good or bad for- 

tune. 
¥, 

ὑβρίζειν (ὕβρις) : to creat wantonly or 
insolently, to outrage. 

ὑγιαίνειν : 20 de sound or in health, 

ὑγίεια: health. 

ὑγιής, -és: sound, healthy. 

ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό: water. 
G. 291, 34; B. 115, 24. 

vids: son, regular, also gen. υἱέος, dat. 
υἱεῖ, H. 216, 19; G. 291, 35; B. 
FRG, 25. 

ὑμεῖς: ye, you; ὑμῶν, ὑμῖν, ὑμᾶς. 

ὑμέτερος 3: of you, your(s). 

ὑπάρχειν : see ἄρχειν. 

ὕπαρχος: one commanding under 
another, /teutenant. 

ὑπελάσαᾶς: see ἐλαύνειν. 

ὑπέρ: over; prep. w. gen. and acc. 

ὑπερβαλλόντως : exceedingly, 55 26. 

ὑπερμεγέθης, -es: exceedingly large. 

ὑπήκοος 2 (ὑπακούειν) : hearkening to, 
obedient, subject. 

ὑπηρετεῖν impf.: 20 serve, wait on. 

ὑπηρέτης (ὑπό, ἐρέτης ‘rower’): un- 
derling, servant, attendant. 

ὕπνος: sleep. 

ὑπό: under; prep. w. gen., dat., acc. 
H. 808, G. 1219, B. 417. ἐρωτηθεὶς 
ὑπὸ τῆς μητρός, ‘by’ his mother, so 
reg. of the personal agent; but of 
things, ὑπὸ τῆς πλατύτητος, ‘by 
reason of’ their broad backs, 10 22, 
of. 20 12, 82 8. 

In composition, the force of ὑπό 
must be learned by observation. Οἱ 
ὑπάρχειν, ὑπελαύνειν, ὑπολιπεῖν, ὑπο- 
μένειν, under the respective simples. 

ὑπογραφή (γράφειν) : a drawing or 


Η. 182 a; 





painting under, underlining, 2 6. 





ATTIC 


ὑποκριτής : play-actor. 

ὑπόσπονδος 2: under truce. 

ὑποσχέσθαι: fo promise; ὑποσχήσο- 
μαι, ὑπέσχημαι, ὑπισχνοῦμαι. 

ὑποχείριος 2 (χείρ) : in hand, under 
one’s power, subject. 

ὕστερος, ὕστατος: the latter, later, 
last, latest. 

ὑφαίνειν : fo weave. 

— ἐξυφαίνειν, ‘to weave out,’ ‘build 
up’ the honeycombs 44 16. 

ὑψηλός 3: Zigh, lofty. 


, 

φαίνειν : fo show. 

— ἀποφαίνειν, ‘to show forth,’ ‘give 
an account of,’ ‘ pay in,’ 42 13. 

φαίνεσθαι : φανῆναι. 

φάλαγξ, -αγγος, ἡ : line of battle, army 
in line; εἴσω φάλαγγος, " within the 
lines,’ 58 26. 

φάναι ( fari, fatum, φάσκειν, Phun): 
to say yes, affirm, aver; φημί (encl. 
exc. 2d pers. sing. φη5), ἔφην, φήσω, 
ἔφησα. Const. inf. 

Often ἔφη indep. of the const., 
Lat. inguit. ob φημι, ‘I deny,’ H. 
1028. ἔφην is aoristic, and φημί is 
a pres. aor., the imperf. being φάσκω. 

Syn. εἰπεῖν, λέγειν, ῥηθῆναι. 

- συμφάναι, ‘to assent,’ ‘agree to,’ 
τὶ, 50 5. 

φανερός 3: visible, manifest. 
φανεροῦ, ‘in plain sight,’ 56 22. οὐκ 
ἐφησθεὶς φανερὸς ἐγένετο, ‘was not 
seen to exult thereat,’ 59 19. 

φανῆναι: to become visible, show one- 
self, appear; φανοῦμαι, φαίνομαι. 
Const. ptep., ὅτι or ws, but inf. when 
used in the sense of δοκεῖν, ‘to seem 
to the mind.’ H. 986, B. 661 N. 3. 


ἐκ τοῦ 





PROSE 217 

— ἀναφανῆναι, ‘to be shown forth,’ 
find oneself held up as an example, 
52 23. 

— καταφανῆναι, καταφαίνεσθαι, ‘to 
appear right clearly,’ 31 27. 

— προφανῆναι; προφαίνεται, hist. pres. 
(equiv. to aor.), ‘comes forth into 
view,’ heaves in sight, 84 3. 

φάρμακον: drug, poison. 

φαῦλος 3: slight, mean, paltry. 

φείδεσθαι: 40 be sparing of, spare, 
τινός; φείσομαι, ἐφεισάμην. 

φέρειν : impf. only, Zo bear, bring; 
pass., Zo be borne or swept along, 
to rush, roll rapidly, 86 4; ὁμόσε, 
‘rush together,’ ‘into conflict,’ 10 
22, 57 11. κακῶς, ‘bad conduct,’ 
*ill-success’ of affairs, 55 18. 

Syn. ἐνεγκεῖν, οἴσειν fut. 

— διαφέρειν, ‘to differ,’ ‘to excel,’ 
τινός, 1 13. 

— εἰσφέρειν, ‘to bring in,’ 44 13. 

— παραφέρειν, ‘to bring beside,’ set 
before one, 4 3. 

— προσφέρειν; pass., ‘to rush toward,’ 
bear down on one, 9 16. 

- συμφέρειν, ‘to be advantageous ’ 
for one, 50 23. 

— ὑποφέρειν, ‘ to bear,’ ‘endure.’ 

Syn. ὑπομένειν, ἀνέχεσθαι. 
φέρεσθαι: Zo dear or bring for oneself. 
φερνή: marriage portion, dowry. 
φεῦ: alas. 

φεύγειν : φυγεῖν. 

φήμη (φάναι): a prophetic votce. 

φημί: φάναι. 

φθέγγεσθαι: 40 give utterance to 
sounds, articulate or inarticulate, 20 
sound, 35 25. 

φθείρειν: ὦ corrupt, spoil; φθερῶ, 
ἔφθειρα, ἔφθαρκα, ἔφθαρμαι, ἐφθάρην. 





218 ATTIC 

— διαφθείρειν, ‘to destroy,’ 18 5, 18. 

φθονεῖν impf.: 20 be envious, to be- 
grudge, envy, τινί τινος, 27 15. οὐ 
φθονήσω εἰπεῖν, “1 shall have no 
objection to stating,’ 46 27. 

φθονερός 3: envious, jealous. Adv. 
φθονερῶς. 

φθόνος : envy. 

φιάλη: drinking bowl. 

φιλανθρωπία: Lindliness. 

φιλάνθρωπος 2: humane, kindly. 

φιλεῖν impf.: to love, like, to kiss. 
Regularly of the love of husband 
for wife, 21 20. 

Syn. ἀγαπᾶν, ἐρᾶν, στέργειν. 

— καταφιλεῖν, Κύρου κατεφίλουν χεῖ- 
pas, ‘covered with kisses,’ 25 8. 

φιλέλλην, -nvos, (Ἕλλην): fond of 
the Greeks, 59 13. 

φιλία: affection, friendship. 

φίλιος 3: of a friend or friends, 
friendly. 

φιλόκαλος 2: beauty-loving, fond of 
beauty. 

φιλομαθής, -és: fond of learning. 

φιλονεικεῖν (νεῖκος) impf.: 20 be fond 
of strife, contentious, engaged in 
eager rivalry, 12 12. 

φίλος 3: own, dear, a friend. 

φιλόσοφος : philosopher. 

φιλόστοργος 2 (στέργειν): affection- 
ate, 2 3. 

φιλοτιμεῖσθαι: Zo be ambitious, pur- 
sue emulously ; ἐφιλοτιμήθην. 

φιλοτιμία: love of honor, emulation. 

φιλότιμος 2: honor-loving, ambitious. 

φιλοφρονεῖσθαι : Zo treat kindly, show 
favors to; ἐφιλοφρονησάμην and 
ἐφιλοφρονήθην. 

φλναρεῖν impf.: Zo talk nonsense, play 
the fool, 10 13. 





PROSE 


φοβεῖν impf.: Zo frighten. 

φοβεῖσθαι: Zo fear; πεφόβημαι, épo- 
βήθην. 

- ὑπερφοβεῖσθαι, ‘to be exceedingly 
afraid,’ 7 25. 

φόβος: fright, fear. 

φοιτᾶν : 20 go up and down, go or come 
regularly, 16 13. 

φράττειν : 720 fence, block up. 

— ἀντιφράττειν, ‘to barricade,’ 48 17. 

φρονεῖν (φρήν) impf.: 20 be minded 
in any way; μέγα φρονεῖν, ‘to be 
proud’ of anything, ἐπέ rim, 46 24; 
ὑπὲρ ἄνθρωπον φρονῆσαι, ‘to con- 
ceive more than human pride,’ 80 7. 
ἄδικόν τι φρονεῖν, ‘to be minded to 
some wrong-doing,’ cherish an un- 
righteous sentiment, 32 16. 

— καταφρονεῖν, ‘to despise,’ 61 20. 

φρονητέον: one must be minded in 
some way; μεῖζον, ‘feel more proud.’ 

φροντίς, -ίδος, ἡ : thought, meditation ; 
plur., cares, anxieties, 21 17. 

φρούραρχος: commandant of a for- 
tress or garrison. 

φρουρός (πρό, fop-, ὁρᾶν) : watchman, 
guard; plur., ‘ garrison,’ 17 3. 

φυγεῖν (fugere): to flee; φεύξομαι 
or φευξοῦμαι (H. 426), πέφευγα; 
φεύγω, ‘I try to escape,’ ‘shun’ 50 
12, ‘am in exile’ 59 22. 

φυγή: flight. 

φύειν: Σῶ make grow, beget, produce, 
create; prow, Epica. See φῦναι. 

φυλακή: a keeping watch or guard. 

φυλακτέον : one must be watchful. 

φυλακτήριον: a guarded post. 

φύλαξ, -akos, ὁ, ἡ : watcher, guard. 

φυλάττειν : fo guard, watch; φυλάξω, 
ἐφύλαξα, πεφύλαχα, πεφύλαγμαι, 
ἐφυλάχθην, 





ATTIC 


φυλάττεσθαι: 20 be on one’s guard 
against, Tl, τινά, 8 28; cf. the act. 
const., 20. 
φῦλον : race, nation. 
φῦναι (φυ-, be, Suisse, picts): to grow 
or de born, come to be or be by nature ; 
πέφυκα. See φύειν. H. 500, 3. 
With φῦναι, 15, f φύσιν ἔχων, 9 f. 
διὰ βασιλέων πεφυκώς, ‘descended 
through a line of kings,’ 20 22. εὖ 
πεφυκέναι πρός τι, ‘to be created 
suitably’ for anything, 43 19, 48 1. 
φύρειν : fo mix into a paste, 58 20. 
φυσᾶν: fo puff, blow up, distend. 
— ἀναφύσᾶν; pass. 20 18, ‘puffed up,’ 
filled with conceit. 
φύσις, -ews, ἡ, (φῦναι) : nature. 
φυτεύειν : fo plant. 
φωνή : the sound of the voice, voice. 
hop, φωρός, ὁ, (fur): thief. 
φωρᾶν: fo search for a thief. 
— καταφωρᾶν, ‘to catch in the act’; 
τὴν ψυχὴν ws οὖσαν κατεφωρᾶτε, ‘ye 
. surmised,’ ‘ detected the existence,’ 
of the soul, 31 19. 
φῶς, φωτός, τό, (φαρος, φανῆναι): 
light. 
X. 


χαίρειν : χαρῆναι. 

χαλᾶν: fo slacken, to become slack or 
loose, ‘stand open,’ 24 22. 

χαλεπαίνειν : to be cross or vexed, to 
show ill-temper. 

χαλεπός 3: hard, difficult, cross, harsh. 

χαλεπότης, -nTos, 7: Aarshness, ill- 
temper. 

χαλκεύς, -éws, ὁ: 
brazier, smith. 

χαλκός: copper, bronze or brass. 

χαμαί (humus): on the ground, 

Xapa: joy. 


a worker in copper, 





PROSE 219 

χαρῆναι (yearn, grd/us, gratia, χά- 
pis) : Lo rejoice ; χαιρήσω, κεχάρηκα, 
χαίρω; χαῖρε, χαίρετε, ‘hail,’ or 
‘ farewell.’ 

— ὑπερχαρῆναι, ὑπερχαίρειν, ‘to be 
overjoyed,’ 2 26, 9 11. 

xaples, -ev: graceful, charming. B. 
125, 1. Comparison, H. 248, G. 355, 
B. 132. 

χαρίζεσθαι: 20 vratify, please, τινί; 
χαριοῦμαι, ἐχαρισάμην, κεχάρισμαι; 
κεχαρισμένος, ‘pleasing,’ “ grateful,’ 
‘acceptable,’ 50 23. 

χάρις, -ἰτος, 7, (χαρῆναι) : grace, 
charm, favor, thanks. χάριν εἰδέ- 
vat, ‘to be thankful,’ 45 8. 

χαριστήρια, τά: shank-offerings, of 
thanksgiving, 30 3. 

χειμών, -Bvos, 6: wiser, tempest. 

χείρ, χειρός, 7: and, forearm; xe- 
ροῖν, χερσί. 

χειροήθης, -és, (ἐθίζειν, ἦθος) : accus- 
tomed to the hand, tame, tractable. 

χειρόμακτρον (μάττειν) : towel, nap- 
kin, 8. 26. 

χειροῦσθαι (χείρ) : fo overpower. 


χείρων, -ov: worse; χείριστος. Η. 
254; 25°(3:1301, 12: Β: ΤΊΉΟΣ 
XtAlapxos: ‘chiliarch,’ commander 


of a thousand, 

χίλιοι 3: thousand. 

χϊῖλιοστύς, -vos, 7: a body or battalion 
of a thousand, 

χιτών, -@vos, 6: under-garment, tunic. 

χορηγία: ‘choregia,’ at Athens the 
defraying of the cost of a public 
chorus, 41 3. 

χορός: choral dance, a chorus, band 
of dancers and singers. 

χρῃζειν : Zo want, wish. 

χρῆμα, -aros, τό, (χρῆσθαι) : ching, 








220 ATTIC 


affair, 9 10; plur. χρήματα, prop- 
erty, money, 60 2, 5. 

χρῆναι (χρή, εἶναι) : χρή (sc. ἐστιν), 
it behooves, one ought; χρῆν, ἐχρῆν, 
χρήσει. H. 486; 6. 1692, p. 406; 
Β. 267. 

Χρῆσθαι: 20 use, have dealings with, 

H. 412, G. 496, B. 199, 3. 
τί αὐτῷ χρήσει, ‘what shall you do 
with him?’ 1117. χρῆσθαι αὐτοῖς 
ὅ τι ἐβούλετο, ‘to turn them to such 
use as he would,’ appropriate them 
in any way, 56 3. 

χρηστήριον (χρᾶν, ‘to utter a re- 
sponse’): oracle, 

Χρηστός 3: useful, good. 

Syn. ἀγαθός. 

Χρόνος: zine. 

χρῦσίον: a piece of gold, gold coin. 

χρῦσσς : gold. 

Xpicots, -ἢ, -οῦν : of gold, golden. 

XpvroxdAtvos 2: with golden bridle. 

χρῶμα, -ατος, τό: color, paint, 2 6. 

χωλός 3: lame, limping. 

χώρα: country; military place or posi- 
tion, 35 20, 

χωρεῖν impf.: 20 give place, yield, to 
march, go, to contain; χωρήσομαι. 

— ἀποχωρεῖν, ‘to fall back,’ ‘ retreat.’ 

— προχωρεῖν, ‘to advance.’ 

χωρίον: ὦ place. 

χῶρος: space, room, place. 


Ψ. 


Ψέγειν : 20 blame, disparage. 

Ψέλιον : armilet, bracelet, 2 10, 39 5. 
ψεύδεσθαι : ὦ lie, report or deal falsely. 
Ψευδής, -és: false. 

Ψυχή : breath of Uf, soul. 

ψῦχος, -ovs, τό: cold. 

Ψωραλέος 3: itchy, mangy. 


τινί. 





PROSE 


2. 


ὦ: prefixed to vocatives. 

ὧδε: thus, as follows. 

ὠθεῖν impf.: 20 push, shove; ἐώθουν, 
bow, ἔωσα, ἔωσμαι, ἐώσθην. 

ὠθεῖσθαι: 20 push (away from one- 
self), 58 4. 

ᾧμην : οἴεσθαι. 

ὦμμαι, ὥφθην : ὀφθῆναι. 

dpora: ὀμνύναι. 

ὠνεῖσθαι: fo buy; ὠνήσομαι, ἐώνημαι, 
ἐωνήθην. H. 359, G. 537, 1. 

Syn. πρίασθαι. 

ὥνησα : ὀνινάναι. 

ὥρα (year): season, the right season 
for anything, ‘ high time,’ 11 21. 

a@patos 3: in season, ripe, in the bloom 
of youth. 

ὡραιότης, -nTos, 7: seasonableness, 
ripeness, charm of youth and 
beauty. 

appa: ὁρμᾶν. 

ὥς: οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even shus, 86 13; so 
μηδ᾽ ὥς, καὶ ὥς. H. 284, G. 138, 3. 

ὡς: as, how, that, in order that. 
ἰέναι ws σέ, to come to thee,’ 18 23; 
H. 784 a, G. 1220, 8, B. 418. Tem- 
poral, ‘as,’ ‘when,’ 2 1, 9 4, 9, 16. 
Causal, ‘as,’ ‘for,’ 11 23, 41 27. 
Exclamatory, ws καλός, ‘how beau- 
tiful” 2 14, 10 13, 19. ὡς ἥδιστα, 
‘as agreeably as possible,’ 3 2, 16 
18, cf ὅτι in the same usage. 
ἀπιοῦσα, ‘ with the intention’ of go- 
ing home, 5 17,23 15. H.974. ὡς 
els κύκλωσιν, ‘ with a view to’ turn- 
ing the enemy’s flank, 36 26. ὡς 
ἔχοντες, having ‘as they believed’; 
ὡς κωμασταὶ ὄντες, * pretending’ to 
be revellers, 24 11. H. 978. 


ε 
ως 


ATTIC PROSE 


With inf, ‘so as, 26 17, 88 τό; 
w. ind., ‘so that,’ 29 7; cf ὥστε. 
ὡσαύτως: in the same way, likewise. 
ὥσπερ: just as, as (if). 
wore: so as, so that. Const. H. 927, 
ὁ 953, 954; G. 1449 ff; B. 595 f. 





221 


ὥστε σε κινδυνεύειν, Sif you must 
incur peril,’ 10 7. 

ὠφελεῖν (ὄφελος) impf.: 20 benefit, be 
of use to. 

ὠφέλιμος 2: helpful, serviceable. 


Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar 


By JAMES HADLEY (YALE) 


REVISED BY 
FREDERIC DE FOREST ALLEN (Harvarp) 
Cloth, 12mo, 422 pages. : : 5 ‘ . Price, $1.50 
1 





This standard Grammar not only presents the latest 
and best results of Greek studies, but also treats the 
language in the light received from comparative philology. 
Its comprehensive treatment of the principles and forms 
of the Greek language, together with its clear, analytic 
method, has made it at once an authoritative and exhaus- 
tive treatise for reference and at the same time a practical 
and popular text-book for class use. The fact that during 
all these years it has held its place and maintained its wide- 
spread popularity and extensive use in the leading classical 
schools and colleges of the country is in itself sufficient 
evidence of the excellence of the original work. 

Professor Hadley’s Greek Grammar was published in 
1860, and was founded on the scholarly and exhaustive 
work of the eminent German professor, Curtius, of the 
University of Kiel. 

Professor Allen brought to the work of revision the 
enthusiasm and critical method of an accomplished scholar, 
combined with the experience and skill of a successful 
teacher, and the result of his labors is gratifying alike to 
the publishers and friends of the Grammar. 

In its present form it is a practical work for beginners. 
Clearness of statement, accuracy of definition, and judicious 
arrangement recommend it for elementary classes; yet at 
the same time it is a complete and comprehensive manual 
for the advanced student. 





Copies of Hadley’s Greek Grammar will be sent, prepaid, to any address 
on receipt of the price by the Publishers: 


American Book Company 


New York . Cincinnati ° Chicago 
(285) 


Plato’s Apology of Socrates and Crito, 
and a Part of the Phaedo 


WITH INTRODUCTION, COMMENTARY, AND CRITICAL APPENDIX 


By Rev. C. L. KITCHEL, M.A. 
Instructor in Greek in Yale University 


Flexible Binding, 12mo, 188 pages . a : : . Price, $1.25 





THE DIALOGUES OF PLATO contained in this volume 
exhibit the moral qualities of Socrates in their highest 
manifestations, and also give some insight into those 
intellectual processes by virtue of which he made an 
epoch in philosophy. In addition to the Afology and Crito 
there has been included that part of the Phaedo which 
describes in detail the last sayings and doings of Socrates. 

The Introduction gives a clear and comprehensive 
outline of the life, character, and philosophy of Socrates. 
This historical sketch is followed by other aids to an 
understanding of Plato’s dramatic representation of his 
great master and by a critical analysis of the argument 
pursued in the Dialogues. 

The Text is based upon that of Wohlrab in his revision 
of the text of Hermann (6 vols., Teubner, Leipzig—Vol. I, 
1886). The grammatical and exegetical notes have been 
drawn principally from Cron (Teubner, Leipzig, 1895). 
The appendix contains a brief account of the notable 
manuscripts and editions of Plato’s works and some of 
the more important variations in the text of the Afology, 
the Crito, and the Phaedo, together with the principal 
authorities for each variation. 





Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price. 


American Book Company 


New York . Cincinnati ° Chicago 
(295) 


Greek -Dictionaries 





LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 
Revised and Enlarged. Compiled by HENRY GEORGE LIDDELL, 
D.D., and Roserr Scott, D.D., assisted by HENRY DRISLER, 
LL.D. Large Quarto, 1794 pages. Sheep . : - $10.00 
The present edition of this great work has been thoroughly revised, 
and large additions made to it. The editors have been favored with the 
co-operation of many scholars and several important articles have been 
entirely rewritten. 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON—Intermediate 
Revised Edition. Large Octavo, gI0 pages. 
‘Cloth, $3.50; Half Leather, $4.00 


This Abridgment is an entirely new work, designed to meet the 
ordinary requirements of instructors. It differs from the smaller 
abridged edition in that it is made from the last edition of the large 
Lexicon, and contains a large amount of new matter. 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON—Abridged 
Revised Edition. Crown Octavo, 832 pages. Half Leather $1.25 


This Abridgment is intended chiefly for use by students in Secondary 
and College Preparatory Schools. 


THAYER’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 
Being Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti. Translated, 
Revised, and Enlarged by JosEPH HENRY THayeEr, D.D., LL.D 
Royal Quarto, 727 pages . Cloth, $5.00; Half ‘Leather, $6. 50 
This great work embodies and represents the results of the latest 

researches in modern’philology and biblical exegesis. It traces histori- 

cally the signification and use of all words used in the New Testament, 
and carefully explains the difference between classical and sacred usage. 


YONGE’S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON 


By C. Ὁ. Yoncr. Edited by HENRY DRIsLer, LL.D. 
Royal Octavo, 903 pages. Sheep . ° . $4.50 


AUTENRIETH’S HOMERIC DICTIONARY 


‘Translated and Edited by RoBert P. ΚΕΕΡ, Ph.D. New Edition. 
Revised by Isaac FLaGeG, Ph.D. 
I2mo, 312 pages. Illustrated. Cloth . é ἃ - $1.10 





Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price 


American Book Company 


New York . Cincinnati 5 Chicago 
(310) 





University of California 
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
Return this material to the library 
from which it was borrowed. 











SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY 


000 025 365 8 








